妙法蓮華經文句 白話全本 · 冊6

安樂行品 · 總釋(三義・來意・次第・體異)—釋普賢菩薩勸發品 · 20 單元 · 第 66 冊 · 冊目次

安樂行品 · 總釋(三義・來意・次第・體異)Peaceful Practices · General Explanation: Three Meanings, Purpose, Sequence, and Distinctions in Essence

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、先從三方面解釋品名

解釋〈安樂行品〉,可以從三方面來說:第一依事相,第二貼附經文,第三依所顯的法門。

先依事相說。身體沒有危險,所以稱為安;內心沒有憂愁惱亂,所以稱為樂;身體安穩、內心快樂,便能進而修行,所以稱為行。

再貼附經文說。前一品說,披著如來之衣,法身便安;進入如來之室,解脫之心便樂;坐在如來之座,般若便能引導修行向前。這一層是貼附前品的經文而解釋。若貼附本品來說,住在忍辱之地,所以身安;性情柔和而不突然粗暴,所以心樂;觀察一切法的真實相,所以修行能向前。

二、安是不動,樂是無受,行是無行

再依法門說,安名為不動,樂名為無受,行名為無行。

所謂不動,是六道中的生死與聲聞、緣覺二乘的涅槃都不能使人動搖。既不攀緣這兩邊,身便沒有動搖。前文大意說:身體和手足寂靜安穩而不動,心中常常恬靜淡泊,從來沒有散亂。這便是安住不動,如同須彌山頂一樣,是常住不動的法門。

所謂無受,是不受三昧的廣大作用,不受凡夫的五種感受,乃至在圓滿教門中,對五受生起見取,也全都不受。有所領受,便有苦;沒有領受,便沒有苦;超出苦與樂的相對,才名為大樂。

所謂無行,是說只要有所領受,便有所行;沒有領受,便無所行。不行凡夫之行,也不行賢聖之行,所以稱為無行;然而又正行於中道,因此仍名為行。這就是依法門解釋安樂行。

三、從因果廣釋安樂行

現在再從事相廣說。安樂就是大涅槃,是從果上立名;行就是通向涅槃的道路,是從因上得名。

除了安樂行以外,其餘種種因果總體都歸於苦。分別說來,有三種苦樂交錯的情形。第一,因苦、果也苦,如執著常見的外道修種種苦行,後來仍得到苦果。第二,因樂、果卻苦,如執著斷見的外道任情享樂,後來得到苦報。第三,因苦、果樂,如析法的二乘人,以觀無常的拙劣方法費力用功,經歷艱苦,最後才能進入涅槃。如今所說的安樂行,因與果都安樂,正是《大品》所說的如實巧度。

《大經》的意思是:一定行苦的人,是凡夫;苦樂交雜而行的人,是聲聞、緣覺;一定行樂的人,是菩薩。總括七方便所有粗劣的因與粗劣的果,都不能稱為安樂行;只有這裡所說的妙因、妙果,才能稱為安樂行。

四、三德是境,三行是道

再從經文廣說,安樂行就是通向涅槃的道路。涅槃有三層義,稱為法身、般若、解脫三德祕藏;行也有三層義,就是止行、觀行、慈悲行。

止行,是身、口、意三業都柔和,面對違逆或順從都歸於寂靜。這便是體合法身之行,也就是前文所說的如來衣。

觀行,是以真實相的智慧照見一切,發出沒有分別的光明。這便是體合般若之行,也就是前文所說的如來座。

慈悲行,是發起四弘誓願,廣泛度脫一切眾生。這便是體合解脫之行,也就是前文所說的如來室。

總合這三種行,便是涅槃之道;總合三德,便是修行所對的境。境稱為安樂,道稱為行。

五、三行如何導三業而至果德

《大論》所錄的意思是:菩薩從最初發心起,常常觀察涅槃而行道;在因地時,用止、觀、慈悲這三種行法引導身、口、意三業而修行。三業清淨,也就是六根清淨;六根若清淨,便發起相似的理解,進而進入真實;到了果地,便稱為佛的眼、耳等六根。

在因地稱為止行,到果地稱為斷德;在因地稱為觀行,到果地稱為智德;在因地稱為慈悲行,到果地稱為恩德。又,在因地稱為三業,到果地稱為三密;因地以慈悲引導三業、利益眾生,到了果地,便稱為三輪不可思議的教化。

六、一切法本有安樂性

如此觀察時,心中不再分別:一切法中都有安樂之性;一切眾生本來就是大涅槃,不可能再被滅一次;行於通常所說的非道,也能通達佛道。這就是以超出一切相對的方式說明安樂行。這種行與涅槃的義理相合。

《大經》又說,另有一行名為如來行。如來是人,安樂是法;如來是安樂之人,安樂是如來之法。總體來說,兩者義理不異;分別來說,兩者也不異。

本論所說的是寂滅忍、法空座與如來室;《大經》則說金銀寶樹。寶樹就是無漏的寶林,無漏與空、寂滅、忍相合。又說金沙大河直接流入西海,這與真實智慧及一切法空相合;又說得道的女人沒有諂曲,這與無緣大慈及如來室相合。《大經》把它稱為沒有剩餘的義,這裡把它稱為無上道。該經所說五種行的義理,也與衣、座、室的意思相同。

七、攝受與折伏為何看似相反

有人問:《大經》說親近國王、持弓帶箭、摧伏惡人;《法華經》卻說遠離有權勢的人,態度謙下慈善。前者剛強,後者柔和,差別如此之大,怎能說兩者不異?

回答是:《大經》偏重說折伏,卻又說菩薩住在把一切眾生視如獨子的境地,哪裡會沒有攝受?《法華經》偏重說攝受,卻又說惡人將頭破七分,並不是沒有折伏。兩經只是各自舉出一端,以適合當時的情況;就道理說,必定具足四種意義。

第一,選擇合宜的時機,是世界悉檀之意;第二,攝受眾生,是為人悉檀之意;第三,折伏過惡,是對治悉檀之意;第四,使人悟道,是第一義悉檀之意。

若再廣泛依法門解釋,本應說明不動門、不受門、不行門;本論在這裡只列出三門,略而沒有記述。

八、本品為誰而來

本品在迹門流通中是第四層意思。那二萬位與八十億那由他位受命弘經的菩薩,深深了知權宜與真實,廣泛通曉漸次與頓入,又能通達眾生的根機和因緣,神力運用自在。濁惡世間的惱亂不能阻礙祂們弘通經典,所以不必再另外開示方法。

可是,若是最初有所依憑、剛剛發心的人,想修圓滿之行,進入濁世弘揚經典,卻受到濁世惱亂,使自己的修行不能成立,也不能成就教化眾生的功用,便必須為這類人開示方法,說明安樂行。這就是本品出現的緣由。

九、安樂行究竟有沒有先後

安樂行有什麼次第呢?《法華》圓滿之行,一種行便含有無量種行,意義不可思議,怎能固定誰先誰後?如今只暫取一條次緒來說。

若依說法的功能,〈法師品〉簡略開示弘經,以利益他人為根本,所以先說進入如來室;本品說在惡世弘經,先要安頓各種逼迫惱亂,所以先說披著如來衣。兩品只是把前後次序互相顯出。

若依實行的說明次第,一切法從本來便常住於寂滅之相。若背離寂滅而生起種種相,便應先以般若掃除繫累,所以第一步是坐在如來座。明白一切法本來不生,般若智慧卻由此生起;菩薩因與眾生同體的慈悲,憐愍眾生而行道,所以其次進入如來室。既以慈悲教化世間,必定會遭逢違逆與順從,便決定需要安忍,所以再次披著如來衣。

雖然說明時作出座、室、衣的次第,卻不是實行當下各自分開的次第。真正實行時,一入於空,便同時具足一切法,何況慈悲與忍辱,怎會不具足?

十、五家怎樣解釋四行之體

對四安樂行以什麼為體,本論先列四家說法。

第一,舊說以假、實二空為第一行之體,以說法為第二行之體,以遠離過失為第三行之體,以慈悲為第四行之體。

第二,基師以空為第一,以遠離憍慢為第二,以除去嫉妬為第三,以大慈悲為第四。

第三,龍師以身體遠離種種惡行、逐漸接近空理為第一,以除去口業過失為第二,以除去內心嫉妬為第三,以生起慈悲為第四。

第四,南岳師以沒有執著的正慧為第一,以口中不說他人過失為第二,以恭敬在上者、接引在下者為第三,以大慈悲為第四。

十一、天台以止、觀、慈悲貫通四行

天台師說,以止、觀、慈悲引導身、口、意三業以及誓願。正文先以身業為例。

身業有止,所以遠離身體的粗重惡業;有觀,所以不可得身,不可得身業,也不可得一個能夠遠離身業的人。因為一切都無所得,所以不墮在凡夫一邊。

身業又有慈悲,所以精勤修習一切身業,廣泛利益眾生,不墮在二乘境地。有止行,所以披著忍辱之衣;有觀行,所以坐在如來之座;有慈悲,所以進入如來之室。

止行能離過失,便成就斷德;觀行沒有執著,便成就智德;慈悲利益他人,便成就恩德。恩德幫助智德成就,智德又能通達斷德。這就名為身業安樂行。其餘口業、意業與誓願,也都依止、觀、慈悲如此修行。

I. First Explaining the Chapter Title in Three Ways

The “Peaceful Practices” chapter can be explained in three ways: first in terms of circumstances, second by attaching the explanation to the text, and third in terms of the Dharma-gateway revealed.

First, in terms of circumstances: because the body is free from danger, it is called peaceful; because the mind is free from sorrow and distress, it is called at ease; because bodily peace and mental ease enable practice to advance, it is called practice.

Next, attaching the explanation to the text: the preceding chapter says that putting on the Tathāgata’s robe gives peace to the dharma-body, entering the Tathāgata’s chamber gives ease to the mind of liberation, and sitting upon the Tathāgata’s seat lets prajñā guide practice forward. This explanation attaches to the text of the preceding chapter. Attached to the present chapter, abiding on the ground of forbearance gives the body peace; gentleness without sudden violence gives the mind ease; and contemplating all dharmas in their true aspect lets practice advance.

II. Peace Is Nonmovement, Ease Is Non-Reception, and Practice Is Non-Practice

In terms of the Dharma-gateway, peace is named nonmovement, ease non-reception, and practice non-practice.

Nonmovement means that neither birth and death in the six paths nor the nirvāṇa of śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas can move one. Because one does not condition oneself upon either extreme, the body is without wavering. The preceding passage says in substance that body, hands, and feet are quiet, peaceful, and unmoving, while the mind is constantly serene and has never been scattered. This is abiding peacefully and unmoving, like the summit of Mount Sumeru: the Dharma-gateway of permanent abiding and nonmovement.

Non-reception means not receiving the vast functioning of samādhi, not receiving the five kinds of feeling of ordinary beings, and not even receiving the views produced from the five feelings within the Perfect Teaching. Where there is reception there is suffering; where there is no reception there is no suffering. Only beyond the opposition of pain and pleasure is it called great ease.

Non-practice means that where something is received, something is practiced; where nothing is received, nothing is practiced. One practices neither the practices of ordinary beings nor those of worthies and sages, and therefore it is called non-practice. Yet one thereby practices the middle way, and so it is still named practice. This is the explanation of peaceful practice in terms of the Dharma-gateway.

III. An Expanded Explanation of Peaceful Practice through Cause and Fruit

We now expand the explanation in terms of circumstances. Peaceful ease is great nirvāṇa and is named from the fruit; practice is the path leading to nirvāṇa and is named from the cause.

Apart from peaceful practice, all other kinds of cause and fruit are painful as a whole. More particularly, there are three mixed patterns of pain and pleasure. First, both cause and fruit are painful: outsiders attached to eternalism perform painful austerities and still later obtain a painful fruit. Second, the cause is pleasant but the fruit painful: outsiders attached to annihilationism freely indulge their desires and later receive painful retribution. Third, the cause is painful but the fruit pleasant: those of the two vehicles who analyze dharmas exert themselves through the clumsy method of contemplating impermanence and only after hardship enter nirvāṇa. In the peaceful practice taught here, both cause and fruit are pleasant; this is the skillful crossing in accordance with reality taught in the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Sutra.

The Great Nirvāṇa Sutra means that those whose practice is invariably painful are ordinary beings; those whose practice mixes pain and pleasure are śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas; and those whose practice is invariably pleasant are bodhisattvas. In sum, all the coarse causes and coarse fruits of the seven expedients cannot be called peaceful practice. Only the wondrous cause and wondrous fruit taught here merit that name.

IV. The Three Virtues Are the Object; the Three Practices Are the Path

In an expanded explanation based upon the sutra, peaceful practice is the path leading to nirvāṇa. Nirvāṇa has three meanings, called the secret treasury of the three virtues—dharma-body, prajñā, and liberation. Practice also has three meanings: the practice of calming, the practice of contemplation, and the practice of compassion.

The practice of calming makes all three modes of conduct—body, speech, and mind—gentle, bringing both opposition and compliance to quiescence. This practice embodies the dharma-body and is the Tathāgata’s robe described above.

The practice of contemplation illuminates everything with the wisdom of the true aspect, emitting a light free of discrimination. This practice embodies prajñā and is the Tathāgata’s seat described above.

The practice of compassion gives rise to the four universal vows and widely liberates all sentient beings. This practice embodies liberation and is the Tathāgata’s chamber described above.

Taken together, these three practices are the path to nirvāṇa. Taken together, the three virtues are the object toward which practice proceeds. The object is called peaceful ease; the path is called practice.

V. How the Three Practices Guide the Three Karmas to the Virtues of the Fruit

The passage recorded from the Great Treatise means that from the first generation of resolve a bodhisattva constantly contemplates nirvāṇa while practicing the path. At the causal stage, the bodhisattva uses calming, contemplation, and compassion to guide the three karmas of body, speech, and mind in practice. Purifying the three karmas is precisely purifying the six sense faculties; when the six faculties are pure, understanding in semblance arises and one enters the real. At the fruit, these are called the Buddha’s eyes, ears, and other faculties.

At the causal stage it is called the practice of calming; at the fruit, the virtue of severance. At the causal stage it is called the practice of contemplation; at the fruit, the virtue of wisdom. At the causal stage it is called the practice of compassion; at the fruit, the virtue of beneficence. Again, at the causal stage they are called the three karmas; at the fruit, the three mysteries. In the causal stage compassion guides the three karmas to benefit others; at the fruit, this is called the inconceivable transformation of the three wheels.

VI. All Dharmas Inherently Possess the Nature of Peaceful Ease

When one contemplates in this way, discrimination no longer remains: all dharmas possess the nature of peaceful ease; all sentient beings are themselves great nirvāṇa and cannot be extinguished again; by practicing what is ordinarily called a non-Buddhist path one can penetrate the Buddha’s path. This explains peaceful practice beyond every opposition. Such practice accords with the meaning of nirvāṇa.

The Great Nirvāṇa Sutra also says that there is another practice called the practice of the Tathāgata. Tathāgata names the person, while peaceful ease names the Dharma; the Tathāgata is the person of peaceful ease, and peaceful ease is the Tathāgata’s Dharma. In general their meanings do not differ; distinguished, they still do not differ.

The present treatise speaks of the patience of quiescent extinction, the seat of the emptiness of dharmas, and the Tathāgata’s chamber. The Great Nirvāṇa Sutra speaks of jeweled trees of gold and silver. Jeweled trees are a precious grove of the uncontaminated, and the uncontaminated accords with emptiness, quiescent extinction, and patience. It also speaks of a great golden-sand river flowing directly into the western sea, which accords with the wisdom of the one reality and the emptiness of all dharmas; and of an awakened woman free from deviousness, which accords with objectless great loving-kindness and the Tathāgata’s chamber. That sutra calls this the meaning without remainder; here it is called the unsurpassed path. The five practices taught there likewise accord with the meaning of robe, seat, and chamber.

VII. Why Do Attraction and Subjugation Appear Opposed?

Someone asks: the Great Nirvāṇa Sutra speaks of associating with kings, carrying bows and arrows, and subduing evil people, whereas the Lotus Sutra says to remain distant from the powerful and to be humble and kind. The former is forceful, the latter gentle. How can two teachings so different be said not to differ?

The answer is that although the Great Nirvāṇa Sutra emphasizes subjugation, it also says that bodhisattvas abide on the ground that regards all sentient beings as an only child—how could attraction be absent? Although the Lotus Sutra emphasizes attraction, it also says that an evil person’s head will split into seven parts—subjugation is not absent. Each sutra brings forward one side because it suits its time; in principle both necessarily possess four meanings.

First, choosing what is timely and fitting carries the meaning of the worldly siddhānta. Second, attracting sentient beings carries the siddhānta for the person. Third, subjugating faults carries the counteractive siddhānta. Fourth, causing realization of the path carries the siddhānta of ultimate meaning.

An expanded explanation through the Dharma-gateway ought further to set forth the gateway of nonmovement, the gateway of non-reception, and the gateway of non-practice. The root treatise only lists those three gateways here and leaves the explanation unrecorded.

VIII. For Whom Does This Chapter Come?

This chapter is the fourth purport in the transmission of the Trace Gate. The twenty thousand and the eighty koṭis of nayutas of bodhisattvas who received the charge to propagate the sutra deeply know the provisional and the real, widely understand the gradual and the sudden, comprehend capacities and conditions, and freely employ supernormal powers. The disturbances of a turbid world cannot obstruct their propagation of the sutra, so they do not need a further method to be shown.

But people at the beginning of reliance and resolve who wish to cultivate the perfect practice and enter the turbid world to propagate the sutra may be disturbed by that world, so that their own practice cannot stand and their transformative work cannot succeed. A method must therefore be shown to such people and peaceful practice explained. This is why the chapter comes.

IX. Does Peaceful Practice Ultimately Have an Order?

What sequence does peaceful practice have? In the perfect practice of the Lotus, a single practice contains immeasurable practices and is inconceivable. How could its earlier and later stages be fixed? Here only one thread is provisionally taken up for explanation.

In terms of the function of teaching, the “Dharma Teacher” chapter briefly reveals propagation of the sutra and takes benefiting others as its basis, so it first speaks of entering the Tathāgata’s chamber. The present chapter speaks of propagating the sutra in an evil age and first settles the many pressures and afflictions, so it begins with donning the Tathāgata’s robe. The two chapters mutually reveal what comes before and after.

In the explanatory sequence of actual practice, all dharmas have from the beginning constantly and naturally borne the mark of quiescent extinction. When one turns away from quiescence and gives rise to marks, one should first use prajñā to sweep away entanglements; thus one first sits upon the Tathāgata’s seat. Although all dharmas are unborn, prajñā is thereby born; moved by compassion grounded in shared embodiment, the bodhisattva pities sentient beings and practices the path, so next enters the Tathāgata’s chamber. Once compassion begins transforming the world, opposition and compliance will inevitably be encountered; one must therefore practice patient endurance, and next dons the Tathāgata’s robe.

Although the explanatory sequence is seat, chamber, robe, these are not separate stages at the time of practice. In actual practice, entering emptiness itself includes all dharmas. How, then, could compassion and forbearance be absent?

X. How Do Five Houses Explain the Essence of the Four Practices?

The root treatise first presents four houses’ explanations of what constitutes the essence of the four peaceful practices.

First, the old explanation takes the two emptinesses of the provisional and the real as the essence of the first practice, teaching the Dharma as the essence of the second, avoiding faults as the essence of the third, and compassion as the essence of the fourth.

Second, Master Ji takes emptiness as the first, freedom from arrogance as the second, removal of jealousy as the third, and great compassion as the fourth.

Third, Master Long takes bodily separation from various evils and gradual approach to the principle of emptiness as the first, removal of verbal faults as the second, removal of jealousy from the mind as the third, and the arising of compassion as the fourth.

Fourth, Master Nanyue takes unattached right wisdom as the first, not speaking of others’ faults as the second, respecting those above and guiding those below as the third, and great compassion as the fourth.

XI. Tiantai Uses Calming, Contemplation, and Compassion to Penetrate All Four Practices

The Tiantai master says that calming, contemplation, and compassion guide the three karmas of body, speech, and mind, as well as vow. The root text first takes bodily action as its example.

Because bodily action has calming, it leaves coarse bodily misconduct. Because it has contemplation, body cannot be apprehended, bodily action cannot be apprehended, and an agent capable of leaving bodily action cannot be apprehended. Since nothing at all is attained, it does not fall to the side of ordinary beings.

Because bodily action also has compassion, it diligently cultivates all bodily action, benefits sentient beings widely, and does not fall to the ground of the two vehicles. Because it has the practice of calming, it dons the robe of forbearance; because it has the practice of contemplation, it sits upon the Tathāgata’s seat; because it has compassion, it enters the Tathāgata’s chamber.

The practice of calming leaves faults and accomplishes the virtue of severance. The practice of contemplation is unattached and accomplishes the virtue of wisdom. Compassion benefits others and accomplishes the virtue of beneficence. Beneficence assists wisdom in being accomplished, and wisdom can penetrate severance. This is called the peaceful practice of bodily action. Verbal and mental action, as well as vow, likewise practice through calming, contemplation, and compassion.

安樂行品 · 身安樂行Peaceful Practices · Peaceful Practice of the Body

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、從深行之問,轉入行處與近處

本品經文有問、有答。問的一段先讚歎前一品所說的深行菩薩,能夠忍受種種大難而弘揚此經;接著再問:修行較淺的菩薩,應當怎樣在惡世中宣說這部經?

從佛告文殊以下是第二部分,也就是回答。回答分成三部分:第一,標出四行的章目;第二,解釋修行方法;第三,總說修行成就時的相狀。第一標章,如經文所說。從『第一,安住』以下是第二解釋方法,依四行分別說明。第一行又分兩段:先解釋方法,再總結行成。修行方法有長行與偈頌;長行又分兩段,先從『一者』以下同時標出行處、近處,再從『文殊』以下分別解釋。分別解釋又有兩項,就是行處與近處。

有人說:內凡位最初的修行名為行處;長久熏習而純熟以後,漸漸能親近所證之理,名為近處。他引用前一品接近佛果的修行作例。

又有人說:行處約修因而說,近處約所得果而說;行處顯明能觀的智慧,近處顯明所觀的境。

瑤師說:『七住以上,心體安住於理,名為行處,因為已經越過分段生死;從七住以下,無生尚未現前,只是漸漸接近於理,名為近處,仍同在分段生死之中。這兩者都是修行的開端,合起來成為一安樂行。』

智者評論說:第一家把行判得較淺,可是《大經》說,十地菩薩因為仍有行,所以見佛性還不明了;由此可知,行並不淺。後一家的解釋把近判得較淺,可是《淨名經》說,接近無與倫比的佛自在智慧;如此一來,近反而更深。

如果行處、近處兩者都判為深,那便成了前品深行菩薩弘經之行,不再是初發心人的方法。如果兩者都判為淺,那只是七方便人的修行,又怎麼會是圓行的方法?所以不能偏執深或淺來說。

行這個名稱,意思是進趣;近這個名稱,意思是親近熏習。因為親近熏習,所以能夠進趣;也因為進趣,所以更能親近熏習,彼此怎能硬分深淺?再者,行與近是前面所標的方法;行處相當於如來衣,近處相當於如來座。座與衣既不能判為一深一淺,行與近又怎能分出高下?

忍辱必須在內心懷持至理,又在接觸外緣時耐受種種事,所以稱為行。法空之座必須體達外緣,棲息於真實境界,所以稱為近。事與理在兩者中互相顯現,又怎能分出深淺?

既然如此,為什麼仍要分行處與近處?因為直接到達義理而作簡略說明,名為行處;附帶種種事相而作廣說,名為近處。兩者只是說法有廣有略,所明的理並沒有深淺。

二、一法明行處:一諦與三行

現在依三種法門說明行處。第一,直接緣一諦。一諦是一切所歸的地方,是一切生起的根本,又遍及一切而沒有分別。

所謂一切所歸,就是忍辱地。地就是中道,一切法都歸到這裡,所以名為地;一切修行都在這裡止息安住,所以名為忍辱。這就是行而不落於有所行的行。

所謂作一切的根本,譬如萬物依大地而生,一切修行依義理而成。如果得到義理這個根本,遇到剛強時便能柔和,遇到違逆時便能隨順,遇到暴烈時便能調伏,遇到驚動時便能安定;無量功德都從中道之地生起。這地本來無所生,卻能生起功德,這就是不行而能行的行。

所謂遍及一切而沒有分別,就是不再分別不行與行的差別相,所以經文說,又不行,也不分別。這就是既非凡夫之行,也非二乘之不行。

本來沒有三種固定的行,卻能隨義說出三行,所以名為行;三行同依一實諦,所以名為處。如此解釋行處,便能會合前面的經文:眾行止息,會合如來衣;隨緣生起功德,會合如來室;遍一切而無分別,會合如來座。這叫作以一法解釋行處,是弘揚此經的方軌。

三、二法明行處:二忍、二空與四忍

第二,依二法說明,就是生忍與法忍。二忍也就是眾生空與法空。這裡的二空不同於二乘所行的二空。為什麼?人、法二空依真俗、假實而說,這裡所明的二空、二忍都見中道,所以不同於二乘。

若再展開,可以說成四忍。若說五忍,就把經文的善字另指為信忍;若說六忍,又把和字另指為和從忍。若配合地位,還可開成四十二忍;一地尚且具足其他四十一地的功德,一忍怎會不能具足其他四十一忍的法義?現在只依四忍消釋經文,就是伏忍、順忍、無生忍、寂滅忍。

這四忍不同於別教所說。別教以前兩忍為生忍,地位較淺;後兩忍為法忍,地位較深。現在依圓義說,生忍、法忍都貫通始終,四忍也都貫通始終。為什麼?因為二空之理就是中道。從初住修四忍,入中道而見二空之理,直到最後一心,也仍窮盡二空之理。《大經》說:『最初發心與究竟成就,兩心沒有差別。』

若不依深淺判四忍,從最初發心便圓伏五住煩惱,直到金剛頂都名為伏忍;從初到後都不違背實相,名為順忍;從初到後都不起二邊之心,名為無生忍;從初到後都止息眾行,名為寂滅忍。

聽到生死,不忽然畏懼其中的苦;聽到涅槃,也不忽然急著證取其中的樂。聽到佛是常或無常,聽到二乘能成佛或不能成佛,聽到生死與涅槃是相異或不異,聽到佛道是長或短、難或易,乃至非長非短、非難非易等,都不驚懼恐怖。

修這種行的人,從開始到終了,都以二空之理安忍一切法,這就是披著如來衣;安住二空之理,就是坐在如來座;悲愍一切眾生,就是進入如來室。二空、四忍名為行,二空之理就是處。這叫作依二法說明行處,是弘揚此經的方軌。

四、三法明行處,以及龍師異解

第三,依三法說明。三法就是不可思議的真、俗、中三諦。

『安住忍辱地』是總說三諦,如同先有可安住的大地,才有可能安忍。『柔和善順』是善順真諦,能忍受虛妄見愛如寒熱般的逼迫,所以稱為善順。『不忽然暴烈,心也不驚』是安住俗諦,隨順眾生不同根性與因緣,說法能符合時機,所以不忽然暴烈;又能安忍違逆與隨順兩種境緣,所以心不驚動。

『對一切法無所行』等句,是安住中諦,能忍二邊,所以說無所行;正安住中道,所以說觀察實相;連中道實相也不執取,所以說不分別。如此,依三諦之地名為處,忍受五住煩惱之逼迫名為行。

行也分成三種:止行,就是行而不落有所行;觀行,就是非行非不行;慈悲行,就是不行而能行。這三行會合前面如來衣、座、室等意義。這叫作依三法說明行處,辨明弘經方軌。

龍師另作解釋:『安住忍辱地,是總標生忍、法忍;以下再分別說明二忍。柔和善順,說的是身業;不忽然暴烈,說的是口業;心也不驚,說的是意業。這是依身、口、意三業修習生忍。對一切法無所行,是不行於有相;觀察如實相,是行於空而平等;也不行、不分別,是不行於無相。有、無兩邊都止息而會入中道,這三句說的是修習法忍。得到生忍、法忍,總結為行處。』

智者評論說:龍師雖明二忍,卻不知道所依的是哪一種教義。若是三教所說的二忍,便完全不是《法華經》這裡的義;若依圓義說,又不應把各項隔開,使它們彼此不能融通。〔以下從略〕

五、近處三門與十種應遠

從『什麼名為親近處』以下,是第二近處。經文分成三門。

第一,遠離十種惱亂,由遠離而說親近,也就是依戒門幫助正觀。第二,修攝自己的心,由直接親近而說親近,也就是依定門幫助正觀。第三,觀一切法空,不依遠或近而說親近,也就是依慧門幫助正觀。

前面只直接緣理而住忍辱地;現在戒門廣泛列出各種能引生侮辱與惱亂的因緣,應當修習遠離。這並不是持刀兵與它們相抗,也不是棄捨那些眾生,只是以正慧遠離惱亂。由此可知,從遠而說近,是廣泛展開前面行所不行的意思。

前面只直接說遇到暴烈不隨之暴烈,遇到驚動也能安定;現在定門廣泛說明修定之心、修定之處與修定要門。依定力,在暴烈中仍能調伏,在驚動中仍能安定。由此可知,直接親近而說近,是廣泛展開前面不行行的意思。

前面只直接說對一切法無所行;現在廣觀一切法空,遍歷無量、無邊、無礙、無障的諸境。由此可知,不依遠近而說近,是廣泛展開前面非行非不行的意思。

第一門有十種應當遠離的惱亂:第一豪強權勢,第二邪人邪法,第三兇險遊戲,第四旃陀羅,第五二乘大眾,第六遠離欲想,第七遠離不男之人,第八遠離危害,第九遠離譏嫌,第十遠離畜養等事。

路伽耶,譯為惡論,也譯為破論。逆路,是違逆君主、父親的議論。又,路也解作善論,指老師破斥弟子;逆路解作惡論,指弟子破斥老師。

那羅延,是高難的伎戲,也可指彩畫、身體作種種變化,或攀緣高幢、投擲翻倒等一類技藝。

本論又把十種分為生死、涅槃二邊:九種屬生死邊,一種屬涅槃邊。兩邊都應遠離,這也就是寂滅的另一名稱。至於依觀心解釋十種,以及直接親近所含的三重意思,本論只留下〔以下從略〕。

到這裡,《妙法蓮華經文句》卷第八下結束;以下是卷第九上,仍署天台智者大師說。

六、非遠非近:由境智總標到十九句

第三門不依遠或近而說近處,經文分成三段:第一總標所觀之境與能觀之智,第二分別解釋,第三總結成就。

『觀』是中道的觀智,『一切法』是十法界之境。若只單獨說智慧,智慧便沒有可觀的對象,所以舉出一切法,顯明它們全都空寂。

從『如實』以下是分別解釋。二邊與三諦沒有一、異的固定相,所以名為如;它不是七方便的境界,所以名為實;以真實作為諸法之相,所以說如實相。

『不顛倒』,是沒有八種顛倒。『不動』,是不被兩種生死所動。『不退』,是念念寂滅,流入一切智海。『不轉』,是不像凡夫流轉於生死,也不像二乘在凡、聖之間轉變。

『如虛空』,是說只有名字,而名字本身不可得;中道觀智也只有名字,追求它的實體仍不可得。『無所有性』,是說沒有自性、他性、共性、無因性等任何固定自性。『一切言語道斷』,是說這境界不可思議。

『不生』,是惑、智與理都不生。『不出』,是如來所對治的煩惱究竟不再發起。『不起』,是種種方便全都寂滅。『無名』,是名字不能為它命名。『無相』,是相狀不能為它標相。『無所有』,是沒有二邊之有。『無量』,是它不屬於可計數之法。『無邊』,是它沒有方所邊際。『無礙無障』,是它遍在一切處。

『但以因緣有』是總結。前面只說中道觀慧,現在進一步說它雙照二邊。理性究竟清淨,如前所說,本身不是解脫,也不是迷惑;然而,從迷惑的因緣生起生死,從解脫的因緣生起涅槃。又因緣所有,可以有涅槃;從顛倒而生,便生於生死。這樣,雙照的意思就顯明了。

『常樂觀如是等法』,就是常常樂於觀察三諦等法。又,『但因緣有,從顛倒生』,是總結不可思議的三諦境;『故說』,是不可思議之教;『常樂觀』,是總結不可思議的三觀。

本論又作一種解釋:『觀一切法空如實相』,是標出觀體;從『不顛倒』以下九句,是解釋觀相。不被二邊與八倒所動,名為不顛倒、不動;不墮在二乘與凡夫二地,名為不退、不轉。這兩句顯明智慧依理所起的作用。

非屬未來,所以不生;非屬過去,所以不出;非屬現在,所以不起。《釋論》卷五十一說:『如同虛空,沒有入相、出相、住相。』《攝大乘》也是如此:沒有未來可入之處,沒有過去可出之處,沒有現在可住之處。又卷第四十三說:『因這一邊不起,名為不出;緣這一邊不起,名為不生。』

以上共有十九句:第一句是總標,後十八句配合《大品》所說十八空。

第一,『如實相』就是第一義空。第二,『不顛倒』就是內空,因為內六入之中沒有我與我所。第三,『不顛倒、不動』就是外空,因為外境不被六塵牽流而動。第四,『不退』就是內外空,十二入空,所以說不退。

第五,『不轉』就是空空。空能破一切法,一切法是所破,空是能破;一切法既已破盡,只剩下空,這個空本身也空,所以名為空空。空也既空,便再沒有能轉之物,所以說不轉。

第六,『如虛空』就是大空。對方所的執取計度既破,所以說如虛空。第七,『無所有性』就是畢竟空。一切法沒有任何遺餘,所以名為畢竟空;因為畢竟空,所以沒有任何固定自性。

第八,『一切言語道斷』就是一切空;一切空不可言說,所以言語之道斷絕。第九,『不生』就是有為空;有為法由因緣和合而成,既沒有實在的和合,也就不生。第十,『不出』就是無為空;出離之名與出離之法都空,所以名為不出。

第十一,『不起』就是無始空;追求最初的本原而不可得,所以無起。第十二,『無名』就是性空。第十三,『無相』就是相空。第十四,『實無所有』就是不可得空。

第十五,『無量』就是有法空;有法便有可計量之量,量既空,所以說無量。第十六,『無邊』就是無法空;無法是以有法為邊際的表示,現在連這表示也空,所以無邊。

第十七,『無礙』就是有法無法空;有法、無法二者都不可得,所以說無礙。第十八,『無障』就是散空;一切妨礙障蔽都不可得,所以說無障。

十八空全是中道正慧,所以全都名為空;只是隨所觀的十八種境而說有十八。《大經》說:『如來恆常修習十八空義。』因此,本論以十八空解釋後十八句。

七、偈頌合明:十四行事相與八行理觀

偈頌共有二十八行三句,分成三部分:最初一行,重頌標章;其次二十二行,重頌修行;最後五行三句,說明修行成就。

長行分開解釋行處與近處,偈頌則把兩者合在一起重頌。正因大意相同,而開合互相顯示,所以廣說、略說的解釋更可相互依據。長行的行處、近處各有三項,現在偈頌合說,不再依原來次第。

從『應入行』以下十四行,重頌事相上的遠與近。上文列出十種遠離,偈頌略說而不照次第,依文可以看出。這十四行也重頌眾生空的行處;取其意義,又兼攝近處三重意思,所以偈頌說:『這就名為行處、近處。』

偈中說『常離國王』,因為比丘親近國王可能牽涉十種不如法之事:第一,被疑陰謀王命;第二,國王誅殺大臣;第三,掌管庫藏而寶物遺失;第四,宮中女人懷孕;第五,國王身中毒害;第六,大臣互相爭競;第七,兩國交戰;第八,國王慳吝,不肯布施人民;第九,徵斂人民財物;第十,國中多有疾病瘟疫,便說是比丘行咒所致。

發生這十種事時,一切臣民容易認為是比丘所作;若因此誹謗比丘,也就誹謗正法、誹謗佛,所以佛不許比丘親近國王。

偈中所說外道梵志,《摩隥伽經》記載:最初有一人名為梵天,造一部韋陀。其次有一人名為白淨,把一部變成四部:第一名讚誦韋陀,第二名祭祀,第三名歌詠,第四名禳災。每一部各有三十二萬偈,合成一百二十八萬偈,共有一千七百卷。

其次有一人名為弗沙,有二十五名弟子,各自對一部韋陀作廣泛分別,於是形成二十五部韋陀。又有一人名為鸚鵡,把一部韋陀變為十八部。再有一人名為善道,有二十一名弟子,變成二十一部韋陀。如此輾轉變化,最後形成一千二百零六部韋陀。

毘陀論,漢譯為智論,由婆耶娑所造,共有四種。第一,信力毘陀,說明事奉火神以滅罪。第二,耶受毘陀,說明供養婆羅門可以得福。第三,娑摩毘陀,說明使兩國和合。第四,阿陀婆毘陀,說明戰鬥。讀這四論的人自稱一切智人。

毘伽羅,漢譯為記論,由婆尼尼所造,說明種種經書以及各種雜語。衛世師論由優留佉所造;優留佉漢譯為最勝,本論記為『出世八百年』,論中說明六諦。

迦毘羅漢譯為黃頭,也稱龜種;他所造的論名為僧佉,僧佉漢譯為無頂。因為以造論者之名命名此論,所以稱為迦毘羅論,其中說二十五諦。

偈中所說小乘三藏學者,本論依三藏最初宣說的因緣加以解釋。佛在波羅柰,最初為五人說契經修多羅藏;佛在羅閱祇,最初為須那提說毘尼藏;佛在毘舍離獼猴池,最初為跋耆子說阿毘曇藏。五百羅漢在初夜結集阿毘曇藏《相續解脫經》,這就是三藏之學。

偈中所說深著五欲,本論分別欲界諸處欲相:四天下的人、龍、須輪與四天王,都是男女二根互相接觸;忉利天以風為事;炎天以互相親近為事;兜率天以互相牽手為事;化樂天以互相注視為事;他化自在天以心念為事;再往上的諸天全都離欲。

偈中所說寡女、處女,又引阿難請問佛:如來滅度以後,見到女人應當怎樣?佛回答:不要相見;假使相見,不要交談;假使交談,應當專心念佛。

偈中又說各種不男之人。其中般吒,漢譯為黃門。所謂黃門,是有男形或女形,卻不能行男事或女事。

八、羊與師子,以及八精進、八懈怠

偈中說入村里乞食,《雜阿含》以羊與師子王作譬喻。有一隻羊走到糞堆飽食,回到羊群便高傲地說自己得到好食。比丘也是如此:得到四事以後,生起染著與欲想,不知道出離;即使尚未得到,也一直懷著求取之想;得到以後,又在其他比丘面前自高而輕毀別人,說自己能得,別人不能得。這就是如羊一般乞食的比丘。

師子王遇到大獸便吃,不貪味、不染著;遇到小獸也吃,不鄙視、不輕薄。比丘也是如此:得到四事供養,不生染著,沒有欲想,自己明白出離之道;假使得不到利養,也不生紛亂之念,心中沒有增減。這就是如師子王一般乞食的比丘。

乞食等四事,各自在事情以前與事情以後,合成八個時分;本論依此前後八時說明八精進與八懈怠。

以乞食為例:乞食以前應想,這是為了修道而補治飢餓之瘡;尚未乞得飲食時,也不廢止憶念與修行。乞得飲食以後,為了報恩,更應念道不止。事情前後兩個時分,都倍加精進。其餘三事,前後也都如此;與此相反,就名為八懈怠。

《寶雲經》說,乞得的食物應分成四分:第一分奉給共同修梵行的人,第二分給乞者,第三分施給鬼神,第四分自己食用。

從『又復不行』以下八行,重頌不依遠或近而說的理上近處。

九、行成安樂:外無失、內無滯

從『若有比丘』以下五行三句,是說明修行成就,又分成三段。最初一行半,標出行成。事相成就,外在威儀沒有過失;義理成就,內心沒有滯礙,所以經文說沒有怯弱。

其次,從『菩薩有時』以下三行,說明修行成就而得到安樂。最後一行一句,重頌長行的總結。

從『菩薩入靜室』以下,解釋得到安樂的原因。因為修習禪定,止息種種過失與惡行,證得眾生無我,所以對外不會損害他人;因為修習智慧,遠離種種取著,證得法無我,所以內心沒有顛倒。這樣,心中便不再怯弱;不怯弱,就名為安樂。

從『文殊』以下一行一句,再次重頌長行的總結。至此,身安樂行的方法與行成之相,都已說完。

I. From the Question about Deep Practice to the Sphere of Conduct and Sphere of Approach

The chapter’s sutra text contains both a question and an answer. The question first praises the bodhisattvas of deep practice described in the preceding chapter, who can bear every great difficulty and propagate this sutra; it then asks how bodhisattvas whose practice is shallower should proclaim it in an evil age.

The passage beginning when the Buddha addresses Mañjuśrī is the second part, the answer. The answer has three sections: first, it marks the headings of the four practices; second, it explains the methods of practice; third, it summarizes the marks present when practice is accomplished. The first marks the headings as the sutra states. The passage beginning “First, abiding” is the second, explanation of the methods, and explains each of the four practices separately. The first practice has two parts: explanation of the method, then a summary of its accomplishment. The method is given in prose and verse. The prose also has two parts: from “first” it marks the sphere of conduct and sphere of approach together; from “Mañjuśrī” it explains them separately. The separate explanation has two items, the sphere of conduct and the sphere of approach.

One explanation says that initial cultivation at the stage of inner ordinary beings is called the sphere of conduct; once long cultivation has become mature and one gradually draws near the principle to be realized, it is called the sphere of approach. It cites as an example the practice near the fruit of buddhahood in the preceding chapter.

Another explanation says that the sphere of conduct is spoken of in terms of cultivation of the cause, while the sphere of approach is spoken of in terms of the resulting fruit; the sphere of conduct reveals contemplating wisdom, while the sphere of approach reveals the contemplated object.

Master Yao says: “From the seventh abode upward, the essence of mind securely abides in principle, and this is called the sphere of conduct because segmented birth and death has already been transcended. Below the seventh abode, nonarising has not yet become present; one only gradually approaches principle, and this is called the sphere of approach, for one still remains within segmented birth and death. Both are beginnings of practice and together constitute one peaceful practice.”

Master Zhiyi comments: The first school judges conduct shallow, yet the Great Nirvāṇa Sutra says that bodhisattvas of the ten grounds still possess conduct and therefore do not yet see buddha-nature clearly. Conduct is thus not shallow. The latter school judges approach shallow, yet the Vimalakīrti Sutra speaks of approaching the Buddha’s sovereign wisdom without peer. Approach would therefore be the deeper.

If the sphere of conduct and sphere of approach are both judged deep, they become the sutra-propagating practice of the deeply practicing bodhisattvas in the preceding chapter rather than a method for those who have first generated resolve. If both are judged shallow, they would be only the practice of people of the seven expedients. How could this be a method of perfect practice? One therefore cannot explain them through partial attachment to depth or shallowness.

The name conduct means advancing; the name approach means drawing near and cultivating intimacy. Because one draws near and cultivates intimacy, one can advance; because one advances, one can draw nearer and cultivate more intimately. How could the two be rigidly divided into deep and shallow? Moreover, conduct and approach are the methods marked above: the sphere of conduct corresponds to the Tathāgata’s robe, and the sphere of approach to the Tathāgata’s seat. Since seat and robe cannot be judged one deep and one shallow, how could conduct and approach be ranked?

Forbearance must inwardly embrace the highest principle while outwardly bearing the many affairs encountered through conditions, and is therefore called conduct. The seat of the emptiness of dharmas must penetrate outward conditions and dwell in the true object, and is therefore called approach. Phenomena and principle become manifest in one another within both. How, then, could they be divided into deep and shallow?

Why, if this is so, still distinguish the sphere of conduct and sphere of approach? Directly reaching principle and explaining it briefly is called the sphere of conduct; broadly explaining it in connection with various phenomenal matters is called the sphere of approach. The two differ only because one explanation is broad and the other brief. The principle they reveal has neither depth nor shallowness.

II. Explaining the Sphere of Conduct through One Dharma: One Truth and Three Conducts

The sphere of conduct is now explained through three Dharma-gateways. First, it directly takes the one truth as its object. The one truth is the place to which all things return, the root from which all things arise, and that which pervades all without discrimination.

That to which all things return is the ground of forbearance. The ground is the middle way. Because all dharmas return here, it is called the ground; because all practices come to rest and abide here, it is called forbearance. This is conduct that does not fall into something conducted.

That which forms the root of all things is like the great earth from which the myriad things arise: all practices are accomplished in dependence upon principle. When this root of principle is obtained, one can be gentle before the hard and strong, compliant amid opposition, calming before violence, and settled amid alarm. Immeasurable merit arises from the ground of the middle way. This ground originally gives birth to nothing, yet it can give rise to merit: this is nonconduct that can conduct.

That which pervades all without discrimination means no longer discriminating the distinct marks of nonconduct and conduct. The sutra therefore says that one neither engages in contrivance nor discriminates. This is neither the conduct of ordinary beings nor the nonconduct of the two vehicles.

There are originally no three fixed kinds of conduct, yet three can be spoken according to meaning, and so it is called conduct. All three depend upon the one real truth, and so it is called a sphere. Explained in this way, the sphere of conduct accords with the preceding sutra text: the cessation of all practices accords with the Tathāgata’s robe; the arising of merit in response to conditions accords with the Tathāgata’s chamber; and pervading all without discrimination accords with the Tathāgata’s seat. This is explaining the sphere of conduct through one dharma, the method for propagating this sutra.

III. Explaining the Sphere of Conduct through Two Dharmas: Two Patiences, Two Emptinesses, and Four Patiences

Second, it is explained through two dharmas: patience toward sentient beings and patience toward dharmas. These two patiences are the emptiness of sentient beings and the emptiness of dharmas. The two emptinesses here differ from those practiced by the two vehicles. Why? The emptinesses of person and dharmas may be explained through true and conventional, provisional and actual, but the two emptinesses and two patiences revealed here both see the middle way and therefore differ from those of the two vehicles.

Unfolded further, they can be described as four patiences. In a scheme of five patiences, the word “good” in the sutra is separately assigned to the patience of faith; in a scheme of six, the word “harmonious” is separately assigned to the patience of harmonious conformity. Correlated with stages, they can be opened into forty-two patiences. If even one ground fully possesses the merit of the other forty-one grounds, how could one patience not fully possess the Dharma-meaning of the other forty-one? Here only four patiences are used to explain the sutra text: the patience of subjugation, conforming patience, the patience of nonarising, and the patience of quiescent extinction.

These four patiences differ from those taught in the Distinct Teaching. The Distinct Teaching takes the first two as patience toward sentient beings at shallower stages and the latter two as patience toward dharmas at deeper stages. Here, according to the perfect meaning, patience toward sentient beings and patience toward dharmas both penetrate beginning and end, as do all four patiences. Why? Because the principle of the two emptinesses is the middle way. From the first abode one cultivates the four patiences, enters the middle way, and sees the principle of the two emptinesses; even at the final single mind one still exhausts that principle. The Great Nirvāṇa Sutra says: “Between the first generation of resolve and ultimate accomplishment, the two minds do not differ.”

Without judging the four patiences through depth and shallowness, one perfectly subdues the five abiding afflictions from the first generation of resolve, and this remains the patience of subjugation through the vajra summit. Not opposing the true aspect from beginning to end is conforming patience. Not arousing a mind fixed on either extreme from beginning to end is the patience of nonarising. Bringing all practices to rest from beginning to end is the patience of quiescent extinction.

Hearing of birth and death, one does not suddenly fear its suffering. Hearing of nirvāṇa, one does not suddenly hurry to realize and seize its pleasure. Whether one hears that the Buddha is permanent or impermanent, that those of the two vehicles can or cannot become buddhas, that birth and death and nirvāṇa are different or not different, that the Buddha Way is long or short, difficult or easy—even neither long nor short, neither difficult nor easy—one is not startled, afraid, or terrified.

From beginning to end, a practitioner of this conduct patiently accepts all dharmas through the principle of the two emptinesses: this is wearing the Tathāgata’s robe. Abiding in the principle of the two emptinesses is sitting upon the Tathāgata’s seat. Pitying all sentient beings is entering the Tathāgata’s chamber. The two emptinesses and four patiences are called conduct; the principle of the two emptinesses is the sphere. This is explaining the sphere of conduct through two dharmas, the method for propagating this sutra.

IV. Explaining the Sphere of Conduct through Three Dharmas, and Master Long’s Alternate Explanation

Third, it is explained through three dharmas: the inconceivable true, conventional, and middle truths.

“Abiding on the ground of forbearance” is a general statement of the three truths, just as a ground on which one can abide must first exist before patient acceptance is possible. “Gentle and kindly compliant” means complying well with the true truth and bearing the pressure of delusive views and attachments as one bears cold and heat; hence it is called good compliance. “Neither suddenly violent, with a mind that is not startled” means abiding in the conventional truth. One accords with the differing faculties and conditions of sentient beings and teaches at the proper time, and therefore is not suddenly violent; one also patiently bears both adverse and favorable conditions, and therefore the mind is not startled.

“Acting upon nothing with respect to all dharmas” and the clauses that follow mean abiding in the middle truth. One can bear both extremes, and so is said to act upon nothing; one properly abides in the middle way, and so is said to contemplate the true aspect; one does not grasp even the true aspect of the middle way, and so is said not to discriminate. Thus the ground of the three truths is called the sphere, while bearing the pressure of the five abiding afflictions is called conduct.

Conduct also divides into three kinds. The practice of calming is conduct that does not fall into something conducted. The practice of contemplation is neither conduct nor nonconduct. Compassionate conduct is nonconduct that can conduct. These three conducts accord with the meanings of the Tathāgata’s robe, seat, and chamber given above. This is explaining the sphere of conduct through three dharmas and discerning the method for propagating the sutra.

Master Long gives an alternate explanation: “Abiding on the ground of forbearance generally marks patience toward sentient beings and patience toward dharmas; the following text explains the two separately. Gentleness and good compliance concern bodily action; freedom from sudden violence concerns verbal action; and a mind not startled concerns mental action. This is cultivating patience toward sentient beings through the three karmas of body, speech, and mind. Acting upon nothing with respect to all dharmas is not engaging with existent marks; contemplating the true aspect is acting in emptiness and equality; neither engaging in contrivance nor discriminating is not engaging with signlessness. Both the extremes of existence and nonexistence come to rest and converge in the middle way. These three clauses describe cultivation of patience toward dharmas. Attainment of both patiences is summarized as the sphere of conduct.”

Master Zhiyi comments: Although Master Long explains the two patiences, he does not know which teaching forms their basis. If they are the two patiences taught in the three teachings, they are wholly unlike the meaning of the Lotus Sutra here. If explained through the perfect meaning, the items should not be isolated so that they cannot interpenetrate one another. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

V. Three Gateways of the Sphere of Approach and Ten Things to Keep Distant

The passage beginning “What is called the sphere of association?” is the second item, the sphere of approach. The sutra text divides into three gateways.

First, distancing oneself from ten disturbances speaks of approach through distance: precepts assist right contemplation. Second, cultivating and gathering in one’s own mind speaks of approach through direct approach: concentration assists right contemplation. Third, contemplating all dharmas as empty speaks of approach through neither distance nor approach: wisdom assists right contemplation.

Previously the text only took principle directly as its object and abided on the ground of forbearance. The gateway of precepts now broadly lists conditions that can produce insult and disturbance and that should be kept distant. This does not mean taking up weapons in opposition or abandoning those sentient beings, but only distancing oneself from disturbance through right wisdom. Approach spoken through distance therefore broadly unfolds the earlier meaning of conducting what is not conducted.

Previously the text only directly said not to follow violence with violence and to remain settled amid alarm. The gateway of concentration now broadly explains the concentrated mind, the place of concentration, and the essential gateway of concentration. Through the power of concentration one can still bring calm amid violence and remain settled amid alarm. Approach spoken through direct approach therefore broadly unfolds the earlier meaning of nonconduct that conducts.

Previously the text only directly spoke of acting upon nothing with respect to all dharmas. Now it broadly contemplates all dharmas as empty, passing through objects that are immeasurable, boundless, without impediment, and without obstruction. Approach spoken through neither distance nor approach therefore broadly unfolds the earlier meaning of neither conduct nor nonconduct.

The first gateway contains ten disturbances to be kept distant: first, the powerful; second, wrong people and wrong teachings; third, dangerous games; fourth, caṇḍālas; fifth, the assemblies of the two vehicles; sixth, thoughts of desire; seventh, persons in the ancient category of non-males; eighth, danger and harm; ninth, suspicion; and tenth, keeping dependents and the like.

Lokāyata is translated as wrong discourse and also as refutational discourse. Anti-Lokāyata means discourse opposing one’s ruler or father. Again, Lokāyata may be explained as good discourse, in which a teacher refutes a disciple, and anti-Lokāyata as bad discourse, in which a disciple refutes a teacher.

Nārāyaṇa refers to difficult acrobatic entertainments at great heights. It may also refer to painting, to various bodily transformations, or to such arts as climbing tall poles, leaping, and tumbling.

The treatise also divides the ten between the two extremes of birth and death and nirvāṇa: nine belong to birth and death and one to nirvāṇa. Both extremes should be left behind, which is another name for quiescent extinction. Concerning an explanation of the ten through contemplation of the mind and the three meanings contained in direct approach, the treatise preserves only 〔the remainder is abbreviated〕.

Here Fascicle Eight, Part Two, of the Fahua Wenju ends. What follows is Fascicle Nine, Part One, still attributed to the Tiantai Master Zhiyi.

VI. Neither Distance nor Approach: From the General Statement of Object and Wisdom to Nineteen Clauses

In the third gateway, approach is explained through neither distance nor approach. The sutra text has three sections: first, a general statement of the contemplated object and contemplating wisdom; second, a separate explanation; third, a summary of accomplishment.

“Contemplating” is the contemplative wisdom of the middle way; “all dharmas” are the objects of the ten Dharma-realms. If wisdom were mentioned alone, it would have no object to contemplate. All dharmas are therefore adduced to reveal that they are wholly empty and quiescent.

The passage beginning “in accordance with the true” is the separate explanation. Because the two extremes and three truths have no fixed marks of identity or difference, it is called “accordance”; because it is not the object of the seven expedients, it is called “true”; because the real is taken as the mark of all dharmas, it is called “in accordance with their true aspect.”

“Not inverted” means without the eight inversions. “Not moving” means not moved by the two kinds of birth and death. “Not retreating” means that thought after thought is quiescent extinction, flowing into the ocean of all-knowledge. “Not turning” means neither revolving through birth and death like an ordinary being nor turning between the stages of ordinary being and sage like those of the two vehicles.

“Like empty space” means that there is only a name, while the name itself cannot be obtained. The contemplative wisdom of the middle way likewise has only a name; when its substance is sought, it cannot be obtained. “Without any existent self-nature” means possessing no fixed self-nature—whether own-nature, other-nature, shared nature, or causeless nature. “The paths of all language are cut off” means that this object is inconceivable.

“Not born” means that delusion, wisdom, and principle are all unborn. “Not emerging” means that the afflictions counteracted by the Tathāgata ultimately arise no more. “Not arising” means that various skillful means are wholly quiescent extinction. “Without name” means that names cannot name it. “Without mark” means that appearances cannot mark it. “Possessing nothing” means lacking the existence of the two extremes. “Immeasurable” means that it does not belong to countable dharmas. “Boundless” means that it has no spatial limit. “Without impediment and without obstruction” means that it pervades every place.

“They exist only through causes and conditions” is the summary. Previously only the contemplative wisdom of the middle way was explained; now it is further said to illuminate both extremes. The principle-nature is ultimately pure, as explained above, and is itself neither liberation nor delusion. Yet birth and death arise from the conditions of delusion, while nirvāṇa arises from the conditions of liberation. Again, what exists through causes and conditions can be nirvāṇa; arising from inversion, it becomes birth and death. In this way the meaning of illuminating both is revealed.

“Constantly delighting in contemplating dharmas such as these” means constantly delighting in contemplation of the three truths and other dharmas. Again, “they exist only through causes and conditions and arise from inversion” summarizes the object of the inconceivable three truths; “and therefore are spoken of” is the inconceivable teaching; and “constantly delighting in contemplating” summarizes the inconceivable three contemplations.

The treatise also gives another explanation: “Contemplating all dharmas as empty, in accordance with their true aspect” marks the essence of contemplation. The nine clauses from “not inverted” onward explain the marks of contemplation. Not being moved by the two extremes and eight inversions is called not inverted and not moving; not falling into the two stages of the two vehicles and ordinary beings is called not retreating and not turning. These two pairs reveal the functioning of wisdom that arises in dependence upon principle.

It does not belong to the future, and therefore is not born; it does not belong to the past, and therefore does not emerge; it does not belong to the present, and therefore does not arise. Fascicle Fifty-One of the Great Treatise says: “Like empty space, it has no mark of entering, emerging, or abiding.” The Mahāyānasaṃgraha is the same: there is no future place to enter, no past place from which to emerge, and no present place in which to abide. Fascicle Forty-Three also says: “Because the side of the cause does not arise, it is called not emerging; because the side of the condition does not arise, it is called not born.”

There are nineteen clauses in all. The first is a general statement, and the latter eighteen correspond to the eighteen emptinesses taught in the Large Prajñāpāramitā Sutra.

First, “in accordance with their true aspect” is the emptiness of ultimate meaning. Second, “not inverted” is inner emptiness, because within the six inner entrances there is neither self nor what belongs to self. Third, “not inverted and not moving” is outer emptiness, because outer objects are not drawn along and moved by the six sense objects. Fourth, “not retreating” is inner-and-outer emptiness: because the twelve entrances are empty, it is said not to retreat.

Fifth, “not turning” is the emptiness of emptiness. Emptiness can break all dharmas; all dharmas are what is broken, and emptiness is what breaks. Once all dharmas have been wholly broken, only emptiness remains; that emptiness itself is also empty, and so it is called the emptiness of emptiness. Once emptiness is itself empty, nothing remains capable of turning, and so it is called not turning.

Sixth, “like empty space” is great emptiness. Because grasping and conceptual construction concerning direction and place have been broken, it is said to be like empty space. Seventh, “without any existent self-nature” is ultimate emptiness. Because not the least remainder of any dharma exists, it is called ultimate emptiness; because it is ultimately empty, it has no fixed self-nature.

Eighth, “the paths of all language are cut off” is the emptiness of all dharmas. Because the emptiness of all cannot be expressed, the pathways of language are cut off. Ninth, “not born” is the emptiness of the conditioned. Conditioned dharmas are formed through the conjunction of causes and conditions; because no real conjunction exists, they are not born. Tenth, “not emerging” is the emptiness of the unconditioned. Both the name of escape and the dharma of escape are empty, and so it is called not emerging.

Eleventh, “not arising” is beginningless emptiness. Seeking an original first source, one cannot obtain it, and so there is no arising. Twelfth, “without name” is nature-emptiness. Thirteenth, “without mark” is mark-emptiness. Fourteenth, “in reality possessing nothing” is the emptiness of the unobtainable.

Fifteenth, “immeasurable” is the emptiness of existent dharmas. Where dharmas exist there is a measure by which they can be measured; because measure is empty, it is called immeasurable. Sixteenth, “boundless” is the emptiness of nonexistent dharmas. Nonexistent dharmas are indicated by taking existent dharmas as their boundary; now even this indication is empty, and so it is boundless.

Seventeenth, “without impediment” is the emptiness of existent and nonexistent dharmas. Because neither existent nor nonexistent dharmas can be obtained, it is called without impediment. Eighteenth, “without obstruction” is dispersed emptiness. Because every hindrance and obscuration is unobtainable, it is called without obstruction.

All eighteen emptinesses are the right wisdom of the middle way and are therefore all called empty. They are spoken of as eighteen only in accordance with eighteen kinds of contemplated object. The Great Nirvāṇa Sutra says: “The Tathāgata constantly cultivates the meaning of the eighteen emptinesses.” The treatise therefore uses the eighteen emptinesses to explain the latter eighteen clauses.

VII. The Verse Explains Them Together: Fourteen Lines on Phenomena and Eight on Contemplation of Principle

The verse has twenty-eight lines and three phrases, divided into three parts: the first line recapitulates the heading; the next twenty-two lines recapitulate cultivation; and the final five lines and three phrases explain the accomplishment of practice.

The prose explains the sphere of conduct and sphere of approach separately, whereas the verse recapitulates them together. Precisely because their general meaning is the same while separation and combination reveal one another, the broad and brief explanations can support each other. The prose gives three items each for the sphere of conduct and sphere of approach. The verse now explains them together and no longer follows the original order.

The fourteen lines beginning “They should enter the sphere of conduct” recapitulate distance and approach in terms of phenomena. The preceding prose lists ten things to keep distant; the verse states them briefly and not in order, as the text itself shows. These fourteen lines also recapitulate the sphere of conduct through the emptiness of sentient beings; according to their meaning, they further include the three levels of the sphere of approach. The verse therefore says: “This is called the sphere of conduct and sphere of approach.”

The verse says “constantly keeping distant from kings” because a bhikṣu’s approach to a king can implicate him in ten unlawful matters. First, he may be suspected of plotting against the king’s command. Second, the king may execute a minister. Third, treasure may go missing from a treasury he oversees. Fourth, a woman in the palace may become pregnant. Fifth, the king may be poisoned. Sixth, ministers may contend with one another. Seventh, two countries may go to war. Eighth, a miserly king may refuse to distribute wealth to the people. Ninth, the king may levy the people’s property. Tenth, if disease and epidemic spread through the kingdom, the bhikṣu may be accused of causing it through spells.

When any of these ten matters occurs, ministers and people may readily believe the bhikṣu responsible. If they therefore slander the bhikṣu, they also slander the right Dharma and the Buddha. The Buddha consequently does not permit a bhikṣu to approach a king.

Concerning the outsider brahmans mentioned in the verse, the Mātaṅga Sutra records that in the beginning a man named Brahmā composed one Veda. Next a man named Baijing transformed the one into four: first, the Veda of Recitation; second, Sacrifice; third, Chanting; fourth, Calamity-Aversion. Each contained 320,000 verses, making 1,280,000 verses in all and 1,700 fascicles.

Next a man named Fusha had twenty-five disciples, each of whom extensively distinguished one Veda, thereby forming twenty-five Vedas. Another man named Yingwu transformed one Veda into eighteen. Another man named Shandao had twenty-one disciples and transformed it into twenty-one Vedas. Through transformations such as these, there eventually came to be 1,206 Vedas.

Veda Treatise is translated into Chinese as “Treatise on Knowledge” and was composed by Poyesuō. It has four kinds. First, the Veda of the Power of Faith explains serving the fire god in order to extinguish wrongdoing. Second, the Yajur Veda explains that merit can be obtained by making offerings to brahmans. Third, the Sāma Veda explains how to bring two countries into harmony. Fourth, the Atharva Veda explains warfare. Readers of these four treatises call themselves people of all-knowledge.

Vyākaraṇa is translated into Chinese as “Treatise on Grammar.” Composed by Ponini, it explains various scriptures and many kinds of mixed language. The Vaiśeṣika Treatise was composed by Youliuqu. Youliuqu is translated into Chinese as “Supreme”; the present treatise records that he “appeared eight hundred years later.” His treatise explains six truths.

Kapila is translated into Chinese as “Yellow-Headed” and is also called “of the Tortoise Clan.” His treatise is named Sāṃkhya, translated into Chinese as “Without a Crown.” Because the treatise is named after its author, it is also called the Kapila Treatise. It teaches twenty-five truths.

Concerning the scholars of the Lesser Vehicle’s three treasuries mentioned in the verse, the treatise explains the conditions under which the three treasuries were first taught. At Vārāṇasī, the Buddha first taught the five men the sūtra treasury. At Rājagṛha, He first taught Sunati the vinaya treasury. At the Monkey Pond in Vaiśālī, He first taught the Vajjiputtakas the abhidharma treasury. During the first watch of the night, the five hundred arhats compiled the abhidharma treasury, the Sutra of Continuous Liberation. This is the study of the three treasuries.

Concerning deep attachment to the five desires in the verse, the treatise distinguishes the marks of desire at the various places of the desire realm. Humans of the four continents, nāgas, asuras, and the gods of the Four Kings engage through contact between the two sexual faculties. The Heaven of the Thirty-Three uses wind; the Yāma Heaven draws close; the Tuṣita Heaven holds hands; the Heaven of Delight in Transformation gazes; and the Heaven of Freely Enjoying Others’ Transformations engages by thought. All heavens above these have left desire.

Concerning widows and maidens in the verse, the treatise also cites Ānanda asking the Buddha how one should act upon seeing women after the Tathāgata’s extinction. The Buddha answers: do not see them; if one does see them, do not converse; if one converses, one should single-mindedly recollect the Buddha.

The verse also mentions persons in the various ancient categories of non-males. Among them, paṇḍaka is translated into Chinese as “yellow gate.” A yellow gate is someone with the form of a man or woman who cannot perform the sexual function of a man or woman.

VIII. The Sheep and the Lion, and Eight Kinds of Diligence and Laziness

When the verse speaks of entering a village to seek alms, the Saṃyukta Āgama uses the sheep and lion king as similes. A sheep goes to a dung heap and eats its fill, then returns to the flock and arrogantly boasts of obtaining fine food. A bhikṣu may act likewise: after obtaining the four requisites, he gives rise to attachment and thoughts of desire and does not understand escape; even before obtaining them, he continually longs to acquire them; after obtaining them, he exalts himself before other bhikṣus and disparages them, saying that he can obtain what others cannot. This is a bhikṣu who seeks alms like a sheep.

When the lion king meets a great animal, he eats without craving the taste or becoming attached; when he meets a small animal, he also eats without disdain or contempt. A bhikṣu may act likewise: receiving the four requisites, he neither attaches nor entertains thoughts of desire and himself understands the way of escape; even if he obtains no gain or support, he does not give rise to confused thoughts and his mind neither increases nor decreases. This is a bhikṣu who seeks alms like a lion king.

The four requisites, beginning with seeking alms, each have a time before and a time after the affair, making eight occasions in all. The treatise uses these eight occasions to explain eight kinds of diligence and eight kinds of laziness.

Take seeking alms as an example. Before seeking alms one should think that it is undertaken to treat the wound of hunger for the sake of cultivating the Way; while food and drink have not yet been obtained, one still does not abandon recollection and practice. After obtaining food and drink, one should remain mindful of the Way without cease in order to repay kindness. On both occasions, before and after the affair, one redoubles diligence. The same applies before and after each of the other three requisites; the opposite is called the eight kinds of laziness.

The Ratnamegha Sutra says that food obtained through alms should be divided into four shares: the first is given to companions in pure conduct, the second to beggars, the third to ghosts and spirits, and the fourth is eaten oneself.

The eight lines beginning “Further, not acting” recapitulate the sphere of approach in principle, explained through neither distance nor approach.

IX. Accomplishment of Practice and Peaceful Ease: No Outward Failure, No Inward Obstruction

The five lines and three phrases beginning “If there is a bhikṣu” explain the accomplishment of practice and divide into three sections. The first line and a half mark that accomplishment. Accomplishment in phenomena means no outward fault in dignified conduct; accomplishment in principle means no inward obstruction in the mind. The sutra therefore speaks of freedom from timidity.

Next, the three lines beginning “At times a bodhisattva” explain the peaceful ease obtained when practice is accomplished. The final line and phrase again recapitulate the prose conclusion.

The passage beginning “The bodhisattva enters a quiet chamber” explains the cause of attaining peaceful ease. Through cultivation of meditative concentration, one stills faults and harmful conduct and realizes the nonself of persons, so outwardly one does not harm others. Through cultivation of wisdom, one leaves every form of grasping and realizes the nonself of dharmas, so inwardly the mind is not inverted. The mind is therefore no longer timid; freedom from timidity is called peaceful ease.

The line and phrase beginning “Mañjuśrī” again recapitulate the prose conclusion. At this point the method of the peaceful practice of the body and the marks of its accomplishment have both been fully explained.

安樂行品 · 口・意・誓願安樂行Peaceful Practices · Peaceful Practices of Speech, Mind, and Vows

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、口安樂行:先止住四種言語過失

第二是口安樂行,也分長行和偈頌。長行有兩部分:先標出章目,再解釋行法。行法又分止行、觀行兩門。

止行有四項。第一,不說人與經典的過失。聽聞的人可能因說法而生過失,佛所說的法本身怎可說有過?七種方便法是佛隨順眾生的意趣而說,雖稱為未了義,仍是佛的方便教法。若攻擊這些法,便會惱害信受這些法的人,這不是安樂行的相貌。

第二,不輕慢。不可以自己倚仗圓滿的行法便輕蔑偏門,也不可以只尊重真實而輕視權宜。

第三,不說別人的長處與短處。經文先通說一切人,再特別舉出聲聞人。人都不喜歡聽別人談自己的過失,所以不可說短;當面稱譽某人,也可能反使眼前另一人感到自己受毀,所以不可說長。譬如不可對張某稱說趙某的長處,使張某以為這是借趙某之長譏諷自己的短處;也不可對張某說趙某的短處,因為張某會想:此人既能在我面前背後毀謗趙某,也會在趙某面前背後毀謗我。正因如此,無論好壞都止而不說。

對於不說長短,本論又引《日藏》第一所說:在初夜、中夜、後夜減少睡眠,精進坐禪、誦經、修道,背捨生死而面向涅槃之路;不稱說他人的短處,不宣說自己的長處;謙下卑遜,不自高傲;衣食知足,修頭陀精進而不放逸;繫念思惟,不使心向外奔散;對一切眾生生起慈悲。又引修多羅所說的空行:自己讀誦,也教人讀誦;不誹謗他人,不說他人的過失,也不稱說自己的長處。

聲聞人的根性尚未決定。如果讚歎二乘,可能使其中有人從大乘退下而取小乘;如果毀辱二乘,也可能使他對大、小兩邊全都失去信心,最後兩無所取。所以,不讚毀不是不辨別法義,而是不以讚毀斷傷受法之機。

第四,不生怨恨、嫌棄之心。若認為某人或某法妨礙我的道,便是怨心;若認為對方鄙陋低劣,便是嫌心。心念的機關一動,口中的言語隨即發出。要截斷說過失的源頭,就必須連怨嫌之心也不使生起。

二、口安樂行:觀空而不逆人、不違法

從善於修習這種安樂心以下,進入觀行門。應觀一切法空,不對任何東西取著,心不苟且固執;既不違逆人的意趣,也不違背法的實相,因此不用小乘法回答難問,而只以大乘為人解說。

這裡仍須分清有沒有看見對方的根機。若明知對方沒有大乘根機,此時為他說小乘法,他可以得到方便利益。若並沒有看清他缺少大乘根機,卻逕自為他說小乘,便可能妨礙他的大乘因緣。在同樣不能判明根機的情況下,只說大乘便沒有過失。

口安樂行的偈頌共有十六行半,分成三段:最初二行重頌標章,其次九行半重頌行法,最後五行說明行已成就。

最初二行把長行總說的安樂行展開為三種行相。使面前聽法的人得到安穩的道與果,是入如來室之義;在清淨處安設床座,是坐如來座之義;用油塗身、洗去塵穢,是著如來衣之義。這三法共同引導口業,所以稱為口安樂行。

從安處法座以下九行半再分兩段:先以五行半重頌止行,再以四行重頌觀行。前面的四種止行,在這裡全都得到重頌。

第一,隨著別人的發問而為他解說,半行重頌不輕慢;若心存輕慢,便不會真正隨問而說。

第二,從比丘來問一直到隨義回答,共二行半,重頌不說長短:只依義回答,不談人的好壞。隨義回答又要分可答、不可答。雙方以問答彼此詰難,互相比較高下,而勝負各自明白,這是有智慧者的言語,可以回答;放縱威勢,聲稱誰敢違逆便誅罰誰,這是王者的言語,不應以爭勝相答;連長短是非都不知道,只想求勝,這是愚者的言語,同樣不應投入爭競。

第三,從用因緣、譬喻說法,到使人進入佛道,共一行半,追頌不喜歡說人與法的過失。宣說別人的過失,會使他生起毒害之念;如今不說過失,使他心生歡喜而發心進入佛道,因為佛道從歡喜生起。

第四,除去懶惰之意的一行,重頌沒有怨嫌。怨嫌生起,便帶來懈怠、憂愁和煩惱;如今以慈心說法,沒有怨嫌,便能精進而無憂。長行的四項從停止惡行來說,偈頌則從積極修行善法來說。

接著四行重頌觀門。長行說只以大乘回答,偈中便說晝夜常說無上道教;長行說使人得到一切種智,偈中便說願他成就佛道。

最後五行說口安樂行成就。第一行標出行成。其次二行說,內心若沒有嫉妒等過失,外面的困難便不會前來,正如沒有臭物,蒼蠅便不會聚集。再下一行說,智慧之人依此而行,內在具備善法,所以行能成就。所謂如佛先前所說,若就內無過失而言,是指長行所說;若就內有善法而言,是指偈頌所說。最後一行衡量這個人的功德。

三、意安樂行:四止與四觀逐一相反

第三是意安樂行,也有長行、偈頌。長行分為標章、解釋行法、結成三段;行法仍是先止、後觀。

止行有四項:不嫉妒諂曲,不輕蔑辱罵,不惱亂他人,不作偏執諍競。二乘人求迅速出離生死,先除貪欲;菩薩則先除瞋恚與錯誤見解。嫉妒是瞋恚的垢染,諂曲是見解的垢染。嫉妒違背慈悲,不是教化他人的方法;諂誑違背智慧,不是自己修行的方法。智慧若受障礙,憑什麼上求佛道?慈悲若受妨礙,又憑什麼向下教化眾生?所以,修安樂行的菩薩最須捨棄嫉妒與諂曲。

第二,不可輕蔑辱罵。不可用圓滿的行法呵責修別行的人。若知道對方的根機,可以責勉;若不知道,就不可責罵,因為可能使他退失善根。

第三,不可惱亂他人。也不可用圓滿的行法呵責修通行的人。對方本來沒有大乘根機,若勉強以圓行呵責,便違逆他的心而造成惱亂;原本所修的通行既受呵責,圓行又尚未理解,於是先起疑、後生悔,大、小兩邊全都失去。經文所說離道很遠,是指所行迂迴,這會惱害修別行的人;所說不能到達,是指沉滯於空而取證,這會惱害修通行的人;所說懈怠,是指厭棄生死,《悲花》把小乘人稱作懈怠。

第四,不可偏執諍競。這一項到觀行的平等說法處反面顯出:若堅執一邊與人爭論,便不能依眾生根器平等說法。

觀行也有四項,分別反轉前面的四惡。第一,對一切眾生生起大悲,反轉嫉妒、諂曲。第二,對如來生起慈父之想,反轉輕蔑辱罵。凡是求佛道的人,都是正在學習的人;應當像敬佛一樣敬重學人,不可輕罵。經文說諸如來,諸字通於過去、現在、未來三世;眼前正在求佛道的學人,便是未來的如來。

第三,對菩薩生起大師之想,反轉惱亂。依義理說,三乘人都是菩薩,都有教化、訓導眾生的德行,都是眾生的老師;所以應作大師之想,不可宣說他們的短處。

第四,平等說法,反轉諍論。平等能破除偏執與爭競,但平等並不是對所有人說得一樣多、一定少,而是衡量聽者根器的利與鈍,不多不少地為他說法。

最後結成意安樂行,分為兩點。由於止息四惡,惡事不能加在修行者身上,所以沒有人能惱亂他;由於修起四種觀行,有德之人便前來聚集,所以他能得到良善的同學。

意安樂行的偈頌共有六行。最初五行重頌止、觀兩門,各有四項;最後一行重頌行成。數目與長行前後相應,不可將四項合併成一個籠統的善意。

四、誓願安樂行:先辨境,再辨起願之由

第四是誓願安樂行,先有長行,後有偈頌。長行先說行法,再讚歎此經難得聽聞;行法又分標章、正說行法、結成三層。

正說行法有三項。第一,標出誓願所對的境;第二,說明生起誓願的緣由;第三,正式立下誓願。

誓願的境先分慈、悲兩類。慈誓之境,通取所有曾經發起方便心的人。其中,尚未出離三界的稱為在家,已斷盡通惑的稱為出家;這一類攝取兩種二乘與三種菩薩。他們仍有無明,本來也可以成為大悲所緣的境;但因他們都曾發心,與慈誓相應,應當給予圓滿道、圓滿果的安樂,所以經文說對他們生大慈心。

悲誓之境是非菩薩人,通取從未發起方便心的人。他們對方便法尚且全不歸向,何況真實之法;這一類攝取三界之內的一切眾生。他們同樣需要得到安樂,但因流轉沒有邊際,當下最與拔苦的悲誓相應,應拔除他們受罪的因與受罪的果,所以經文說生大悲心。

其次說起願之由。第一是起慈之由:有些人喜愛小乘,把佛的方便說當作究竟真實,不能會入圓滿之道,因而發生重大的損失。這個大失,正是生起慈誓的緣由。

第二是起悲之由:未發偏、圓之心的人,對偏、圓兩種道都沒有聽聞、認知、覺悟。就偏道說,不聞便沒有聞慧,不知便沒有思慧,不覺便沒有修慧;就圓道說,也同樣沒有這三慧。為什麼會三者全無?因為不曾發問,所以沒有聽聞;不肯相信,所以沒有認知;不能理解,所以不能修習。偏、圓兩邊的三慧、權宜與真實全都沒有,實在值得憐愍,這便是生起悲誓的緣由。

五、正式發願與三種行成

接著正式發願。這些人雖不發問,也不相信這部經,菩薩卻不依偏道立願,而只希望給予他們圓道的三慧。因此,菩薩立誓:自己得到無上正等正覺時,無論身在何處,都要以神通力、智慧力引導他們,使他們住在這個法中。

這裡的誓願、菩提、智慧與神通,都依修安樂行而得。深觀如來座,便得到智慧力,以四種辯才莊嚴,能以智慧拔濟眾生;深觀如來室、如來衣,便得到廣大、善妙、寂靜之力,不必進入滅盡定,仍能示現種種威儀。神通由福德莊嚴,以定力先感動眾生;智慧則能拔濟眾生。

從佛再呼文殊以下,是結說行成,共有三層。

第一,總結沒有過失,這便是行成。為什麼說行已成就?因為立下大誓願,所以進入如來室之行成就;因為知道四眾失去圓道,所以坐如來座之行成就;因為以誓願約束自己的心,不使懈怠,所以著如來衣之行成就。三種行全都建立,才能說行已成就。所謂沒有過失,是慈悲成就,所以沒有瞋恚垢染的過失;如來衣成就,所以沒有懈怠;如來座成就,所以沒有諂曲。

第二,分別結成慈悲之行。由慈行成就,便能攝受比丘、比丘尼、優婆塞、優婆夷及人、天前來供養、聽法;由誓願成就,感得佛的神通護念,也感得諸天保護;由如來座成就,聽法的人心生歡喜。

第三,解釋誓願之行為何能成。過去、現在、未來諸佛尚且守護此經,何況諸天更應護持修行者。

六、經何以難聞:不與珠的六層譬喻

接下來讚歎此經難以聽聞,先用法直接說,再用譬喻說。法說分兩項:過去未曾明顯宣說,所以從前不能得到;到了今日才得以聽聞。譬說也分兩項:不與珠,譬喻過去未曾明顯宣說;與珠,譬喻今日終於得聞。兩個譬喻各自都有展開譬喻與會合譬義兩面。

不與珠的譬喻有六層。第一,強力轉輪王以威勢降伏諸國;第二,小王不肯服從命令;第三,轉輪王發動種種兵眾前往討伐;第四,王看見士兵有戰功,心生歡喜;第五,依功勞大小賞賜種種物品;第六,唯獨不把髻中的明珠賜出。

轉輪王譬喻如來教化世間,降伏諸國譬喻面對陰、界、入等諸境。小王譬喻煩惱等尚未被無漏之法調伏,所以稱為不順王命。

種種兵眾也有次第。七賢之中的修法,譬喻前軍;須陀洹、斯陀含之中的修法,譬喻次軍;阿那含、阿羅漢之中的修法,譬喻後軍。所要攻破的,是貪、瞋、癡及三者等分而成的八萬四千寇盜;能夠攻破它們的,是八萬四千法門的官兵。王看見兵眾立功,便是第四層的有功歡喜。

第五層隨功賞賜,每一物都有次第。田譬喻三昧,宅譬喻智慧;聚落譬喻初果、二果,邑譬喻三果,城譬喻涅槃;衣服譬喻慚愧、忍辱等善法,嚴飾身體的器具譬喻助道善法,種種七寶譬喻七覺支等法,象、馬、車乘譬喻二乘的盡智、無生智,奴婢譬喻神通,人民譬喻所得的有漏善法。這些賞物與所配法義必須各守本論的列序。

第六層仍不與珠。能出離分段生死的根機,只算較小的功勳;能出離變易生死的根機,才算較大的功勳。如果沒有大功勳便突然賜下髻中明珠,諸臣會感到驚怪;這譬喻眾生的大乘根機尚未發動,便忽然宣說此經,二乘人會疑惑,菩薩也會驚怪。六層譬喻各有相應的合譬,依次會合,不可跳項。

七、與珠、十四行半偈與全品二十三行總結

與珠的譬喻分兩項:先有大功勳,然後才與珠。明珠的光明譬喻中道智慧,珠體圓滿譬喻常住;珠在頭頂,譬喻它是究竟果位所宗;珠藏髻中,譬喻真實被權宜覆藏。解開髮髻,譬喻開啟權宜;把珠賜下,譬喻彰顯真實。

合譬也有兩層。能使人到達一切智,其中的智是果名,稱為行一;第一之說,稱為教一;祕密寶藏,稱為理一,同時也兼得人一。這四個一依本論原次第而立。

誓願安樂行的偈頌共有十四行半,分成兩段:最初四行重頌行法,其次十行半重頌讚歎此經。

最初四行中,第一行越次先重頌行成:常行忍辱,重頌著如來衣成就;哀愍一切,重頌入如來室成就;然後才能演說此經,重頌坐如來座成就。從末世弘經以下三行,才依次重頌修行法;長行所有的境、由、誓三項,偈中都完整重頌。

其次十行半重頌經法難聞。長行有法說、譬喻、合譬,偈中只重頌譬喻與合譬。譬喻先以三行重頌不與珠,再以一行重頌與珠;合譬先以三行半重頌合不與珠,再以三行重頌合與珠。

從佛說自己滅度以後開始的二十三行偈,是本品第三大段,總結行成所得的徵相,勸人修行。它分成三段:最初一行半總結、勸修諸行;其次二十行半舉現、生、後三種果報勸修,也稱為三種障礙清淨;最後一行總結。三障清淨,使現在、來生、後世的惡業滅盡,也就得到現在、來生、後世的殊勝果報。

第一,無憂惱的一行,是報障轉變,轉的是現報。讀誦此經,當下滅除憂惱,是除去苦受的心報;沒有病痛等,是轉變身體的色報。

第二,不生貧窮的半行,是業障轉變,轉的是生報。惡業之因本應招感惡果,現在由經力轉變惡因而得好果;不生貧窮,表示現在持經而不造貧窮之業,來世便不生在卑賤之處。

第三,從眾生樂於見他以下十九行,是煩惱障轉變,轉的是後報。這十九行又分兩段:最初三行分別說貪、瞋、癡三種障礙轉變,後面十六行總說一切障礙轉變。

三種煩惱障中,第一,眾生樂見的一行說貪障轉變。多欲的人受人輕忽,也被欲望障礙而不能生於梵天;欲障轉變以後,便為人所樂見,也有天童前來給使。第二,刀杖不能加害的一行半說瞋障轉變;捨去瞋心,便除去內心的刀箭,進入戰陣,外在刀刃也不能傷害。第三,智慧光明的半行說愚癡障轉變。

八、夢中六位:一念夢相所表的後報

從夢中見到妙事以下十六行,總說一切煩惱障轉變,也屬後報轉變。持經人在現在感得這些夢相,應當知道他過去已久遠成就,如今遇緣而發;其中又有成佛之因、成佛之果等相,都屬未來後報,所以在夢中看見未來後報的徵相。百千萬劫之事在一念夢中顯現,表示妙法不可思議:一中能現無量,無量又不離一。徵相先在夢中出現,後來才當成果。

夢相再分六位,從最初信心直到妙覺示現八相成佛;這些都是如來莊嚴行者,也就是忍辱所得的果報。

第一,最初三行表示夢入十信。其中前二行半是慈悲之報,後半行是正見而無愚癡之報。

第二,從又見諸佛以下六行半,表示夢入十住。其中說證得不退轉智慧而得到授記,可知是進入初住、證得無生而受記之位。

第三,從又見自身在山林以下三句,表示夢修十行,因為在山林修習善法正表十行。

第四,證得諸法實相的一句,表示夢悟十迴向,以中道正觀為此位之義。

第五,深入禪定的半行,表示夢入十地,即在第十地入無垢三昧、金剛定,諸佛出現而摩頂授職。

第六,從諸佛身呈金色以下五行,表示夢入妙覺,夢見示現八相成佛。這裡也保留另一種讀法:可能是初住已能示現八相成佛,仍依前面的位次,寄說究竟覺位。兩種讀法由本論並存,不能把其中一種抹去。

最後一行從後世惡世開始,總結行成。

九、五根兩解、八正四果與五因七因

本論接著解釋五根,先有一組依通常行法說明。信根,是對佛、法、僧三寶得到堅固信心,一切事物都不能破壞它;精進根,是得到四正勤;念根,是得到四念處觀,以勤勉方便調伏貪著與憂愁;定根,是得到四禪;慧根,是理解四諦而如實了知。

五根另有一組全都依如來發心來說。信根,是對如來發菩提心所得的清淨信心;精進根,是在如來之所發心而生起的精進;念根,是在如來發心而生起的正念;定根,是在如來之所生起的三昧;慧根,是在如來之所生起的智慧。這兩組解釋各自完整,不可混成一組。

八正道是沙門所行之道,也是沙門之法。使貪、瞋等一切煩惱滅盡,是沙門之義;四種果位則是沙門果。

說到夢,從須陀洹直到辟支佛都有夢,只有佛不夢,因為佛已沒有疑心,也沒有習氣。

夢可由五件事而生:疑心、分別、平日學習、眼前所發生的事、非人前來相告。另依曾經歷、聽聞、看見以及各種病患等,又說有七件事而生夢。五因與七因是兩套原有說法,不可把兩數相加另造十二因。

十、夢與眠的四組問答

第一問:現在的意識尚且不能直接看見顏色形象,夢中的意識怎能見色?回答:夢中所現都是過去曾經看見、曾經聽聞,因此由想念而現;又可能是吉祥或不吉祥的徵相。

第二問:夢中沒有神通,也沒有宿命智,怎能看見未來世的事?回答:這不是願智所緣的境界,而是由同類事例推知。過去有人曾作這樣的夢,後來得到這樣的果;如今依相同的夢與果作比類,所以能推知。

第三問:誰會睡眠?回答:五道眾生與中陰身都有睡眠;在胎中諸根已經具足的眾生也會睡眠;一直到佛,祂也會睡眠。

第四問:睡眠通常屬於愚癡,又是覆蓋心識的障礙,說佛也睡眠怎麼能通?回答:佛起現前的睡眠,只是為了調養身體,不是被障礙覆蓋,也不是愚癡之眠。

I. The Peaceful Practice of Speech: First Restraining Four Verbal Faults

Second is the peaceful practice of speech, which is also divided into prose and verse. The prose has two parts: first it marks the heading, and then it explains the practice. The practice is further divided into restraint and contemplation.

There are four restraints. First, one does not speak of faults in people or scriptures. Listeners may incur faults on account of a teaching, but how could the Dharma spoken by the Buddha itself be said to have faults? The seven expedient teachings were spoken by the Buddha in accord with sentient beings’ inclinations. Although called teachings of incomplete meaning, they remain the Buddha’s expedient teachings. Attacking these teachings will distress the people who receive them, which is not the character of a peaceful practice.

Second, one does not disparage. One may not rely on one’s own perfect practice to scorn partial approaches, nor honor only the real while belittling the provisional.

Third, one does not speak of others’ strengths and weaknesses. The sutra first refers generally to all people and then specifically names śrāvakas. People dislike hearing their faults discussed, so one must not speak of their weaknesses. Praising someone to their face may also make another person present feel condemned, so one must not speak of strengths. For example, one may not praise Zhao’s strengths before Zhang, causing Zhang to think that Zhao’s strengths are being used to mock Zhang’s weaknesses. Nor may one speak of Zhao’s weaknesses before Zhang, because Zhang will think: if this person can condemn Zhao behind his back before me, he can also condemn me behind my back before Zhao. For this reason, one stops speaking of both good and bad.

On not speaking of strengths and weaknesses, the treatise also cites the first chapter of the Rizang: reduce sleep during the first, middle, and last watches of night; diligently sit in meditation, recite scriptures, and cultivate the Way; turn away from birth and death and toward the road to nirvāṇa; do not speak of others’ shortcomings or proclaim one’s own strengths; remain humble and deferential without exalting oneself; be content with clothing and food, diligently cultivate ascetic practices, and avoid negligence; bind the mind to reflection and do not let it race outward; arouse loving-kindness and compassion for all sentient beings. It also cites the practice of emptiness taught in a sutra: recite it oneself and teach others to recite it; do not slander others, speak their faults, or proclaim one’s own strengths.

The capacities of śrāvakas are not yet fixed. Praising the Two Vehicles may cause some to retreat from the Great Vehicle and adopt the Lesser. Condemning the Two Vehicles may cause them to lose faith in both Great and Lesser, leaving them with neither. Not praising or condemning does not mean failing to distinguish the meaning of Dharma, but refusing to sever or wound another’s capacity to receive Dharma through praise and blame.

Fourth, one does not produce resentment or aversion. Thinking that a person or teaching obstructs one’s path is resentment; thinking that another is base and inferior is aversion. As soon as the mechanism of mind moves, speech follows from the mouth. To cut off the source of fault-finding, one must prevent even resentment and aversion from arising.

II. The Peaceful Practice of Speech: Contemplating Emptiness Without Opposing People or Violating Dharma

From “skillfully cultivating such a peaceful mind” onward comes the gate of contemplation. One should contemplate all dharmas as empty, appropriate nothing, and not rigidly cling. Because one neither opposes people’s intentions nor violates the true character of Dharma, one does not answer difficult questions with Lesser-Vehicle teachings but explains only through the Great Vehicle.

Here it is still necessary to distinguish whether the other person’s capacity has been seen. If one knows that the person lacks a Great-Vehicle capacity, teaching the Lesser Vehicle can bring expedient benefit. If one has not seen that the person lacks such a capacity but nevertheless teaches the Lesser, one may obstruct that person’s Great-Vehicle connection. When the capacity is equally indiscernible, teaching only the Great Vehicle entails no fault.

The verse of the peaceful practice of speech has sixteen and a half lines in three sections: the first two lines repeat the heading, the next nine and a half repeat the practice, and the last five teach the accomplishment of practice.

The first two lines expand the prose’s general statement of peaceful practice into three forms of practice. Wishing the listener before one to obtain the secure path and fruit is the meaning of entering the Tathāgata’s chamber. Preparing a seat in a pure place is the meaning of sitting on the Tathāgata’s seat. Anointing the body with oil and washing away dust is the meaning of donning the Tathāgata’s robe. These three dharmas together guide verbal karma and are therefore called the peaceful practice of speech.

The nine and a half lines beginning with taking one’s place on the Dharma seat have two sections: five and a half lines first repeat restraint, and four lines then repeat contemplation. All four earlier restraints are repeated here.

First, explaining in response to another’s question is half a line repeating not disparaging others. A mind that disparages does not genuinely teach in response to a question.

Second, the two and a half lines from a bhikṣu coming to ask through answering according to meaning repeat not speaking of strengths and weaknesses: one answers only according to meaning and does not discuss whether people are good or bad. Answering according to meaning further divides into what can and cannot be answered. When two parties challenge one another through questions and answers, compare relative strength, and each can recognize victory and defeat, this is the speech of the wise and can be answered. To exercise power wantonly and say that anyone who dares dissent will be executed is the speech of a king and should not be met with a contest for victory. To know neither strengths and weaknesses nor right and wrong and seek only to win is the speech of a fool; one likewise should not enter that contention.

Third, the line and a half from teaching through causes, conditions, and similes through causing people to enter the Buddha Way further repeats not delighting in speaking of faults in people or teachings. Speaking another’s faults arouses poisonous thoughts in them. By not speaking faults, one allows them to become joyful, arouse resolve, and enter the Buddha Way, for the Buddha Way arises from joy.

Fourth, the line on removing indolent thoughts repeats freedom from resentment and aversion. When resentment and aversion arise, indolence, sorrow, and affliction follow. Teaching Dharma with loving-kindness and without resentment or aversion enables diligence without sorrow. The prose speaks of the four as stopping evil, while the verse speaks of them as actively practicing good.

The following four lines repeat the gate of contemplation. The prose says to answer only through the Great Vehicle, while the verse says constantly to teach the unsurpassed Way day and night. The prose says to enable others to attain knowledge of all modes, while the verse says to vow that they accomplish the Buddha Way.

The last five lines teach accomplishment of the peaceful practice of speech. The first line marks that accomplishment. The next two say that when jealousy and other faults are absent within, external difficulties do not arise, just as flies do not gather where there is no foul-smelling object. The next line says that a wise person who practices accordingly possesses wholesome dharmas within, and the practice is therefore accomplished. “As I explained above” means the prose when speaking of freedom from faults within, and the verse when speaking of wholesome qualities present within. The last line measures that person’s merit.

III. The Peaceful Practice of Mind: Four Restraints and Four Contemplations That Reverse Them

Third is the peaceful practice of mind, which also has prose and verse. The prose has three sections: heading, explanation of the practice, and conclusion. The practice again treats restraint first and contemplation afterward.

There are four restraints: no jealousy or crooked flattery, no disparaging abuse, no disturbing others, and no contentious attachment. Two-Vehicle practitioners seek to leave birth and death quickly and first remove desire; bodhisattvas first remove anger and wrong views. Jealousy is a stain of anger, while flattery and crookedness are stains of wrong views. Jealousy violates loving-kindness and compassion and is not a method for teaching others; deception and flattery violate wisdom and are not a method of self-cultivation. If wisdom is obstructed, how can one seek the Buddha Way above? If compassion is hindered, how can one transform sentient beings below? Bodhisattvas practicing peaceful ease must therefore abandon jealousy and flattery above all.

Second, one must not disparage or abuse. One may not use the perfect practice to rebuke someone cultivating the Distinct teaching. If one knows the person’s capacity, admonition may be possible; if one does not know it, one must not scold, because the person may retreat from wholesome roots.

Third, one must not disturb others. One likewise may not use the perfect practice to rebuke someone cultivating the Shared teaching. If the other person originally lacks a Great-Vehicle capacity, forcing the perfect practice upon them opposes their mind and causes disturbance. The Shared practice already cultivated has been condemned, while the Perfect has not yet been understood; first doubt and then regret arise, and both Great and Lesser are lost. “Far from the Way” means that the course is circuitous and disturbs a practitioner of the Distinct teaching. “Cannot attain” means sinking into emptiness and grasping realization, which disturbs a practitioner of the Shared teaching. “Indolent” means rejecting birth and death; the Lotus of Compassion calls Lesser-Vehicle practitioners indolent.

Fourth, one must not contend through partial attachment. This appears by reversal in the contemplation of teaching equally: when one clings to one side and argues with others, one cannot teach equally in accord with sentient beings’ capacities.

Contemplation also has four items, each reversing one of the four evils above. First, arouse great compassion for all sentient beings, reversing jealousy and flattery. Second, regard the Tathāgata as a loving father, reversing disparagement and abuse. Everyone seeking the Buddha Way is a person engaged in learning; one should respect students as one respects the Buddha and must not disparage them. The sutra speaks of the tathāgatas in the plural, extending through past, present, and future; a student presently seeking the Buddha Way is a future tathāgata.

Third, regard bodhisattvas as great teachers, reversing disturbance. In principle, practitioners of all three vehicles are bodhisattvas. They possess the virtue of teaching and guiding sentient beings and are their teachers. One should therefore regard them as great teachers and not speak their shortcomings.

Fourth, teach Dharma equally, reversing contention. Equality breaks partial attachment and contention, but it does not mean speaking equally much or equally little to everyone. It means measuring whether listeners’ capacities are sharp or dull and teaching neither too much nor too little.

The conclusion of the peaceful practice of mind has two points. Because the four evils have been restrained, evil cannot be inflicted upon the practitioner, and no one can disturb them. Because the four contemplations have been cultivated, excellent people gather and the practitioner obtains good fellow students.

The verse on the peaceful practice of mind has six lines. The first five repeat restraint and contemplation, each of which has four meanings; the last repeats accomplishment of practice. The counts correspond before and after and may not be collapsed into a vague goodwill.

IV. The Peaceful Practice of Vows: First Distinguishing the Fields, Then the Reasons for Arousing Vow

Fourth is the peaceful practice of vows, with prose followed by verse. The prose first teaches the practice and then praises how difficult the sutra is to hear. The practice has three levels: heading, principal teaching of the practice, and conclusion.

The principal teaching has three parts. First, it marks the fields toward which vows are directed. Second, it explains the reasons for arousing vows. Third, it formally establishes the vows.

The fields of vow first divide into loving-kindness and compassion. The field of the vow of loving-kindness includes all who have previously aroused an expedient resolve. Those not yet beyond the three realms are called householders, while those who have exhausted the shared delusions are called renunciants; together these include two kinds of Two-Vehicle practitioners and three kinds of bodhisattvas. They still possess ignorance and could also be objects of great compassion. Yet because they have all already aroused resolve and accord with the vow of loving-kindness, one should give them the joy of the perfect path and perfect fruit. Thus the sutra says to arouse great loving-kindness toward them.

The field of the vow of compassion is persons who are not bodhisattvas and includes all who have never aroused an expedient resolve. They do not turn toward expedients at all, much less the real. This field includes all beings within the three realms. They too need joy, but because they wander without limit, they now correspond most immediately to the compassionate vow of rescue; the causes and fruits of their offenses should be removed. Thus the sutra says to arouse great compassion.

Next come the reasons for arousing vows. The first is the reason for loving-kindness: some cherish the Lesser Vehicle, take the Buddha’s expedient teaching as ultimate reality, and cannot enter the perfect path, thereby suffering a great loss. This great loss is the reason for arousing the vow of loving-kindness.

The second is the reason for compassion. Those who have not aroused a partial or perfect resolve have neither heard, known, nor awakened to either the partial or perfect paths. Regarding the partial path, not hearing means lacking the wisdom of hearing; not knowing means lacking the wisdom of thinking; not awakening means lacking the wisdom of cultivation. The same three wisdoms are also absent regarding the perfect path. Why are all three absent? Because they have not asked, they have not heard; because they do not believe, they do not know; because they do not understand, they do not cultivate. They possess none of the three wisdoms on either the partial or perfect side and neither the provisional nor the real. They are profoundly worthy of compassion, and this is the reason for arousing the vow of compassion.

V. Formally Making the Vow and the Threefold Accomplishment of Practice

Next the vow is formally made. Although these beings do not ask or believe in this sutra, the bodhisattva does not make a vow in terms of a partial path, but seeks only to give them the three wisdoms of the perfect path. The bodhisattva therefore vows: when I attain unsurpassed complete awakening, wherever they may be, I shall guide them through the powers of supernormal ability and wisdom and cause them to abide in this Dharma.

Vow, awakening, wisdom, and supernormal power are all obtained through cultivating the peaceful practices. Deep contemplation of the Tathāgata’s seat brings the power of wisdom, adorned with four kinds of eloquence, and enables one to rescue beings through wisdom. Deep contemplation of the Tathāgata’s chamber and robe brings a vast, excellent, quiescent power by which one manifests many forms of deportment without entering the concentration of cessation. Supernormal powers are adorned by merit and first move beings through concentration; wisdom then rescues them.

From the Buddha’s next address to Mañjuśrī onward comes the conclusion on accomplishment of practice, in three levels.

First, the general conclusion says that there are no faults, which is accomplishment of practice. How is the practice accomplished? Establishing the great vow accomplishes the practice of entering the Tathāgata’s chamber. Knowing that the fourfold assembly has lost the perfect path accomplishes the practice of sitting on the Tathāgata’s seat. Binding one’s mind through vow so that it does not become indolent accomplishes the practice of donning the Tathāgata’s robe. Only when all three practices are established can practice be called accomplished. Having no faults means that because loving-kindness and compassion are accomplished, there is no fault of the stain of anger; because the Tathāgata’s robe is accomplished, there is no indolence; because the Tathāgata’s seat is accomplished, there is no crooked flattery.

Second, the accomplishment of loving-kindness and compassion is concluded separately. Because loving-kindness is accomplished, bhikṣus, bhikṣuṇīs, male and female lay disciples, people, and devas are gathered to make offerings and hear Dharma. Because vow is accomplished, the Buddha’s supernormal protection is elicited and the devas also guard the practitioner. Because the Tathāgata’s seat is accomplished, listeners become joyful.

Third, the treatise explains why the practice of vow can be accomplished. Even the buddhas of past, present, and future protect this sutra; how much more should the devas protect its practitioner?

VI. Why the Sutra Is Difficult to Hear: Six Levels of the Simile of Not Giving the Jewel

The following passage praises how difficult the sutra is to hear, first through direct teaching and then through simile. The direct teaching has two points: it was not explicitly taught in the past and therefore could not formerly be obtained; only today can it be heard. The simile also has two points: not giving the jewel represents its not having been explicitly taught in the past; giving the jewel represents its finally being heard today. Each simile has both an opening of the simile and an application of its meaning.

The simile of not giving the jewel has six levels. First, a powerful wheel-turning king subdues countries through might. Second, lesser kings refuse his command. Third, the wheel-turning king sends various armies to punish them. Fourth, the king sees that his soldiers have earned merit in battle and rejoices. Fifth, he awards various things according to their merit. Sixth, he alone does not give away the bright jewel in his topknot.

The wheel-turning king represents the Tathāgata transforming the world, while subduing the countries represents confronting the objects of the aggregates, elements, and sense fields. The lesser kings represent afflictions and the like that have not yet been subdued by the uncontaminated Dharma and are therefore called disobedient to the king’s command.

The armies also follow a sequence. Methods among the seven worthy stages represent the vanguard; methods among stream-enterers and once-returners represent the next army; methods among nonreturners and arhats represent the rear army. The bandits to be defeated are the eighty-four thousand combinations of greed, anger, delusion, and equal shares of all three. The officers and troops that defeat them are the eighty-four thousand Dharma gates. The king’s delight upon seeing the army’s merit constitutes the fourth level.

In the fifth level, each award according to merit has its sequence. A field represents samādhi and a house represents wisdom. Villages represent the first and second fruits, a town the third fruit, and a city nirvāṇa. Clothing represents wholesome dharmas such as shame and forbearance; bodily ornaments represent aids to the Way; the various seven treasures represent the factors of awakening and related dharmas; elephants, horses, and vehicles represent the Two Vehicles’ knowledges of exhaustion and nonarising; servants represent supernormal powers; and people represent the contaminated wholesome dharmas attained. These awards and their corresponding meanings must retain the order given by the treatise.

At the sixth level, the jewel is still not given. A capacity for escaping segmented birth and death counts only as lesser merit; a capacity for escaping transformational birth and death counts as great merit. If the jewel in the topknot were suddenly given without great merit, the ministers would be astonished. This represents suddenly teaching this sutra before sentient beings’ Great-Vehicle capacities have moved: Two-Vehicle practitioners would doubt and bodhisattvas would be astonished. Each of the six levels has a corresponding application and must be applied in sequence without skipping an item.

VII. Giving the Jewel, the Fourteen-and-a-Half-Line Verse, and the Chapter’s Twenty-Three-Line Conclusion

The simile of giving the jewel has two points: great merit is first established, and then the jewel is given. The jewel’s brightness represents middle-way wisdom and its roundness represents permanence. Its position on the crown represents what the ultimate fruit honors; its concealment in the topknot represents the real covered by expedients. Unbinding the topknot represents opening the provisional, and giving the jewel represents revealing the real.

The application also has two levels. Causing someone to reach all wisdom uses wisdom as the name of the fruit and is called the one practice. “The foremost teaching” is the one teaching. “The secret treasury” is the one principle and also includes the one person. These four ones retain the treatise’s original sequence.

The verse of the peaceful practice of vows has fourteen and a half lines in two sections: the first four repeat the practice, and the next ten and a half repeat the praise of the sutra.

Within the first four, the first line first repeats accomplishment of practice out of sequence. Constantly practicing forbearance repeats accomplishment in donning the Tathāgata’s robe; pitying all beings repeats accomplishment in entering the Tathāgata’s chamber; only then being able to expound the sutra repeats accomplishment in sitting on the Tathāgata’s seat. The following three lines on transmitting the sutra in the final age then repeat the cultivation of the practice in order. The fields, reasons, and vows found in the prose are all repeated in the verse.

The next ten and a half lines repeat the difficulty of hearing the Dharma. The prose contains direct teaching, simile, and application; the verse repeats only simile and application. The simile first uses three lines to repeat not giving the jewel, then one line to repeat giving it. The application first uses three and a half lines to apply not giving the jewel, then three lines to apply giving it.

The twenty-three-line verse beginning with the Buddha’s statement concerning the time after his extinction is the third major section of the chapter. It concludes with the signs elicited by accomplishment of practice and exhorts cultivation. It has three sections: the first one and a half lines conclude and exhort the four practices; the next twenty and a half use three retributions to exhort, also called the purification of three obstructions; the last line concludes. Purification of the three obstructions exhausts evil karma of the present, next, and later lives, bringing excellent retributions in the present, next, and later lives.

First, the one line on freedom from sorrow is the transformation of the retributive obstruction and transforms present retribution. Reciting this sutra removes present sorrow and affliction, thereby eliminating the mental retribution of painful feeling; freedom from illness and the like transforms bodily retribution.

Second, the half line on not being born poor is the transformation of karmic obstruction and transforms next-life retribution. The cause of evil karma should produce an evil fruit, but the sutra’s power transforms the evil cause and brings a good fruit. Not being born poor means that one who upholds the sutra does not create the karma of poverty now and will not be born in a lowly station in the next life.

Third, the nineteen lines beginning with sentient beings delighting to see the practitioner are the transformation of the afflictive obstruction and transform later retribution. The nineteen lines have two sections: the first three teach separately the transformation of the obstructions of greed, anger, and delusion, while the following sixteen teach generally the transformation of all obstructions.

Of the three afflictive obstructions, first, one line on sentient beings delighting to see the practitioner teaches the transformation of the obstruction of greed. A person with many desires is slighted by others and is obstructed by desire from rebirth in the Brahmā heaven. When the obstruction of desire is transformed, people delight to see that person and heavenly youths serve them. Second, the line and a half on weapons being unable to harm teaches the transformation of the obstruction of anger. Abandoning anger removes inner blades and arrows, while outer weapons cannot injure one even when one enters battle. Third, the half line on the light of wisdom teaches the transformation of the obstruction of delusion.

VIII. Six Stages in Dreams: Later Retribution Disclosed in a Single Dream-Thought

The sixteen lines beginning with seeing wondrous events in dreams teach generally the transformation of all afflictive obstructions and also belong to the transformation of later retribution. When one who upholds the sutra experiences these dream signs now, one should know that they were accomplished long ago and are now disclosed upon encountering conditions. Signs of the causes and fruits of buddhahood also belong to future later retribution, so the person sees signs of future retribution in dreams. Events of hundreds of thousands of myriads of kalpas appear in one dream-thought, showing the inconceivability of the Wondrous Dharma: the immeasurable appears within one and the one remains within the immeasurable. The sign appears first, and the fruit will be accomplished later.

The dream signs further divide into six stages, from initial faith through wondrous awakening and the manifestation of the eight marks of buddhahood. All are ways in which the Tathāgata adorns the practitioner and are the retribution of forbearance.

First, the initial three lines show entry in dreams into the ten faiths. The first two and a half are the retribution of compassion, and the last half is the retribution of right view free of delusion.

Second, the six and a half lines beginning with again seeing buddhas show entry in dreams into the ten abodes. The statement that one realizes irreversible wisdom and receives prediction shows entry into the first abode, realization of nonarising, and the stage of receiving prediction.

Third, the three phrases beginning with again seeing oneself in a mountain forest show cultivation in dreams of the ten practices, because cultivating wholesome dharmas in a mountain forest represents the ten practices.

Fourth, the one phrase on realizing the true mark of all dharmas shows awakening in dreams to the ten dedications, whose meaning at this stage is right contemplation of the middle way.

Fifth, the half line on entering deeply into concentration shows entry in dreams into the ten grounds: on the tenth ground one enters the stainless samādhi and diamond concentration, the buddhas appear, touch one’s crown, and confer office.

Sixth, the five lines beginning with the golden bodies of the buddhas show entry in dreams into wondrous awakening and the manifestation of the eight marks of buddhahood. Another reading is also preserved: this may show that the first abode can already manifest the eight marks of buddhahood, while the preceding sequence provisionally speaks of ultimate awakening. The treatise preserves both readings, and neither may be erased.

The final line beginning with the evil age to come concludes accomplishment of practice.

IX. Two Explanations of the Five Faculties, the Eightfold Right Path and Four Fruits, and Five and Seven Causes

The treatise next explains the five faculties, first according to ordinary practices. The faculty of faith is unshakable faith in the Three Jewels of Buddha, Dharma, and Saṅgha. The faculty of diligence is attainment of the four right efforts. The faculty of mindfulness is contemplation of the four applications of mindfulness, with diligent skill used to subdue greed and sorrow. The faculty of concentration is attainment of the four dhyānas. The faculty of wisdom is understanding the four truths and knowing them as they are.

A separate explanation treats all five faculties in terms of arousing resolve toward the Tathāgata. The faculty of faith is the pure faith obtained by arousing the aspiration to awakening toward the Tathāgata. The faculty of diligence is the diligence that arises from the resolve directed toward the Tathāgata. The faculty of mindfulness is the mindfulness that arises from that resolve. The faculty of concentration is the samādhi that arises toward the Tathāgata. The faculty of wisdom is the wisdom that arises toward the Tathāgata. The two explanations are each complete and may not be blended into one.

The eightfold right path is the path practiced by renunciants and is also the Dharma of renunciants. Exhausting greed, anger, and all afflictions is the meaning of a renunciant, while the four stages are the fruits of renunciation.

Regarding dreams, everyone from a stream-enterer through a pratyekabuddha dreams. Only a buddha does not, because a buddha has neither doubt nor habitual residues.

Dreams may arise from five things: doubt, discrimination, habitual learning, present events, and a nonhuman being coming to speak. A separate account teaches seven things, including what has been experienced, heard, and seen and various illnesses. Five and seven are two inherited accounts and may not be added to invent twelve causes.

X. Four Questions and Answers on Dreaming and Sleeping

First question: present consciousness cannot directly see visible forms, so how can the mental faculty see them in a dream? Answer: everything that appears in a dream has previously been seen or heard and thus appears through imagination; it may also be an auspicious or inauspicious sign.

Second question: a dream contains neither supernormal knowledge nor knowledge of past lives, so how can it show events in a future life? Answer: this is not an object of knowledge born of resolve, but something known through inference from similar cases. Other people have had such dreams and later experienced such results; one can infer by comparing the same kinds of dreams and results.

Third question: who sleeps? Answer: beings in the five paths and in the intermediate state sleep; fetuses whose faculties are complete also sleep; even the Buddha sleeps.

Fourth question: sleep ordinarily belongs to delusion and is a covering that obstructs consciousness, so how can it be said that the Buddha sleeps? Answer: the Buddha manifests sleep only to regulate the body; it is neither sleep under a covering nor the sleep of delusion.

釋從地踊出品Emerging from the Earth

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、五番解釋品名

老師嚴正、道法尊貴,弟子鞠躬敬奉;如來一聲呼喚,四方菩薩奔湧而出,所以稱為〈從地踊出品〉。

佛在過去、現在、未來三世化導眾生,所給予的利益沒有邊際;一輪明月映現萬千水影,誰能思量得盡?佛召喚過去所化的弟子來示現於今,這些弟子弘揚此經以利益未來,所以稱為〈從地踊出品〉。

虛空湛然寂靜,沒有早也沒有晚;有些人卻執著佛的近迹,因而不明白佛的遠本。佛召喚往昔的弟子示現於今日,破除執近、顯出遠本,所以稱為〈從地踊出品〉。

在寂滅道場示現始成正覺的是年少的父親,在常寂光土久已修行的是年老的兒子;佛顯示藥力,使大眾全都知曉,所以稱為〈從地踊出品〉。

經文說『這些菩薩從何處來?因什麼因緣而聚集?』如今以上述諸義解釋品名,正是顯出世界、為人、對治、第一義四悉檀的因緣之解,所以稱為〈從地踊出品〉。

二、全經後半的總科

從這裡以下是一大段,也就是第二段:開啟佛以師的身分所示現的近迹,顯出佛地的久遠之本。

這一大段的文字分成三部分:第一,從這裡以下到『你們自然會因此而聽聞』為止,是序段;第二,從『那時釋迦牟尼佛告訴彌勒』以下,到〈分別功德品〉中彌勒所說十九行偈為止,是正說段;第三,偈頌以後的十一品半,是流通段。

三、序文分踊出與疑問

序文分兩部分:一是踊出,二是疑問。

踊出又分三段:一、他方菩薩請求弘經,二、如來不許,三、下方菩薩踊出。

他方菩薩聽說弘通此經福德廣大,都想發願住在這個世界宣揚,所以請求佛允許。

如來制止他們,共有三個理由。第一,你們各自都有自己的職任,若住在這個國土,就荒廢了那邊的利益。第二,他方菩薩與此土眾生結緣不深,即使想要宣揚傳授,也必定沒有大的利益。第三,如果允許他們,就不能召喚下方菩薩;下方菩薩若不來,近迹便不能破除,遠本便不能顯出。因為這三個理由,如來制止了他們。

召喚下方菩薩前來,也有三個理由:他們是我的弟子,理應弘揚我的法;他們結緣深廣,能夠遍利此土、遍利分身諸土、遍利他方諸土;又能藉此開近顯遠。所以制止他方而召喚下方。

四、經家敘相五事

從『佛說這話時』以下,是第三段下方踊出,分兩部分:一是經家敘述所見之相,二是說明問訊。兩部分各有五項。

最初五項是:一、踊出,二、身相,三、住處,四、聞命,五、眷屬。

所謂住處,就是常寂光土。常,就是常德;寂,就是樂德;光,就是淨德與我德。這是四德祕密之藏,正是他們的住處;他們以無所住的方式住在祕藏之中。

所謂下方,是法性的深淵之底、玄妙宗致的極地,所以說是下方。處在下方,就不屬於此界;住在空中,就不屬於彼界;非此非彼,就是中道。從此界出來而不在上界、不在此界之下,不上不下而住在空中,也是中道。

前來的緣由是:因聽到命令而來,為弘法而來,為破執而來,為顯本而來——都如前面所說。

至於所帶的眷屬,若依人情去看,會覺得領六萬、五萬恒河沙眾的算多,領三個、兩個、一個的算少,單身一人的算孤獨。但若依經文去尋,六萬五萬反而算少,單身一人反而算多——經文說單身獨處的,其數目更超過前面所說。

若依法門來看,每一位都是導師的德,能引導眾人到達寶所。應當知道:一個人並不孤獨,六萬也不算多。一就是一道清淨,二就是定與慧,三就是戒定慧,四就是四諦,五就是五眼,六就是六度。每一度具足十法界,每一界各有十法,十就有百,百就具足千,配十善就有萬;一度具足萬行,六度就是六萬法門。多不算多,一不算少;非多非少而又是多是少。

五、問訊五分與兩重不可思議

從『這些菩薩從地踊出』以下,是第二部分問訊,分五項:一、三業供養,二、陳述問訊之辭,三、佛答安樂,四、偈頌隨喜,五、如來述歎。

先說三業供養。經歷五十小劫,大眾卻覺得只像半日;四眾能夠遍見一切菩薩。這是隱去長時而顯現短時,又藉佛的神力使狹小的視野見到廣大的境界,兩者都是不可思議。

『拜遶』屬身業,『讚法』屬口業,『瞻仰』屬意業。至於『五十小劫』與『半日』,這是時節上的不可思議。如來所見不落長短二相;下方菩薩當面不斷稱揚,如來默然常受他們的讚歎。有解悟的人即短而見長,所以覺得是五十小劫;有迷惑的人即長而見短,所以覺得只像半日。這正為下文本迹之說預作引子。如來未曾開顯之前,人們昧於本而執著迹;佛若開顯,便能由悟近而通達遠,也就知道不可思議是同一件事。

四眾能夠遍見菩薩,也是不可思議。肉眼、天眼所見本來不遠,而如今所見充滿虛空。看見雨勢猛烈,就知道龍力廣大;看見花開繁盛,就知道池水深廣;看見應現的身充滿虛空,就知道真身遍滿法界。

最初,標舉四位導師。

六、陳問辭與如來具答

其次,陳述問訊之辭。問又分兩部分:長行與偈頌。長行有兩項:一是問如來是否安樂,二是問眾生是否易於度化。

只舉出四個人,是要比擬開、示、悟、入四十個階位。就像《華嚴經》只舉法慧、德林、金幢、金藏四位菩薩宣說四十位一樣。

第三,如來完整作答。安樂與易度兩件事互相成就:眾生易度,佛便安樂;佛安樂,眾生便易度。

易度分兩類。第一類是根性銳利、德行深厚的人。他們世世以來常受大乘教化,一見到我的身、一聽到我所說,就稟受《華嚴》而契入如來智慧;果實成熟便容易落下,這是眾生易度。第二類是根性遲鈍、德行淺薄的人。他們世世以來不曾受大乘教化,佛為這種人必須開出鈍根之教、宣說漸次法門,以三藏教、方等、《般若》調伏他們,也使這些人今日聽聞《法華》而契入佛慧。比起前一類雖然較難,對佛而言仍然很容易;佛知道他們的機宜,方便施設恰到好處,只須稍加塗敷熨帖,所得的慧悟仍然相同。

現在略舉十重意義來解釋。第一是始見與今見,第二是開合與不開合,第三是豎廣與橫略,第四是本一迹多、迹共本獨,第五是加說與不加說,第六是變土與不變土,第七是多處與不多處,第八是斥奪與不斥奪,第九是直顯實與開權顯實,第十是利根初熟與鈍根後熟。

第一,始見與今見:初成道時所見名為始見,法華會上久後真實所見名為今見。第二,日光照高山便宣說頓教,不開也不合;為不能契入的人開出頓教而宣說漸教,以五味調伏,使漸次歸於頓。第三,頓教直下豎入而入於法界,所以說豎廣;不經歷方便,所以說橫略。如今經歷五味就是橫廣,得入佛慧也是豎廣。第四,一朵蓮臺所以說本一,千片花葉所以說迹多;迹與眾經相同所以說共,本與眾經相異所以說獨。第五,《華嚴》加被四位菩薩宣說四十位,本經則是佛自說開示悟入,不加被他人。第六,花王世界不變,所以說不變;經中兩度變化土田,所以說變土。第七,《華嚴》七處八會所以說多處,本經在耆闍崛山、遠處虛空,所以說不多處。第八,滅去化城、改換客作之身,所以說斥奪;《華嚴》沒有這樣的事,所以說不斥奪。第九,行於大直道名為直顯實,決了聲聞之法名為開權顯實。第十,根利緣熟的人最初就契入佛慧,根鈍後熟的人今日才契入佛慧。

機緣所宜不同,略分十種差異;至於一切種智與法界,則平等而沒有差別。所以經文說『一見到我的身、聽到我所說,就都信受而入如來智慧,只除了先前修習小乘的人』。今日在此經中契入佛慧,明文就在這裡,不必疑惑。

諸師見到機緣不同,就順著機緣作出不同的解釋,迷惑而不知返還,離道愈來愈遠。若能認清道理相同,就像千輛車走在同一條轍上,佛慧並無差別。

舊有一種說法:《華嚴》是了義、滿字、常住,《法華》是不了義、非滿非常。如今用這段經文來對照:如果最初契入的是了義,今日契入的是不了義,那麼最初契入的是佛慧,今日契入的就不是佛慧了。若佛慧既然相等,了義也就相等,滿字與常住也全都如此。

地論師稱《華嚴》為圓宗、稱《法華》為不真宗,如今也用這段經文來對照。

七、領解隨喜與如來述歎

第四,菩薩領解而生隨喜。能發問的,就是《華嚴》中的四位大士、《法華》中舍利弗的三次請問,都是能問的人。所問的,就是問佛的智慧。

第五,如來述歎。這與發問大不相同:發問的一方是隨喜。能發問的人都是菩薩,以及他們所化度的人聽聞之後信受奉行,我們因此隨喜。如來述歎能化度的人生起隨喜,這是什麼意思呢?原來能發問的人都是古佛,你們既能隨喜,就已經是如來了。菩薩隨喜的是他們的迹,如來述歎的是他們的本;這也暗中表出壽量之義。

八、疑問序與此土他土二疑

從『那時彌勒以及八萬大士』以下,是第二部分疑問序。

彌勒說:從寂滅道場以來、到今日這一座法會為止,十方大士前來聚會不曾間斷,雖然多得無法計算,我以補處菩薩的智力全都見到、全都知道;然而在這批大眾之中,我竟一個也不認得。而且我遊化十方、覲奉諸佛,諸佛的大眾我都熟悉;就我所經歷過的地方來看,這些人也都不認得。無論說他們從哪裡來、往哪裡去,這樣推尋都不認得。

又,那些大士是先前已經進達的前輩,彌勒是後來的末學;後輩不知前輩,所以不認得。又,那些大士本來安住實相之底而應現十方,另行教化,他們所有的真身應身都不是彌勒的境界,所以不認得。又,佛託付弘經而召喚諸大士,大士因為聽到師父的命令而來,其中暗含壽量之義,不是在座大眾所能知道,所以說不認得。

這是依世界、為人、對治、第一義四悉檀來解釋疑問序。

疑問分兩部分:一是此土菩薩的疑,二是他土菩薩的疑。此土之疑又分兩層:最初是長行的疑念;其次是偈頌,共十九行半,是正式發問,又分五段。最初一行一句,問從何處來;其次從『因什麼因緣』以下一行三句,問因什麼因緣而來;其次從『一一諸菩薩』以下九行,敘述他們的數量;其次從『這些大威德』以下兩行,問他們的老師是誰;其次從『這樣的菩薩神通』以下五行半,是結請,又分五段:最初兩句是結歎;其次從『四方地』以下兩行,請佛答覆來處;其次從『我在此眾中』以下一行,請佛答覆來緣;其次從『今日這場大眾』以下一行半,是大會共同請問;其次從『無量德』以下兩句,請佛答覆師主是誰。

第二,他方菩薩之疑:分身佛的眷屬橫遍十方,與彌勒同樣生疑;兩土都不知道佛的本地,佛想顯示成道極其久遠,於是各自向佛陳述疑問,佛都按下不答而等待彌勒。

九、正說之首:誡許與四德

從『那時釋迦牟尼佛告訴彌勒』以下,是第二段正說。文分兩部分:先長行,次偈頌;長行先誡後許,然後正說。

長行先是述說讚歎;其次是誡,誡勿散亂、勿懈怠、勿退轉;其次是許,標舉果地智慧——果智就是如來知見,也就是知見的妙果;其次開示能化教的人,就是『宣示』。

『自在神力』指過去利益眾生,『師子奮迅』指現在十方分身所到之處。也有人說奮迅是將要向前的姿態,這表示未來常住利益眾生之相。『大勢威猛』指未來利益眾生。也有人以此為現在震動十方,隨各人的意思去用罷了;還是依經文次第來讀較好。

另外我私下認為:『如來自在』就是我德,『神通』就是樂德,『師子奮迅』——奮迅除去垢染就是淨德,『大勢威猛』指未來利益眾生就是常德。這是點出四德之意。

四行偈中,最初三句重頌三誡,其後三行一句重頌許諾。最初一句重頌標舉智慧之果,其次三行重頌三世。

十、略開近顯遠與有底散三昧

從『那時世尊』以下,是第二段,也就是正說段。文分三部分:從這裡到〈壽量品〉終了,是正式開近顯遠;第二,〈分別功德品〉之初,總授法身之記;第三,彌勒總申領解。

第一部分又分兩層:先是略開近顯遠,動搖執著而生起疑惑;其次是廣開近顯遠,斷除疑惑而生起信心。略開又分兩項:一是略開,二是因疑更請。

略開之中有長行、偈頌。這裡只答覆兩個問題,沒有答覆因什麼因緣而聚集;正因為沒有答,所以才有重請。長行雙答雙釋,如經文所示。

解釋下方空中而住:《大智度論》說有底散三昧,應當作四種解說。所謂有,指三有;所謂底,指非想非非想處,因為它最深最勝所以稱為底。又,所謂有指名相,所謂底指空,因為空寂所以稱為底。又,所謂有指有無二邊的世俗,所謂底指邊際智圓滿所以稱為底。如今本經以下方虛空為底——不是上界,也不是下界,表示中道為底。這是就四教分別而說。

『在諸經典之中』以下是解釋。師父知道弟子具備智、斷兩種德:起初是雙修智斷,其次是雙證智斷。在經典中分別,是修智;正憶念,是修斷;不樂處在大眾之中,是證斷;勤行精進,是證智。

從『不依止人天而住』起,是解釋處所。人與天是有、空二邊,不住就是不執著。『深智無礙』是說依於不可思議的智慧,『樂於佛法』是說樂於不可思議的境界。境與智都極其微妙,不是行位尚淺的菩薩所能及。

偈頌八行半:最初五行半重頌答覆兩個問題,其下三行重頌雙釋。

十一、因疑更請:法說與譬說

從『那時彌勒』以下,是因疑更請,有長行與偈頌。長行分兩部分:一是疑,二是請。

彌勒聽到前面說『在菩提樹下才教化他們,如今都住於不退轉』,又聽到說『我從久遠以來教化這些大眾』;聽到這兩種說法,執著被動搖而生起疑惑。

從『稟白佛陀』以下,是騰述疑惑而更加請問,又分兩部分:一是法說,二是譬說。

法說分三段:最初從『就稟白佛陀』以下,第一段,懷疑成道時間很近而所化度的人卻極多,這是執近而疑遠;其次從『世尊,這些大菩薩』以下,第二段,所化度的既然眾多、行位又深妙,這是執遠而疑近;其次從『世尊,像這樣的事』以下,第三段,是結請。

譬說有開譬與合譬。開譬分三段:『色美髮黑』譬喻前面所說成道時間很近之意;『指著百歲之人』以下,譬喻前面所說所化度的人極多之意。

淮北諸師以譬喻解釋譬喻:父親服了返老還童的藥,容貌如同二十五歲;兒子沒有服藥,形貌像是百歲。若知道藥力,就不會懷疑父子關係;不知道的人就覺得奇怪。如來橫向服下垂迹之藥,示現於伽耶城初生;諸菩薩則直就本地而論,久遠以來已發道心,如今安住不退。若是佛與佛,便能明快知曉此事;自此以下的人不能通達,就不得不生疑。

『這事難以相信』以下,是結譬。

最初是合近譬,如經文所示。從『而這些大眾』以下,是合遠譬。觀察這些菩薩久已種下善根,並不止於在伽耶城發心。

『善於入、出、住』一語:九次第定是善入,師子奮迅是善出,超越三昧是善住,這是通教與三藏教之意。從初地到十地名為善入,十地進入重玄門、倒過來修習凡夫之事名為善出,妙覺遍滿名為善住,這是別教之意。畢竟法性三昧名為善入,首楞嚴三昧名為善出,王三昧名為善住,這是圓教之意。次第修習諸善法,就因位而言是善習,就果位而言是善入。

『善於答覆難問』一語,是說具足福慧二種莊嚴。他們是七種方便之人中的尊者,所以稱為『寶』。

十二、請答與偈頌

『今日世尊』以下是請答,又分三段。從『今日』以下,是舉出佛的話。從『我等』以下,第二段,說明請問的用意。

請問的用意有二:一是為現在的人。我雖然還不能通達,只是信受而已。從『然而諸菩薩』以下,第二,是為未來的人。修行淺的人容易生起誹謗,新發心的人因誹謗而墮入惡道;不退轉的人雖然信受而不誹謗,卻不能增進道業。若佛為他們分別解說,誹謗的人就會生起信心,信受的人就能增進道業。

從『唯願』以下,第三段,是請佛答覆。請答也分兩層:最初是『除去我們的疑惑』;從『以及未來』以下,第二,是除去未來眾生的疑惑。

偈頌十四行,重頌上面的法說與譬說:五行重頌法說,九行重頌譬說。

法說之中分三段:最初一行重頌執近;其次從『這些佛子』以下,第二段,二行三句重頌疑遠;最後從『怎麼可以』以下,第三段,一行一句重頌結請。

重頌譬說之中,最初二行重頌開譬;其後從『世尊也是如此』以下七行,重頌合譬。也分三段:最初兩句重頌合近;其次從『這些菩薩志向』以下,第二段,三行半重頌合遠;最後從『我們從佛聽聞』以下,第三段,三行重頌合請答。

〔妙法蓮華經文句卷第九上訖。〕

I. Five Explanations of the Chapter Title

The teacher is awe-inspiring and the Way is honored, so the disciples bow in reverence and attend upon him. At a single summons from the Tathāgata, bodhisattvas surge forth from the four directions; therefore this is called the Emerging from the Earth chapter.

The Buddha teaches and guides sentient beings through past, present, and future, bestowing benefit without boundary. One bright moon appears as myriad reflections in water—who could ever fathom them all? The Buddha summons the disciples whom he transformed in the past and manifests them now; these disciples propagate the sutra to benefit the future. Therefore this is called the Emerging from the Earth chapter.

Open space is limpid and quiescent, without early or late, yet some cling to the Buddha’s near Trace and therefore do not understand his distant Origin. The Buddha summons his disciples of former times and manifests them today, breaking attachment to the near and revealing the distant Origin. Therefore this is called the Emerging from the Earth chapter.

The father who manifests initial perfect awakening at the site of quiescence is young, while the sons who have long practiced in the Land of Constant Quiescent Light are old. The Buddha reveals the medicine’s power so that the entire assembly may understand. Therefore this is called the Emerging from the Earth chapter.

The sutra says, “From where have these bodhisattvas come? Through what causal conditions have they gathered?” To explain the chapter title through the meanings above is precisely an explanation through the causal conditions of the worldly, individual, counteractive, and ultimate-meaning siddhāntas. Therefore this is called the Emerging from the Earth chapter.

II. The General Outline of the Sutra’s Latter Half

From here begins one major division, the second: opening the near Trace that the Buddha manifests in his role as teacher and revealing the distant Origin of the Buddha Ground.

This major division has three parts. First, from here through “You will naturally hear of this through that,” is the introductory section. Second, from “At that time Śākyamuni Buddha told Maitreya” through Maitreya’s nineteen lines of verse in the Distinctions in Merit chapter is the main exposition. Third, the eleven and a half chapters after those verses form the transmission section.

III. The Introduction Divided into Emerging and Doubt

The introduction has two parts: first, emerging; second, doubt.

Emerging is further divided into three passages: the bodhisattvas from other lands request permission to propagate the sutra; the Tathāgata does not permit them; and the bodhisattvas from below emerge.

Hearing that propagating this sutra brings vast merit, the bodhisattvas from other lands all wish to vow to remain in this world and proclaim it, so they ask the Buddha’s permission.

The Tathāgata stops them for three reasons. First, each of you has duties of your own; remaining in this land would neglect benefit there. Second, the affinities between the bodhisattvas from other lands and the sentient beings of this land are not deep; even if they wished to proclaim and transmit the sutra, no great benefit would result. Third, if their request were permitted, the bodhisattvas from below could not be summoned. If the bodhisattvas from below did not come, the near Trace could not be broken and the distant Origin could not be revealed. For these three reasons, the Tathāgata stops them.

There are likewise three reasons for summoning the bodhisattvas from below. They are my disciples and should propagate my Dharma; their affinities are deep and broad, so they can benefit this land throughout, benefit all the lands of the emanation-bodies throughout, and benefit other lands throughout; and they can thereby open the near and reveal the distant. Thus he stops those from other lands and summons those from below.

IV. The Sutra Narrator’s Five Features of the Manifested Scene

From “When the Buddha spoke these words” onward is the third passage, the emergence from below. It has two parts: first, the sutra narrator describes the manifested scene that was seen; second, the greetings are explained. Each part has five items.

The first five items are: first, their emergence; second, their bodily marks; third, their dwelling place; fourth, hearing the command; fifth, their entourages.

Their dwelling place is the Land of Constant Quiescent Light. Constant is the virtue of permanence; quiescent is the virtue of bliss; light is the virtues of purity and self. This is the secret treasury of the four virtues and is precisely their dwelling place. They dwell within the secret treasury through the manner of nonabiding.

“Below” means the abyssal bottom of Dharma-nature and the ultimate ground of the mysterious purport; therefore it is called below. Situated below, they do not belong to this realm; dwelling in open space, they do not belong to the other realm. Neither this nor that is the middle way. Emerging from this realm yet remaining neither in an upper realm nor beneath this realm, they dwell in open space as neither above nor below; this too is the middle way.

They come because they have heard the command, to propagate the Dharma, to break attachment, and to reveal the Origin—all as explained above.

As for the entourages they bring, ordinary sentiment regards those leading sixty or fifty thousand Ganges sands as many, those leading three, two, or one as few, and those who come alone as solitary. But if one follows the sutra’s wording, sixty and fifty thousand instead count as few and those alone instead count as many, for the sutra says that the number dwelling alone exceeds all those described before.

In terms of Dharma gates, each one possesses the virtue of a guide and can lead the many to the jeweled place. One should understand that one person is not solitary, and sixty thousand are not many. One is the single pure path; two are concentration and wisdom; three are precepts, concentration, and wisdom; four are the Four Truths; five are the Five Eyes; and six are the Six Pāramitās. Each pāramitā contains the ten Dharma realms, each realm contains ten dharmas, ten make a hundred, and a hundred contains a thousand; matched with the ten wholesome actions, these make ten thousand. One pāramitā contains ten thousand practices, and six pāramitās are sixty thousand Dharma gates. Many is not many, and one is not few; they are neither many nor few, yet they are both many and few.

V. Five Parts of the Greetings and Two Kinds of Inconceivability

From “These bodhisattvas emerged from the earth” onward is the second part, the greetings, divided into five items: first, offerings through the three modes of action; second, the words of greeting; third, the Buddha’s answer concerning ease and well-being; fourth, rejoicing in verse; fifth, the Tathāgata’s praise.

First are offerings through the three modes of action. Fifty minor kalpas pass, yet the assembly feels that only half a day has gone by; the fourfold assembly can see all the bodhisattvas throughout. Long time is concealed and short time manifested, while the Buddha’s supernormal power also enables a narrow field of vision to behold a vast domain. Both are inconceivable.

“bowing and circumambulating” belongs to bodily action, “praising the Dharma” to verbal action, and “gazing upward in reverence” to mental action. As for “fifty minor kalpas” and “half a day,” this is the inconceivability of time. What the Tathāgata sees does not fall into the dual marks of long and short. The bodhisattvas from below ceaselessly praise him to his face, while the Tathāgata silently and continually receives their praise. Those who awaken see the long within the short and therefore experience fifty minor kalpas; those who are deluded see the short within the long and therefore feel that it is only half a day. This prepares the way for the Origin and Trace teaching below. Before the Tathāgata has opened and revealed, people remain dark about the Origin and cling to the Trace. Once the Buddha opens and reveals, awakening through the near enables them to comprehend the distant, and they understand that the inconceivable is one and the same.

The fourfold assembly’s ability to see the bodhisattvas throughout is likewise inconceivable. What fleshly and divine eyes ordinarily see is not far, yet what they now see fills open space. Seeing torrential rain, one knows the dragon’s power is vast; seeing flowers flourish, one knows the pond is deep and broad; seeing responsive bodies fill open space, one knows that the true body pervades the Dharma realm.

First, the four guides are introduced.

VI. The Words of Inquiry and the Tathāgata’s Complete Answer

Next come the words of greeting. The inquiry has two parts: prose and verse. The prose has two items: first, asking whether the Tathāgata is at ease and well; second, asking whether sentient beings are easy to transform.

Only four people are named in order to correspond to the forty stages of opening, showing, awakening, and entering. This is like the Avataṃsaka Sutra, which names only the four bodhisattvas Dharmamati, Guṇavana, Vajradhvaja, and Vajragarbha to expound the forty stages.

Third, the Tathāgata answers completely. Ease and well-being and ease of transformation mutually accomplish one another: when sentient beings are easy to transform, the Buddha is at ease; when the Buddha is at ease, sentient beings are easy to transform.

Ease of transformation has two kinds. The first comprises those of sharp faculties and profound virtue. Life after life, they have continually received Great-Vehicle teaching; as soon as they see my body and hear what I teach, they receive the Avataṃsaka teaching and enter the Tathāgata’s wisdom. Ripe fruit falls easily: this is sentient beings’ ease of transformation. The second comprises those of dull faculties and shallow virtue. Life after life, they have never received Great-Vehicle teaching. For such people, the Buddha must open the teaching for dull faculties and proclaim the gradual Dharma, disciplining them through the Tripiṭaka, Vaipulya, and Prajñāpāramitā teachings; he likewise enables them today to hear the Lotus and enter buddha-wisdom. Although they are more difficult than the first kind, they are still easy for the Buddha. The Buddha knows their capacities and establishes expedients with perfect fitness; only a little application and adjustment are needed, and the wisdom realized is still the same.

Now ten meanings are briefly presented to explain this. First are first seeing and seeing now; second, opening and convergence versus neither opening nor convergence; third, vertical breadth and horizontal brevity; fourth, one Origin and many Traces, shared Traces and an exclusive Origin; fifth, supplemental teaching and no supplemental teaching; sixth, transforming the land and not transforming it; seventh, many places and not many places; eighth, repudiation and deprivation versus neither repudiation nor deprivation; ninth, directly revealing the real and opening the provisional to reveal the real; tenth, sharp faculties maturing first and dull faculties maturing later.

First, first seeing and seeing now: what is seen at initial awakening is called first seeing; the true seeing long afterward in the Lotus assembly is called seeing now. Second, when sunlight illuminates the high mountains, the sudden teaching is proclaimed, neither opened nor converged. For those unable to enter, the sudden teaching is opened into the gradual teaching, and they are disciplined through the five flavors so that the gradual converges with the sudden. Third, the sudden teaching directly enters vertically and enters the Dharma realm, so it is called vertically broad; because it does not pass through expedient means, it is called horizontally brief. Here, passing through the five flavors is horizontal breadth, while attaining entry into buddha-wisdom is also vertical breadth. Fourth, one lotus platform is called one Origin, while its thousand petals are called many Traces; the Traces are shared because they accord with other sutras, while the Origin is exclusive because it differs from other sutras. Fifth, in the Avataṃsaka, the four bodhisattvas are empowered to expound the forty stages; in this sutra, the Buddha himself speaks opening, showing, awakening, and entering and does not empower someone else. Sixth, the Flower-King world is not transformed and therefore is called untransformed; in this sutra the land is transformed twice and therefore is called transformed. Seventh, the Avataṃsaka has seven places and eight assemblies and therefore many places; this sutra has Vulture Peak and distant open space and therefore not many places. Eighth, extinguishing the transformed city and changing the identity of the hired laborer are called repudiation and deprivation; the Avataṃsaka has no such events and therefore no repudiation or deprivation. Ninth, traveling the great direct path is called directly revealing the real, while resolving the Dharma of the śrāvakas is called opening the provisional to reveal the real. Tenth, those of sharp faculties whose conditions are mature enter buddha-wisdom at the beginning, while those of dull faculties who mature later enter buddha-wisdom only today.

Appropriate conditions differ, and so ten distinctions are briefly made; as for the knowledge of all modes and the Dharma realm, they are equal and without difference. Thus the sutra says, “As soon as they saw my body and heard what I taught, they all accepted it in faith and entered the Tathāgata’s wisdom, excepting only those who had previously cultivated and studied the Lesser Vehicle.” The explicit text for entering buddha-wisdom in this sutra today is right here; there is no need for doubt.

When masters see differing conditions, they follow those conditions into differing explanations; becoming confused and failing to return, they stray ever farther from the Way. If one recognizes identity at the level of principle, it is like a thousand carts traveling the same track: buddha-wisdom is without difference.

An older account says that the Avataṃsaka is definitive meaning, full word, and permanent, while the Lotus is nondefinitive meaning, neither full nor permanent. Now compare that account with this passage. If the first entry is definitive while entry today is nondefinitive, then the first entry is into buddha-wisdom, while today’s entry is not into buddha-wisdom. If buddha-wisdom is equal, definitive meaning is likewise equal, and full word and permanence are entirely the same.

The Dilun masters call the Avataṃsaka the Perfect School and the Lotus the Unreal School. This same passage is now likewise used to compare their claim.

VII. Understanding and Rejoicing, Followed by the Tathāgata’s Praise

Fourth, the bodhisattvas understand and rejoice. Those capable of asking are like the four great beings in the Avataṃsaka and Śāriputra’s three requests in the Lotus; these are all capable questioners. What they ask about is the Buddha’s wisdom.

Fifth, the Tathāgata praises them. This greatly differs from asking: on the questioners’ side there is rejoicing. Those capable of asking are all bodhisattvas, and when the people whom they transform hear, accept in faith, and practice, we rejoice accordingly. What, then, does it mean that the Tathāgata praises the rejoicing of those capable of transformation? Those capable of asking are originally ancient buddhas; because you can rejoice, you already are tathāgatas. The bodhisattvas rejoice in their Trace, while the Tathāgata praises their Origin. This also secretly indicates the meaning of the lifespan.

VIII. The Introduction of Doubt and the Doubts of This Land and Other Lands

From “At that time Maitreya and the eighty thousand great beings” onward is the second part, the introduction of doubt.

Maitreya says: From the site of quiescence until this assembly today, great beings from the ten directions have continuously come to gather. Although they are too numerous to count, through the power of the wisdom of a bodhisattva in the place of succession I have seen and known them all. Yet of this company I do not recognize a single person. Moreover, I have traveled and taught throughout the ten directions and attended upon the buddhas, and I know the assemblies of those buddhas well; in every place I have visited, these people have likewise been unknown. Whether I consider where they came from or where they are going, no inquiry enables me to recognize them.

Again, those great beings are elders who advanced and arrived before, while Maitreya is a later student; a junior does not know his seniors, and therefore he does not recognize them. Again, those great beings originally abide at the bottom of the true mark and responsively manifest throughout the ten directions, teaching and transforming along separate courses; none of their true or responsive bodies belongs to Maitreya’s field, and therefore he does not recognize them. Again, the Buddha entrusts propagation of the sutra and summons the great beings. They come upon hearing the teacher’s command, within which the meaning of the lifespan is secretly contained; this is not something the assembly present can know, and therefore he says he does not recognize them.

This explains the introduction of doubt through the worldly, individual, counteractive, and ultimate-meaning siddhāntas.

The doubt has two parts: first, the doubt of the bodhisattvas of this land; second, the doubt of the bodhisattvas of other lands. The doubt of this land has two levels. First comes doubt in prose. Next come nineteen and a half lines of verse constituting the formal question, divided into five passages. The first line and one phrase ask where they have come from. Next, the one line and three phrases beginning with “through what causal conditions” ask through what causal conditions they have come. Next, the nine lines beginning with “each one of the bodhisattvas” describe their number. Next, the two lines beginning with “these beings of great majestic virtue” ask who their teacher is. Next, the five and a half lines beginning with “such are these bodhisattvas’ supernormal powers” form the concluding request, which is further divided into five. The first two phrases conclude the praise. Next, the two lines beginning with “the earth in the four directions” ask the Buddha to answer concerning their place of origin. Next, the one line beginning with “within this assembly, I” asks the Buddha to answer concerning the conditions of their coming. Next, the one and a half lines beginning with “this great assembly today” are the common question of the great assembly. Next, the two phrases beginning with “immeasurable virtue” ask the Buddha to answer who their master is.

Second is the doubt of the bodhisattvas from other lands. The retinues of the emanation-buddhas extend horizontally throughout the ten directions and share Maitreya’s doubt. Neither land knows the Buddha’s original ground. The Buddha wishes to reveal that his attainment of the Way lies in the exceedingly distant past, so each group states its doubt to its buddha, while every buddha holds back an answer and waits for Maitreya.

IX. The Beginning of the Main Exposition: Admonition, Permission, and the Four Virtues

From “At that time Śākyamuni Buddha told Maitreya” onward is the second division, the main exposition. The text has two parts: first prose, then verse. The prose first admonishes and then grants permission, after which comes the proper exposition.

The prose begins with praise. Next comes the admonition: do not become distracted, indolent, or regressive. Next comes permission, introducing the wisdom of the fruit-ground. Fruit-wisdom is the Tathāgata’s knowledge and vision, the wondrous fruit of knowledge and vision. Next is the opening that discloses the teacher capable of transforming beings, namely “proclaiming and revealing.”

“sovereign supernormal power” refers to benefiting sentient beings in the past; “the lion’s swift advance” refers to the places reached in the present by the emanation-bodies throughout the ten directions. Some also say that swift advance is the posture of one about to move forward, indicating the future manifestation of perpetually benefiting beings. “great power and fierce majesty” refers to benefiting sentient beings in the future. Others take it as presently shaking the ten directions; each may use the reading according to their intent, but it is preferable to follow the sutra’s sequence.

Moreover, my private view is that “the Tathāgata’s sovereignty” is the virtue of self; “supernormal power” is the virtue of bliss; “the lion’s swift advance”—the swift advance removes defilement and is the virtue of purity; and “great power and fierce majesty,” referring to the future benefit of sentient beings, is the virtue of permanence. This points out the meaning of the four virtues.

Within the four lines of verse, the first three phrases restate the three admonitions, while the remaining three lines and one phrase restate the permission. The first phrase restates the introduction of the fruit of wisdom, and the next three lines restate the three periods.

X. Briefly Opening the Near and Revealing the Distant, and the Bottom-Dispersing Samādhi

From “At that time the World-Honored One” onward is the second division, the main exposition. The text has three parts. From here through the end of the Lifespan chapter is the proper opening of the near and revelation of the distant. Second, at the beginning of the Distinctions in Merit chapter, prediction of the Dharma body is conferred generally. Third, Maitreya gives a general statement of understanding.

The first part has two levels: first, briefly opening the near and revealing the distant, shaking attachment and producing doubt; second, a renewed request occasioned by doubt, cutting off doubt and producing faith. The brief opening further has two items: first, the brief opening; second, the renewed request occasioned by doubt.

The brief opening contains prose and verse. Here only two questions are answered; the question of through what causal conditions they gathered is not answered. Precisely because it is not answered, there is a renewed request. The prose answers and explains both, as shown in the sutra.

To explain dwelling in the open space below: the Mahāprajñāpāramitā Treatise speaks of the bottom-dispersing samādhi, which should be explained in four ways. First, “existence” means the three existences, and “bottom” means the station of neither perception nor nonperception; because it is deepest and most supreme, it is called the bottom. Again, “existence” means name and form, and “bottom” means emptiness; because emptiness is quiescent, it is called the bottom. Again, “existence” means the conventional extremes of existence and nonexistence, and “bottom” means the completeness of boundary-wisdom, so it is called the bottom. In the present sutra, the open space below is taken as the bottom: it is neither an upper realm nor a lower realm, indicating that the middle way is the bottom. This distinguishes the matter in terms of the four teachings.

From “within the various scriptures” onward is the explanation. The teacher knows that the disciples possess the two virtues of wisdom and severance. At first they cultivate wisdom and severance together; next they realize wisdom and severance together. Discriminating within the scriptures is cultivation of wisdom; right recollection is cultivation of severance; disliking residence among crowds is realization of severance; diligently practicing and advancing is realization of wisdom.

From “dwelling without relying upon humans or devas” onward is the explanation of place. Humans and devas are the two extremes of existence and emptiness; not dwelling means not clinging. “profound wisdom without obstruction” means relying upon inconceivable wisdom; “delighting in Buddha Dharma” means delighting in an inconceivable object. Both object and wisdom are exceedingly subtle and lie beyond bodhisattvas whose stages of practice remain shallow.

The verse has eight and a half lines. The first five and a half restate the answers to the two questions; the following three restate both explanations.

XI. Renewed Request Occasioned by Doubt: Explanation through Dharma and through Simile

From “At that time Maitreya” onward is the renewed request occasioned by doubt, containing prose and verse. The prose has two parts: first, doubt; second, request.

Maitreya has heard the preceding statement “only beneath the bodhi tree did he teach and transform them, and now they all dwell in nonretrogression,” and he has also heard “since the distant past I have taught and transformed this great assembly.” Hearing both statements shakes his attachment and gives rise to doubt.

From “he addressed the Buddha” onward, he raises and restates his doubt and renews his request. This has two parts: first, explanation through Dharma; second, explanation through simile.

The explanation through Dharma has three passages. First, from “he then addressed the Buddha” onward, he doubts how the attainment of the Way can be recent while those transformed are so numerous; this is attachment to the near giving rise to doubt about the distant. Second, from “World-Honored One, these great bodhisattvas” onward, those transformed are numerous and their stages of practice profound and subtle; this is attachment to the distant giving rise to doubt about the near. Third, from “World-Honored One, such a thing” onward is the concluding request.

The explanation through simile has an opening simile and a corresponding application. The opening simile has three passages. “handsome and black-haired” represents the preceding meaning that the attainment of the Way was recent. From “pointing to a hundred-year-old person” onward represents the preceding meaning that those transformed were exceedingly numerous.

The masters north of the Huai River use a simile to explain the simile: the father has taken a medicine that restores youth, so his appearance is that of a twenty-five-year-old; the son has not taken the medicine and appears a hundred years old. If one knows the medicine’s power, one does not doubt their father-son relation; one who does not know finds it strange. The Tathāgata takes horizontally the medicine of manifesting the Trace and shows initial birth in the city of Gayā; the bodhisattvas speak directly from the original ground, having aroused the mind of the Way in the distant past and now abiding in nonretrogression. Buddhas can readily understand this among themselves; those below the level of buddhas cannot comprehend it and cannot avoid giving rise to doubt.

From “this is difficult to believe” onward is the conclusion of the simile.

First comes the application of the near simile, as shown in the sutra. From “yet this great assembly” onward is the application of the distant simile. These bodhisattvas are seen to have planted wholesome roots for a long time, not merely to have aroused resolve in the city of Gayā.

The phrase “skilled in entering, emerging, and abiding” means: the nine successive concentrations are skill in entering, the lion’s swift advance is skill in emerging, and the transcendence samādhi is skill in abiding; this is the meaning of the Shared and Tripiṭaka teachings. From the first through the tenth ground is called skill in entering; at the tenth ground, entering the double mysterious gate and inversely cultivating the affairs of ordinary beings is called skill in emerging; the pervasion of wondrous awakening is called skill in abiding. This is the meaning of the Distinct teaching. The ultimate Dharma-nature samādhi is called skill in entering; the Śūraṅgama Samādhi is called skill in emerging; the king samādhi is called skill in abiding. This is the meaning of the Perfect teaching. Sequentially cultivating wholesome dharmas is called skill in cultivation at the causal stage and skill in entering at the fruit stage.

The phrase “skilled at answering difficult questions” means that they possess both the adornments of merit and wisdom. They are the foremost among the people of the seven expedients and therefore are called a “treasure.”

XII. The Request for an Answer and the Verses

From “today, World-Honored One” onward is the request for an answer, divided into three passages. From “today” onward, the Buddha’s words are cited. From “we” onward, the second passage explains the purpose of the request.

The request has two purposes. The first is for people in the present: although I still cannot comprehend it, I simply accept it in faith. From “yet the bodhisattvas” onward, the second purpose is for people in the future. Those whose practice is shallow readily produce slander; beginners fall into the evil paths because of that slander. Those who are nonretrogressive accept it in faith and do not slander, yet cannot advance their work in the Way. If the Buddha explains it to them distinctly, those who slander will produce faith and those who accept in faith will advance their work in the Way.

From “we only pray” onward is the third passage, the request that the Buddha answer. The request has two levels. First is “remove our doubts.” From “and in the future” onward, the second is to remove the doubts of future sentient beings.

The fourteen lines of verse restate the preceding explanation through Dharma and through simile: five lines restate the explanation through Dharma, and nine restate the explanation through simile.

The explanation through Dharma has three passages. The first line restates attachment to the near. Next, from “these children of the Buddha” onward, the second passage’s two lines and three phrases restate doubt about the distant. Finally, from “how could it be” onward, the third passage’s one line and one phrase restate the concluding request.

In restating the explanation through simile, the first two lines restate the opening simile. The following seven lines, beginning with “the World-Honored One is also like this,” restate the corresponding application. These are likewise divided into three passages. The first two phrases restate the application of the near. Next, from “the resolve of these bodhisattvas” onward, the second passage’s three and a half lines restate the application of the distant. Finally, from “we have heard from the Buddha” onward, the third passage’s three lines restate the corresponding request for an answer.

[Here ends fascicle nine, upper, of the Fahua Wenju.]

壽量品 · 異解與釋品(如來・壽・量)The Lifespan of the Tathāgata · Divergent Interpretations and Explanation of the Chapter: Tathāgata, Lifespan, and Measure

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

《妙法蓮華經文句》第九卷下,天台智者大師說。以下解釋〈如來壽量品〉。

一、先列五家異解

先列出不同的解釋。

叡師在序文中說:『只說佛壽經過無量劫,還不足以表明祂究竟有多麼久遠;只說分身多到不可計數,也不足以使人把這些形體看成彼此相異。由此說來,壽量是要確定佛壽不落在數量中,分身是要表明眾身並不異體;普賢顯示佛果不是重新造成的,多寶顯示佛身並不滅沒。』

河西道朗說:『本品表明法身與真身、化現之身並不相異,存在與隱沒在理上是一。多寶佛出現,是要表明法身常住;壽量品則表明佛壽與廣大虛空同量。』

道場觀說:『會合三乘而歸入一乘,是佛乘教化的開始;息滅外在影迹而澄明內在神理,是佛乘教化的終結。息滅影迹,就是收息示現;澄明神理,就是顯明根本。所以示現之迹無常,根本卻常住。』

注者說:『不屬於存、亡數目的,稱為壽;超出長壽、短壽界限的,稱為量。法身不是形體與年歲所能攝取的,這是要使大士修習實踐究竟的觀照,不把伽耶成道當作佛最初成佛,也不把一百歲當作佛壽的極限。』

竺道生說:『所謂色身佛,是因應眾生而示現,所以才顯得存在,並沒有一個真實固定的形體。形體既不真實,哪裡還有固定的壽命?因此,千萬種形貌都歸向同一旨趣,古與今也本來是一;古就是今,今也就是古,沒有一時不存在,也沒有一處不在。如果有時不在、有處不在,只是眾生這一邊看來如此,佛並不是如此。所以經中把長壽說到極處,卻又說在伽耶成佛。說伽耶是成佛處,便不是把眼前伽耶執為真實起點;伽耶既不固定,彼處所說的長久又豈能單獨執為真實?這樣一來,長、短都消融了,長、短又都隨緣存在。』

二、常、無常兩執與四種解釋

前代講經的人,如上面所列,大多從無量一面說佛壽常住。近世講經的人則多說,壽既然可量,從前雖超過恒河沙數,將來又比那個數目加倍,最後終究仍有盡頭,所以是無常。

又有迷惑的人執著品名,發難說:『本品既然說壽量,量就是無常,怎麼能作常住的解釋?』

現在回答他:品名只是直接說『壽量』,並沒有說壽一定有量,也沒有說壽一定無量。你把它解成無常,別人把它解成常住,品名本身又有什麼過失?兩家如鷸蚌相扼,彼此執持;本論正好乘其相持之弊,指出應當具備四種解釋。

第一,實際有量,卻說成無量,如《阿彌陀經》所說。第二,實際無量,卻說成有量,如本品與《金光明經》所說。第三,實際無量,也說成無量,如《涅槃經》所說只有佛與佛才能究見佛壽無量。第四,實際有量,也說成有量,如示現八十歲而宣告入滅。品文同時具有這四層意義,怎能只承認一種而否定另外三種?

三、諸經說常,究竟同不同

有人問:如果〈壽量品〉說常住,它與《涅槃經》有什麼差別?

現在先反問:如果這樣問,那麼《法華經》所說的一乘與《勝鬘經》所說的一乘,又有什麼差別?〔以下從略〕

若作分別回答,《法華經》簡略說明常住,《涅槃經》廣泛說明常住;《勝鬘經》是為了顯明一乘而直接說一乘,《法華經》則先會合三乘而顯明一乘。〔以下從略〕

又有人問:如果近時成佛是方便示現,久遠成佛才是真實,那麼《華嚴經》所說在寂滅道場成佛,以及《大經》所說超越以前九劫,豈不都成了方便?如果真是如此,《法華經》已經顯明久遠成佛,常不輕菩薩後來為什麼又顯得是近時?那麼《法華經》顯遠以後,豈不又成了方便?

如果照這種推論,三乘既已會歸一乘,也應當又說沒有會三歸一。如果開三顯一是諸佛共同的道路,開近顯遠也應是諸佛共同的道路。若是如此,諸佛都應如此,不只是釋迦佛;若只有釋迦佛如此,前面所說的種種意義便會破壞。

回答說:經中說,這是我的方便,諸佛也都如此。諸菩薩聽聞〈壽量品〉後也發願,希望自己未來成佛時同樣宣說壽量。這就表明諸佛所行之道相同,不能偏執一尊佛近成、另一尊佛遠成。因此應當知道,經中寄託於無始無終、無近無遠,顯示法身常住;說有始有終、有近有遠,則是在說應身示現。用這層意思看各部經典,面對的因緣雖然不同,最後所指並不相異。既已由此通達眾經,便不可反過來把諸師的局部說法當作老師。

四、常住之義有什麼經文根據

有人問:從義理推求,說常住或許可以;可是如果徵求經文,有什麼根據?

回答說:明達的人重視經文所顯的道理,昏暗的人只守著字面。應當循著能詮的言教,領會它所指的宗旨,這才是教法的正意。若只執著糟糠,反覆追問過橋的方法,又有什麼利益?

再者,言教本來就是為眾生因緣而設;因緣不同,說法也不同。有時隨眾生所欣求而說,有時隨所適宜而說,有時為對治而說,有時為使眾生悟入而說。既已悟入、到達目的,為什麼還要在交錯道路間來回徘徊?所以古經說,泥洹是真正法寶,眾生由種種門進入,正是這個意思。

經文又有多說、少說的不同。《涅槃經》以未來常住為宗旨,所以說得多;不以過去久遠成佛為宗旨,所以說得少。如果只依多文而捨棄少文,那就是魔說,不是佛說。

本經以過去久遠成佛為宗旨,說把無數世界磨成微塵,文字很多;說未來常住,文字較少。如果同樣只依多文而捨棄少文,頭便會像阿梨樹枝一樣破成七分。譬如天子的命令,無論字多字少都不可違背,違背便會得罪。

〈方便品〉說,世間相常住,佛在道場已經知道,導師隨後以方便宣說。這段文字就是在說未來常住不滅。本品又說,佛常住於此;又說,祂常在靈鷲山及其餘住處。《普賢觀經》又說,佛的住處是常波羅蜜所攝成之處、我波羅蜜所安立之處。像這樣說常住的文字並不少。本經又處處說明法身,法身怎麼會不常住?

有人再問:既然已說法身,也應當說三德。

回答說:權智與實智兩種智慧,豈不就是般若?過去、現在、未來三世的種種示現,豈不就是解脫?真實之相與本地,正是法身。般若、解脫、法身三德的明文,就是如此。

五、如來、壽、量三字

現在解釋品名。

『如來』是十方三世諸佛、二佛、三佛、本佛、迹佛共同的名號。『壽量』就是詮釋、衡量十方三世諸佛、二佛、三佛、本佛、迹佛的功德。眼前這一品主要詮量本地三佛的功德,所以稱作〈如來壽量品〉。

如來的意義很多,現在暫且說二如來與三如來,其餘可以依例理解。

六、二如來:真身與應身

先說二如來。《成實論》說:『乘著如實之道而來成就正覺,所以稱為如來。』

其中,乘是契合法如如境的智慧,實是法如如境,道是因,覺是果。若只單獨談能乘的智慧,便沒有如如境作所知;若只單獨談真實境界,也沒有如如智作能知。境與智和合,才有因、果:照見境界尚未窮盡源頭時名為因,窮盡源頭時名為果;道與覺的意義因此成立。這就是乘如實道而來成就正覺,也就是真身如來。

以契合真實的智慧,乘著真實之道,來到欲界、色界、無色界中示現成就正覺,便是應身如來。

七、三如來:法身、報身、應身

再說三如來。《大智度論》說:『依照諸法實相而解,依照諸法實相而說,所以稱為如來。』

如,是法如如境。它不是因,也不是果;無論有佛出世或沒有佛出世,諸法性相本來常然,遍及一切處而沒有差異,這就稱為如。不動而能到達,稱為來。指這一層而說,便是法身如來。

契合法如如境的智慧,乘著如如真實之道而來成就妙覺;智慧與真理相稱,從真理一面名為如,從智慧一面名為來,便是報身如來。所以論中說,依照法相而解,名為如來。

如如境與如如智相合,便能處處示現成就正覺。譬如水銀與真金相和,能塗在種種色像上;功德與法身相和,便能處處隨應而往,示現八相成道,轉動微妙法輪,這就是應身如來。所以論中說,依照法相而說,名為如來。

法身如來名為毘盧遮那,漢譯為遍一切處;報身如來名為盧舍那,漢譯為淨滿;應身如來名為釋迦文,漢譯為度沃焦。這三如來不能只單取其中一個。

《大經》說,單獨法身不是大涅槃,單獨般若不是大涅槃,單獨解脫也不是大涅槃;三法具足,才稱為祕密藏,名為大涅槃。三者不能說成一個,不能說成三個彼此隔離的東西,也不能排成縱向或橫向;圓滿總覽三法,才施設假名稱作如來。

《梵網經》結成《華嚴經》的教說,以華臺為本、華葉為末,因應一類因緣而如此說,本與末卻不能相離。《像法決疑經》結成《涅槃經》,說眾生有時見釋迦為毘盧遮那,有時見祂為盧舍那;這是從前因緣不同,所見便不同,不是佛自身分裂成三個。《普賢觀經》結成《法華經》,說釋迦牟尼名為毘盧遮那,這只是同一佛的不同名稱,不是不同形體。總合眾經的意思,應當知道三佛既不能說成同一個,也不能說成彼此相異。

八、品中雖不標名,義理具足三佛

有人問:這一品沒有列出三佛之名,為什麼能作這種解釋?

回答說:經文雖然沒有標出名稱,卻具足它們的意義。

經文說,並非如,也並非異;不是像三界眾生那樣看見三界。這不是偏在一邊的如,而是顯出圓滿的如,便是法身如來之義。

經文又說,如來如實知見三界之相。這就是如如智與如如境相稱;一切種智的知見便是佛眼,這是報身如來之義。

經文又說,佛有時示現自己的身與事,有時示現他人的身與事。這就是應身如來之義。

如果只說本具之德的三如來,便偏成橫向;只說修成之德的三如來,便偏成縱向;按照法身、報身、應身先後排列,也仍成縱向。本經圓滿地說三如來,不落在縱向,也不落在橫向。連這種縱、橫的三如來都還不是本品所指,何況三藏教、通教中所說的如來?

《法華經》以前的經典也曾說圓滿如來,卻仍同屬示現中所說。如今發迹顯本所明的三如來,與其他經典不同。

《法華論》說,為了顯示成就無上大菩提,所以顯示三種菩提。第一,應化菩提,隨眾生所應見而示現,正如經中說佛出釋氏宮。第二,報佛菩提,十地圓滿而得常涅槃,正如經中說佛實際成佛以來已有無量無邊劫。第三,法佛菩提,就是如來藏性淨涅槃不變,正如經中說如來如實知見三界之相。經文具足它們的意義,論中標出它們的名稱;若不作上述解釋,怎能會通經、論?

九、壽的三義、量與三命

接著解釋『壽量』。

『壽』有受持、領受而不間斷的意義。第一,真如不隔礙一切諸法,所以稱為受。第二,境與智彼此相應,所以稱為受。第三,一期果報所得的百年壽命相續不斷,所以稱為受。三義依次不可混併。

『量』就是詮量。量字可以通於多種情形,並沒有一個固定而專屬的根據。詮量法如來,是以如理為命;詮量報如來,是以智慧為命;詮量應如來,是以同於眾生因緣之理為命。對這三種命,可以詮量為有量、無量,也可以詮量為非量非無量。

法身如來以如理為命:無論有佛、無佛,性相本來常然;既不說境智相應,也不說前後相續,因此既不能說有量,也不能說無量。經文所說並非如、並非異、並非虛、並非實,正是在詮量法身如理之命。

報身如來以智慧為命:如如智契合如如境,境發起智慧而成為果報,智慧冥合境界而成為受。境既無量無邊、常住不滅,智慧也同樣如此,猶如函有多大,蓋也相應有多大。經文說,佛的智力如此,是久遠修習之業所得;智慧光明照耀無量,壽命經過無數劫。這是在詮量報身如來的智慧命。

應身如來以同緣為命:眾生因緣長,應身便同樣示現長;因緣短促,應身便同樣示現短促。〔以下從略〕長、短出於彼方眾生的因緣,與應身自身有什麼固定關係?經文說,祂屢次示現出生,屢次示現入滅;又有時自己說出不同名號、不同年歲大小。這是在詮量應佛的同緣命。

十、第一組四句:量與無量

再換一重說法。

第一,法身既不是量,也不是無量。第二,報身在金剛心以前有量,越過金剛心以後無量。第三,應身隨因緣而現時有量。第四,應身的作用相續不斷,所以無量。

通行地詮量,四句中的三句屬於聖者,一句屬於凡夫;把有量與無常一概判作佛義,並不成立。從前所說只是以增加、減少兩種毀謗加在佛身上,若不是魔說,又是什麼?

十一、第二組四句:常等四句

量的四句意義已經顯明;為了仍未理解的人,再以常等四句分別簡擇。先分別配屬,再通於每一身說。

分別配屬時,第一,非常也非無常;雙非之理達到極處,便是法身。第二,常,就是報身。報智與境相合,其實也非單純常或無常;現在只取正智圓滿、不生不滅,而且越過金剛心以前的階段,所以取常作報身。第三,亦常亦無常,就是應身;應用沒有窮盡,所以亦常,屢次宣告入涅槃,所以亦無常。第四,無常,包括金剛心以前智慧作用逐步增進,乃至凡夫生滅出沒,也都屬無常。

如此,三佛各得一句,凡夫共得一句;這是依別教分別作出的配屬。

若從通途圓滿地說,每一如來都具備四句。

法身四句:非常非無常,是同時破除凡、聖兩邊顛倒;常,是如虛空一般常;無常,是沒有凡夫生滅顛倒;亦常亦無常,是寂然不動而又雙照。

報身四句:非常非無常,是智慧冥合境界;常,是超出二乘;無常,是沒有生滅顛倒;亦常亦無常,是能夠雙照。

應身四句:非常非無常,是既非只屬報身,也非生死凡身;常,是恒常隨應而同;無常,是隨無常因緣而同;亦常亦無常,是兩面都保存。

凡夫既在分別說中得到無常一句,通途也可以說具四句;但凡夫只有本具之理,連四句的名稱都尚未具足,何況實際行用?依前面的意思便可理解,不必等待更多解說。

一身就是三身,卻又不是單一,也不是彼此分離。應當知道,一佛之身具足種種身的壽命功德;隨眾生因緣感見,長短各不相同。

十二、冬、春、夏與三種譬喻

《大經》說,凡夫與二乘所見佛壽如冬日,菩薩所見如春日,只有佛見佛,才能見壽命無量如夏日。

為什麼如此?凡夫處在全然受障的地位,翳障朦朧。三藏教、通教中的二乘雖已斷除四住惑,卻仍未見中道;即使捨離分段生死而受法性身,也還沒有破除無明。他們在彼土所奉事的仍是殊勝應身,所以二乘只見冬日。

菩薩若還沒有登地、入住,所見與前面相同。若已破一分無明,乃至領受一分法身,從准予的說法來看,可以說見到報身壽命;從收回這個名稱的說法來看,仍只是殊勝應身。因為還沒有窮盡報身之源,也沒有到達法性之極,所以所見佛壽仍如春日。

只有佛與佛窮盡法性、窮盡根源,所見法身壽命才如夏日。

《大經》又舉三種譬喻。第一,在一切常住法中,虛空第一;在一切壽命中,如來第一。這譬喻法身壽命無始無終,性相凝然澄明,與應身、報身不同。第二,四河都歸入大海;這譬喻報身所修萬善,全都感得佛的果報而收入壽命海。第三,阿耨達池流出四大河;這譬喻應身壽命從法身、報身而出,隨同眾生顯現長短。

本品所作詮量,從通義說是明三身;若從特別所指來說,重點正在報身。為什麼?因為義理便利,經文也相會。

所謂義理便利,是報身智慧能夠上冥、下契,法、報、應三身由此具足,所以說義理便利。所謂經文相會,是經中說佛成佛以來已經極其久遠,因此能在過去、現在、未來利益眾生;所成的是法身,能成的是報身,法、報相合,所以能利益眾生。因此說經文相會。由此推求,本品的正意是在論說報身佛的功德。

十三、本與迹的多重說法

再者,法身、報身、應身的種種功德,都是本時在道場樹下早已久遠成就的,這稱為本;中間時期以及今日在寂滅道場示現成就的,稱為迹。

其他經典所說的本、迹,是以寂滅道場成就的法身、報身為本,從此發起殊勝、低劣兩種應身為迹。本經所說,則把寂滅道場及中間時期所成的三身都稱為迹,把久遠本昔道場所證的三身稱為本,所以不同於其他經典。

古德說:『沒有本,便無從垂下迹;沒有迹,也無從顯出本。本與迹雖然不同,卻是不思議的一。』本論指出,肇師這句話原本所指,是寂滅道場之本。

再者,寂滅道場的本、迹又有多種說法。

第一,可以涅槃為本,從真實發起應現為迹;迹與本都空,言語與思慮雙雙斷絕,所以稱為不思議的一。

第二,可以世俗為本,從世俗發起應現為迹;迹與本都深廣,下位之人不能以言語、思慮測到邊際,所以稱為不可思議的一。

第三,可以中道為本,從中道發起應現為迹;迹與本都使言語道路斷絕、心行所在止息,所以稱為不思議的一。

再者,這三種既不是三,也不是一。以非三非一為本,而顯現為三、為一作迹;兩邊都使言語道路斷絕、心行所在止息,所以是不思議的一。

不知道諸師所指的,究竟是哪一處本、迹不思議一。原文接著說『今攝𮒸四番』,這四番都仍只是迹中的不思議一;本品則遙指久遠本地的三番、四番不思議作為根本。從那個本垂下迹,再以那個迹顯出本;本與迹雖然不同,卻是不思議的一。像這樣的本、迹,怎麼會不異於眾經?又怎麼會不異於諸師?

十四、種種位行為何總歸壽命海

有人問:各部經典各自說明階位與修行,有的多、有的少。《華嚴經》說四十一位,《瓔珞經》說五十二位,名稱與意義都很廣。本經從頭到尾都沒有這些內容,怎能說本經與它們不同?

回答說:譬如世間人修習種種事業、積集種種珍寶、追求種種地位;如果沒有壽命,財寶與地位又有什麼用?

《大經》說,譬如一位長者生育一子,相師占卜說這個孩子有短壽之相,不能承接家業。父母知道以後,便輕忽他如同草芥。

法門也是如此。修行種種因,獲得種種果,顯現種種神通,教化種種眾生,宣說種種法門,度脫種種人——六項依次都總攝在如來壽命海中。海中之要是法性、智慧、應現;本論末後又並列喉、襟、目、蒵,反問兩列所指的要義怎會相異。

Fascicle nine, lower, of the Fahua Wenju, taught by Tiantai Master Zhizhe. What follows explains the “Lifespan of the Tathāgata” chapter.

I. First Listing Five Divergent Interpretations

First, the differing interpretations are set out.

Master Rui says in his preface: “Merely saying that the Buddha’s lifespan extends through immeasurable kalpas is still insufficient to show how distant it truly is; merely saying that his divided bodies are beyond number is also insufficient if those forms are taken to differ from one another. Lifespan and measure therefore establish that the Buddha’s lifespan does not fall within number; the divided bodies show that the many bodies are not different in substance; Samantabhadra reveals that the Buddha fruit is not something newly produced; and Prabhūtaratna reveals that the Buddha body does not become extinct.”

Daolang of Hexi says: “This chapter shows that the Dharma body is not different from true body and transformation body and that existence and disappearance are one in principle. Prabhūtaratna Buddha appears to show that the Dharma body constantly abides; the Lifespan chapter shows that the Buddha’s lifespan has the same measure as vast open space.”

Daochang Guan says: “Gathering the three vehicles and returning them to the One is the beginning of teaching through the Buddha vehicle. Extinguishing the outer shadow-Trace and clarifying the inner spirit-principle is its end. Extinguishing the shadow-Trace means bringing manifestation to rest; clarifying the spirit-principle means revealing the Origin. Thus the manifested Trace is impermanent while the Origin is permanent.”

The anonymous annotator says: “What does not belong to the count of survival and death is called lifespan; what goes beyond the limits of long and short life is called measure. The Dharma body is not encompassed by form and years. This enables great beings to cultivate and practice the ultimate illumination without taking awakening at Gayā as the Buddha’s first attainment of buddhahood or one hundred years as the extreme limit of the Buddha’s lifespan.”

Zhu Daosheng says: “The so-called form-body Buddha appears in response to beings and therefore seems to exist; it has no real fixed form. Since the form is not real, how could it have a fixed lifespan? The myriad forms therefore converge upon one purport, and ancient and present are originally one. Ancient is present and present is ancient. There is no time when the Buddha does not exist and no place where he is absent. If he seems absent at some time or place, this is so only from the side of beings; it is not so for the Buddha. Thus the sutra speaks of long life to the utmost yet also says that buddhahood was attained at Gayā. To say that Gayā is the place of awakening does not make the present Gayā a real beginning. If Gayā is not fixed, how could the long duration spoken of elsewhere alone be fixed as real? In this way long and short dissolve, while long and short also constantly remain according to conditions.”

II. The Two Attachments to Permanence and Impermanence, and Four Explanations

Earlier exegetes, such as those just listed, generally used immeasurability to explain that the Buddha’s lifespan is permanent. Recent exegetes generally say instead that because lifespan can be measured, although in the past it exceeded the sands of the Ganges and in the future doubles that number, it ultimately reaches a limit and is therefore impermanent.

Another perplexed person clings to the chapter title and objects: “Since this chapter speaks of lifespan and measure, and measure is impermanent, how can it be interpreted as permanence?”

The reply is this: the title directly says only “lifespan and measure.” It does not say that lifespan is necessarily measurable, nor that it is necessarily immeasurable. You interpret it as impermanent and another interprets it as permanent—what fault lies in the title itself? Like a snipe and clam gripping one another, the two schools remain mutually attached. The root treatise makes use of the vulnerability in their stalemate to show that four explanations are required.

First, something is actually measurable but spoken of as immeasurable, as in the Amitābha Sutra. Second, it is actually immeasurable but spoken of as measurable, as in this chapter and the Golden Light Sutra. Third, it is actually immeasurable and spoken of as immeasurable, as when the Nirvāṇa Sutra says that only a buddha with a buddha can fully see the immeasurability of the Buddha’s lifespan. Fourth, it is actually measurable and spoken of as measurable, as when the Buddha manifests eighty years and announces extinction. The chapter text possesses all four meanings; how could one accept only one and deny the other three?

III. Do the Scriptures’ Teachings of Permanence Ultimately Agree or Differ?

Someone asks: If the Lifespan chapter teaches permanence, how does it differ from the Nirvāṇa Sutra?

The present text first asks in return: If that is the question, how does the one vehicle in the Lotus Sutra differ from the one vehicle in the Śrīmālādevī Sūtra? 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

If a differentiated answer is given, the Lotus Sutra briefly explains permanence, while the Nirvāṇa Sutra explains it extensively. The Śrīmālādevī Sūtra directly teaches the one vehicle in order to reveal it, while the Lotus Sutra first gathers the three vehicles and thereby reveals the One. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Someone further asks: If recent attainment is a skillful manifestation and distant attainment is real, would the Avataṃsaka Sutra’s attainment of buddhahood at the site of quiescence and the Great Sutra’s transcendence of the preceding nine kalpas not both become skillful means? If so, after the Lotus Sutra has revealed the distant, why does the Bodhisattva Never Disparaging later appear recent again? Would not the Lotus Sutra, after revealing the distant, have become skillful means once more?

By the same inference, after gathering the three into the One, it should again be said that there was no gathering of the three into the One. If opening the three to reveal the One is the common path of all buddhas, opening the near and revealing the distant should also be the common path of all buddhas. If so, all buddhas should be thus, not Śākyamuni alone. If only Śākyamuni were thus, the foregoing meanings would collapse.

The answer says: The sutra states that this is my skillful means and that all buddhas are likewise. After hearing the Lifespan chapter, the bodhisattvas also vow that when they become buddhas in the future, they too will teach lifespan in the same way. This shows that the path practiced by the buddhas is the same; one cannot insist that one buddha attained recently while another attained distantly. One should therefore know that the scripture entrusts what is without beginning and end, without near and distant, to reveal the permanent abiding of the Dharma body; when it speaks of beginning and end, near and distant, it discusses the manifested Trace of the response body. Looking at the scriptures through this meaning, their conditions may differ but their ultimate referent does not. Once the scriptures have been understood in this way, the partial accounts of the masters should not in turn be taken as one’s teacher.

IV. What Scriptural Basis Supports Permanence?

Someone asks: Permanence may perhaps be inferred from the principle, but if scriptural text is demanded, what is its basis?

The answer says: Those who understand value the principle disclosed by the text, while those in darkness guard only its words. One should follow the verbal teaching that conveys meaning and realize the purport to which it points; this is the true intent of the teaching. If one clings only to chaff and repeatedly asks how to cross a bridge, what benefit is there?

Moreover, verbal teaching is originally established for the conditions of beings; because conditions differ, teachings differ. Sometimes the Buddha speaks according to what beings desire, sometimes according to what is suitable, sometimes as a counteractive, and sometimes to enable awakening. Once one has awakened and arrived, why continue wandering back and forth among intersecting paths? Thus an ancient scripture says that nirvāṇa is the true Dharma treasure and beings enter it through various gateways. This is exactly the meaning.

Scriptural passages also differ in abundance. Because the Nirvāṇa Sutra takes future permanence as its purport, it says much about it; because it does not take buddhahood attained in the distant past as its purport, it says less. If one follows the many passages and discards the few, that is Māra’s teaching, not the Buddha’s.

The present sutra takes buddhahood attained in the distant past as its purport and therefore says much about reducing innumerable worlds to dust particles; it says less about future permanence. If one again follows the many and discards the few, one’s head will split into seven pieces like the branch of an arjaka tree. A sovereign’s command cannot be disobeyed whether it contains many words or few; disobedience incurs guilt.

The Skillful Means chapter says that the characteristics of the world constantly abide, that the Buddha knew this at the site of awakening, and that the Guide afterward taught it through skillful means. This text speaks of future permanent abiding without extinction. The present chapter also says that the Buddha constantly abides here and is constantly on Vulture Peak and in other dwelling places. The Contemplation of Samantabhadra says that the Buddha’s dwelling is the place accomplished through the pāramitā of permanence and established through the pāramitā of self. Passages teaching permanence are by no means scarce. This sutra also clarifies the Dharma body throughout; how could the Dharma body not be permanent?

Someone asks again: Since the Dharma body has been explained, the three virtues should also be discussed.

The answer says: Are not the two wisdoms, provisional and real, precisely prajñā? Are not the manifestations of past, present, and future precisely liberation? The true mark and original ground are precisely the Dharma body. These are the explicit passages for the three virtues of prajñā, liberation, and Dharma body.

V. The Three Terms Tathāgata, Lifespan, and Measure

The chapter title is now explained.

“Tathāgata” is the common name of all buddhas of the ten directions and three periods, of the two buddhas and three buddhas, and of the Buddha of the Origin and the Buddha of the Trace. “Lifespan and measure” means explaining and measuring the qualities of all these buddhas. The present chapter principally measures and explains the qualities of the three buddhas of the original ground and is therefore called the “Lifespan of the Tathāgata” chapter.

Tathāgata has many meanings. For the moment, two and three Tathāgatas are explained; the remaining meanings may be understood by analogy.

VI. Two Tathāgatas: True Body and Response Body

First are the two Tathāgatas. The Satyasiddhi Treatise says: “He rides the path of suchness as it really is and comes to accomplish perfect awakening; therefore he is called Tathāgata.”

Here, riding is wisdom conforming to the suchness-object; real is the suchness-object; path is cause, and awakening is fruit. If only the wisdom that rides were discussed, there would be no suchness-object to be known. If only the real object were clarified, there would be no suchness-wisdom capable of knowing it. Only when object and wisdom unite can there be cause and fruit: illumination of the object before its source is exhausted is called cause, and exhausting the source is fruit. The meanings of path and awakening are thereby established. This is riding the path of suchness as it really is and coming to accomplish perfect awakening—the Tathāgata of the true body.

To come into the desire, form, and formless realms through wisdom corresponding to reality, riding the path of reality and manifesting the accomplishment of perfect awakening, is the Tathāgata of the response body.

VII. Three Tathāgatas: Dharma Body, Reward Body, and Response Body

Next are the three Tathāgatas. The Mahāprajñāpāramitā Treatise says: “Understanding in accordance with the true mark of all dharmas and speaking in accordance with the true mark of all dharmas—therefore he is called Tathāgata.”

“Thus” is the suchness-object of Dharma. It is neither cause nor fruit. Whether or not a buddha appears, the nature and characteristics of all dharmas constantly remain as they are; pervading every place without difference, this is called “thus.” Unmoving yet arriving is called “come.” Speaking with reference to this is the Tathāgata of the Dharma body.

Wisdom corresponding to the suchness-object of Dharma rides the real path of suchness and comes to accomplish wondrous awakening. Wisdom accords with principle; from the side of principle it is called “thus,” and from the side of wisdom it is called “come.” This is the Tathāgata of the reward body. Thus the treatise says that understanding according to the Dharma’s characteristics is called Tathāgata.

When the suchness-object and suchness-wisdom unite, he can manifest the accomplishment of perfect awakening everywhere. Just as mercury combined with true gold can coat images of every color, qualities combined with the Dharma body can appear responsively everywhere. Manifesting the eight marks of attaining the Way and turning the wondrous Dharma wheel is the Tathāgata of the response body. Thus the treatise says that speaking according to the Dharma’s characteristics is called Tathāgata.

The Tathāgata of the Dharma body is named Vairocana, translated as “Pervading All Places.” The Tathāgata of the reward body is named Rocana, translated as “Pure and Full.” The Tathāgata of the response body is named Śākyamuni, translated as “Crossing the Scorching Reef.” Of these three Tathāgatas, none can be taken alone.

The Great Sutra says that the Dharma body alone is not great nirvāṇa, prajñā alone is not great nirvāṇa, and liberation alone is not great nirvāṇa. Only when all three dharmas are complete are they called the secret treasury and named great nirvāṇa. The three cannot be made into one, nor into three separate things; they cannot be arranged vertically or horizontally. Only the perfect survey of all three dharmas establishes the provisional name Tathāgata.

The Brahmā’s Net Sutra concludes the teaching of the Avataṃsaka: it takes the lotus platform as Origin and the lotus leaves as Trace, speaking thus for one class of conditions, yet Origin and Trace cannot be separated. The Sutra for Resolving Doubts During the Semblance Dharma concludes the Nirvāṇa Sutra: beings sometimes see Śākyamuni as Vairocana and sometimes as Rocana. Their earlier conditions differ and therefore what they see differs; the Buddha himself is not split into three. The Contemplation of Samantabhadra concludes the Lotus Sutra: it says that Śākyamuni is named Vairocana. These are different names for the same Buddha, not different bodies. Gathering the intent of the scriptures, one should know clearly that the three buddhas are neither one nor different.

VIII. Although the Chapter Does Not State Their Names, It Possesses the Meanings of the Three Buddhas

Someone asks: This chapter does not list the names of the three buddhas. Why can it be explained in this way?

The answer says: Although it does not state their names, it possesses their meanings.

The scripture says that it is neither thus nor different and that it is not as beings in the three realms see the three realms. This is not a partial “thus” but reveals the perfect “thus,” and is the meaning of the Tathāgata of the Dharma body.

The scripture also says that the Tathāgata knows and sees the characteristics of the three realms as they really are. This is suchness-wisdom corresponding to the suchness-object; the knowledge and vision of knowledge of all modes are the Buddha eye. This is the meaning of the Tathāgata of the reward body.

The scripture further says that the Buddha sometimes shows his own body and affairs and sometimes shows the bodies and affairs of others. This is the meaning of the Tathāgata of the response body.

If one speaks only of the three Tathāgatas as inherent virtues, they become horizontal. If one speaks only of the three as cultivated virtues, they become vertical. Placing Dharma first, reward second, and response third also makes them vertical. The present scripture perfectly teaches the three Tathāgatas as neither vertical nor horizontal. Even the vertically or horizontally arranged three Tathāgatas are not the present meaning; how much less the Tathāgatas taught in the Tripiṭaka and Shared teachings?

Scriptures before the Lotus also spoke of the Perfect Tathāgata, but those teachings still belonged to the manifested Trace. The three Tathāgatas now clarified by opening the Trace and revealing the Origin differ permanently from those in other scriptures.

The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra says that, in order to show the accomplishment of unsurpassed great awakening, three kinds of awakening are revealed. First is the awakening of the response and transformation buddha, manifested according to what beings should see, as when the sutra says that the Buddha left the Śākya palace. Second is the awakening of the reward buddha: the ten grounds are fulfilled and permanent nirvāṇa is attained, as when the sutra says that the Buddha actually attained buddhahood immeasurable and boundless kalpas ago. Third is the awakening of the Dharma buddha, the unchanging pure nirvāṇa of tathāgata-garbha, as when the sutra says that the Tathāgata knows and sees the characteristics of the three realms as they really are. The scripture possesses their meanings and the treatise states their names. Without the preceding explanation, how could scripture and treatise be brought into convergence?

IX. Three Meanings of Lifespan, Measure, and Three Lives

Next, “lifespan and measure” are explained.

“Lifespan” has the meaning of receiving and sustaining without interruption. First, true suchness does not obstruct any dharma and is therefore called receiving. Second, object and wisdom correspond and are therefore called receiving. Third, the hundred-year lifespan obtained as the retribution of a single period continues without interruption and is therefore called receiving. The three meanings must not be conflated.

“Measure” means explanatory measurement. The word applies across multiple circumstances and has no fixed, exclusive basis. The Dharma Tathāgata is measured and explained through principle as life; the reward Tathāgata through wisdom as life; the response Tathāgata through the principle of corresponding to beings’ conditions as life. These three lives can be explained and measured as measurable, immeasurable, or neither measurable nor immeasurable.

For the Tathāgata of the Dharma body, principle serves as life: whether or not a buddha appears, nature and characteristics constantly remain as they are. It is discussed neither in terms of object and wisdom corresponding nor in terms of earlier and later continuity, so it can be called neither measurable nor immeasurable. The scripture’s “neither thus nor different, neither false nor real” precisely measures and explains the Dharma body’s life according to principle.

For the Tathāgata of the reward body, wisdom serves as life: suchness-wisdom conforms to the suchness-object; the object gives rise to wisdom as reward, and wisdom merges with the object as receiving. Since the object is immeasurable and boundless, constantly abiding and never becoming extinct, wisdom is likewise. It is like a lid corresponding to the size of its box. The scripture says that the Buddha’s wisdom-power is thus, attained through long cultivation, that its wisdom-light shines without measure, and that its lifespan endures for innumerable kalpas. This measures and explains the wisdom-life of the Tathāgata of the reward body.

For the Tathāgata of the response body, correspondence with conditions serves as life: when beings’ conditions are long, the response body manifests the same length; when their conditions are short, it manifests the same brevity. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 Long and short arise from the conditions of the beings there; what fixed relation do they have to the response body itself? The text says that he repeatedly manifests birth and repeatedly manifests extinction, and at times declares different names and greater or lesser ages. This measures and explains the condition-corresponding life of the response buddha.

X. The First Quartet: Measure and Immeasurability

The meaning is now recast at another level.

First, the Dharma body is neither measure nor immeasurability. Second, the reward body is measurable before the vajra mind and immeasurable after passing beyond the vajra mind. Third, the response body is measurable when manifested according to conditions. Fourth, because the function of response continues without interruption, it is immeasurable.

In the general explanatory measure, three of the four propositions belong to sages and one to ordinary beings. To judge both measurability and impermanence indiscriminately as meanings of the Buddha cannot stand. The former accounts merely imposed the two slanders of increase and decrease upon the Buddha. If that is not Māra’s teaching, what is it?

XI. The Second Quartet: Permanence and the Remaining Propositions

The meaning of the four propositions of measure has been revealed. For those who still do not understand, the four propositions beginning with permanence are used for further analysis: first they are assigned separately, then explained universally of each body.

In the separate assignment, first is neither permanent nor impermanent: the ultimate principle of the double negation is the Dharma body. Second is permanent: this is the reward body. Reward-wisdom united with its object is actually neither simply permanent nor impermanent, but here its right wisdom is taken as perfect, unborn and unextinguished, and beyond the stage before the vajra mind; hence permanence is taken as the reward body. Third is both permanent and impermanent: this is the response body. Its responsive function is inexhaustible and therefore also permanent; it repeatedly announces nirvāṇa and is therefore also impermanent. Fourth is impermanent: the progressive increase of wisdom’s function before the vajra mind, down to ordinary beings’ births, deaths, appearances, and disappearances, all belong to impermanence.

Thus each of the three buddhas receives one proposition and ordinary beings share one. This is a differentiated assignment according to the Distinct Teaching.

If explained universally and perfectly, every Tathāgata possesses all four propositions.

The four propositions of the Dharma body: neither permanent nor impermanent means simultaneously breaking the inverted views of ordinary beings and sages; permanent means permanent like open space; impermanent means lacking the ordinary beings’ inversion of birth and death; both permanent and impermanent means quiescent and yet illuminating both.

The four propositions of the reward body: neither permanent nor impermanent means wisdom merging with the object; permanent means surpassing the two vehicles; impermanent means lacking the inversion of birth and death; both permanent and impermanent means being able to illuminate both.

The four propositions of the response body: neither permanent nor impermanent means neither merely reward body nor a saṃsāric ordinary body; permanent means constantly corresponding in response; impermanent means corresponding with impermanent conditions; both permanent and impermanent means preserving both aspects.

Since ordinary beings receive the one proposition of impermanence in the separate explanation, they too may universally be said to possess four propositions. Yet ordinary beings possess only the inherent principle and do not yet possess even the names of the four propositions, much less their actual practice and function. This can be understood from what precedes without awaiting further explanation.

One body is the three bodies, yet it is neither a single body nor mutually separate bodies. One should know that the body of one Buddha possesses the lifespan qualities of every body. As beings elicit manifestations according to conditions, the long and short they see differ.

XII. Winter, Spring, Summer, and Three Similes

The Great Sutra says that ordinary beings and the two vehicles see the Buddha’s lifespan like a winter day, bodhisattvas see it like a spring day, and only a buddha seeing a buddha can see a lifespan immeasurable like a summer day.

Why is this? Ordinary beings stand on ground wholly covered by obstruction, dimmed by cataracts. Although the two vehicles of the Tripiṭaka and Shared teachings have severed the four abiding delusions, they have not seen the middle way. Even when they leave behind fragmentary birth and death and receive a body of Dharma-nature, they have not broken ignorance. What they attend upon in that land is still the superior response body. Thus the two vehicles see only a winter day.

When bodhisattvas have not yet ascended to a ground or entered an abode, what they see is the same as before. If they have broken through one part of ignorance and received one part of the Dharma body, a permissive designation grants that they see the lifespan of the reward body; a stricter withdrawal says that it remains only the superior response body. Because they have not exhausted the source of the reward body or reached the ultimate of Dharma-nature, the Buddha’s lifespan they see is still like a spring day.

Only a buddha with a buddha exhausts Dharma-nature and its source; the lifespan of the Dharma body they see is like a summer day.

The Great Sutra also gives three similes. First, open space is foremost among all permanent dharmas, and the Tathāgata is foremost among all lifespans. This compares the Dharma body’s lifespan, without beginning or end and with nature and characteristics limpidly settled, as unlike response and reward. Second, four rivers all enter the great sea. This compares the myriad good deeds cultivated for the reward body, all of which elicit the Buddha’s reward and enter the sea of lifespan. Third, Lake Anavatapta sends forth four great rivers. This compares the response body’s lifespan emerging from the Dharma and reward bodies and following the long and short spans of beings.

The explanatory measurement made by this chapter universally clarifies all three bodies; in its specific referent, however, its center is the reward body. Why? Because the meaning is convenient and the text converges.

“Convenient in meaning” means that the wisdom of the reward body can merge upward and accord downward, and that the Dharma, reward, and response bodies are thereby fully complete. “Convergence in the text” means that the sutra says the Buddha attained buddhahood an immensely distant time ago and can therefore benefit beings in past, present, and future. What is attained is the Dharma body; what attains is the reward body; because Dharma and reward unite, beings can be benefited. Thus the text converges. Inferred from these points, the chapter’s proper intent is to discuss the qualities of the reward-body Buddha.

XIII. Multiple Accounts of Origin and Trace

Moreover, the manifold qualities of the Dharma, reward, and response bodies were all long accomplished beneath the tree at the original-time site of awakening; this is called Origin. The three bodies manifested as accomplished during the intermediate period and today at the site of quiescence are called Trace.

In other scriptures’ accounts of Origin and Trace, the Dharma and reward bodies accomplished at the site of quiescence are Origin, and the superior and inferior response bodies arising from them are Trace. The present scripture instead calls all three bodies accomplished at the site of quiescence and during the intermediate period Trace, and calls the three bodies attained at the site of awakening in the distant original past Origin. It therefore differs from the other scriptures.

An ancient worthy says: “Without Origin, there is no basis for extending the Trace; without Trace, there is no means to reveal the Origin. Though Origin and Trace differ, they are an inconceivable unity.” The root treatise points out that Master Sengzhao’s statement originally refers to the Origin at the site of quiescence.

Moreover, there are several accounts of Origin and Trace at the site of quiescence.

First, nirvāṇa can be taken as Origin and response arising from reality as Trace. Both Trace and Origin are empty and both words and thought are cut off; therefore they are called an inconceivable unity.

Second, the conventional can be taken as Origin and response arising from the conventional as Trace. Trace and Origin are both profound and vast, and those at lower stages cannot reach their bounds through words or thought; therefore they are called an inconceivable unity.

Third, the middle can be taken as Origin and response arising from the middle as Trace. In both Trace and Origin, the path of language is cut off and the activity of mind extinguished; therefore they are called an inconceivable unity.

Moreover, these three are neither three nor one. Neither three nor one is Origin, while appearing as three and one is Trace. In both, the path of language is cut off and the activity of mind extinguished, and so they are an inconceivable unity.

It is not known which Origin and Trace the other masters designate as an inconceivable unity. The root text next says “now gathering into four rounds.” These four rounds still concern only the inconceivable unity within the Trace; the present chapter points distantly to the three and four inconceivable rounds of the original ground as Origin. From that Origin it extends the Trace, and by means of that Trace it reveals the Origin. Though Origin and Trace differ, they are an inconceivable unity. How could Origin and Trace of this kind fail to differ from the various scriptures? How could they fail to differ from the other masters?

XIV. Why Are the Various Stages and Practices All Gathered into the Sea of Lifespan?

Someone asks: The scriptures each explain stages and practices, some extensively and some briefly. The Avataṃsaka Sutra speaks of forty-one stages, and the Jeweled Necklace Sutra of fifty-two; their names and meanings are extensive. The present scripture contains none of this from beginning to end. How can it be said to differ from them?

The answer says: Suppose people in the world cultivate various enterprises, accumulate various treasures, and seek various ranks. If they have no life, of what use are property and rank?

The Great Sutra says: Suppose an elder has a son. A physiognomist predicts that the child bears the marks of a short life and cannot inherit the family estate. Once the parents know this, they disregard him like grass.

Dharma gates are likewise. Cultivating various causes, attaining various fruits, manifesting various supernormal powers, transforming various beings, teaching various dharmas, and liberating various persons—the six are successively gathered into the sea of the Tathāgata’s lifespan. The essentials within the sea are Dharma-nature, wisdom, and response. At the end the root treatise also places beside them throat, lapel, eye, and xi (“shoe-thong”), asking rhetorically how the essentials indicated by the two lists could differ.

壽量品 · 廣開近顯遠(誡信・正答長行)The Lifespan of the Tathāgata · Extensively Opening the Near to Reveal the Distant: Admonition to Believe and the Main Reply in Prose

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、先誡信,後正答

廣泛開顯由近時成佛而顯出久遠成佛,經文分成兩部分:第一是告誡大眾信受,第二是正式回答。佛所發出的旨意名為誡,大眾領受不疑名為信。這一段有三次告誡、三次請求;三請以後又再請,佛也再誡,所以在這裡成為四請、四誡。前面的迹門有三請、一誡,前後合起來便是五誡、七請。這是因將要宣說極其奇特的大事,所以如此殷勤、鄭重。

『誠』是忠誠,『諦』是審察真實;言語不欺騙眾生,所說便到達真實。過去向七種方便之機所說,是隨順他們心意的話,並不是把誠實要旨直接告訴他們;如今佛隨自己的心意說話,把最重要的真實顯示出來,所以稱為『誠諦』。

菩薩既然奉受這樣誠懇的告誡,便不敢生起疑惑;他們聽聞以後必定取信,領受佛的誠實之言。

二、正答的總科與所破近情

正式回答有長行與偈頌。長行又分法說與譬說。法說再分兩部分:第一,說如來在過去、現在、未來利益眾生;第二,總結一切所說都不虛妄。

眾生執著於近時,只看見佛今生八十年的示現,不知道佛過去已經成佛久遠,也不知道未來常住不滅。因此,本論依三世來開除近執、顯示久遠。這種利益不只是釋迦佛如此,諸佛也都如此,所以末後總結皆實不虛。法說中直接說到未來的文字很少,譬說與偈頌中則較多〔以下略記〕。

過去利益眾生的文字分成兩部分。第一,從如來祕密以下,顯出眾生執著近時的情見;第二,從然善男子以下,破除近執而顯示久遠。第一部分又分三層:先顯出眾生所迷的法,再顯出能迷的眾生,最後顯出他們迷失久遠而生起的看法。

所謂『祕密』:一身就是三身,名為祕;三身就是一身,名為密。又可以說,過去沒有宣說,名為祕;只有佛自己知道,名為密。

所謂『神通之力』,是三身的作用。『神』是天然不動之理,也就是法性身;『通』是沒有阻礙、不可思議的智慧,也就是報身;『力』是功能運用自在,也就是應身。

佛在過去、現在、未來同樣都具三身,只是在先前各種教說中把它祕而不傳。因此,一切世間的天、人、阿修羅,都以為今日佛才在菩提樹下得到這三身,於是執著近時而懷疑久遠。

本門這一段不再特別說到二乘,只對菩薩說。菩薩可以攝在天、人、阿修羅三種善趣之中;其餘三惡趣眾生罪重、根鈍、智慧少,不知道生起這種以為佛始成的看法。所以《大品般若》只說大乘勝過天、人、阿修羅,也沒有說三惡趣。

菩薩有三類:從下方踊出的菩薩、從其他世界而來的菩薩,以及本來住在娑婆世界的菩薩。下方菩薩是佛在本時所教化的,所以沒有執著近時的看法。他方與舊住菩薩又各有兩類。

第一類,是從法身相應而生的菩薩。他們過去世早已證得無生,或者先前已聽過開迹顯本;即使當時沒有聽到,這一期果報身命終而受法性身時,在法身之地也自然應當聽到久遠之說。因此,這一類菩薩多半沒有執著近時的看法。

第二類,是今生才證得無生忍,以及尚未證得無生忍的菩薩。這些菩薩都有以為佛近時始成的看法。

從然善男子,我實成佛已來以下,是第二部分:破除執著、遣除迷惑,以顯示久遠根本。上文誠諦的告誡,所要宣說的正是這件事。這一部分又分兩層:先顯示久遠,再從自從是來以下,說過去利益眾生所相應的方式。

顯示久遠又有兩層:第一直接依法義顯遠,第二舉譬喻格量法說。佛成道以來已極其久遠,眾生以為祂只在伽耶近時成道的看法便被破除。破近顯遠大略有十層意思,詳見《玄義》〔以下略記〕。這裡正面採用的是破近顯遠:破除以為近時成佛的情見,廢除只說近成的教法,而顯示久遠。

三、以塵界格量久遠

塵界譬分成三段:第一舉譬發問,第二由彌勒等回答,第三把譬喻合回法義,以顯出成佛以來的久遠。

其他經典有時以不可說的數量或塵沙為譬喻,已經表示數目極多;和眼前的譬相比,那些譬仍然較少。只是把微塵放下、使它落在其中的世界,數目已不可說;何況沒有放下微塵的那些世界,怎麼可能說得盡?放塵與不放塵的世界尚且不可說,把所有放塵與不放塵的世界再磨成微塵,那些微塵數又怎麼能說?何況佛成道以來還超過這一切數目,哪裡能夠說盡?

從彌勒等共同回答以下,是第二段。回答中舉出三類人都不能知道這個數目:聲聞、辟支佛以無漏智慧不能知,住不退轉地的菩薩也不能知,彌勒等自己同樣不能知。第三段把譬喻合回佛壽,依經文即可明白。

四、過去益物的處所與拂疑

從自從是來以下,說過去利益眾生所相應的方式,又分三層:第一,說明利益眾生的處所;第二,拂除依過去示現而生起的疑惑;第三,從若有眾生來至我所以下,正式說明相應眾生之機而施益。

為什麼必須說明處所?上面所舉譬喻表示時間極其久遠,眾生便會問:佛這樣久遠以來住在何處?所以佛說,祂一直在這個娑婆世界,也在其他國土作佛事、利益眾生。

從於是中間以下,是拂除對過去示現的疑惑。疑惑有因、有果:過去教說曾說佛在許多地方修菩薩因,也說祂在許多地方得到授記,這便使眾生對因果生疑。現在要拂除這些疑惑:指出然燈佛,是拂除對因的疑惑;又說中間諸佛入於涅槃,是拂除對果的疑惑。這一類因果並不只一條,都是佛方便分別而說,不是把久遠本地直接說出,所以稱為拂疑。

有人解釋:佛方便說然燈佛是自己的老師,實際上然燈佛卻是釋迦所現;釋迦本來不生而示現出生,本來不滅而示現入滅,所以經中又說那位佛入於涅槃。

智者說,這種解釋不對,只應採取前面的解釋。為什麼?然燈佛當時教化機緣成熟,所以示現佛身教化眾生;釋迦當時自己的成佛機緣還沒有成熟,只作菩薩,從然燈佛得到授記。得到授記含有果的意義,修行各種行門則是因,這樣已足以消解經文。

經文所說的『其』,只是泛指中間施行教化的人,並不是專指然燈佛。又,中間利益眾生本來就有形、聲兩種利益。說釋迦曾遇然燈佛,表示佛身出現而帶來形益;又說中間的佛入於涅槃,表示那位佛滅後,釋迦曾幫助祂弘揚教化,因而有聲益。如此,形益與聲益都仍屬中間修因之事。

既然有形、聲的出現,有生便必有死,死便名為入涅槃;這只是在那一期示現中稱為果,不能因此便說釋迦在中間早已證成佛果。為什麼?《法華經》以前尚未宣說釋迦早已成佛,眾生怎麼會先有關於祂早已證得佛果的疑惑?

舊解又認為然燈佛是釋迦所現,這也不是正確解釋。《法華經》以前的經典既沒有說釋迦往昔早已成佛,哪一部教說曾立然燈佛是釋迦所現,以致現在需要拂除這種疑惑?

五、佛眼觀機與過去形聲兩益

從若有眾生來至我所以下,是第三層,正式說過去利益眾生所相應的方式,又分兩部分:第一是眾生之感與佛的回應,第二是佛依機施行教化。

『來到我這裡』,是說過去眾生具有漸、頓兩類根機,在幽微之中感扣法身。『以佛眼觀察』,是說佛早已成道,以佛眼鑑察眾生,沒有絲毫遺漏差錯;接著將現起劣、勝兩種應身來利益他們。

眾生的善機有兩種力量:第一,能感得人、天的花報;第二,能感得佛道的果報。若只用法眼觀察,可以知道萬種善行,依善行輕重各得相應花報,卻不能究竟知道他們終將得到一切種智的果報。若用佛眼,便能圓滿照見一切善法,知道它們的開始與終極。

這部經一向說佛眼觀察,知道眾生的一切善行最後都能得到佛果,這正是佛為一大事出現世間的本意。

『信等諸根』,是信、進、念、定、慧五根。慧根就是了因,其餘四根就是緣因。這兩類善根各有利、鈍,通攝漸、頓兩類機緣。頓機之中也有利、鈍,就是圓教、別教的根機;漸機之中也有利、鈍,就是藏教、通教的根機。又可以相對來說,小乘根是鈍,大乘根是利;也可以再相對來說,小乘根是利,人天乘根是鈍。

十法界眾生所有善根的利鈍都可以成為感佛之機,惡法則不用,因為惡法不是緣因、了因。如來全都照見十法界的善機,隨其所應得度,以形體示現與音聲說法利益他們。

從處處自說以下,正式說佛依機示現教化,又分兩部分:先說形、聲的利益,後說眾生得到利益而歡喜。形益又分兩層:先說本來不生而示現出生,次說本來不滅而示現入滅。

佛既示現形體,便有相應的名字,以名字召喚所指的形體。眾生根機有優、有劣,佛所現之形便有勝、有負;形體不同,名字也不同。『年紀大小』就是形相勝、負:勝的名為勝應,負的名為劣應。

名字不同,也表示所現兩種佛身的壽命或有量、或無量。『處處』若從縱向說,是過去在不同國土修因;若從橫向說,是十方各國土。依縱向處所而論,也有生身、法身的名字不同,例如今日應身與過去然燈佛等名字不同;依橫向國土而論,同樣有生身、法身的名字不同,例如今日佛與十方分身諸佛不同,也如《華嚴經》列出釋迦的多種異名。

各部經典又說佛有三身,名字不同,名字所召的法體也各異:有時稱毘盧遮那,有時稱盧舍那,有時稱釋迦;法身佛又可稱如如、實相、第一義、般若、楞嚴等。這是就示現佛法界身的名字不同而說。若示現其餘九法界之身,名字更無量無邊,可以依此推知。

『年紀大小』又說壽命長短,隨上面所現的應身而異。有時說壽命二萬年,如迦葉佛時;有時說壽命八萬年,如彌勒佛時。相互傳說的大小,縱向、橫向都可以知道。

若依法身、報身、應身來辨壽命大小,詳見《玄義》〔以下略記〕。可以把三身彼此相望而辨大小,也可以說三身各別便是小、合起來說便是大,三點的例子也是如此〔以下略記〕。這些全都依眾生所應得度,為他們示現相應身形與壽命長短。

『也示現說將入涅槃』,是說應當因佛入滅而得度的人,佛便示現滅度,使他們心生戀慕、仰望而得到解脫。這層意思在後面的譬說中還會出現。

『又以種種方便說微妙法』,是聲音言教的利益。示現較小的身形與較短的壽命,便說漸次之教,所以稱種種方便;示現廣大的身形與長遠的壽命,便說頓法,所以稱說微妙法。雖然最初以漸法引導,最後仍使眾生進入大乘,所以經文說都令眾生歡喜。

這份歡喜就是眾生受教化而得到利益。佛依世界、為人、對治、第一義四悉檀施行形、聲兩種利益,眾生也得到四種利益。說法契合根機便歡喜,違背根機便苦惱。下文所說皆實不虛,正是這個意思。

六、現在師子奮迅益物

從諸善男子,如來見諸眾生以下,是如來現在以師子奮迅三昧利益眾生。這種三昧有十種功德。

第一,分別其他眾生的諸根成熟或尚未成熟、清淨或尚未清淨。

第二,以如來法輪教導尚未得度的人,使他們全都進入佛的法與律。

第三,廣大誓願遍滿十方,音聲也是如此;有時一音遍滿,有時百千萬種音聲全都遍滿,普遍教導各類眾生。

第四,轉動無上法輪,教化眾生,使他們都取得滅度;其他人不能轉,只有佛能轉。

第五,能示現出家、剃髮、持守清淨戒律,也能使他人樂於如此行持。

第六,根性與修行都契合空理。

第七,放出光明,示現入滅;或者示現仍在,或者示現亡滅;或者示現相好,或者隱藏相好。

第八,降伏煩惱魔、陰魔、死魔、天子魔。

第九,使他人得入最重要的法義,使止與觀得到增長。

第十,具足以上十善的根本,也就是身三善、口四善等〔以下略記〕。

這段文字分兩部分:第一說眾生根機感佛,第二說佛依機示現教化。『如來見』就是佛眼照見;『眾生樂於小法』就是佛所照見的根機。

《華嚴經》大意說:大眾雖已清淨,其餘樂小法的人若聽到甚深之事,可能生起疑惑與悔恨,長夜受到衰損苦惱;佛憐愍這些人,所以暫時默然。偈中又說:其餘修行不久、智慧尚未明了的人,依識而不依智,聽聞以後生起憂悔,將會墜入惡道;念及此事,所以不說。

按那部經的會中沒有聲聞二乘,所謂樂小法,只指修行未久的人。師說,樂小也不是專指小乘人,而是把喜歡近時成佛之說的人稱為樂小。

現在作通說。第一,貪愛二十五有,是人、天之機;這種人來到佛所,名為樂小法。第二,貪著涅槃,只求自己解脫,是二乘之機;這種人來到佛所,也名為樂小法。第三,樂於漸次而紆迴地修佛道,是三類菩薩之機;這種人來到佛所,也名為樂小法。

『德薄』,是緣因、了因兩種善法的作用微弱。下文以幼小、尚未有所知的孩子作比。『垢重』,是見惑、思惑尚未斷除。

七、為何連大機也通名樂小

有人問:佛本來不生而示現出生,具足施行頓、漸兩類教化。七種方便等人固然可名樂小法;佛以圓頓之法回應眾生時,所應當是樂大法的人,為什麼也一概判為樂小法?

回答說:前面只略說其意,現在廣作解釋,共有四義。

第一,依過去時說。眾生雖曾發大心,卻不能專一精進,多半貪著惡劣欲樂,不能超出世間,所以把貪著弊欲名為樂小法。

第二,依現在說。佛尚未出現世間時,諸天、諸人雖具有大乘根機,心卻染著世間欲樂,又執著邪見,所以名為樂小法。這兩層意思,與後面良醫譬中服毒的孩子宛轉於地相同。

第三,依修行說。有人雖不再愛樂三界的弊欲小法,卻樂於三乘的灰斷,仍名樂小法;有人雖不樂於三乘近果,卻樂於經歷次第、分別紆迴地修一乘,不能在一心中圓頓普修,也名樂小。以上三義都依因門說樂小法。

第四,依果門說。眾生喜歡聽佛近時成道的較小之說,只願聽祂走出釋氏宮、才證菩提,不願聽成佛長遠久大的道,所以名為樂小。

這些偏小之心不是今天才出現。若他們先前便愛樂久遠大法,佛就不會向他們說自己剛剛成道。佛之所以說始成,正是為了樂小法的人。

八、現在非生現生與形聲利益

從為是人說以下,是第二部分現在應化,又分兩層:第一,本來不生而示現出生;第二,本來不滅而示現入滅。現生部分又分示現出生及利益;示現出生本身再分現生與非生。現生,是在示現之中顯出出生;非生,是說祂並不是今天才初次出生、成道。

佛為樂小、德薄、垢重的人說自己今生才證菩提。前面說利、鈍兩種根機來感法身,現在佛便現出勝、劣兩種應身:劣應回應鈍根,勝應回應利根。兩種應身都各有生身之生、法身之生。

劣應的生身之生,是以正慧寄託母胎,出生後行走七步,如迦旃延子所述;從入胎、出生,直到六年苦行以前,都名為生身之生。劣應的法身之生,是以三十四心斷盡煩惱與習氣,得到戒、定、慧、解脫、解脫知見五分法身。

勝應的生身之生,如《華嚴經》《大經》等所說:佛與諸菩薩同處摩耶夫人胎中,常說大乘;出生後向十方各行七步,這名為生身之生。勝應的法身之生,是在寂滅道場,於金剛後心斷盡無明,得到與妙覺相應的智慧,窮盡照見法性,萬德與一切種智圓滿明淨、普遍具足。

『出家』,依劣應說,是出離分段生死之家;依勝應說,是出離分段、變易兩種生死之家。『得到菩提』,依劣應說,是由有作四諦所發的無漏盡智、無生智,名為菩提;依勝應說,是照見三諦一實之道,以一切種智名為菩提。

從然而我實成以下,說明佛的根本實際上不是今日始生。天、人、阿修羅看見勝、劣兩應各有生身、法身之生,便以為佛今天才開始得到這些。事實並非如此,佛久遠以前已經得到這兩種生身、法身;今日的出生並非真實始生,所以說久遠若斯。『若斯』,就是像上面塵界譬所表示的那樣長久。

從但以方便以下,回答:既然不是今日始生,為什麼還要示現出生?這是為了利益樂小法、德薄、垢重的人,使他們進入佛道,所以說只以方便教化眾生。『作如是說』,是說佛本來不生,卻示現出生,因此方便說自己今日始成。

其他經典破除劣應生身是實生,尚未破除劣應法身是實生;這部經則正面破除勝應法身是今日始生。為什麼?因佛實際成道以來已如塵界譬那樣久遠,所以今日劣、勝兩應的法身之生都被破除,出生便不是始生,與其他經典不同。

從如來所演以下,是第二層,說示現出生所帶來的形、聲利益:先說形與聲,再說一切不虛。『說』是聲音教法,『示』是形體示現。形與聲不出自己、他人兩面。

說法身,是說自己的身;說應身,是說他身。說自己曾遇然燈佛,是說自己的事;說然燈佛是自己的老師,是說他身之事。示現正報,是示自己的事;示現依報國土,是示他事。隨順他人心意而說,是說他身;隨自己心意而說,是說己身。示現自己的事、他人的事,也可依此類推。

『一切所說皆實不虛』又分兩層:先說不虛,再解釋為什麼不虛。第一層偏從聲音教法說不虛,後一層則同時解釋形、聲不虛。

漸、頓兩種根機領受勝、劣兩種形、聲,全都得到利益,所以不虛。上面過去益物章只說皆大歡喜,彷彿只顯世界悉檀的利益;現在說皆實不虛,是說勝、劣形聲恰好投合兩類根機,使他們得到四悉檀的利益,全都不虛。

《大論》說四悉檀各自都有真實。世界悉檀有它的實,對治、為人也有它的實;若嚴密地說,這三種是世間之實,從第一義看仍屬虛。另一方面,因緣中也可以有三種世間之實,而第一義對某些根機反而暫時不能受用。

若把這種虛實配到迹、本兩門,漸、頓眾生所得利益都有虛、有實。過去依方便修行,尚未得到真實之道的利益,是因上之虛;執著佛近時始成,未得久遠本地的真實利益,是果上之虛。如今聽到迹門之說,同入實相,得到因中真實利益;聽到本門久遠之說,便除去執近之情,得到久遠果地的真實利益。因此,今天得到因、果二實,對治過去因、果二虛。

再依圓頓眾生說,他們在迹、本兩門原有一實、一虛:已得中道之行,是因中真實利益;仍執著近時之果,是果上之虛。如今聽到說因,不再另得一份新的真實利益;聽到說久遠果,才得到果上的真實利益。因此,過去有一虛,今天得到一實,所以說皆實不虛。

有人問:今日與過去的大乘所顯都是實相,先悟、後悟的人所入應當有差別嗎?

回答說:最初即入、後來次第而入,乃至拆去草庵以後共同進入中道,所入並沒有兩個;只是進入有漸、有頓,所以分成兩類教法。譬如同樣入於真諦,鈍根人依析法、無常等觀而入,利根人用體法空觀而入,因此分作藏教、通教,所入真諦本身並不另有兩個。

九、六句照理不虛

從所以者何,如來如實知見以下,是第二部分,總解釋利益眾生為什麼不虛。先解釋形體示現的利益,後解釋言說的利益。這裡以六句顯出應身不離法身。法身本來沒有形相,也沒有生起、消滅;眾生卻有生滅之機來感法身,如來依本願之力回應眾生,同樣示現生起與消滅。這種起滅之見出自眾生,所以依三界來說明六句。

這一段又分兩層:第一,照見真理而不虛;第二,從以諸眾生以下,說契合根機而不虛。能通達真理,又能契合根機,施設教法、教化眾生,便必定不虛。

第一句,『如實知見』就是實智,如真理本身照見三界之實。真實中沒有三界因的相狀。

第二句,『沒有生死』,是沒有分段、變易兩種生死之苦。煩惱集起名為退,無常果報顯現名為出,真實中都沒有。

第三句,也沒有住在生死世間的人及進入涅槃滅度的人;世間與滅度兩邊都寂滅,所以說也沒有在世及滅度者。

第四句,不是偏在滅度一邊的實,也不是偏在生死一邊的虛,所以說非實非虛。

第五句,不是出世真如的一邊,也不是世間隔別的一邊,所以說非如非異。前面四種雙非之句都顯示中道。

若只雙重否定兩邊,最後一句卻又固定落在一邊,仍未顯出中道。譬如說非生非死,末句卻結作生;說是生是死,末句結作死;說是退是出,末句結作退;說非退非出,末句結作出;說非虛非實,末句結作實;說是虛是實,末句結作虛。這一類落邊的結法,現在都要否定;乃至單句、複句等各種說法也全都不執,才顯出中道的意思。

第六句,『不像三界眾生所見那樣看三界』,是說佛不像兩類三界眾生所見的那樣見三界。只有佛一人如實窮盡照見三界真實,內在具足實智之用。這是隨佛自己心意而說,也屬於說自己身事,所以《大品》說第一義中沒有分別。

另一方面,如來又以權智如眾生的分量知見三界之相,同三界眾生所見而示現。如來如實知見本無兩種生死,卻隨順眾生心意示現兩種生死身、宣說兩種生死;本無退、出,卻隨順眾生說有退、有出;本無在世及滅度者,卻隨順眾生示生世間、示入涅槃,說有住世的人、有得滅度的人;本無偏實,卻說涅槃之實;本無偏虛,卻說三界之虛;本無三世之異,卻說三世有異;本無真諦一邊的如,卻說有如。

這些說法同三界眾生所見而看三界,全是隨順眾生心意的語言,名為說他身之事、示他身之事。如來的實智、權智明白審察真、俗二諦,所以形體示現與言語教化兩種利益都實在不虛。

十、性、欲、行、憶想與稱機不虛

從以諸眾生以下,是第二層,解釋契合根機而不虛。先說眾生之機感,再說佛依機施行教化。

眾生根機有利、有鈍,所受有漸、有頓;根性、欲樂、行為、智慧又有種種差別。佛想使他們各自增長善根,所以施設自己、他人的教法,以不虛的因緣、譬喻來教導他們。

漸、頓根性各有種種差別,這裡須用為人悉檀,因為為人悉檀正是為了使善根生長。可是善根仍屬根性,習慣的欲樂又會形成根性,為什麼經文先說性、後說欲?

解釋是:因為過去已有的根性,能生起今日的欲樂;又如因煩惱而有五陰,復因五陰更生煩惱,兩者不能說誰絕對在先、誰絕對在後。根性與欲樂也是如此,必須由反覆習慣的欲樂而形成根性。

『欲』,是漸、頓兩類根機各有種種不同欲樂,這裡須用世界悉檀。

『行』,是依欲樂發起造作、修各種行。這裡須用為人悉檀。修行之中又可能有許多愛著,形成妨礙,所以也須用對治悉檀。

『憶想』,是智慧所成的相似理解。由修行而生起理解,仍只是方便,尚未與真理相應,也還沒有到言語道斷的境地,所以仍是念想之觀。漸、頓眾生住在內凡、外凡位時,先有各種善根與欲樂;因欲樂而修行,因修行而得到相似理解。這裡須用第一義悉檀,依他已得到的憶想之解,更進一步說法,使他朗然悟入第一義。

乃至初地菩薩想要修行二地時,仍會憶想二地境界,這也名為念想。等到真正生起二地之解,念想之觀便除去,言語之法也止息。如此層層而上,直到佛才究竟離開一切憶想,得到恒常寂照。

從欲令生以下,是第二部分,正式依機施教。佛對漸、頓各種根機,施行自己、他人的聲音教法,使他們生起種種善根;所以又示現若干自己、他人的身與事,說若干自己、他人的聲教,使用若干因緣、譬喻。

若對漸機,便以藏教四門中的各種因緣、譬喻施教;每一門中又各有許多不同方式。例如,對懈怠的人說苦忍,對我慢的人說無常忍等。通教四門也是如此。

若對頓機,例如別教、圓教等,也各有四門與許多不同方式;又如三十二位菩薩各自說入不二法門,《華嚴經》列出種種修行類別與相貌。這些都是為各種根機施設許多譬喻、言辭而說法。

『所作佛事未曾暫廢』,是總結形、聲利益全都不虛。以上若干自己、他人的形體示現與聲音教法,都要使眾生進入佛的知見,不是只為人、天或二乘小事,所以稱為所作佛事。

如果只有一個人得到滅度,其餘人全都不能得到,所作佛事便有所廢棄;一有廢棄,便使其他眾生得不到真實利益,怎麼還能說全部皆實不虛?

有人可能追問:過去佛曾說自己坐道場時沒有得到一法;七種方便都不是究竟滅度,二種涅槃也只是方便所示的空拳。由此看來,過去只有虛,還沒有看見全都真實,怎麼能說皆實?

回答是:如果過去施設七種權宜,最後始終不能使眾生進入一實,才可以說它是虛。佛先以方便虛引,使眾生得以出離;但沒有一個由方便引出的人最後不進入真實。因此可以知道,過去看似虛的方便,正是為了最後的真實。皆實不虛、佛事未曾暫廢,說的就是這個意思。

十一、本實不滅而三身唱滅

從如是我成佛甚大久遠以下,說佛本來不滅而示現入滅,又分兩部分:第一,本不滅而現滅;第二,從如來以是方便以下,說示現入滅所帶來的利益。

第一部分又分兩層:先說本地實際不滅,再從然而今以下,說示現之中宣告入滅。

從我成佛已來以下,說佛果之位常住;因為常住,所以不滅。經文寄託在這幾個字中,顯出未來大勢威猛、常住利益眾生。

從我本行菩薩道以下,舉因位壽命來比況果位,以顯明常住。舊人依這段證明佛壽仍是無常,說佛在前面已經過恒河沙數劫,未來再加倍於上數,只是以神通延長壽命,終究仍屬無常。

這種讀法偏取文字,大失本意。經文是舉因況果,佛果壽命並不是可數量之法。經偈說,壽命無數劫,是長久修業所得,並不是以神通延壽。

為什麼?佛修圓滿之因,登初住時已經得到常壽;常壽本來不可用數目計算,這個因位壽命尚且超過上面塵數,何況佛果?為什麼捨棄經文所要比況的佛果,反而苟且執著用來比況的因位?即使只說這個因位,它也已是常住,並非無常。

譬如太子時所得俸祿已經用不完,何況登上最尊之位,祿用怎麼可能窮盡?明白文字就在這裡,何必扭轉它的意思,使後來學人疑惑、誤解!

從然而今非實以下,是第二層,說示現中宣告入滅。法身、報身、應身三身都有本來不滅而方便唱滅的意義。

第一,法身本來不滅而唱滅。《淨名經》說法本不生、現在也就沒有可滅,這表示法身本來不滅;又說這是寂滅之義,便是向眾生唱說滅。為什麼?已經了達的人不必再為他唱說寂滅,只為尚未了達的人宣說。

若說『照而寂』,便是唱滅;若說『寂而照』,便是唱生。法身雖本來非生非滅,也可以依眾生迷悟而說生滅:迷惑之心執著時,煩惱生而智慧滅;理解之心不染時,智慧生而煩惱滅。

滅除迷惑、生起理解,是無常生滅;若理解生起、迷惑滅除,也可名為寂滅。這些生滅都依對法性的迷、解而辨。若沒有迷、解兩種因緣,便不宣說有這些生滅。

第二,報身本來不滅而唱滅。究竟是誰擁有智慧,誰擁有煩惱,竟說智慧能破煩惱?光明與黑暗不能彼此相除,這表示報身不滅。眾生尚未明白,聽到這話便可能認為自己當下就是佛,於是生起驕慢、放縱,不再修道;所以佛又宣說道能滅惑:有煩惱時便沒有智慧,有智慧時便沒有煩惱,這豈不是智慧能滅煩惱?

第三,應身本來不滅而唱滅。應身是法身、報身的作用;本體既然不滅,作用怎麼會窮盡?所以應身本來不滅。只是眾生若常常看見佛,便會生起驕慢、放逸,因此佛宣告自己今天夜裡將取滅度。

再從法身、報身的關係詳說。法身就本體直接說不滅;報身說不滅,必須依於法身。若依理推究,智慧到底能不能破煩惱,可以問:是智慧到達煩惱才破,還是沒有到達便破?是智慧與其他條件共同破,還是智慧單獨破?如此推究,找不到一個實在的破除作用,這便是智慧不滅惑的意義;若依事相說,有智慧時便沒有煩惱,也可以說智慧能滅惑。

應身說不滅,必須依於法身、報身;法、報常住,應化作用也就不斷。眾生尚未窮盡,佛的應化便不滅度。若分別說,法身就本體論不生不滅;報身了達沒有實在能生、能滅之法;應身則以前後相續而說不生不滅〔以下略記〕。

十二、現滅的損益與末後總結

從以是方便教化以下,是第二部分,說示現入滅利益眾生,又分兩層:先說佛若始終不示滅,眾生便有損害;再從以方便說比丘當知以下,說佛若唱滅,眾生便得到利益。

不滅有損又分兩層:先略說損害,再廣作解釋。先說損害:前面那些樂小法的人看見佛常在,便不種善根,成為貧窮下賤之人。他們不能生起緣因、了因兩種善法,所以沒有利益;見惑、思惑又不能斷,兩種惡法不除,便形成損害。

貪著五欲,是思惑;進入憶想妄見之網,是見惑。因為這些眾生垢染深重,所以佛必須唱滅。若不唱滅,兩種惡便生而不滅,兩種善便受損而不生。

若依四悉檀示現入滅,兩種惡便得滅,兩種善便得生。為了滅除兩種惡,使用對治悉檀與第一義悉檀:第一義滅除尚未生起的惡,對治滅除已經生起的惡。世界、為人兩悉檀生起兩種善:世界使尚未生的善生起,為人使已經生起的善增長。

又可以說,世界悉檀滅已生惡,對治悉檀滅未生惡。例如修禪而使欲界五陰之惡滅除,便是世界悉檀滅已生惡;為人悉檀使已生善增長,第一義悉檀使尚未生起的無為之善生起。

從若見以下,廣釋不滅的損害。眾生若見佛恒常在世,便生驕慢、放縱之心,所以有損;不能生恭敬心,所以無益。『憍恣』會增長見惑,『厭怠』會增長思惑;不能生難遭之想,便不能生見諦之解;不能恭敬,便不能生思惟修道。因為這些緣故,佛適宜示現入滅。

若眾生見聞法身、報身、應身三身不滅,都可能生起驕慢、放縱。第一,聽法身不滅的人,可能便說眾生之如與彌勒之如同一無二,完全平等就是真理;由此生驕慢、增上慢,又說一切煩惱本來不生、現在也沒有可滅,何必修道,於是任情放逸。為了這些人,佛才宣說這是寂滅之義,令他們滅惑而證。

第二,眾生聽說一切眾生就是菩提之相,菩提之相就是煩惱之相,光明與黑暗不彼此消除,便又生起驕慢、放縱,不再修善,懈怠放逸。為了這些人,佛才宣說報身智慧能滅煩惱;無明力量強大,只有佛的菩提智慧能夠滅除。

第三,應身本來不滅而示現入滅,意思較容易明白。

如果佛只宣說法本來不生、現在也不滅,眾生仍須知道:必須滅除迷惑,才真正名為寂滅。經中又說智慧不滅煩惱;可是光明出現時便沒有黑暗,眾生現在明明具足煩惱,怎能說自己已經具有智慧?應當知道,智慧確能滅除障礙、迷惑。

眾生聽佛這樣宣說唱滅,便會對法身、報身、應身三身生起難遭之想,發起恭敬之心。

從是故如來以方便以下,正式說唱滅有益,又分三層:第一,讚歎佛難以值遇;第二,解釋為什麼難值;第三,說三身佛都難值遇。

眾生愛著小法,見惑、思惑的障礙深重;即使聽說三身不滅,也不肯修道,便很難與三身相契相會。

接著解釋難值。德薄眾生經過百千萬億劫,有時得見佛,有時不能見佛。若能見法身、報身、應身,表示此人善多、惡少,佛不必為他唱滅;這種人便如常見佛在靈山。若不能見佛,表示此人障重、善輕,佛便為他說三身難以契會。

眾生聽後便會想:三身雖然本來非生非滅,自己仍必須生起善法、滅除迷惑,才能親自證見;這件事並不容易,所以稱為難遭。

『心懷戀慕、渴仰於佛』,說明佛示現入滅並沒有使眾生受損。滅除見惑、思惑,名為無損;種下善根,名為有益。

從又善男子以下,是法說的第二大段,總結過去、現在、未來利益眾生,使眾生都得到真實利益。總結又有三項:第一,諸佛出現在五濁世間,必定先說三乘、後歸一乘,先說近時成佛、後顯久遠成佛;第二,這一切全是為了教化眾生;第三,所有方便與真實之說都不是虛妄。

I. First the Admonition to Believe, Then the Main Reply

Extensively opening the near to reveal the distant means opening the Buddha’s recent attainment so as to disclose his attainment in the distant past. The sutra text has two parts: first the assembly is admonished to believe, and second the main reply is given. What issues from the Buddha’s intent is called an admonition; the assembly’s reception without doubt is called belief. This passage has three admonitions and three requests. After the three requests the assembly requests again, and the Buddha admonishes again, making four requests and four admonitions here. The preceding Trace Gate had three requests and one admonition; together, the two portions make five admonitions and seven requests. Such earnest solemnity is used because an exceedingly extraordinary matter is about to be taught.

“sincerity” means fidelity, while “truthfulness” means examining reality. When words do not deceive beings, what they express reaches reality. What was taught in the past to the capacities of the seven skillful means accorded with those beings’ own intentions; it did not directly tell them the sincere and truthful essential purport. Now the Buddha speaks according to his own intent and reveals the most important reality, and it is therefore called “sincere and truthful.”

Having received this sincere admonition, the bodhisattvas do not dare give rise to doubt. On hearing it, they will certainly trust and accept the Buddha’s truthful words.

II. The General Outline of the Main Reply and the Near View It Breaks

The main reply has prose and verse. The prose is further divided into teaching by Dharma and teaching by parable. The teaching by Dharma is again twofold: first, the Tathāgata benefits beings in the past, present, and future; second, all that he teaches is concluded to be without falsehood.

Beings cling to the near: they see only the Buddha’s manifestation of eighty years in this life, not that he attained buddhahood in the distant past, and not that he will constantly abide without extinction in the future. The root treatise therefore uses the three periods to open away attachment to the near and disclose the distant. This benefit is not peculiar to Śākyamuni; all buddhas act in this way, so the passage finally concludes that all is real and not false. Very little text in the teaching by Dharma directly concerns the future, whereas the teaching by parable and the verse say more. “[The remainder is abbreviated.]”

The text on benefiting beings in the past is twofold. First, beginning with the “Tathāgata’s secret,” it exposes the views through which beings cling to the near. Second, beginning with “Yet, good sons,” it breaks the near and reveals the distant. The first part has three levels: it first identifies the Dharma about which beings are deluded, then the beings capable of being deluded, and finally the view that arises when they lose sight of the distant past.

“secret and hidden” means: one body is precisely the three bodies, which is called secret; the three bodies are precisely one body, which is called hidden. It can also mean that what was not taught in the past is called secret, while what the Buddha alone knows is called hidden.

“the power of supernormal penetration” is the functioning of the three bodies. “supernormal” is the naturally unmoving principle, namely the body of Dharma-nature. “penetration” is unobstructed, inconceivable wisdom, namely the reward body. “power” is functional activity freely applied, namely the response body.

The Buddha equally possesses the three bodies in the past, present, and future, but the various preceding teachings kept this secret and did not transmit it. The devas, humans, and asuras throughout the world therefore all suppose that only today, beneath the bodhi tree, did the Buddha attain these three bodies. They thus cling to the near and doubt the distant.

This portion of the Origin Gate no longer speaks separately of the two vehicles, but addresses bodhisattvas alone. Bodhisattvas can be included among the three wholesome destinies of devas, humans, and asuras. Beings in the other three evil destinies bear heavy wrongdoing, dull faculties, and little wisdom, and do not form this view that the Buddha has only now attained. Thus the Large Prajñāpāramitā Sūtra says only that the Great Vehicle surpasses devas, humans, and asuras, without mentioning the three evil destinies.

There are three classes of bodhisattvas: bodhisattvas emerging from below, bodhisattvas coming from other worlds, and bodhisattvas who had long dwelt in the Sahā world. Those from below were transformed by the Buddha in the time of the Origin and therefore have no view of recent attainment. Those from other worlds and the former residents of Sahā are each further divided into two classes.

The first class consists of bodhisattvas born in correspondence with the Dharma body. In past lives they had already realized non-arising or had previously heard the opening of the Trace and revelation of the Origin. Even if they did not hear it then, when the recompense-body life of this period ended and they received a body of Dharma-nature, they would naturally have heard the teaching of the distant past on the ground of the Dharma body. Most bodhisattvas of this class therefore do not hold the view of recent attainment.

The second class consists of bodhisattvas who first realized the patience of non-arising in this life and those who have not yet realized it. All these bodhisattvas possess the view that the Buddha attained buddhahood only recently.

Beginning with “Yet, good sons, since I actually attained buddhahood,” the second part breaks attachment, dispels delusion, and reveals the distant Origin. This is precisely what the preceding sincere and truthful admonition was preparing to teach. The section is twofold: first it reveals the distant; then, beginning with “Since that time,” it explains the modes appropriate for benefiting beings in the past.

Revealing the distant is also twofold: first it directly reveals the distant through a teaching by Dharma, and second it uses a simile to measure and compare that teaching. Since the Buddha attained the Way exceedingly long ago, beings’ view that he attained it only recently at Gayā is broken. Opening the near to reveal the distant has roughly ten meanings, explained in detail in the Profound Meaning. “[The remainder is abbreviated.]” What is directly applied here is breaking the near to reveal the distant: it breaks the view of recent attainment, sets aside the teaching that speaks only of recent attainment, and reveals the distant past.

III. Measuring the Distant Past Through Dust-Worlds

The dust-world simile has three parts: first the simile is presented as a question, second Maitreya and the others answer, and third the simile is applied back to the Dharma so as to reveal how long ago buddhahood was attained.

Other scriptures sometimes use ineffable numbers or dust and sand as similes, already indicating an enormous number; compared with the present simile, however, those remain smaller. Merely the worlds upon which dust particles are deposited are beyond expression. How much less can all the worlds upon which no particle was deposited be fully expressed? If the worlds with and without particles cannot be expressed, how could one express the number of particles produced by grinding all those worlds into dust? How much less could one express the time since the Buddha attained the Way, which exceeds all these numbers?

Beginning with the collective reply of Maitreya and the others is the second part. The answer names three classes of people who cannot know this number: śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas cannot know it with uncontaminated wisdom; bodhisattvas abiding on the stage of non-retrogression cannot know it; Maitreya and the others themselves likewise cannot know it. The third part applies the simile back to the Buddha’s lifespan and is clear from the sutra text.

IV. The Places of Past Benefit and the Dispelling of Doubt

Beginning with “Since that time” explains the modes appropriate for benefiting beings in the past and has three levels: first, the places where beings are benefited; second, doubts arising from former manifestations are dispelled; third, beginning with “If beings come to me,” the capacities of beings are addressed and benefits are actually bestowed.

Why must the places be explained? The preceding simile expresses an exceedingly distant span of time, so beings may ask: Where has the Buddha abided throughout such a distant past? The Buddha therefore says that he has continually performed buddhawork and benefited beings in this Sahā world and in other lands.

Beginning with “During the interval” dispels doubts concerning former manifestations. The doubts concern cause and fruit. Earlier teachings said that the Buddha cultivated bodhisattva causes in many places and received predictions in many places, thereby causing beings to doubt about cause and fruit. These doubts are now dispelled: the mention of Dīpaṃkara Buddha dispels doubt about cause, while the statement that intermediate buddhas entered nirvāṇa dispels doubt about fruit. There is more than one such cause and fruit; all were differentiated and taught as skillful means, rather than disclosing the distant original ground directly, and this is why the passage is called the dispelling of doubt.

Someone explains that the Buddha skillfully said Dīpaṃkara Buddha was his teacher, whereas Dīpaṃkara was actually manifested by Śākyamuni. Śākyamuni, originally unborn, manifested birth; originally unextinguished, he manifested extinction. The sutra therefore again says that this buddha entered nirvāṇa.

Zhizhe says that this interpretation is incorrect and that only the preceding explanation should be adopted. Why? Dīpaṃkara Buddha’s conditions for transformation had matured, so he manifested the form of a buddha and transformed beings. Śākyamuni’s own conditions for buddhahood had not yet matured; he remained a bodhisattva and received a prediction from Dīpaṃkara. Receiving the prediction contains the meaning of fruit, while cultivating the various practices is cause. This already suffices to explain the sutra text.

The word qi (“that one”) in the sutra refers generally to one who carried out transformation in the intermediate period; it does not refer specifically to Dīpaṃkara Buddha. Moreover, benefiting beings in the intermediate period inherently included benefits through form and sound. Saying that Śākyamuni encountered Dīpaṃkara indicates the appearance of a buddha-body and thus a benefit through form. Saying that an intermediate buddha entered nirvāṇa indicates that after that buddha’s extinction Śākyamuni helped propagate his teaching and thus provided a benefit through sound. Benefits through both form and sound still belong here to the causal practices of the intermediate period.

Once there is an appearance in form and sound, birth necessarily entails death, and death is called entry into nirvāṇa. This is called fruit only within that period of manifestation; one cannot therefore say that Śākyamuni had already realized the fruit of buddhahood during the intermediate period. Why? Before the Lotus Sutra, it had not yet been taught that Śākyamuni had long ago attained buddhahood. How then could beings already have formed a doubt about his having realized the Buddha fruit in the distant past?

An older interpretation likewise holds that Dīpaṃkara Buddha was manifested by Śākyamuni, but this too is incorrect. Since scriptures before the Lotus Sutra did not say that Śākyamuni had already attained buddhahood in the past, what teaching could have first established Dīpaṃkara as his manifestation and thereby produced a doubt requiring removal now?

V. The Buddha Eye’s Observation of Capacities and the Two Past Benefits of Form and Sound

Beginning with “If beings come to me” is the third level, which directly explains the modes appropriate for benefiting beings in the past. It has two parts: first, beings’ stimulus and the Buddha’s response; second, the Buddha’s teaching and transformation according to their capacities.

“coming to me” means that beings in the past possessed gradual and sudden capacities which, from within the subtle, struck and elicited the Dharma body. “observing with the Buddha eye” means that the Buddha had long ago attained the Way and used the Buddha eye to discern beings without the slightest omission or error; he would next manifest inferior and superior response bodies to benefit them.

Beings’ wholesome capacities have two powers: first, they can elicit the flower-fruition of birth among humans and devas; second, they can elicit the fruit-fruition of the Buddha Way. Observation with the Dharma eye can know the myriad wholesome acts and the corresponding flower-fruition obtained according to their relative weight, but cannot ultimately know the fruit of knowledge of all modes that beings will finally attain. The Buddha eye completely illumines all wholesome dharmas and knows both their beginnings and their ultimate end.

This sutra consistently speaks of the Buddha eye’s observation and of knowing that all beings’ wholesome acts will finally obtain the Buddha fruit. This is precisely the original intent for which the Buddha appears in the world for one great matter.

“the faculties beginning with faith” are the five faculties of faith, vigor, mindfulness, concentration, and wisdom. The wisdom faculty is the discernment cause; the other four are conditioning causes. Both kinds of wholesome roots have sharp and dull forms and encompass gradual and sudden capacities. Sudden capacities also have sharp and dull forms, namely capacities for the perfect and distinct teachings; gradual capacities likewise have sharp and dull forms, namely capacities for the Tripiṭaka and shared teachings. In another relative comparison, Lesser Vehicle faculties are dull and Great Vehicle faculties sharp; in another comparison, Lesser Vehicle faculties are sharp and human and deva vehicle faculties are dull.

The sharp and dull wholesome roots of beings in the ten Dharma realms can all become capacities that elicit the Buddha; evil dharmas are not used because they are neither conditioning nor discernment causes. The Tathāgata completely illumines the wholesome capacities of the ten Dharma realms and, according to what will liberate them, benefits them through manifested form and spoken teaching.

Beginning with “Everywhere I declare” directly explains the Buddha’s manifestation and transformation according to capacities. It has two parts: first, benefits through form and sound; second, beings’ reception of benefit and resulting joy. Benefit through form is itself twofold: first, the originally unborn manifests birth; second, the originally unextinguished manifests entry into extinction.

Once the Buddha manifests a form, there is a corresponding name by which the referent of that form is called. Beings’ capacities may be superior or inferior, and the form manifested by the Buddha is correspondingly superior or inferior; as forms differ, names differ. “greater or lesser age” means the superiority or inferiority of the form: the superior is called the superior response and the inferior the inferior response.

Different names also indicate that the lifespans of the two manifested Buddha-bodies may be measurable or immeasurable. “everywhere,” vertically considered, means cultivating causes in different lands throughout the past; horizontally considered, it means lands in the ten directions. In vertical places there are different names for corporeal and Dharma bodies—for example, today’s response body and former buddhas such as Dīpaṃkara have different names. In horizontal lands there are likewise different names for corporeal and Dharma bodies—for example, today’s Buddha and the divided-body buddhas in the ten directions differ, just as the Flower Garland Sutra lists Śākyamuni’s many different names.

The scriptures also say that the Buddha has three bodies with different names, and the Dharma-essences called by those names differ: at times they are called Vairocana, Rocana, and Śākyamuni; the Dharma-body Buddha may also be called suchness, true mark, ultimate truth, prajñā, or Śūraṃgama. These are the different names used when the body of the Buddha Dharma realm is manifested. When bodies in the other nine Dharma realms are manifested, the names are still more immeasurable and boundless, as can be inferred from this.

“greater or lesser age” also means longer or shorter lifespan, varying with the response body manifested above. At times the lifespan is said to be twenty thousand years, as in the time of Kāśyapa Buddha; at times it is eighty thousand years, as in the time of Maitreya Buddha. Greater and lesser as transmitted in relation to one another can be understood both vertically and horizontally.

The relative greatness and smallness of the lifespans of the Dharma, reward, and response buddhas is explained in detail in the Profound Meaning. “[The remainder is abbreviated.]” The three bodies can be compared with one another in greatness and smallness. It can also be said that explaining the three separately is small and explaining them together is great; the example of the three points is the same. “[The remainder is abbreviated.]” All these manifestations of appropriate bodily forms and longer or shorter lifespans accord with what beings require for liberation.

“he also manifests and says that he will enter nirvāṇa” means that when people should be liberated through the Buddha’s extinction, he manifests extinction so that they cherish longing, look up to him, and attain liberation. This meaning appears again in the following teaching by parable.

“again, through various skillful means he teaches the subtle Dharma” is benefit through spoken teaching. Manifesting a smaller form and shorter lifespan, he gives gradual teachings, and these are called various skillful means. Manifesting a vast form and distant lifespan, he gives sudden Dharma, and this is called teaching the subtle Dharma. Although beings are initially guided by gradual Dharma, they are ultimately enabled to enter the Great Vehicle; the sutra therefore says that all are made joyful.

This joy is beings’ benefit from transformation. The Buddha bestows benefits through form and sound according to the four siddhāntas of the worldly, the individual, the counteractive, and ultimate truth, and beings receive all four benefits. A teaching that accords with capacities brings joy; one that runs against capacities brings distress. This is precisely the meaning of the later statement that all is real and not false.

VI. Benefiting Beings in the Present Through the Lion’s Vigorous Advance

Beginning with “Good sons, the Tathāgata sees all beings” describes the Tathāgata’s present benefit to beings through the samādhi of the lion’s vigorous advance. This samādhi has ten qualities.

First, distinguishing whether the faculties of other beings are mature or immature, purified or not yet purified.

Second, teaching those not yet liberated through the Tathāgata’s Dharma wheel so that they all enter the Buddha’s Dharma and discipline.

Third, vast vows pervade the ten directions, and sound does likewise: at times one sound pervades, at times hundreds of thousands of myriads of sounds all pervade, universally teaching every class of beings.

Fourth, turning the unsurpassed Dharma wheel, transforming beings and enabling them all to attain extinction; others cannot turn it, and only the Buddha can.

Fifth, manifesting home-leaving, shaving the head, and observing pure precepts, while also enabling others to delight in these practices.

Sixth, both disposition and conduct accord with the principle of emptiness.

Seventh, emitting light and manifesting entry into extinction; at times manifesting continued presence, at times manifesting disappearance; at times revealing the marks, at times concealing them.

Eighth, subduing the māra of afflictions, the māra of aggregates, the māra of death, and the māra who is a deva.

Ninth, enabling others to enter the most essential Dharma meaning and causing cessation and contemplation to increase.

Tenth, perfecting the foundation of the preceding ten wholesome deeds, namely the three wholesome acts of body and the four of speech, and so forth. “[The remainder is abbreviated.]”

This passage has two parts: first, beings’ capacities elicit the Buddha; second, the Buddha manifests and transforms according to capacities. “the Tathāgata sees” means illumination by the Buddha eye. “beings delight in Lesser Dharmas” identifies the capacities illumined by the Buddha.

The general purport of the Flower Garland Sutra is that although the assembly is pure, others who delight in Lesser Dharmas may, on hearing something profound, give rise to doubt and regret and suffer decline and distress through the long night. The Buddha pities them and therefore remains silent for a time. Its verse also says that others who have not practiced long and whose wisdom is not yet clear rely on consciousness rather than wisdom; after hearing, they give rise to sorrow and regret and will fall into evil paths. With this in mind, the Buddha does not teach.

Because that scripture’s assembly contains no śrāvakas of the two vehicles, “those who delight in Lesser Dharmas” there refers only to those who have not practiced long. The master says that delighting in the Lesser does not refer exclusively to Lesser Vehicle people; rather, those who delight in the teaching of recent attainment are called those who delight in the Lesser.

A general explanation is now made. First, craving the twenty-five modes of existence is the capacity of humans and devas; people of this kind who come to the Buddha are called those delighting in Lesser Dharmas. Second, craving nirvāṇa and seeking only one’s own liberation is the capacity of the two vehicles; those who come to the Buddha in this way are also called those delighting in Lesser Dharmas. Third, delighting in a gradual and circuitous course toward the Buddha Way is the capacity of the three classes of bodhisattva; those who come to the Buddha in this way are likewise called those delighting in Lesser Dharmas.

“meager in qualities” means that the functioning of the two wholesome dharmas of conditioning and discernment causes is weak. A later passage compares this with small children who have not yet understood. “heavy with defilement” means that the delusions of views and thought have not yet been severed.

VII. Why Even Great Capacities Are Generally Called Those Who Delight in the Lesser

Someone asks: The Buddha, originally unborn, manifests birth and fully administers both sudden and gradual transformation. People of the seven skillful means and so forth can indeed be called those delighting in Lesser Dharmas. But when the Buddha responds with perfect and sudden Dharma, those addressed should be people who delight in the Great. Why are they all generally judged to delight in Lesser Dharmas?

The answer is that the preceding passage only gave the purport briefly; it is now explained extensively through four meanings.

First, in terms of the past: although beings once aroused the great mind, they could not be single-minded and diligent, remained largely attached to base desires, and could not transcend the world. Their attachment to base desires is therefore called delighting in Lesser Dharmas.

Second, in terms of the present: before the Buddha appeared in the world, devas and humans possessed Great Vehicle capacities, yet their minds were stained by worldly pleasures and attached to wrong views; they are therefore called those delighting in Lesser Dharmas. These two meanings are the same in intent as the poisoned children writhing on the ground in the later parable of the good physician.

Third, in terms of practice: someone may no longer delight in the base desires and Lesser Dharmas of the three realms, yet delight in the quiescent cessation of the three vehicles and thus still delight in Lesser Dharmas. Another may no longer delight in the near fruits of the three vehicles, yet delight in cultivating the One Vehicle through successive stages and differentiated, circuitous practice, unable to cultivate universally and perfectly within one mind; this too is delighting in the Lesser. The first three meanings explain delight in Lesser Dharmas through the gate of cause.

Fourth, in terms of the gate of fruit: beings delight in hearing the lesser teaching of the Buddha’s recent attainment. They wish to hear only that he left the Śākya palace and then realized bodhi, and do not wish to hear of the Way that is long, distant, great, and enduring; they are therefore called those delighting in the Lesser.

These inclinations toward the Lesser did not first appear today. Had beings already delighted in the great Dharma of the distant past, the Buddha would not have told them that he had only just attained the Way. He speaks of recent attainment precisely for those who delight in Lesser Dharmas.

VIII. Presently Manifesting Birth Without Originally Being Born, and Benefits Through Form and Sound

Beginning with “For these people he says” is the second part, transformation in the present, and has two levels: first, originally unborn yet manifesting birth; second, originally unextinguished yet manifesting entry into extinction. Manifested birth is further divided into the manifestation of birth and its benefit; the manifestation itself is again divided into birth and non-birth. Birth means that birth is displayed within manifestation; non-birth means that the Buddha did not first become born and attain the Way today.

For people who delight in Lesser Dharmas, are meager in qualities, and heavy with defilement, the Buddha says that he attained bodhi only in this life. The preceding passage said that sharp and dull capacities elicit the Dharma body; now the Buddha manifests superior and inferior response bodies. The inferior response answers dull faculties, and the superior response answers sharp faculties. Each response body has both the birth of a corporeal body and the birth of a Dharma body.

The corporeal-body birth of the inferior response means entrusting the mother’s womb through right wisdom and walking seven steps after birth, as described by Kātyāyanīputra. From entering the womb and being born until before the six years of ascetic practice is all called the birth of the corporeal body. The Dharma-body birth of the inferior response means using thirty-four thought-moments to sever afflictions together with their habits and attaining the fivefold Dharma body of precepts, concentration, wisdom, liberation, and knowledge and vision of liberation.

The corporeal-body birth of the superior response is as taught in the Flower Garland Sutra, Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra, and others: the Buddha abides in Lady Māyā’s womb together with bodhisattvas and constantly teaches the Great Vehicle; after birth he takes seven steps in each of the ten directions. This is called the birth of the corporeal body. The Dharma-body birth of the superior response occurs at the place of practice of quiescence: in the final vajra mind the Buddha completely severs ignorance, attains wisdom corresponding to wondrous awakening, exhaustively illumines Dharma-nature, and perfectly and universally fulfills the myriad qualities and knowledge of all modes.

“leaving home,” in terms of the inferior response, means leaving the home of fragmentary birth and death; in terms of the superior response, it means leaving the home of both fragmentary and transformational birth and death. “attaining bodhi,” in terms of the inferior response, is the uncontaminated knowledge of exhaustion and knowledge of non-arising produced from the Four Truths involving activity; this is called bodhi. In terms of the superior response, it is illumining the Way of the three truths and one reality and taking knowledge of all modes as bodhi.

Beginning with “Yet since I actually attained” explains that the Buddha, at the Origin, did not in fact first become born today. Devas, humans, and asuras see the superior and inferior responses each have the birth of a corporeal body and of a Dharma body, and assume that the Buddha began attaining these today. This is not so. The Buddha obtained both corporeal and Dharma bodies in the distant past; today’s birth is not true initial birth, and is therefore said to be distant in this way. “in this way” means as long ago as expressed by the dust-world simile above.

Beginning with “Only through skillful means” answers: If the Buddha was not first born today, why manifest birth? It is to benefit those who delight in Lesser Dharmas, are meager in qualities, and heavy with defilement, enabling them to enter the Buddha Way. Thus he says that he teaches and transforms beings only through skillful means. “making this statement” means that although the Buddha is originally unborn, he manifests birth and skillfully says that he attained buddhahood today.

Other scriptures break the belief that the corporeal-body birth of the inferior response is real birth, but do not yet break the belief that its Dharma-body birth is real birth. This sutra directly breaks the belief that the Dharma-body birth of the superior response occurs only today. Why? Since the Buddha actually attained the Way as long ago as the dust-world simile expresses, the Dharma-body births of both inferior and superior responses today are broken as beginnings; these births are not initial birth, unlike in the other scriptures.

Beginning with “The scriptures expounded by the Tathāgata” is the second level, explaining benefits through the form and sound of manifested birth. First it explains form and sound, then that all is not false. “speaking” is the teaching of sound, while “displaying” is manifested form. Form and sound do not go beyond oneself and others.

Speaking of the Dharma body is speaking of one’s own body; speaking of the response body is speaking of another’s body. Saying that one encountered Dīpaṃkara Buddha is speaking of one’s own affairs; saying that Dīpaṃkara Buddha was one’s teacher is speaking of the affairs of another’s body. Displaying the primary recompense is displaying one’s own affairs; displaying the dependent land is displaying another’s affairs. Speaking according to another’s intent is speaking of another’s body; speaking according to one’s own intent is speaking of one’s own body. Displaying one’s own and another’s affairs can be understood in the same way.

“All that is spoken is real and not false” is also twofold: first non-falsehood is stated, and then the reason for non-falsehood is explained. The first level speaks of non-falsehood primarily in relation to spoken teaching; the second explains the non-falsehood of both form and sound.

Gradual and sudden capacities receive the superior and inferior forms and sounds and all obtain benefit; hence these are not false. The preceding section on benefiting beings in the past said only that all became greatly joyful, seemingly disclosing only the benefit of the worldly siddhānta. The present statement that all is real and not false means that superior and inferior form and sound precisely fit the two capacities, enabling beings to obtain the benefits of all four siddhāntas; none is false.

The Great Treatise says that each of the four siddhāntas has its own reality. The worldly siddhānta has its reality, and the counteractive and individual siddhāntas have theirs. Strictly speaking, these three are worldly realities and remain false from the standpoint of ultimate truth. Conversely, within causes and conditions there can be three worldly realities, while ultimate truth may temporarily be unusable for certain capacities.

When this provisional and real are correlated with the Trace and Origin Gates, the benefits received by gradual and sudden beings include both false and real. In the past they practiced through skillful means without yet receiving the benefit of the real Way; this was falsity on the side of cause. Clinging to the Buddha’s recent attainment and not receiving the real benefit of the distant original ground was falsity on the side of fruit. By now hearing the Trace Gate, entering true mark together, and receiving real benefit in the cause, and by hearing the distant teaching of the Origin Gate, removing attachment to the near, and receiving the real benefit of the distant fruit-ground, they obtain today the two realities of cause and fruit that counteract the two former falsehoods of cause and fruit.

For perfect and sudden beings, there had originally been one reality and one falsehood across the Trace and Origin Gates. Having attained the practice of the Middle Way was real benefit in the cause; continuing to cling to a recent fruit was falsehood on the side of fruit. Hearing the causal teaching now does not give them another new real benefit; only hearing of the distant fruit gives them real benefit on the side of fruit. Thus there was one former falsehood and one reality is received today, and all is said to be real and not false.

Someone asks: If the Great Vehicle of today and the Great Vehicle of the past both disclose true mark, should there be a difference between what earlier and later awakeners enter?

The answer is that immediate entry at the outset, later gradual entry, and even dismantling the grass hut and entering the Middle Way together do not enter two different realities. Entry alone is gradual or sudden, and therefore two teachings are distinguished. For example, in entering the true truth, dull people rely on analysis of dharmas, contemplation of impermanence, and so forth, while sharp people enter through contemplation of the emptiness of dharmas in their very substance. The Tripiṭaka and shared teachings are thereby distinguished, but the true truth entered is not itself divided in two.

IX. Six Statements of Non-Falsehood in Illumining Principle

Beginning with “Why is this? The Tathāgata knows and sees the marks of the three realms as they really are” is the second part, which generally explains why benefiting beings is not false. It first explains the benefit of manifested form and then the benefit of spoken teaching. Six statements here show that the response body is not apart from the Dharma body. The Dharma body originally has no form and neither arises nor ceases. Beings, however, possess capacities of arising and ceasing that elicit the Dharma body. Through the power of his original vows, the Tathāgata responds to beings by likewise manifesting arising and ceasing. This view of arising and ceasing comes from beings, and the six statements are therefore explained through the three realms.

This passage is also twofold: first, non-falsehood through illumining truth; second, beginning with “because beings,” non-falsehood through according with capacities. When one can penetrate truth and accord with capacities, establishing teachings and transforming beings, the result cannot be false.

The first statement, “knowing and seeing as it really is,” is real wisdom illumining the reality of the three realms in accordance with truth itself. In reality there are no marks of the causes of the three realms.

The second statement, “there is no birth and death,” means that there is no suffering of fragmentary or transformational birth and death. The accumulation of afflictions is called retreat, while the manifestation of impermanent recompense is called emergence; neither exists in reality.

The third statement means that there is also no person abiding in the world of birth and death and no person entering the extinction of nirvāṇa. Both the world and extinction are quiescent, and therefore there is no one in the world or entering extinction.

The fourth statement means neither the one-sided reality of extinction nor the one-sided falsehood of birth and death; it therefore says neither real nor false.

The fifth statement means neither the one-sided suchness that transcends the world nor the one-sided difference of the world; it therefore says neither such nor different. The preceding four paired negations all disclose the Middle Way.

If the two sides are only doubly negated but the final statement becomes fixed on one side, the Middle Way still has not been disclosed. For example, one might say neither born nor dead but end by concluding “born”; say both born and dead but end by concluding “dead”; say both retreat and emergence but end by concluding “retreat”; say neither retreat nor emergence but end by concluding “emergence”; say neither false nor real but end by concluding “real”; or say both false and real but end by concluding “false.” All such conclusions that fall to one side must now be negated. The meaning of the Middle Way appears only when single, compound, and all other formulations are likewise not grasped.

The sixth statement, “not seeing the three realms as beings in the three realms see them,” means that the Buddha does not see the three realms as the two classes of beings there do. The Buddha alone exhaustively and truly sees the reality of the three realms, inwardly perfecting the functioning of real wisdom. This is speech according to the Buddha’s own intent and also concerns the affairs of his own body. The Large Prajñāpāramitā therefore says that in ultimate truth there is no differentiation.

On the other hand, the Tathāgata uses provisional wisdom to know and see the marks of the three realms according to the measure of beings, manifesting in accord with how beings in the three realms see. Although in true knowing and seeing there are originally not two kinds of birth and death, the Tathāgata manifests bodies of both and speaks of both according to beings’ intent. Although there is originally no retreat or emergence, he speaks of retreat and emergence. Although there is originally no one in the world or entering extinction, he manifests birth in the world and entry into nirvāṇa and speaks of persons abiding in the world and attaining extinction. Although there is originally no one-sided reality, he speaks of the reality of nirvāṇa; although no one-sided falsehood, he speaks of the falsehood of the three realms; although no difference among the three periods, he speaks of differences among them; although no one-sided suchness of true truth, he speaks of suchness.

These teachings see the three realms in accord with the way beings there see them. They are all words spoken according to beings’ intentions and are called speaking and displaying the affairs of another’s body. The Tathāgata’s real and provisional wisdoms clearly examine true and conventional truth, so the two benefits of manifested form and spoken teaching are both real and not false.

X. Nature, Desire, Conduct, Recollective Thought, and Non-Falsehood in According with Capacities

Beginning with “because beings” is the second level, explaining non-falsehood in according with capacities. It first states the stimulus of beings’ capacities and then the Buddha’s teaching according to those capacities.

Beings’ faculties may be sharp or dull, and what they receive may be gradual or sudden; their natures, desires, conduct, and wisdom also have many differences. The Buddha wishes to enable each to increase wholesome roots and therefore establishes teachings concerning himself and others, instructing them through unfailing causes and conditions and similes.

Gradual and sudden natures each have many differences, and the individual siddhānta is required here because it specifically causes wholesome roots to grow. Yet wholesome roots themselves belong to nature, and habitual desires in turn form nature. Why then does the sutra speak first of nature and afterward of desire?

The explanation is that the nature carried from the past can generate present desire. It is also like affliction giving rise to the five aggregates and the five aggregates again giving rise to affliction; neither can be declared absolutely first or later. Nature and desire are the same: repeated habitual desire is required to form nature.

“desire” means the many different desires of gradual and sudden capacities; the worldly siddhānta is required here.

“conduct” means acting and cultivating various practices in accordance with desire. The individual siddhānta is required here. Many attachments may also arise in practice and create obstructions, so the counteractive siddhānta is required as well.

“recollective thought” is the semblant understanding produced by wisdom. Understanding arises from practice yet remains a skillful means; it is not yet in accord with truth and has not reached where the path of words is cut off, and therefore remains a contemplation through conceptual recollection. While gradual and sudden beings abide in the inner and outer ordinary stages, they first possess various wholesome roots and desires; desire leads to practice, and practice produces semblant understanding. Ultimate truth is required here: based on the understanding already obtained through recollective thought, the Buddha teaches further so that they clearly awaken to ultimate truth.

Even when a bodhisattva of the first ground wishes to cultivate the second ground, that bodhisattva recollectively conceives the domain of the second ground; this too is called conceptual recollection. When genuine understanding of the second ground arises, contemplative recollection is removed and verbal dharmas cease. Proceeding upward level by level, only at buddhahood does one ultimately leave every recollective thought and attain constant quiescent illumination.

Beginning with “wishing to cause them to generate” is the second part, actual teaching according to capacity. For the various gradual and sudden capacities, the Buddha administers spoken teachings concerning himself and others so as to cause various wholesome roots to arise. He therefore also displays various forms and affairs of self and other, speaks various verbal teachings of self and other, and uses various causes and conditions and similes.

For gradual capacities, the Buddha teaches with various causes and conditions and similes within each of the four gates of the Tripiṭaka teaching; every gate has many different methods. For example, he teaches the patience of suffering to the indolent and the patience of impermanence to the arrogant. The four gates of the shared teaching are the same.

For sudden capacities, such as those of the distinct and perfect teachings, there are likewise four gates and many different methods. The thirty-two bodhisattvas each teach entry into the Dharma gate of nonduality, while the Flower Garland Sutra lists many classes and forms of practice. All these are teachings delivered through numerous similes and expressions established for diverse capacities.

“The buddhawork performed has never been suspended even briefly” concludes that benefits through form and sound are all not false. The various manifested forms and spoken teachings concerning self and other above are all intended to bring beings into the Buddha’s knowing and seeing, not merely to accomplish the lesser affairs of humans, devas, or the two vehicles; hence they are called buddhawork.

If only one person attained extinction and everyone else could not, some buddhawork would be abandoned. Once abandoned, other beings would not obtain real benefit. How then could all be called real and not false?

Someone may pursue the point: In the past the Buddha said that while seated at the place of practice he had not obtained a single dharma; none of the seven skillful means was ultimate extinction, and the two nirvāṇas were only the empty fist displayed as a skillful means. On this account, the past was only false and did not yet reveal that everything was real. How then can all be said to be real?

The answer is that the seven provisional means of the past could be called false only if they never ultimately enabled beings to enter the one reality. The Buddha first used provisional means to lead beings out, but there is no one whom provisional means led out who does not finally enter reality. Thus one knows that the skillful means that appeared false in the past existed precisely for the final reality. This is the meaning of all being real and not false and buddhawork never being suspended.

XI. The Origin Is Truly Without Extinction, Yet the Three Bodies Announce Extinction

Beginning with “In this way, since I attained buddhahood, an exceedingly long time has passed” explains that although the Buddha originally does not become extinct, he manifests entry into extinction. It has two parts: first, originally unextinguished yet manifesting extinction; second, beginning with “The Tathāgata uses this skillful means,” the benefit brought by manifested extinction.

The first part is also twofold: first, the Origin’s actual non-extinction; second, beginning with “Yet now,” the announcement of entry into extinction within manifestation.

Beginning with “Since I attained buddhahood” states that the Buddha fruit constantly abides; because it constantly abides, it does not become extinct. The sutra entrusts to these few words the revelation of the mighty tendency of the future, constantly abiding and benefiting beings.

Beginning with “The lifespan I accomplished while originally practicing the bodhisattva path” uses lifespan on the causal ground to compare and reveal lifespan on the fruit-ground, thereby clarifying constant abiding. Earlier people used this passage to prove that the Buddha’s lifespan remains impermanent. They said that in the past the Buddha had already passed kalpas numbering more than the sands of the Ganges and would continue for twice the preceding number, but that this merely prolonged life through supernormal power and remained impermanent in the end.

Such a reading grasps the wording one-sidedly and greatly misses the purport. The sutra uses cause to illustrate fruit; the lifespan of the Buddha fruit is not something countable. The sutra’s verse says that the lifespan of numberless kalpas was obtained through long cultivation of karma; it is not life prolonged through supernormal power.

Why? When the Buddha cultivated the perfect cause and ascended to the first abode, he had already obtained constant lifespan. Constant lifespan cannot be calculated by number; if lifespan on the causal ground already exceeds the preceding number of particles, how much more the Buddha fruit? Why abandon the Buddha fruit that the sutra intends to illustrate and instead cling casually to the causal ground used as the comparison? Even that causal lifespan is already constant rather than impermanent.

It is like the stipend received by a crown prince: it is already inexhaustible, so how could his resources be exhausted after he ascends the highest sovereign rank? The clear wording stands here; why wrench its meaning and cause later students to doubt and misunderstand?

Beginning with “Yet now it is not a real extinction” is the second level, announcing entry into extinction within manifestation. The Dharma, reward, and response bodies all possess the meaning of originally not becoming extinct yet skillfully announcing extinction.

First, the Dharma body is originally unextinguished yet announces extinction. The Vimalakīrti Sūtra says that dharmas are originally unborn and now therefore have nothing that can be extinguished; this expresses the Dharma body’s original non-extinction. It also says that this is the meaning of quiescent extinction, which is the announcement of extinction to beings. Why? Those who already understand do not need quiescent extinction announced for them; it is taught only to those who do not yet understand.

If one says “illumining yet quiescent,” this is the announcement of extinction; if one says “quiescent yet illumining,” this is the announcement of birth. Although the Dharma body is originally neither born nor extinguished, birth and extinction can be discussed in relation to beings’ delusion and awakening. When the deluded mind grasps, afflictions arise and wisdom is extinguished; when the understanding mind remains unstained, wisdom arises and afflictions are extinguished.

Extinguishing delusion and generating understanding is impermanent birth and extinction; when understanding arises and delusion is extinguished, this can also be called quiescent extinction. All these births and extinctions are distinguished in terms of delusion and understanding with respect to Dharma-nature. Without the two conditions of delusion and understanding, such birth and extinction would not be taught.

Second, the reward body is originally unextinguished yet announces extinction. Who possesses wisdom and who possesses affliction, such that wisdom is said to destroy affliction? Light and darkness cannot mutually remove one another; this indicates the reward body’s non-extinction. Beings who have not understood may hear this and suppose that they are already buddhas in their present state, become arrogant and unrestrained, and cease cultivating the Way. The Buddha therefore also announces that the Way can extinguish delusion: when affliction is present wisdom is absent, and when wisdom is present affliction is absent. Is this not wisdom extinguishing affliction?

Third, the response body is originally unextinguished yet announces extinction. The response body is the functioning of the Dharma and reward bodies. Since the essence does not become extinct, how could its functioning be exhausted? Thus the response body is originally unextinguished. Yet if beings constantly see the Buddha, they become arrogant and heedless, and the Buddha therefore announces that he will enter extinction that very night.

This can be explained further through the relation of the Dharma and reward bodies. The Dharma body is directly said to be unextinguished in essence; the reward body must rely upon the Dharma body to be called unextinguished. If one investigates through principle whether wisdom can destroy affliction, one may ask: Does wisdom destroy affliction only after reaching it, or before reaching it? Does wisdom destroy it together with other conditions, or alone? Such investigation finds no substantial act of destruction; this is the meaning of wisdom not extinguishing affliction. In terms of phenomena, however, affliction is absent when wisdom is present, and wisdom can be said to extinguish affliction.

To say that the response body does not become extinct relies on the Dharma and reward bodies. Since Dharma and reward constantly abide, responsive transformation continues without interruption. So long as beings are not exhausted, the Buddha’s responsive transformation does not enter extinction. Distinguished separately, the Dharma body is neither born nor extinguished in essence; the reward body realizes that no substantial dharma can be born or extinguished; the response body is said to be unborn and unextinguished through continuity from before to after. “[The remainder is abbreviated.]”

XII. The Harm and Benefit of Manifested Extinction, and the Final Conclusion

Beginning with “through this skillful means he teaches and transforms” is the second part, explaining how manifested extinction benefits beings. It has two levels: first, if the Buddha never manifests extinction, beings are harmed; second, beginning with the skillful statement “Monks, you should know,” beings benefit when the Buddha announces extinction.

The harm of non-extinction is also twofold: first it is stated briefly, then explained extensively. Briefly: the people described above who delight in Lesser Dharmas see the Buddha constantly present and do not plant wholesome roots, becoming poor and lowly. They cannot generate the two wholesome dharmas of conditioning and discernment causes and therefore receive no benefit; the delusions of views and thought also cannot be severed, and these two evils remain, causing harm.

Attachment to the five desires is the delusion of thought; entering the net of recollective thought and false views is the delusion of views. Because these beings’ defilements are heavy, the Buddha must announce extinction. If he does not, the two evils arise and are not extinguished, while the two wholesome qualities are damaged and do not arise.

When extinction is manifested according to the four siddhāntas, the two evils are extinguished and the two wholesome qualities arise. To extinguish the two evils, the counteractive and ultimate-truth siddhāntas are used: ultimate truth extinguishes evil that has not yet arisen, while the counteractive extinguishes evil that has arisen. The worldly and individual siddhāntas generate the two wholesome qualities: the worldly causes unarisen good to arise, and the individual causes arisen good to increase.

It can also be said that the worldly siddhānta extinguishes arisen evil while the counteractive siddhānta extinguishes unarisen evil. For example, cultivating meditation and thereby extinguishing the evil of the five aggregates in the desire realm is the worldly siddhānta extinguishing arisen evil. The individual siddhānta increases arisen good, and the ultimate-truth siddhānta generates the unarisen unconditioned good.

Beginning with “if they see” extensively explains the harm of non-extinction. If beings see the Buddha constantly abiding in the world, they become arrogant and unrestrained, which is harm; they cannot generate reverence, which is absence of benefit. “arrogance and license” increases the delusion of views, while “weariness and indolence” increases the delusion of thought. Inability to form the thought that the Buddha is difficult to encounter prevents the understanding that sees truth; inability to revere prevents reflective cultivation of the Way. For these reasons it is appropriate for the Buddha to manifest entry into extinction.

Beings who see or hear that the Dharma, reward, and response bodies do not become extinct may all become arrogant and unrestrained. First, one who hears that the Dharma body does not become extinct may say that the suchness of beings and Maitreya’s suchness are one without duality, and that complete equality is truth. From this arise arrogance and overweening pride. The person may further say that all afflictions were originally unborn and now have nothing that can be extinguished, so why cultivate the Way, and may therefore indulge heedlessly. For such people the Buddha declares that this is the meaning of quiescent extinction, causing them to extinguish delusion and realize.

Second, beings hear that the mark of all beings is precisely the mark of bodhi, the mark of bodhi precisely the mark of affliction, and light and darkness do not mutually remove one another. They again become arrogant and unrestrained, cease cultivating good, and fall into indolence and heedlessness. For them the Buddha declares that the wisdom of the reward body can extinguish affliction. The power of ignorance is great, and only the Buddha’s bodhi-wisdom can extinguish it.

Third, the response body is originally unextinguished yet manifests entry into extinction; the meaning is comparatively easy to understand.

If the Buddha taught only that dharmas were originally unborn and are now unextinguished, beings would still have to know that only extinguishing delusion is truly called quiescent extinction. The sutra also says that wisdom does not extinguish affliction; yet darkness is absent when light appears, and beings plainly possess afflictions now. How could they say that they already possess wisdom? One should know that wisdom can indeed extinguish obstructions and delusion.

When beings hear the Buddha announce extinction in this way, they form the thought that the Dharma, reward, and response bodies are difficult to encounter and arouse a mind of reverence.

Beginning with “Therefore the Tathāgata uses skillful means” directly explains the benefit of announcing extinction and has three levels: first, praising how difficult the Buddha is to encounter; second, explaining why he is difficult to encounter; third, saying that the buddhas of all three bodies are difficult to encounter.

Beings delight in Lesser Dharmas and are deeply obstructed by the delusions of views and thought. Even after hearing that the three bodies do not become extinct, they refuse to cultivate the Way and therefore find it difficult to accord and meet with the three bodies.

Next the difficulty of encounter is explained. Beings of meager qualities may pass hundreds of thousands of myriads of koṭis of kalpas, sometimes seeing a buddha and sometimes not. If they can see the Dharma, reward, and response bodies, they have much good and little evil, and the Buddha need not announce extinction for them; such people are as though they constantly see the Buddha present on Vulture Peak. If they cannot see him, their obstructions are heavy and their good slight, so the Buddha tells them that the three bodies are difficult to encounter.

Beings who hear this think: Although the three bodies are originally neither born nor extinguished, I must still generate wholesome dharmas and extinguish delusion before I can realize and see them myself. This is not easy and is therefore called difficult to encounter.

“cherishing longing and thirsting for the Buddha” shows that the Buddha’s manifested extinction does not harm beings. Extinguishing the delusions of views and thought is called absence of harm; planting wholesome roots is called benefit.

Beginning with “Again, good sons” is the second major part of the teaching by Dharma. It concludes the Buddha’s benefit to beings in the past, present, and future, through which they all receive real benefit. The conclusion has three points. First, when buddhas appear amid the five turbidities, they necessarily teach the three vehicles first and afterward return them to the One, and teach recent attainment first and afterward reveal distant attainment. Second, all this is done to transform beings. Third, every teaching of skillful means and reality is without falsehood.

壽量品 · 譬說(開譬・合譬)The Lifespan of the Tathāgata · Teaching by Parable: Opening and Application

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、譬說怎樣分科

從『譬如』以下,是第二大段譬說,分成開譬與合譬。

開譬又分兩層:第一是良醫治子譬,用來譬喻前面所說三世應化的機宜;第二是治子實益譬,用來譬喻前面所說三世利益眾生真實不虛。前面法說之中,未來的文字很少,這裡的譬喻卻三世俱全。

先說第一層,又分三段:第一是良醫遠行譬,譬喻過去世利益眾生;第二是回家以後又離去,譬喻現在世的應化;第三是不久又回來,譬喻未來世的應化。

過去這一段,前面的長行原有兩層:一是從近時成佛推顯久遠成佛,二是說明過去應化的機宜。這裡只譬喻應化的機宜。機宜又有三項:一是處所,二是拂去對中間因果的疑惑,三是正說應化;這裡只譬喻應化。應化又分兩項:一是眾生的機感,二是佛的正應化;這兩項譬中都有。

『如有良醫』一句,是越過中間而直接譬喻前文『我以佛眼觀』,表示佛有能應眾生的智慧。從『多諸子息』一句起,是回頭譬喻前文『若有眾生來至我所』,表示眾生有能感佛的根機。

前面所說應化的機宜又有兩層:一是利益眾生,二是說明眾生歡喜;這裡只譬喻利益眾生。前面利益眾生又有兩層:一是本來不生而示現出生,二是本來不滅而示現滅度;這裡只譬喻示現滅度。

二、十種醫是哪十種

先解『良醫』一詞。醫有十種。

第一種,治病而使病增加、毫無減損,有時甚至致人於死。這譬喻執著空見的外道,他們縱意造惡,又教人生起邪見、斷絕善根,法身既已喪失,慧命也隨之而死。

第二種,治病而不增不減。這譬喻執著有見的苦行外道,他們投身巖下、赴入火中,以苦行修善,卻得不到禪定、不能斷除煩惱結使,這就是無所減損;也不能斷絕善根,這就是不增加。

第三種,治病能減損而不增加,但世間醫者所治,痊癒之後還會再犯。這就是修習禪定、伏斷煩惱的外道。

第四種,治病能使痊癒之後不再復發,但所能治的並不周遍。這就是二乘之人,只能治一兩種有緣的眾生,不能普遍治療一切眾生。

第五種,雖然能夠兼治周遍,卻沒有巧妙的技術來處理痛苦。《大智度論》稱這種為拙度,就是修六度的菩薩以慈悲廣泛救治。

第六種,治病的技術巧妙,治療時不生痛惱,卻不能治必死之人。這譬喻通教菩薩用體法觀門,只能救治還有轉圜餘地的凡夫,不能救治如同焦壞種子的二乘。

第七種,雖然能治難以痊癒的病,卻不能同時治好一切病。這就是別教菩薩。

第八種,能夠同時治好一切病,卻不能使人平復如初。這就是圓教初心的十信位。

第九種,能夠周遍治好一切,也能使人平復如初,卻不能使人超過原本。這就是圓教後心。

第十種,同時治好一切病,並且能使人平復,又使人超過原本。這就是如來。

前三種醫,就是《大般涅槃經》中所說用乳藥的舊醫;後七種都是客醫。其中沒有技術的,只會用無常、苦等法門,如同使用辛、苦、酢一類的藥;有技術而從遠方來的,最後仍舊教人服乳,這才是究竟的良醫。

三、良醫、智慧、聰達逐字怎麼講

『良』就是善。內在具有三達與五眼,這就是八術;能巧妙掌握藥性而善於治療,是說對外能認識病源、懂得用藥。

『智慧』,指權智與實智二種智慧,深深了知真俗二諦。『聰達』,指以五眼鑑察根機,頓與漸絲毫不差。十二部教的文與理都極為深奧,如同經文所說『明鍊方藥』;依四悉檀救治眾生的病,如同經文所說『善治眾病』。

《無量義經》說『醫王大醫王』;因為是大醫,所以稱為良醫。

四、多諸子息與三種佛子

『多諸子息』一句中,『若十』指聲聞,『二十』指支佛,『百數』指菩薩。

菩薩之子,共有三種子的意義。

第一,就一切眾生而言,眾生都具有三種性德,佛性就是佛子,所以經中說『其中眾生悉是吾子』,本經此處則說『多諸子息』。若就十種心數法來說便有百子:心王是正因佛性,慧是了因佛性,其餘九項互相扶助生起,屬於緣因佛性;一個心數生起時,另外九個從旁扶助,這樣就成為百。性德佛子不是善也不是惡,卻能通於善惡,所以這十數與心王同為通心數;因此性德三因,全都歸屬正因佛子。

第二,就往昔結緣而成為佛子。例如十六王子重講《法華經》時,聽法的人也生起微少的理解,這就成為了因佛性;往昔能夠稍稍修行,成為緣因佛性;正因為根本。這三因合起來都歸屬緣因,能資助引發今日一實之解,所以把往昔結緣稱為緣因佛子,也就是〈譬喻品〉火宅中的三十子。這是就十信位說:一信生起時就具足其餘九信,仍舊成為百信,所以能以結緣為佛子。

第三是了因之子,就是今日聽聞《法華經》、安住實智之中、確信自己必定當得作佛、決了聲聞之法、知道此經是諸經之王,因而從佛口生、得佛法分,所以名為真子。這一類也有三因性;如今既已顯了見到佛性,就都歸屬了因佛子。百子的意義,仍舊是把十數收入十善法中、把十信收入初住中,因此正因通於本與末。本段所說的百子,不取了因之子;了因之子屬於下文不失心而服藥一節中說明。

五、遠行、飲毒、還家

『以有事緣遠至他國』一句,譬喻過去應化之中的示現滅度。

從『諸子於後』以下,是第二段回家以後又離去,譬喻現在世利益眾生,又分兩層。

第一,諸子在父親離去之後飲下毒藥,譬喻前面所說機與應互相關涉:佛見眾生德行淺薄、垢染深重。眾生在佛滅度以後,樂於執著三界中邪師的法,所以說『飲他毒藥』,也就是經文『遊行詣他國』;輾轉流轉於諸趣、墮在三界之中,所以說『宛轉于地』。

從『是時其父還來歸家』以下,譬喻前面所說我少年出家得三菩提,也就是第二層本來不生而示現出生。

前面原有兩項:形益與聲益,以及利益真實不虛。如今說諸子飲毒,是譬喻前面的形益。信受邪師之法名為『飲毒』;『失心』表示沒有大乘小乘的機感生起,不失心表示有大乘小乘的機感生起。

又,失心的人貪著三界,喪失先前所種的三乘善根,佛為這種人本來不滅而唱說滅度。不失心的人,雖然貪著五欲卻沒有喪失三乘善根,佛為這種人本來不生而示現出生。善根強而惡業輕的,見到佛就能修道斷結,如同兒子見到父親、求藥而病癒;善根輕而惡業重的,雖然也見到佛,只求救護而不肯修道,如同兒子見到父親、求救卻不肯服藥,父親便為這樣的兒子唱說應當死去。

『遙見』一句,說明佛出世時眾生也能見到色身,卻被見惑、思惑障隔五分法身,不能親自承奉法身,所以說『遙』。見聞佛出世都有歡喜恭敬之事,如今諸經文中梵王請佛等記載,都屬於求救的言辭。

六、經方、藥草與擣篩和合

從『父見子等苦』以下,譬喻前面所說的聲益,又分兩層。最初譬喻佛接受請求而轉真俗二諦法輪。從『而作是言』以下,譬喻誡與勸。

『經方』就是十二部教,『藥草』就是十二部教所詮的八萬法門。從佛出十二部教乃至出《大般涅槃經》,這是出漸教與頓教的藥草;直接從佛出十二部教,這是出頓教的藥草;從佛出修多羅,這是出漸教的藥草。

『色』譬喻戒,戒能防護身業口業,事相彰明顯著。『香』譬喻定,功德之香熏染一切。『味』譬喻慧,能得到理的滋味。這戒、定、慧就是八正道;修八正道能見佛性。

又可以說,『色』是般若,照了法性之色分明無礙;『香』是解脫,斷德離去臭穢;『味』是法身,也就是理的滋味。這三法不縱不橫,名為祕密藏;依教修行便能進入此藏。

宣說三乘:空三昧之力如同『擣』,無相三昧如同『篩』,無作三昧如同『合』;一一三昧都具足戒定慧。又可說空觀如同『擣』,假觀如同『篩』,中觀如同『合』;這三觀各自不離戒定慧。把這些法給予漸教頓教的眾生、令其修行,名為『服』。

從『而作是言』乃至『可服』,就是勸門;從『速除苦惱』乃至『無復眾患』,就是誡門。以誡、勸二教,使眾生服下法藥。

從『其諸子中不失心者』以下,譬喻前面所說得益真實不虛。前面原有兩項:一是不虛,二是解釋不虛。如今說『其諸子中不失心者服藥病差』,就是譬喻前面所說一切真實不虛。至於解釋不虛,則沒有另作譬喻。

〔妙法蓮華經文句卷第九下訖。以下卷第十上,天台智者大師說。〕

七、餘失心者與唱說滅度

從『餘失心者』以下,譬喻前面所說本來不滅而示現滅度。前面原有兩項:一是不久應當死去,譬喻本來不滅而示現滅度;二是諸子醒悟,譬喻唱說滅度所生的利益。

又,唱說死去的緣由,在於兒子不肯服藥,這譬喻前面所說德行淺薄的人見佛常在、反而更增憍慢放縱。

前面說示現滅度時有兩層:一是本來實在不滅,二是本來不滅而唱說滅度;其中並未說出示現滅度的緣由,那緣由也含在唱說滅度的利益之中。如今譬喻不譬第一層,而說明示現滅度的緣由,正因為眾生德薄、見佛而不修行,也就是不肯服藥。

從『我今當設』以下,正式唱說應當死去,譬喻本來不滅而唱說滅度。此中說明衰老又分兩層:第一是斟酌去或住哪一種合宜,譬喻前面所說常住有損、示滅有益;第二從『即作是言』以下唱說應當死去,正是譬喻示現滅度、化緣將盡。

『死時已至』,是說將要進入涅槃。留下經教在世,所以說『是好良藥今留在此』。『復至他國』,就是在此方示現滅度、在他方示現出生;前文說『願在他方遙見守護』,正是這個意思。

『遣使』一句,有人取《大般涅槃經》中大聲普告的人為使者,有人用神通,有人用舍利,有人用經教等為使者;如今則用四依菩薩告訴眾生說:佛已滅度,只留下此法,我今宣揚弘傳,你們應當受持奉行。後代眾生若沒有四依傳述經法,怎能自己知道佛已滅度?所以用四依作為使者。

第二,從『是時諸子』以下,諸子醒悟,譬喻示現滅度所生的利益。前文原有兩項:一是說明損與益,二是解釋損與益;如今只譬喻得益。

其中從『自惟孤露』以下,說明佛滅度以後所得的利益,如同優波笈多所度化的那一類人。這又分兩層:一是示現滅度的利益,二是未來的機感。正因為佛滅度以後眾生醒悟、服藥修行而作成因緣,才能感得未來的應化,如同《佛遺教經》所說『其未度者作得度因緣』;也有現前就能感見的,《觀普賢菩薩行法經》說『精進苦到得見釋迦分身、多寶、東力、善德等及七佛世尊』。

第三,從『其父聞子悉已得差』以下,就是未來利益眾生的威猛之力。父親聽說兒子病癒,眾生的根機便一齊使他得見,這就是興起未來的應化,將要施行形益與聲益兩種利益,如經文所說。

從『諸善男子於意云何』以下,是牒舉不虛之譬,說明三世利益真實不虛。

八、合譬

從『佛言我亦如是』以下,說明合譬。

『成佛已來無量劫』一句,合於過去世。『方便力言當滅度』一句,合於現在世。文中省略而沒有合未來世。『亦無能說我虛妄』一句,合於利益眾生真實不虛。

I. How the Teaching by Parable Is Divided

Beginning with “suppose,” the second major section is the teaching by parable, which is divided into opening the parable and applying the parable.

Opening the parable is further divided into two levels. First is the parable of the good physician treating his children, illustrating the appropriateness of responsive transformation in the three periods taught above. Second is the parable of the real benefit gained by treating the children, illustrating that benefiting beings in the three periods, as taught above, is real and not false. Very little in the preceding Dharma teaching concerned the future, but all three periods are complete in this parable.

The first level is itself divided into three parts. First, the good physician’s distant journey illustrates benefiting beings in the past. Second, his leaving again after returning home illustrates responsive transformation in the present. Third, his return soon afterward illustrates responsive transformation in the future.

The preceding prose passage on the past had two levels: first, using recent attainment to bring distant attainment to light; second, explaining what was appropriate for responsive transformation in the past. Only what was appropriate for responsive transformation is illustrated here. That appropriateness had three aspects: first the places, second dispelling doubt about cause and effect in the intervening period, and third responsive transformation proper. Only responsive transformation is illustrated here. Responsive transformation itself had two aspects: beings’ stimulus of capacity and the Buddha’s actual response; both are present in the parable.

The words “suppose there is a good physician” leap over the intervening material and directly illustrate the earlier words “I observe with the Buddha eye,” showing that the Buddha possesses the wisdom capable of responding to beings. Beginning with “many children,” the text turns back to illustrate the earlier “if beings come to me,” showing that beings possess capacities capable of eliciting the Buddha.

The appropriateness of responsive transformation taught above also had two levels: benefiting beings and then explaining their joy. Only benefiting beings is illustrated here. Benefiting beings above likewise had two levels: manifesting birth without originally being born, and manifesting extinction without originally becoming extinct. Only manifested extinction is illustrated here.

II. What Are the Ten Kinds of Physician?

First the term liangyi (“good physician”) is explained. There are ten kinds of physician.

The first treats an illness but makes it worse without reducing it at all, sometimes even causing death. This illustrates outsiders attached to views of emptiness. They freely commit evil and teach others to produce wrong views and sever their wholesome roots. Once the Dharma body has been lost, the life of wisdom also dies.

The second treats an illness without making it either better or worse. This illustrates ascetic outsiders attached to views of existence. They cast themselves from cliffs or enter fire, cultivating wholesome acts through austerities, yet they do not attain concentration and cannot sever the bonds of affliction; this is the absence of improvement. Nor do they sever their wholesome roots; this is the absence of aggravation.

The third treats illness so that it diminishes without worsening, but after worldly physicians have cured it, the illness can recur. This illustrates outsiders who cultivate concentration and suppress or sever the afflictions.

The fourth cures illness so that it does not recur, but cannot treat universally. This illustrates people of the two vehicles, who can treat only one or two classes of beings with whom they have affinities and cannot treat all beings universally.

The fifth can treat universally, yet lacks skillful technique for dealing with pain. The Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom calls this clumsy crossing: bodhisattvas cultivating the six perfections provide broad treatment through compassion.

The sixth possesses skillful technique and causes no painful distress while treating, but cannot treat someone certain to die. This illustrates bodhisattvas of the shared teaching, whose contemplation realizing the substantial emptiness of dharmas can rescue ordinary beings who still have the possibility of reversal, but cannot rescue those of the two vehicles who are like scorched seeds.

The seventh can treat an illness difficult to cure, but cannot cure all illnesses simultaneously. This illustrates bodhisattvas of the distinct teaching.

The eighth can cure all illnesses simultaneously, but cannot restore the patient to the original state. This illustrates the ten faiths, the beginner’s stage of the perfect teaching.

The ninth can cure all illnesses universally and restore the patient to the original state, but cannot cause the patient to surpass that state. This illustrates the later mind of the perfect teaching.

The tenth cures all illnesses simultaneously, restores the patient, and causes the patient to surpass the original state. This is the Tathāgata.

The first three physicians are the old physicians using milk medicine described in the Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra; the latter seven are all visiting physicians. Those without technique use only teachings such as impermanence and suffering, like medicines that are pungent, bitter, and sour. The one with technique who comes from afar ultimately still has people drink milk; only this is the ultimate good physician.

III. How “Good,” “Wisdom,” and “Clear Understanding” Are Explained Word by Word

“good” means excellent. Inwardly possessing the three penetrative knowledges and five eyes constitutes the eight arts; skillfully mastering the properties of medicines and treating well means that outwardly the physician can recognize the source of illness and understand how to use medicine.

“wisdom” means the two kinds of wisdom, provisional and real, through which the physician deeply knows the two truths of the true and the conventional. “clear understanding” means using the five eyes to discern capacities without the slightest error concerning sudden and gradual. The words and principles of the twelve divisions of the teaching are all exceedingly profound, like the sutra’s “thoroughly versed in prescriptions and medicines”; treating beings’ illnesses through the four siddhāntas is like the sutra’s “skillfully treating the many illnesses.”

The Sutra of Immeasurable Meanings says “king of physicians, great king of physicians.” Because he is the great physician, he is called a good physician.

IV. “Many Children” and Three Kinds of Buddha-Child

In the phrase “many children,” “perhaps ten” refers to śrāvakas, “twenty” to pratyekabuddhas, and “a hundred” to bodhisattvas.

The bodhisattva children have the meaning of three kinds of child.

First, as concerns all beings, beings all possess the three kinds of inherent virtue. Buddha-nature is precisely buddha-child, and so the sutra says “the beings within are all my children,” while the present passage of this sutra says “many children.” If reckoned through the ten associated mental factors, there are a hundred children. The mind-king is buddha-nature as the direct cause; wisdom is buddha-nature as the discernment cause; the other nine mutually assist their arising and belong to buddha-nature as conditioning cause. Whenever one mental factor arises, the other nine assist it, making a hundred. Buddha-children of inherent virtue are neither wholesome nor unwholesome, yet can extend through both; hence these ten and the mind-king are mental factors common to all minds. All three causes as inherent virtue are therefore assigned to buddha-children of the direct cause.

Second are those who became buddha-children through connections formed in the past. For example, when the sixteen princes repeated the Lotus Sutra, those who heard the Dharma also generated a slight understanding, which became buddha-nature as discernment cause. Their slight cultivation in the past became buddha-nature as conditioning cause, while the direct cause remained the basis. Together these three causes are all assigned to the conditioning cause, because they assist in eliciting today’s understanding of the one reality. Past connection is therefore called the conditioning-cause buddha-child, namely the thirty children in the burning house of the “Parable” chapter. This is explained in terms of the ten faiths: when one faith arises, it possesses the other nine and still makes a hundred faiths. Thus connection can constitute buddha-children.

Third are children through the discernment cause: those who today hear the Lotus Sutra, abide in real wisdom, firmly believe that they will certainly attain buddhahood, have decisively understood the Dharma of the śrāvakas, and know that this sutra is king among sutras. They are thereby born from the Buddha’s mouth and receive a share of the Buddha Dharma, and so are called true children. This class also possesses the nature of the three causes. Since they have now clearly seen buddha-nature, all are assigned to buddha-children of the discernment cause. The meaning of a hundred children still gathers the tenfold number into the ten wholesome deeds and the ten faiths into the first abode; hence the direct cause extends through root and branches. The hundred children in this passage do not include children through the discernment cause. Those children are explained below in the passage on those who have not lost the right mind and take the medicine.

V. Traveling Afar, Drinking Poison, and Returning Home

The words “having business, he travels far to another country” illustrate manifested extinction within responsive transformation in the past.

Beginning with “afterward, the children,” the second part describes the father leaving again after returning home. It illustrates benefiting beings in the present and is divided into two levels.

First, the children drink poison after their father has left, illustrating the mutual involvement of capacity and response explained above: the Buddha sees beings as meager in qualities and heavy with defilement. After the Buddha’s extinction, beings delight in and cling to the teachings of wrong teachers within the three realms. Hence the text says “they drink another’s poison,” corresponding to the sutra’s “he travels to another country.” Revolving through the destinies and falling within the three realms is called “writhing upon the ground.”

Beginning with “at that time their father returns home” illustrates the earlier statement that the Buddha left home in youth and attained complete awakening. This is the second level: manifesting birth without originally being born.

The preceding passage originally had benefits through form and sound, together with benefit that is real and not false. The children’s drinking poison now illustrates the preceding benefit through form. Accepting the Dharma of wrong teachers is called “drinking poison.” “losing the right mind” means that no Great or Lesser Vehicle capacity arises; not losing the right mind means that a Great or Lesser Vehicle capacity arises.

Again, those who lose their right minds cling to the three realms and lose the wholesome roots of the three vehicles planted earlier. For them the Buddha, originally unextinguished, announces extinction. Those who do not lose their right minds cling to the five desires yet have not lost the wholesome roots of the three vehicles. For them the Buddha, originally unborn, manifests birth. Those with strong wholesome roots and light evil karma can cultivate the Way and sever the bonds on seeing the Buddha, like children who see their father, request medicine, and recover. Those with slight wholesome roots and heavy evil karma may also see the Buddha but only request rescue and refuse to cultivate the Way, like children who see their father and request help but refuse to take the medicine. For such children the father announces that he must die.

The word yaojian (“seeing from afar”) means that when the Buddha appears in the world, beings can see his form-body, yet the delusions of views and thought separate them from the fivefold Dharma body. They cannot personally attend upon the Dharma body, and so it is called “afar.” Seeing and hearing that the Buddha has appeared both produce joy and reverence. Accounts such as Brahmā’s request to the Buddha in the scriptures all belong to words seeking rescue.

VI. Prescriptions, Medicinal Herbs, and Pounding, Sifting, and Combining

Beginning with “the father sees his children suffering” illustrates the preceding benefit through sound and is divided into two levels. The first illustrates the Buddha accepting the request and turning the Dharma wheel of the two truths, true and conventional. Beginning with “and he speaks these words” illustrates admonition and exhortation.

“prescriptions” means the twelve divisions of the teaching, and “medicinal herbs” means the eighty thousand Dharma gates conveyed by those divisions. From the Buddha there issue the twelve divisions through the Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra: these are the medicinal herbs of the gradual and sudden teachings. The twelve divisions issuing directly from the Buddha are the medicinal herbs of the sudden teaching; the sūtras issuing from the Buddha are the medicinal herbs of the gradual teaching.

“color” illustrates ethical discipline, which guards bodily and verbal karma and is manifest in concrete conduct. “fragrance” illustrates concentration, whose fragrance of qualities permeates everything. “flavor” illustrates wisdom, which obtains the taste of principle. Ethical discipline, concentration, and wisdom are the eightfold noble path; cultivating that path enables one to see buddha-nature.

It may also be said that “color” is prajñā, which clearly and unobstructedly illumines the color of Dharma-nature; “fragrance” is liberation, the virtue of severance freed from foulness; and “flavor” is the Dharma body, the taste of principle. These three dharmas are neither vertical nor horizontal and are called the secret treasury. Practicing according to the teaching enables one to enter this treasury.

In teaching the three vehicles, the power of the samādhi of emptiness is like “pounding,” the samādhi of signlessness is like “sifting,” and the samādhi of wishlessness is like “combining.” Each samādhi fully possesses ethical discipline, concentration, and wisdom. It may also be said that contemplation of emptiness is like “pounding,” contemplation of the provisional is like “sifting,” and contemplation of the middle is like “combining.” None of these three contemplations is apart from ethical discipline, concentration, and wisdom. Giving these dharmas to beings of the gradual and sudden teachings and causing them to practice is called “taking the medicine.”

From “and he speaks these words” through “you may take it” is the gate of exhortation; from “quickly remove your painful distress” through “have no further afflictions” is the gate of admonition. Through the two teachings of admonition and exhortation, beings are made to take the Dharma medicine.

Beginning with “among his children, those who have not lost their right minds” illustrates that the benefit taught above is real and not false. The preceding passage originally had two aspects: non-falsehood and the explanation of non-falsehood. Here the words “among his children, those who have not lost their right minds take the medicine and recover” illustrate that everything stated above is real and not false. No separate parable is given for the explanation of non-falsehood.

“Fahua Wenju, Fascicle Nine, Lower Half, ends here. Below begins Fascicle Ten, Upper Half, spoken by the Great Master Zhizhe of Tiantai.”

VII. The Remaining Children Who Have Lost Their Right Minds and the Announcement of Extinction

Beginning with “the remaining children who have lost their right minds” illustrates manifesting extinction without originally becoming extinct, as taught above. The preceding passage originally had two aspects: first, “before long I will die,” illustrating manifested extinction without originally becoming extinct; and second, the children’s awakening, illustrating the benefit produced by announcing extinction.

Again, the reason for announcing death lies in the children’s refusal to take the medicine. This illustrates the earlier teaching that people meager in qualities see the Buddha constantly present and consequently become still more arrogant and unrestrained.

The preceding explanation of manifested extinction had two levels: first, originally and truly not becoming extinct; second, announcing extinction without originally becoming extinct. It did not separately state the reason for manifested extinction, which was included within the benefit produced by announcing extinction. The parable now does not illustrate the first level, but explains the reason for manifested extinction: beings are meager in qualities, see the Buddha, and yet do not practice—just as the children refuse the medicine.

Beginning with “I will now devise” formally announces that the father must die, illustrating the announcement of extinction without originally becoming extinct. The explanation of his decline in age has two levels. First, he weighs whether departure or remaining is appropriate, illustrating the preceding point that constant presence causes harm while manifested extinction brings benefit. Second, beginning with “he then speaks these words,” he announces that he must die, directly illustrating manifested extinction as the conditions for transformation draw to an end.

“the time of death has arrived” means that he is about to enter nirvāṇa. He leaves the scriptural teaching in the world, and so says “I now leave this fine medicine here.” “again he goes to another country” means manifesting extinction in this land and manifesting birth in another. The preceding text’s “may he watch over and protect us from afar in another land” has precisely this meaning.

The phrase qianshi (“sending a messenger”) has been interpreted in several ways: some take the person who announces the news in a great voice in the Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra as the messenger, some take supernormal powers, some relics, and some the scriptural teaching. Here, however, bodhisattvas of the four reliances are taken as telling beings: the Buddha has entered extinction and left only this Dharma; I now proclaim and transmit it, and you should receive, uphold, and practice it. If later beings had no four reliances to transmit the scriptures and Dharma, how could they know by themselves that the Buddha had entered extinction? The four reliances are therefore taken as the messenger.

Second, beginning with “at that time the children,” the children awaken, illustrating the benefit produced by manifested extinction. The preceding passage originally had two aspects: first, explaining harm and benefit; second, explaining that harm and benefit. Only the acquisition of benefit is illustrated here.

Within this, beginning with “they consider themselves orphaned and exposed” explains the benefit obtained after the Buddha’s extinction, as with the kinds of people transformed by Upagupta. This is again twofold: first, the benefit of manifested extinction; second, capacity in the future. Because beings awaken after the Buddha’s extinction, take the medicine, and practice, they create the conditions capable of eliciting responsive transformation in the future. Thus the Sutra of the Buddha’s Bequeathed Teaching says “for those not yet liberated, create the conditions for liberation.” Some can elicit a vision in the present: the Sutra on the Practice of Contemplating the Bodhisattva Samantabhadra says “through diligent and arduous effort, one sees Śākyamuni’s divided bodies, Prabhūtaratna, Dongli, Shande, and the seven World-Honored Buddhas.”

Third, beginning with “the father hears that all his children have recovered” is the mighty power of benefiting beings in the future. When the father hears that the children have recovered, beings’ capacities jointly cause them to see him. Responsive transformation in the future thus arises, about to bestow both benefit through form and benefit through sound, as the sutra states.

Beginning with “good sons, what do you think?” restates the parable’s non-falsehood and explains that benefiting beings in all three periods is real and not false.

VIII. Applying the Parable

Beginning with “the Buddha says, I am also like this” explains the application of the parable.

“immeasurable kalpas since I attained buddhahood” applies to the past. “through the power of skillful means I say that I will enter extinction” applies to the present. The text abbreviates and does not apply the parable to the future. “nor can anyone say that I am false” applies to the real and unfailing benefit of beings.

壽量品 · 偈頌The Lifespan of the Tathāgata · Verse

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、二十五行半先分法說、譬說

這一段共有二十五行半偈,重頌前面長行中的法說與譬說。最初二十行半重頌法說,其後五行重頌譬說。

前面的法說分成兩部分,現在的偈頌也分成兩部分:最初十九行半重頌佛在過去、現在、未來三世利益眾生;其後一行重頌前面所說的利益全都真實不虛。

二、過去世利益眾生有三層

重頌過去世利益眾生的共有四行,又分成三層。

第一,最初一行重頌佛成道以來已經非常久遠。

第二,從『常常說法教化』以下一行,重頌佛在久遠成道以後、直到現在的中間時期持續利益眾生。

第三,從『為了度化眾生』以下兩行,重頌佛利益眾生時所在之處。

三、現在世以非生現生、非滅現滅分二

從『眾人看見我滅度』以下五行,是第二大段,重頌現在世利益眾生。前面的長行分成兩層,這裡也分成兩層。

最初二行半,重頌佛本來不是新近出生,卻為眾生示現出生。眾生看見佛滅度,供養舍利,心中戀慕渴仰;等到他們信受調伏、心地質直柔軟,一心想見佛而不惜身命,佛便與眾僧一同出現在靈鷲山。

其次,從『我那時告訴眾生』以下二行半,重頌佛本來不曾滅盡,卻為眾生示現滅度。佛告訴眾生,祂常在此處而不滅,只因方便之力,才示現有滅與不滅;其他國土若有恭敬信樂的眾生,祂也在其中為他們宣說無上之法。眾生沒有聽見這件事,才只以為佛已滅度。

四、未來世十行半分成四層

從『我看見眾生』以下,是第三大段,以十行半偈重頌未來世利益眾生。前面的長行只用『常住不滅』四個字寄託這層意思,現在的偈頌則把它廣為展開,共分四層。

第一,從『我看見眾生』以下一行半,說明未來眾生的根機與佛的回應。佛看見眾生沉沒在苦惱中,暫時不為他們現身,使他們生起渴仰;等到他們心生戀慕,佛才出現而為他們說法。

第二,從『神通力就是如此』以下四行,重頌常住不滅。經文說佛常在靈鷲山,這裡判為實報土;經文又說祂也在其他住處,這裡判為方便有餘土,也就是前文所說的餘國之義。

『天、人充滿』一句中,三十心稱作『人』,十地稱作『天』。『擊響天鼓』,表示不待有人發問而自行說法;『曼陀羅華』,表示宣說賢聖的階位。

第三,從『我的淨土』以下兩行,說明眾生不能得見的因緣。佛的淨土本來不毀,罪業眾生卻因惡業看見它被燒盡,長久處在憂怖苦惱中,甚至聽不到三寶之名。

第四,從『凡有修習功德的人』以下三行,說明眾生能夠得見的因緣。修習功德、柔和質直的人能看見佛身,聽佛說法;佛有時為眼前大眾宣說壽命無量,有時對久後才見佛的人宣說佛極難值遇,最後說佛的智慧之光與無數劫壽命都是長久修行所得。

五、法說最後一行結為利益不虛

從『你們這些有智慧的人』以下一行,是法說的第二部分,重頌前面所說的利益真實不虛。佛勸有智慧的人不要對此生疑,應當把疑惑斷除到永遠窮盡;佛所說的話確實不虛。

六、譬說五行先開譬、再合譬

其次五行重頌譬說,分成開譬與合譬兩部分。

開譬共有一行,又分成三層。最初一句『良醫善用方便』,重頌過去;從『為了醫治狂亂的兒子』以下兩句,重頌現在,不重頌未來;從『沒有人能說這是虛妄』以下最後一句,重頌良醫的話並不虛妄。良醫實際仍在,卻為治療狂子而說自己已死,因此不能把他的方便說成虛妄。

從『其後,我也作世間之父』以下四行,是第二部分,重頌合譬。

前面的長行合譬原本沒有配合未來世。現在最初半行重頌合於過去:佛作世間眾生之父,救拔種種苦患。

其次,從『因為凡夫顛倒』以下二行半,重頌合於現在。佛實際仍在,卻為顛倒凡夫示現滅度;眾生若常常看見佛,便會生起驕慢放縱之心,貪著五欲而墮入惡道。佛常知眾生有沒有行道,隨著他們各自所應得度的因緣,為他們宣說種種法。

最後,從『每每自己作這樣的思量』以下一行,重頌合於不虛。佛常常思量,應當用什麼方法使眾生進入無上智慧,迅速成就佛身。這裡同時結出開三顯一、開近顯遠;佛要使眾生迅速進入佛道,這件事必定真實不虛。

I. The Twenty-Five and a Half Lines Are First Divided into Dharma Teaching and Teaching by Parable

This passage contains twenty-five and a half lines of verse, recapitulating the Dharma teaching and teaching by parable in the preceding prose. The first twenty and a half lines recapitulate the Dharma teaching; the next five recapitulate the teaching by parable.

The preceding Dharma teaching had two parts, and the present verse likewise has two. The first nineteen and a half lines recapitulate the Buddha’s benefit to beings in the past, present, and future; the following line recapitulates that all the benefit taught above is real and not false.

II. Benefiting Beings in the Past Has Three Levels

Four lines recapitulate the benefit to beings in the past, and they are further divided into three levels.

First, the initial line recapitulates that it has been an exceedingly long time since the Buddha attained the Way.

Second, the line beginning with “constantly teaching the Dharma and transforming” recapitulates the Buddha’s continuous benefit to beings during the intervening period from distant attainment until the present.

Third, the two lines beginning with “in order to liberate beings” recapitulate the places where the Buddha abides while benefiting beings.

III. The Present Is Divided into Manifesting Birth Without Originally Being Born and Manifesting Extinction Without Originally Becoming Extinct

The five lines beginning with “beings see me enter extinction” are the second major part and recapitulate benefit to beings in the present. The preceding prose had two levels, and this passage likewise has two.

The first two and a half lines recapitulate how the Buddha, though not newly born, manifests birth for beings. Beings see the Buddha enter extinction, make offerings to his relics, and cherish longing and thirst. Once they are subdued through faith, upright and gentle in mind, and single-mindedly wish to see the Buddha without sparing their lives, the Buddha and the saṅgha appear together on Vulture Peak.

Next, the two and a half lines beginning with “at that time I tell the beings” recapitulate how the Buddha, though never extinguished, manifests extinction for beings. The Buddha tells beings that he constantly abides here without extinction, and only through the power of skillful means manifests extinction and non-extinction. In other lands where beings revere, trust, and delight, he also teaches them the unsurpassed Dharma. Because beings have not heard this, they suppose only that the Buddha has entered extinction.

IV. The Ten and a Half Lines Concerning the Future Have Four Levels

Beginning with “I see the beings,” the third major part recapitulates benefit to beings in the future in ten and a half lines. The preceding prose lodged this meaning only in the four characters “constantly abiding without extinction;” the present verse unfolds it extensively in four levels.

First, the line and a half beginning with “I see the beings” explains future beings’ capacities and the Buddha’s response. The Buddha sees beings sunk in suffering and temporarily does not manifest his body, causing them to thirst and look up to him. When their hearts are filled with longing, the Buddha emerges and teaches them the Dharma.

Second, the four lines beginning with “such is the power of supernormal penetration” recapitulate constant abiding without extinction. The sutra says that the Buddha constantly abides on Vulture Peak, which is judged here to be the land of true recompense; it also says that he abides in other dwelling places, judged here to be the land of expedient means with remainder, the same meaning as the other lands mentioned above.

In “devas and humans fill it,” the thirty minds are called “humans” and the ten grounds “devas.” “beating the heavenly drums” signifies spontaneous teaching without awaiting a question, while “māndārava flowers” signifies teaching the stages of sages and noble ones.

Third, the two lines beginning with “my pure land” explain the conditions through which beings cannot see. The Buddha’s pure land is originally not destroyed, but beings burdened by wrongdoing see it consumed because of their evil karma, long remain amid fear and suffering, and even fail to hear the names of the Three Jewels.

Fourth, the three lines beginning with “those who cultivate qualities” explain the conditions through which beings can see. Those who cultivate qualities and are gentle and upright can see the Buddha’s body and hear him teach. The Buddha sometimes teaches his immeasurable lifespan to the present assembly and sometimes tells those who see him only after a long interval that a buddha is exceedingly difficult to encounter. Finally, he says that the radiance of his wisdom and lifespan through innumerable kalpas were gained through long cultivation.

V. The Final Line of the Dharma Teaching Concludes That the Benefit Is Not False

The line beginning with “you who possess wisdom” is the second part of the Dharma teaching and recapitulates that the preceding benefit is real and not false. The Buddha exhorts those with wisdom not to doubt but to end their doubts forever; the words spoken by the Buddha are indeed not false.

VI. The Five Lines of Teaching by Parable First Open and Then Apply the Parable

The next five lines recapitulate the teaching by parable and are divided into opening and applying the parable.

Opening the parable occupies one line and has three levels. The first phrase, “a good physician skillfully uses a method,” recapitulates the past. The two phrases beginning with “in order to treat his deranged children” recapitulate the present and do not recapitulate the future. The final phrase beginning with “no one can say this is false” recapitulates that the good physician’s words are not false. Though actually alive, the physician says that he has died in order to treat his deranged children, and his skillful means therefore cannot be called false.

The four lines beginning with “then I too become father of the world” are the second part and recapitulate the application of the parable.

The preceding prose application originally did not correlate the parable with the future. The first half-line here recapitulates application to the past: the Buddha is father of the beings of the world and rescues them from every painful affliction.

Next, the two and a half lines beginning with “because ordinary beings are deluded” recapitulate application to the present. Though actually present, the Buddha manifests extinction for deluded ordinary beings. If beings constantly saw him, they would become arrogant and unrestrained, cling to the five desires, and fall into evil destinies. The Buddha constantly knows whether beings practice the Way and teaches various dharmas according to the conditions through which each can be liberated.

Finally, the line beginning with “repeatedly forming this thought” recapitulates application to non-falsehood. The Buddha constantly considers what means will enable beings to enter unsurpassed wisdom and swiftly accomplish a buddha-body. This simultaneously concludes opening the three to reveal the One and opening the near to reveal the distant. The Buddha seeks to enable beings to enter the Buddha Way swiftly, and this matter is necessarily real and not false.

釋分別功德品Distinguishing Qualities

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、品名與本品之位

佛宣說壽量,過去與現在兩世的弟子因而得到種種利益,所以稱為『功德』;所得利益淺深不同,所以稱為『分別品』。

這一段文字是本門的第二授記段。《法華論》把這一段分成法力與修行力兩類。

法力有五項:一是證,二是信,三是供養,這三項都在本品之中;四是聞法,如〈隨喜功德品〉;五是讀誦持說——讀誦如〈法師功德品〉,持是回頭指〈法師品〉、〈安樂行品〉、〈勸持品〉三品,說則如〈如來神力品〉、〈囑累品〉。

修行力也有五項:苦行力如〈藥王菩薩本事品〉,教化如〈妙音菩薩品〉,護難如〈觀世音菩薩普門品〉與〈陀羅尼品〉,示功德如〈妙莊嚴王本事品〉,護法如〈普賢菩薩勸發品〉。

二、光宅之判

光宅法雲說:第一,就功德門而言,是記他修行進益、現在所修之因;第二,就智慧門而言,是記他損減受生、未來所得之果;第三,說明外凡發心。授記本來通於因與果,這三項全都屬於授記。

以下八個世界發心的人,本應排在最前面,因為外凡聽聞此經而發心,安住於三十心;三十心的人聽聞此經,才出離內凡而登初地、得無生忍;初地聽聞此經,進入二地而得聞持;二地聽聞此經,得入三地,名為樂說辯;三地聽聞此經進入四地,得無量旋;四地聽聞此經進入五地,名為不退;五地進入六地,名為清淨輪。從小千世界以後,就依損減受生之門來授記。

七地已經斷除無明之惑。惑有九品,能為九次受生作因。從七地以上,果報沒有一定的期限,很難判定,只能就斷除九品煩惱來說。煩惱的品數有百千萬種,如今只取其中一種、分作九品來立義。七地所斷,分作上下二品;乃至十地所斷,也分作上下二品;金剛心所斷作一品。六地聽聞此經而登上七地下忍,斷除一品,還剩八品,為八次受生作因,所以說八生當得菩提。七地上忍再斷一品,就損去二品之生,餘下七品為七次受生作因,七生當得菩提。各品依例都有上下,斷一品就損一生。經文從略,所以從八地乃至四生;餘下一生,就是金剛心所斷之法。

三、《法華論》之判與本論的評斷

《法華論》說:得無生忍的,是指契入初地的證智,應當知道。從八生乃至一生得菩提的,是說諸凡夫決定能證初地,隨其分位受生以及一生便證得菩提。所謂菩提,是離開三界的分段生死,隨分能見真如佛性,名為得菩提,並不是說究竟圓滿的菩提。

如今評斷:《論》的說法是前面深而後面淺,光宅的說法是前面淺而後面深;兩家互相抵拒,世間誰能判定?

原來無生法忍在經與論中所指不同。迦旃延子說五法成就而獲得不退轉,那是六度菩薩之位;須陀洹無論就智或就斷而說是菩薩無生法忍,那是三乘共位;登初地得無生忍,那是別教菩薩之位;登初住得無生法忍,那是圓教菩薩之位。這些都是聖教的明文,不可以互相混雜。

又《維摩詰經》說『近於無等等而得無生忍』,《仁王經》說『到金剛頂都名為伏忍,也名為寂滅忍』——這大概是別教與圓教。地地相望,是通途的說法,不可以固定套用。

於是光宅以發心為內凡、以三十心之位為無生忍、以此為初地,這些全是別教家的名相教法,不是通教的門戶。從初地到六地稱為福德門,《大般涅槃經》稱之為有為有漏、名為聲聞僧,那是通教之意。七地以上斷九品受生之因——小乘大乘得入位的人,誰不斷惑?這還不足以判定。若說七地斷無明,那既不是通教也不是別教,而是別教接通教之意。光宅的說法漫無所歸,不契合此經。

天親以發心為無生忍,從八生到一生,說凡夫決定斷盡果報之生而得入初地、獲無生忍——這是專據別教之義,也不契合此經。

四、本品三分與圓位的配當

現在把本品的文字分為三部分:一是經家總序,二是如來分別,三是時眾供養。

總序如經文所示。

說到分別:佛語圓妙,不可以用權教之位來解釋經文。前面說開、示、悟、入佛之知見,如今本門的增道損生也都依圓教的位次來解釋。

以下八個世界發心的人,是六根清淨之人,最初進入十信位。所以《仁王經》說『十善菩薩發起大心,長久別離三界的苦輪之海』,正是這個意思。得無生忍,是進入十住位;所以《華嚴經》說『初發心住,一發一切發,得如來一身無量身,清淨妙法身,湛然應一切』,正是這個意思。得聞持陀羅尼,是進入十行位。得樂說辯才,是進入十迴向位。得無量旋陀羅尼,是進入初地。得不退,是進入二地。得清淨,是進入三地。八生,是進入四地。七生,是進入五地。六生,是進入六地。五生,是進入七地。四生,是進入八地。三生,是進入九地。二生,是進入十地。一生,是進入等覺金剛心。

若論增道損生,不採用光宅斷除受生之因的說法,也不採用天親斷除果報之生的說法;只就智德說增,就斷德說損;就法身說生,就無明說滅。

好比《大般涅槃經》的月喻:從初一日到十五日,光色漸漸增長;從十六日到三十日,光色漸漸減損。就一個月的整體而論增減,比喻就法身而論智與斷。

也可以是一個人在一時之中有八番增進,也可以是一世,或八世,或無量世;也可以是一念,或八念,或無量念;也可以是眾多微塵之數。人也是如此。所以不可以用受生之因或受生之果來局限它,也不可以離開智與斷來解釋它。

而本門所成就的得道人數,數倍於其他諸經;不只人數多,而且熏修的時日久遠。從根本以來垂下應迹,處處開示引導;中間屢次相值,一次次成熟;今世以五味節節調伏,收羅結集而歸會於《法華》。好比農家,春天播種、夏天生長,耕種耘治;到秋收冬藏,一時全部收割。從《法華》以後才得道的人,就像收割之後拾取遺穗罷了。

五、時眾供養

第三是時眾供養。大眾聽聞深遠之法而得到大利益,想要報答佛恩而設供養;這也是寄託事相以表達領解。

前面的迹門,菩薩雖然也有所悟,但大事還沒有完畢,所以沒有陳述領解;本門既已說完,彌勒總申領解,說明諸菩薩執持幡蓋,依次而上直到梵天。

幡是轉的意思,蓋是覆的意思,地是始的意思,梵是淨的意思。智與斷一番一番地轉,慈與悲一番一番地覆;高下深淺不失其次第,直到梵天,表示諸菩薩增道損生,鄰近妙覺而達於最極的清淨。若依天親的解釋,只得到初地這一番而已,怎麼能與這段經文相合呢?

六、偈十九行與南北二師

偈頌有十九行,分為三段:最初二行重頌時眾得解,其次九行重頌如來分別,最後八行重頌時眾供養。

『得到無量無漏清淨的果報』一句:為了與二乘的有量相區別,所以說無量;因為是妙因所感,所以說清淨;因為是無障礙之土,所以說果報——這與二乘沒有果報不同。

『聽聞佛的壽命無量』一句:這段經文已經確定判為無量,怎麼還能用舊解說成有量?

南方諸師從偈頌以後的長行起,判屬流通段,並引前面迹門文殊在現在說法也算流通。北方諸師以四信的弟子在現在聽聞此經,判屬正說;從『又如來滅後』以下,才是流通。兩家的說法都可以採用,如今姑且依南方之說。

七、偈後十一品半的分科與生起

從偈頌以後共十一品半,分為兩部分:一是從這裡以下到〈常不輕菩薩品〉,說明弘經功德深厚,勸人流通;二是從〈如來神力品〉以下八品,是付囑與流通。兩部分各又有三層。

這半品以及〈隨喜功德品〉,說明初品之因的功德,勸人流通;第二從〈法師功德品〉起,說明初品之果的功德,勸人流通;〈常不輕菩薩品〉引信受與毀謗的罪福,作證而勸流通。後三者之中,〈如來神力品〉與〈囑累品〉是囑累流通,〈藥王菩薩本事品〉以下五品是就化他而勸流通,〈普賢菩薩勸發品〉是就自行而勸流通。

至於生起的次第:現在聽聞此經而得真解、似解兩種利益,如上文所說。若只是聽聞一句而生起隨喜,就如現在四信那樣格量其功德。未來沒有佛在世,恐怕有人懷疑福德微少,所以宣說滅後五品的功德。因的功德微細隱密,不如果的功德彰明顯著,所以宣說〈法師功德品〉。因果雙舉,不如引證分明,所以宣說〈常不輕菩薩品〉。雖然舉出往昔之人,不如當場現出神變,所以宣說〈如來神力品〉。雖然示現神力,不如摩頂付囑,所以宣說〈囑累品〉。雖然作了通途的囑累,不如指示其中要術——捨棄身命而存續正道,所以宣說〈藥王菩薩本事品〉。雖然誡勅了能化的人,不如誡勅所化的人,教他隨著聽聞法的處所應當生起佛想,所以宣說〈妙音菩薩品〉與〈觀世音菩薩普門品〉。若是初發心的人弘經,既然沒有神力,就應當依靠內在的禁戒,所以宣說〈陀羅尼品〉。還須要外護,所以宣說〈妙莊嚴王本事品〉與〈普賢菩薩勸發品〉。如此接連重疊,使大法得以弘通。

八、現在四信之第一:一念信解

偈頌以後的長行分為兩部分:一是現在四信,二是滅後五品。

什麼是四信?略解的有三人,廣說的有二人,觀成的有一人,信則通貫四者,所以說四信。四信是:一、一念信解而尚未能為人演說;二、略解其言語旨趣;三、廣為他人宣說;四、深信而觀行成就。

最初的一念信解,有長行與偈頌。長行有三層:一是舉出並指示其人,二是說明功德,三是位行不退。

現在解釋一念信解。所謂一念信解,是說隨著所聽聞之處豁然開明,隨著話語而契入,沒有任何罣礙;相信一切法都是佛法,又相信佛法不隔絕一切法;不得佛法、不得一切法,而見一切法也見佛法;即一而三、即三而一。這也就是行於非道而通達佛道、行於佛道而通達一切道;不得佛道與一切道,而通達佛道與一切道。無所有而有,而有無所有,非所有非無所有。好比門前的道路通達一切東西南北,𢄶然沒有壅塞阻礙;眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意,凡有所面對的境界也都是如此。

沒有疑惑叫作信,明白了然叫作解——這就是一念信解之心。

若是靜坐思惟,隨著所思惟而豁然開悟、通達三諦,也是如此。這樣的信解名為鐵輪位。另有一種解釋:這還不是具足的鐵輪,而是十信的初心;那人尚未得到六根清淨,所以不是鐵輪的正位。

其次是格量。先總論其無量,再格量其多少。格量分兩層,最初舉五度作為格量的基準——般若就是此處所說的正慧,所以說『除去般若』。

問:既然離開了般若,那五者就不能稱為度。

答:因為都是為了求佛慧而窮盡布施持戒等邊際,也可以稱為度;這是次第之意。

『以這樣的功德』以下是第二層,正式格量多少。『若是善男子』以下是第三層,說明位行不退。別教第六心還會退轉,第七心才不退;圓教初住之心就不退轉。聽聞壽量的功德是從外而資助,圓融隨順的信解是從內而熏發,所以不退。《大品》說『有的菩薩會退,有的不退』,有魔沒有魔,都是這個道理。

偈頌十九行半:最初十二行先重頌格量多少;其次二行追頌人的行相;最後五行半重頌行位不退。『無量劫行道』是說長久修習諸度,『願我於未來』是說發起慈悲之願。憑藉長久修行的願力而聽聞此經、生起信解;如今初品之人最初聽聞此經、一念信解,功德等同於長久修行,甚至還超過它。

九、現在四信之第二至第四

『又阿逸多,聽聞佛的壽命長遠』一段,是第二品。前面只是信解而未能敷演宣說;宣說牽涉名相數目,須要善巧的言辭。此品具足這些,所以說為他人解說。從勝處受名,名為第二品。因為有宣說之力,能夠生起自己與他人的無上智慧。這段文字先標舉人的行相,其次格量。

『何況廣為聽聞此經』以下是第三品:廣聞、廣解、廣為他人宣說、廣修供養。供養從外資助,使內在的智慧迅速契入,能生一切種智。先出人的行相,其次格量。

『阿逸多』以下是第四,那人具備上面三品而加修觀行——入禪而運用智慧,觀想成就而境相生起,能見到方便有餘土與實報土兩種土的相貌。『見佛與比丘僧常在耆闍崛山』,是方便有餘土之相;『又見娑婆世界純是諸菩薩』,是實報土之相。

最初兩品是聞慧位,廣聞廣說是思慧位,觀行想成是修慧位;由淺入深而成就六根清淨的十信位。

十、滅後五品

『又如來滅度以後』以下說明五品。文字分兩部分:先列五品而格量後四品的功德,後面以隨喜一品格量初品的功德。

問:為什麼這樣?

答:後四品是粗略格量,初品是廣為格量。廣為格量之後,更殊勝的可以類推而得,佛不必多費文字——巧妙的說法就是這樣。

五品是:一、直接生起隨喜之心;二、加上自己受持讀誦;三、加上勸他人受持讀誦;四、加上兼行六度;五、加上正行六度。

這五種人,就通論而言都是自行兼化他,下文說『五十人展轉相教』。既然都有自行,就通稱為弟子;都有化他,就通稱為法師。就別論而言,前二人只是自行,後三人具足化他;作法師的名稱是往後而說的,在後三而不在五。自行既然通於五者,所以都稱為弟子。

初品只標舉其人,格量放在後面說。『何況』以下是第二品,是從中舉出能受持讀誦的人,標人容易理解。從『這人頂戴』以下是格量。

初發心的人畏懼外緣紛擾牽動而妨礙修習正業,就專一持誦此經,這就是上等的供養——廢除事相而存留理體,所得利益極多。後心的人理觀若已純熟,涉入外事也不妨礙內在,事相資助於道,如同油多而火猛、順流而又揚帆,再加上功力,勢頭轉為迅疾。

指著經文,這就是法身舍利,不須另外安置生身舍利;文字是能詮、所詮之處即是塔,不須事相的塔;經文能含容第一義僧,不必等待相狀之僧。

問:若是這樣,持經就是第一義戒,為什麼又說『能持戒的人』?

答:這是說明初品之意,不應當拿後品來質難。若要解釋,持經就是隨順理體之戒,也就任運持得初篇、二篇;如今說能持戒,是說第三篇以下事相上沒有虧損罷了。

第三品,是又能教導他人的人。先標舉其人,從『起立』以下是格量。『何況又有人』以下是第四品,是又能兼行六度的人。先標人,從『其德最勝』以下是格量。『若人讀誦』以下是第五品,是又能正行六度的人。先標人,從『若我滅後』以下是格量。

總結這五品:前三人是聞慧位,兼行六度是思慧位,正行六度是修慧位,全都在十信之前。也有人說最初的〈隨喜功德品〉是進入信心之位,把一品分為兩心,五品就是十信心,也就是鐵輪六根清淨位。

十一、偈十九行半頌五品

偈頌十九行半:最初五行半重頌第二品;其次從『若能持』以下三行,重頌第三品;『若有信解』以下四行,重頌第四品;其次從『恭敬』以下七行,重頌第五品。

『生起如佛之想』一句,是最初依人而稱他為如來。『不久前往道樹』一句,是說他的位次在鐵輪,不久便能進入銅輪,能夠示現八相成佛。『已經趣向道場』是說行處,『三菩提』是說近處。

這第五品與第四信相齊,同樣是修慧位;若論所入之位,同樣是六根清淨位——只有現在佛世與佛滅之後的差別罷了。

I. The Chapter Title and the Chapter’s Placement

The Buddha teaches the measure of his lifespan, and disciples of the past and present thereby gain various benefits; these are called “qualities.” Because the benefits differ in depth, the chapter is called “Distinguishing.”

This passage is the second division of prediction in the Origin Gate. The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra divides it into two classes: power of Dharma and power of practice.

The power of Dharma has five items. First is realization, second trust, and third offering, all three being in this chapter. Fourth is hearing the Dharma, as in “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance.” Fifth is reading, reciting, upholding, and teaching: reading and reciting occur in “The Qualities of the Dharma Teacher”; upholding points back to “The Dharma Teacher,” “Peaceful Practices,” and “Exhortation to Uphold the Sutra”; teaching occurs in “The Supernormal Powers of the Tathāgata” and “Entrustment.”

The power of practice likewise has five items: the power of arduous practice, as in “The Former Affairs of the Bodhisattva Medicine King”; teaching and transforming, as in “The Bodhisattva Wonderful Sound”; protection from difficulty, as in “The Universal Gateway of the Bodhisattva Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” and “Dhāraṇī”; displaying qualities, as in “The Former Affairs of King Wonderful-Adornment”; and protecting the Dharma, as in “The Encouragement of the Bodhisattva Universally Worthy.”

II. Guangzhai’s Judgment

Guangzhai Fayun says: first, the gateway of qualities predicts the person’s present cause, the progress gained in practice; second, the gateway of wisdom predicts the future result, the reduction of further birth; third, the text explains initial resolve at the outer-ordinary stage. Prediction properly applies to both cause and result, so all three belong to prediction.

The people of the eight worlds who bring forth resolve below ought to have been listed first, because outer-ordinary beings hear this sutra, bring forth resolve, and abide in the thirty minds. Those in the thirty minds hear it, leave the inner-ordinary stage, ascend the first ground, and attain forbearance of the non-arising. Those on the first ground hear it, enter the second, and attain retention of what is heard. Those on the second ground hear it, enter the third, and attain joyful eloquence. Those on the third hear it, enter the fourth, and attain immeasurable revolving retention. Those on the fourth enter the fifth, called nonretrogression; those on the fifth enter the sixth, called the pure wheel. From the small-thousand world-system onward, predictions are made according to the gateway of reducing further birth.

At the seventh ground, delusion of ignorance has already begun to be eliminated. Delusion has nine grades that serve as causes for nine further births. Above the seventh ground, resultant recompense has no fixed term and is hard to determine, so one can speak only in terms of eliminating the nine grades of affliction. Afflictions have hundreds of thousands of myriads of kinds; here one kind is taken and divided into nine grades to establish the meaning. What is eliminated on the seventh ground is divided into upper and lower grades; what is eliminated on the tenth ground is likewise divided into upper and lower; and what is eliminated by the adamantine mind forms one grade. One on the sixth ground hears this sutra, ascends to the lower forbearance of the seventh, eliminates one grade, and has eight grades remaining as causes for eight births; the sutra therefore says that awakening will be attained after eight births. At the upper forbearance of the seventh ground another grade is eliminated, reducing two grades of birth and leaving seven grades as causes for seven births; awakening will be attained after seven births. Each stage likewise has upper and lower grades, and eliminating one grade reduces one birth. The sutra abbreviates, and so continues from the eighth ground down to four births. The remaining one birth is the dharma eliminated by the adamantine mind.

III. The Judgment of the Treatise on the Lotus Sutra and the Root Treatise’s Evaluation

The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra says: those attaining forbearance of the non-arising should be understood as entering the realized wisdom of the first ground. Those who attain awakening after eight births down to one are ordinary beings certain to realize the first ground, taking births according to their respective shares until in one birth they realize awakening. “Awakening” here means leaving segmented birth and death in the three realms and seeing true suchness and buddha-nature in part. It does not mean ultimately complete awakening.

The present evaluation is this: the Treatise is deep first and shallow afterward, while Guangzhai is shallow first and deep afterward. The two oppose one another—who in the world can decide between them?

Forbearance of the non-arising of dharmas designates different stages in sutras and treatises. Kātyāyanīputra says that accomplishing five dharmas brings nonretrogression; this is the stage of a bodhisattva practicing the six perfections. A stream-enterer, whether described in terms of wisdom or severance as possessing a bodhisattva’s forbearance of the non-arising, belongs to the shared stages of the three vehicles. Attaining forbearance upon entering the first ground is a bodhisattva stage of the Separate Teaching. Attaining it upon entering the first abode is a bodhisattva stage of the Perfect Teaching. All are explicit passages in the sacred teachings and must not be mixed together.

The Vimalakīrti Sutra also says, “drawing near the unequaled and attaining forbearance of the non-arising,” while the Humane Kings Sutra says, “up to the adamantine summit all are called the forbearance of subjugation and also the forbearance of quiescent extinction.” These likely concern the Separate and Perfect teachings. Comparing ground with ground is a general mode of expression and cannot be applied rigidly.

Guangzhai makes initial resolve an inner-ordinary stage and the thirty minds forbearance of the non-arising, which he makes the first ground. These are all names and teachings of the Separate tradition, not gateways of the Shared Teaching. He calls the first through sixth grounds the gateway of qualities; the Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra calls these conditioned and contaminated and names them the śrāvaka-saṅgha, which is a Shared-Teaching meaning. As to eliminating the causes of nine births at and above the seventh ground—who among those who enter a stage in either Lesser or Great Vehicle does not eliminate delusion? This does not suffice as a judgment. If the seventh ground eliminates ignorance, that is neither Shared nor Separate but the meaning of the Separate Teaching receiving the Shared. Guangzhai’s account drifts without anchorage and does not accord with this sutra.

Vasubandhu makes initial resolve forbearance of the non-arising, and says that from eight births down to one, ordinary beings certainly exhaust resultant birth, enter the first ground, and attain forbearance of the non-arising. This relies exclusively on the Separate meaning and likewise does not accord with this sutra.

IV. The Chapter’s Three Divisions and Their Correspondence to Perfect-Teaching Stages

The chapter is now divided into three: first, the sutra compiler’s general introduction; second, the Tathāgata’s distinctions; third, the offering by the assembly.

The general introduction is as stated in the sutra.

As for distinguishing: the Buddha’s words are perfect and wondrous and cannot be explained by provisional stages. Earlier the sutra spoke of opening, showing, awakening to, and entering the Buddha’s knowledge and vision. Here in the Origin Gate, increasing the path and reducing birth are likewise explained according to the stages of the Perfect Teaching.

Those in the eight worlds below who bring forth resolve have purified the six faculties and first enter the ten trusts. Thus the Humane Kings Sutra says, “bodhisattvas practicing the ten wholesome acts bring forth the great mind and forever leave the sea of the wheel of suffering in the three realms.” Those who attain forbearance of the non-arising enter the ten abodes. Thus the Flower Garland Sutra says, “at the abode of initial resolve, bringing forth one is bringing forth all; one attains the Tathāgata’s one body and immeasurable bodies, the pure and wondrous Dharma body, serenely responding to all.” Those who attain the dhāraṇī of retaining what is heard enter the ten practices. Those who attain joyful eloquence enter the ten dedications. Those who attain immeasurable revolving dhāraṇī enter the first ground. Those attaining nonretrogression enter the second; those attaining purity enter the third. Eight births means entry into the fourth ground, seven the fifth, six the sixth, five the seventh, four the eighth, three the ninth, two the tenth, and one birth entry into the adamantine mind of equal awakening.

In speaking of increasing the path and reducing birth, neither Guangzhai’s elimination of the cause of further birth nor Vasubandhu’s elimination of resultant birth is adopted. Increase is discussed only in relation to the quality of wisdom and reduction in relation to the quality of severance; birth in relation to the Dharma body and extinction in relation to ignorance.

It is like the moon simile in the Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra: from the first through the fifteenth day, the light and color gradually increase; from the sixteenth through the thirtieth, they gradually decrease. Increase and decrease are discussed in relation to the single whole of the moon, just as wisdom and severance are discussed in relation to the Dharma body.

There may also be eight advances by one person in one time, or one lifetime, eight lifetimes, or immeasurable lifetimes; one thought, eight thoughts, or immeasurable thoughts; or a number of dust particles. The same applies to people. The meaning therefore cannot be confined through either the cause or the result of birth, nor can it be explained apart from wisdom and severance.

Those who attain the Way in the Origin Gate are many times more numerous than in the other sutras. Not only are the people numerous; the period of their cultivation and permeation is distant and long. From the Origin, responsive traces were extended downward and beings taught and guided everywhere. In the intervening period they met the Buddha repeatedly and matured time after time. In this lifetime they were regulated stage by stage through the five flavors, then gathered and brought into the Lotus. It is like farmers sowing in spring and growing crops in summer, plowing and weeding; when autumn harvest and winter storage arrive, they reap everything at once. Those who attain the Way only after the Lotus are like gathering leftover ears after the harvest.

V. The Offering by the Assembly

Third is the offering by the assembly. Hearing the profound and distant Dharma and gaining great benefit, the assembly wishes to repay the Buddha’s kindness and establishes offerings. This also entrusts understanding to an event in order to express it.

In the preceding Trace Gate, the bodhisattvas had awakened but the great matter was not complete, and so they did not state their understanding. Once the Origin Gate had been fully taught, Maitreya expressed the understanding of all, explaining that the bodhisattvas held banners and canopies that rose in sequence to the Brahmā heaven.

A banner means turning, a canopy means covering, earth means beginning, and Brahmā means pure. Wisdom and severance turn again and again; kindness and compassion cover again and again. High and low, deep and shallow, do not lose their sequence. Their reaching the Brahmā heaven expresses the bodhisattvas’ increasing the path and reducing birth, approaching wondrous awakening, and reaching utmost purity. If Vasubandhu’s explanation yields only one turn of attaining the first ground, how could it accord with this passage?

VI. The Nineteen Lines of Verse and the Southern and Northern Masters

The verse has nineteen lines divided into three: the first two recapitulate the assembly’s attainment of understanding; the next nine recapitulate the Tathāgata’s distinctions; the final eight recapitulate the assembly’s offerings.

The phrase “attain immeasurable, uncontaminated, pure fruit and recompense” says “immeasurable” to distinguish it from the measured attainments of the two vehicles; “pure” because it is elicited by a wondrous cause; and “fruit and recompense” because it is a land without obstruction, unlike the two vehicles, which have no such recompense.

The phrase “hearing that the Buddha’s lifespan is immeasurable” has already established the judgment “immeasurable.” How could an old explanation still make it measured?

The southern masters assign the prose after the verse to the circulation division, citing the earlier Trace Gate where Mañjuśrī’s teaching in the present likewise counts as circulation. The northern masters assign the four-trust disciples who hear the sutra in the present to the main discourse, and begin circulation only with “again, after the Tathāgata’s extinction.” Both accounts can be used; here the southern is provisionally followed.

VII. Dividing the Eleven and a Half Chapters After the Verse and Explaining Their Sequence

The eleven and a half chapters beginning after the verse divide into two parts. First, from here through “The Bodhisattva Never Disparaging,” they explain the profound qualities of propagating the sutra and exhort its circulation. Second, the eight chapters beginning with “The Supernormal Powers of the Tathāgata” entrust and circulate it. Each part again has three levels.

This half chapter and “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance” explain the qualities of the cause belonging to the first grade and exhort circulation. Second, beginning with “The Qualities of the Dharma Teacher,” the text explains the qualities of the result belonging to the first grade and exhorts circulation. “The Bodhisattva Never Disparaging” adduces the wrongdoing and blessing of accepting with trust or slandering as proof that exhorts circulation. Among the latter three divisions, “The Supernormal Powers of the Tathāgata” and “Entrustment” are the circulation of entrustment. The five chapters beginning with “The Former Affairs of the Bodhisattva Medicine King” exhort circulation in terms of transforming others. “The Encouragement of the Bodhisattva Universally Worthy” exhorts circulation in terms of one’s own practice.

As for the sequence: those hearing the sutra in the present gain the two benefits of true and semblant understanding described above. If one merely hears a sentence and rejoices, the qualities are measured as with the four present trusts. Since no buddha will be present in the future, some might fear that the blessing is slight; the qualities of the five grades after extinction are therefore taught. Because the qualities of the cause are subtle and hidden, unlike the qualities of the result, which are evident, “The Qualities of the Dharma Teacher” is taught. Because naming both cause and result is less clear than adducing proof, “The Bodhisattva Never Disparaging” is taught. Because adducing a person of the past is less effective than manifesting a transformation on the spot, “The Supernormal Powers of the Tathāgata” is taught. Because manifesting supernormal power is less effective than placing the hand on their crowns and entrusting the teaching, “Entrustment” is taught. Because a general entrustment is less effective than showing the essential method—abandoning body and life to preserve the right Way—“The Former Affairs of the Bodhisattva Medicine King” is taught. Because admonishing the one who transforms is less effective than admonishing those transformed and teaching them to regard the place where they hear the Dharma as the Buddha, “The Bodhisattva Wonderful Sound” and “The Universal Gateway of the Bodhisattva Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” are taught. If a person of initial resolve propagates the sutra but lacks supernormal power, that person should rely on internal precepts; “Dhāraṇī” is therefore taught. External protection is also needed, so “The Former Affairs of King Wonderful-Adornment” and “The Encouragement of the Bodhisattva Universally Worthy” are taught. In this way they follow and overlap, enabling the great Dharma to circulate widely.

VIII. The First of the Four Present Trusts: A Single Thought of Trust and Understanding

The prose after the verse divides into two: first the four present trusts; second the five grades after extinction.

What are the four trusts? Three people briefly understand, two teach extensively, one accomplishes contemplation, and trust pervades all four; hence they are called four trusts. They are: first, a single thought of trust and understanding, not yet able to expound for others; second, briefly understanding the intent of the words; third, teaching widely to others; fourth, deep trust with contemplative practice accomplished.

The first thought of trust and understanding has prose and verse. The prose has three levels: first, identifying and indicating the person; second, explaining the qualities; third, nonretrogression in stage and practice.

A single thought of trust and understanding means suddenly becoming clear wherever one hears, entering according to the words without any obstruction; trusting that all dharmas are the Buddha-Dharma and that the Buddha-Dharma is not cut off from any dharma; attaining neither Buddha-Dharma nor any dharma, yet seeing every dharma and seeing Buddha-Dharma; the one being three and the three being one. This is practicing what is not the Way and penetrating the Buddha Way, practicing the Buddha Way and penetrating every way; attaining neither Buddha Way nor every way, yet penetrating both. Having nothing yet having; having yet having nothing; neither having nor not having. It is like the road before the gate, open in every direction—east, west, south, and north—broadly without obstruction. Everything encountered by eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind is likewise.

To have no doubt is called trust; to understand clearly is called understanding. This is the mind of a single thought of trust and understanding.

If one sits quietly in contemplation and suddenly awakens wherever one contemplates, penetrating the three truths, the same applies. Such trust and understanding are called the iron-wheel stage. Another explanation says this is not yet the complete iron wheel but the initial mind of the ten trusts; the person has not yet purified the six faculties and therefore is not at the proper iron-wheel stage.

Next is the measure. It first states generally that the qualities are immeasurable, then measures how much. The measure has two levels. First, the five perfections are adduced as the standard—prajñā is the proper wisdom explained here and is therefore “excluded from the reckoning.”

Question: apart from prajñā, the other five cannot be called perfections.

Answer: because all are carried to the limit—giving, precepts, and the rest—for the sake of seeking buddha-wisdom, they can also be called perfections. This is a sequential meaning.

Beginning with “with such qualities” is the second level, formally measuring how much. Beginning with “if a good man” is the third, explaining nonretrogression in stage and practice. In the Separate Teaching, the sixth mind can still retreat and only the seventh is nonretrogressing; in the Perfect Teaching, the mind of the first abode is already nonretrogressing. The qualities of hearing the lifespan assist from without, while perfect and concordant trust and understanding permeate from within; therefore one does not retreat. The Great Prajñāpāramitā Sūtra says, “some bodhisattvas retreat and some do not.” Whether there is Māra or no Māra has this same meaning.

The verse has nineteen and a half lines. The first twelve recapitulate the measure; the next two retrospectively recapitulate the person’s practice; the final five and a half recapitulate nonretrogression in practice and stage. “practicing the Way for immeasurable kalpas” means long cultivation of the perfections. “may I in the future” means bringing forth a vow of kindness and compassion. Through the power of vows cultivated over a long time, one hears this sutra and gives rise to trust and understanding. A person at this first grade who hears the sutra for the first time and gives rise to a single thought of trust and understanding has qualities equal to or even surpassing that long cultivation.

IX. The Second Through Fourth of the Four Present Trusts

The passage beginning “again, Ajita, hearing that the Buddha’s lifespan is long” is the second grade. The preceding person has only trust and understanding and cannot yet expound. Teaching involves names and numbers and requires skillful language. This grade possesses these and therefore explains for others. It takes its name from what is superior and is called the second grade. Through the power of teaching, it can give rise to unsurpassed wisdom in oneself and others. The passage first identifies the person’s practice and then gives the measure.

Beginning with “how much more one who extensively hears this sutra” is the third grade: extensively hearing, understanding, teaching for others, and cultivating offerings. Offerings assist from without so that inward wisdom quickly enters and can give rise to the knowledge of all modes. The text first states the person’s practice and then gives the measure.

Beginning with “Ajita” is the fourth. This person possesses the preceding three grades and adds contemplative practice—entering meditation and applying wisdom until contemplation is accomplished and its object appears. The person can see the appearances of both the land of expedient means with remainder and the land of true recompense. “seeing the Buddha and the bhikṣu-saṅgha constantly abiding on Vulture Peak” is the appearance of the land of expedient means with remainder. “also seeing the Sahā world filled solely with bodhisattvas” is the appearance of the land of true recompense.

The first two grades belong to wisdom born of hearing; extensive hearing and teaching belong to wisdom born of reflection; contemplative appearance accomplished belongs to wisdom born of cultivation. Proceeding from shallow to deep, these accomplish the ten-trust stage of purification of the six faculties.

X. The Five Grades After Extinction

Beginning with “again, after the Tathāgata’s extinction” explains the five grades. The text divides in two: first it lists the five grades and measures the latter four; afterward the single grade of joyful acceptance measures the first.

Question: why is it arranged this way?

Answer: the latter four grades receive a summary measure; the first receives an extensive measure. Once the extensive measure has been given, what is more excellent can be inferred by analogy and the Buddha need not expend many words. Such is the skill of the teaching.

The five grades are: first, directly giving rise to a mind of rejoicing; second, adding one’s own accepting, upholding, reading, and reciting; third, adding encouragement for others to accept, uphold, read, and recite; fourth, adding the auxiliary practice of the six perfections; fifth, adding the proper practice of the six perfections.

In general, all five kinds of people practice for themselves while also transforming others, for the passage below speaks of “fifty people teaching one another in succession.” Because all practice for themselves, all are generally called disciples; because all transform others, all are generally called Dharma teachers. Specifically, the first two only practice for themselves, while the latter three fully transform others. The title Dharma teacher is assigned looking forward and belongs to the latter three, not to all five. Because personal practice applies to all five, all are called disciples.

The first grade only identifies the person; its measure is explained later. Beginning with “how much more” is the second grade, selecting from among them one able to accept, uphold, read, and recite; the person is easily understood. Beginning with “this person bears upon the crown” is the measure.

A person of initial resolve fears that agitation by external conditions will obstruct the cultivation of proper practice and therefore upholds and recites this sutra exclusively. This is the highest offering—discarding material acts and preserving principle—and brings immense benefit. When a later mind’s contemplation of principle has matured, involvement in external affairs does not obstruct the inward; material acts assist the Way, like abundant oil making a fire fierce or raising a sail while moving downstream. Added effort makes the momentum suddenly swift.

Point to the sutra text: it is itself the relic of the Dharma body, so there is no need separately to install relics of the birth-body. Written words are what express, and what they express is the stūpa, so no material stūpa is needed. The sutra can contain the saṅgha of ultimate meaning, so there is no need to await a saṅgha of outward marks.

Question: if so, upholding the sutra is the precept of ultimate meaning. Why does the text also speak of “one able to uphold the precepts”?

Answer: this explains the meaning of the first grade and should not be challenged with a later grade. If an explanation is required, upholding the sutra is the precept that accords with principle and naturally upholds the first and second divisions. “Able to uphold the precepts” here means that there is no deficiency in material observances from the third division downward.

The third grade is a person also able to teach others. The text first identifies the person; beginning with “erecting” is the measure. Beginning with “how much more if there is a person” is the fourth grade, a person also able to practice the six perfections as auxiliaries. The person is identified first; beginning with “that person’s qualities are most excellent” is the measure. Beginning with “if a person reads and recites” is the fifth grade, a person also able properly to practice the six perfections. The person is identified first; beginning with “if after my extinction” is the measure.

To summarize the five grades: the first three people belong to wisdom born of hearing, auxiliary practice of the six perfections belongs to wisdom born of reflection, and proper practice of the six belongs to wisdom born of cultivation. All remain before the ten trusts. Some also say that the first “Qualities of Joyful Acceptance” grade enters the stage of the mind of trust; dividing one grade into two minds, the five grades become the ten minds of trust, the iron-wheel stage of purification of the six faculties.

XI. The Nineteen and a Half Lines of Verse Recapitulating the Five Grades

The verse has nineteen and a half lines. The first five and a half recapitulate the second grade; the next three beginning with “if one can uphold” recapitulate the third; the four beginning with “if there is trust and understanding” recapitulate the fourth; and the next seven beginning with “reverently” recapitulate the fifth.

The phrase “give rise to the thought of that person as a buddha” initially names the person a Tathāgata on the basis of the person. “before long proceed to the tree of the Way” means that the person’s stage is the iron wheel and that the copper wheel will soon be entered, enabling the manifestation of buddhahood through the eight marks. “already proceeding to the site of awakening” states the place of practice; “complete awakening” states the place drawn near.

This fifth grade and the fourth trust are equal in both belonging to wisdom born of cultivation. In terms of the stage entered, both likewise belong to purification of the six faculties. They differ only in the Buddha’s presence in the world and the period after his extinction.

釋隨喜功德品The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、隨與喜

現在解釋〈隨喜功德品〉。

『隨』,是隨順事與理,在所隨順的事理上沒有兩樣、沒有差別;『喜』,是慶賀自己,也慶賀他人。聽聞深奧之法,隨順理便有真實的功德,隨順事便有權宜的功德;慶賀自己,是自己有了智慧,慶賀他人,是對他人懷有慈悲。把權實與智斷合起來說,所以稱作〈隨喜功德品〉。

再說隨順理:聽聞佛的本地深遠又深遠,便信受隨順而不違逆,連一絲一毫的疑惑滯礙也沒有。再說隨順事:聽聞佛在過去、現在、未來三世利益眾生,其化益橫向、豎向普遍貫通一切地方,也沒有一絲一毫的疑惑滯礙。由廣大的事通達深奧的理,又由深奧的理通達廣大的事。它們本來不二,卻可以分作二來說;本來無別,卻可以分別來說。雖說有二、有別,究竟仍是無二無別。能如此信解,便名為隨。

如來出現在世間四十多年,尚未顯說真實,也未向七種方便之人說出誠實的真諦。如今既能慶賀自己,也能慶賀他人,以凡夫之心等同佛所知,以自己所生之眼同於如來之見。這樣的知見究竟法界,廣大得沒有涯岸、沒有底限;它無可比等,又與那無可比等者相等,再沒有任何法能超過它。佛現在宣說這項法義,我現在得以聽聞,所以稱作〈隨喜功德品〉。

二、第五十人為何能顯出初心功德

展轉傳聞至第五十的人,是初品之中的最初一層。這個開始只有一念理解,只有一念慶賀自己、慶賀他人;尚未具備事上的行持,恩澤也還沒有達到別人。可是他所得的功德,經如來善巧設喻加以顯示,竟能蓋過無學之人。第五十人尚且如此,何況最初在法會中親聞的人,何況已到第二、第三、第四、第五品的人,何況進入位次,從十住、十行一直到後心的人?有誰聽聞如此深妙的功德,會不景仰愛慕?如來宣說這些,是要使眾生尊崇向往,所以稱作〈隨喜功德品〉。

前文一直稱揚受持經典的功德。當時大眾都以為,必須進入真實因位才能成就這種功德,因此對初心中的最初一層生起輕微、薄弱之想。忽然聽到好堅樹還在地下,萌芽便已有百圍;又聽到迦陵頻伽還在㲉中,聲音已勝過眾鳥。大眾覺得希有奇特,對初心的輕視與疑惑於是解除,所以稱作〈隨喜功德品〉。

得到五種神通的外道,雖能移山、竭海,卻不能降伏見惑與愛惑,仍不及煖法中人。二乘無學的子果都已解脫,仍被涅槃束縛,不知道自己的因與果都是權宜。通教人修因雖然巧妙,發心時卻不認識五百由旬,證果也只除去四住惑。別教人雖勝過二乘,修因仍有所偏,所入之門又拙,不是佛所讚歎。這些都不及最初隨喜的人。佛現在舉最初的『阿』字來比況最後的『茶』字,二字都勝過諸教,所以稱作〈隨喜功德品〉。

三、《大品》隨喜與本品問答

有人問:這裡的隨喜,與《大品》所說的隨喜有什麼關係?

回答:這裡舉的是法,那裡舉的是人;人與法互相舉出。

本品經文有問、有答,問與答又各有長行、偈頌。前一品已經校量後面四種人,沒有說到最初一種人,所以彌勒承著當時根機發問,把這層意思問了出來;經文所說就是如此。

佛的回答分為兩部分:第一,回答內心隨喜的人;第二,直接說明在外聽法的人。第一部分又分五科:一、展轉互相教導;二、作為格量基礎的本事;三、佛發問;四、彌勒回答;五、正式格量。五科的數目與先後都依經文而立,問與答各守自己的位置。

四、五十人的兩種古解與本論數法

南方對五十人的解釋分成三種:第一,展轉而後一人勝過前一人;第二,展轉而前後平等;第三,展轉而後一人劣於前一人。若後人更勝,這種人難得;若前後平等,也很稀有;若後人漸劣,則比較接近經文所說。用最後較劣的人作格量,便可以反過來顯出中間平等者與前面較勝者的功德。

北方人的解釋,是最初由妙覺位者為第十地人說,第十地人再為第九地人說,如此依次展轉,一直到十信位;再用最後的人校量最初的人。

本論認為這種說法不對。佛已明說,最初一品是在法會中聞法,此後一人傳一人、互相教導,展轉到第五十人,再用最後一人校量最初一人。傳聞的最後端並不是十信之始,最初端也不是妙覺之終,何必採用這種解釋?它雖把位次推得很深,卻沒有會合經文的本旨。

本論另立兩種算法。第一,橫向依諸教中的四眾計數;第二,直接依圓教計數。

第一種算法中,三藏教有四門。每一門本有四眾,再分出沙彌、沙彌尼,便合成六人;四門各有六人,共成二十四人。再依信行、法行分開,便成四十八人;加上最初與最後兩人,合成五十人。通教與別教的四門也同樣計算。

第二種算法直接依圓門計數。其數法有小七、大七;大七中有七個七,合成四十九。這些人都是師與弟子,具備自己修行、教化他人的德行;只有最後一人只是自己理解,沒有教導他人的德行。因此用最下的一人作格量,以顯示上面諸人的功德。

五、從世間之樂格量到初隨喜福

格量先說給與世間安樂、拔除果報之苦,後說給與涅槃安樂、拔除生死之苦。這只是簡略舉出梵福,現在再把它廣泛說明。

滿閻浮提所有人的福,不及西瞿耶尼一人的福;滿西瞿耶尼所有人的福,不及東弗婆提一人的福;滿三天下所有人的福,不及北欝單越一人的福;滿四天下所有人的福,不及一位四天王的福;四天王的福,不及一位釋天的福;如此一直推到第六天,仍不及一份梵福。

梵福有定福、散福兩類。散福有四種:在沒有塔的地方建塔;塔已損壞便加以修治;使僧眾和合,請他們轉動法輪;僧眾散離,便使他們重新和合。這四種福與梵天之福相等,所以稱作梵福。

聖福,是阿羅漢住在最後一身、得到有餘涅槃的福。又有體法三乘之人,共同學習無生,斷盡煩惱,如同把木材燒成炭。又有薩埵聖福:自己修行、教化他人,兩者都以沒有言說的道路斷除煩惱,進入無餘涅槃。又有薩埵福:從初發心開始,依次教化他人,使他們進入大涅槃。

如此逐級格量:梵福不及聖福,聖福不及體聖福,體聖福不及小薩埵福,小薩埵福不及大薩埵福,大薩埵福又不及聽聞《法華經》而生起最初隨喜的福。為什麼?因為前面那些不是佛法、不是真實、也不是圓滿;即使已住於後面的果位,仍不及這裡的初心。這一段的意思就是如此。

六、私記五十功德與六根功德

私下記錄認為,勸別人聽法所得的功德,從與陀羅尼菩薩共同出生在一處起,到人相具足為止,合計有五十種功德。若把每一種功德都當作一個人的名目,也可以計成五十人。只是上文的五十人,是論內在理解而生隨喜;這裡只論外在行事,這是兩者的差別。

這一段經文也有六根功德。利根智慧,是意的功德;不會瘖瘂,是舌的功德;鼻修長高直,是鼻的功德;得以見佛,是眼的功德;得以聞法,是耳的功德;其餘所列,是身的功德。前面所說的是相似位的功德,這裡所說的是相似位以前的功德。

聽經一段分為四科:一、自己前往;二、分座給人;三、勸別人前往;四、具足聽聞並依說修行。〔以下從略〕

七、偈頌十八行

偈頌共有十八行,分成兩部分。最初九行頌隨喜;從『若有勸』以下,第二個九行頌聽經。

隨喜的九行又分三科。第一,最前一行半,頌第五十人。第二,從『最後人』以下五行半,頌格量所依的本事。第三,從『最後』以下兩行,頌正式格量。偈中略去沒有重頌的部分,是福德極其繁多。

後九行頌聽經,次序與長行稍有不同,分成四科。第一,最初五行越過前科,先頌勸人聽經。第二,從『若故詣』以下兩行,回過來追頌自己前往聽經。第三,從『若於講法』以下一行,頌分座給人。第四,從『何況』以下一行,頌依說修行。〔以下從略〕

I. Acceptance and Joy

We now explain “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance.”

“acceptance” means conforming to events and principle, with no duality or difference in what is followed. “joy” means rejoicing for oneself and for others. On hearing the profound Dharma, conforming to principle brings real qualities and conforming to events provisional qualities. Rejoicing for oneself means possessing wisdom; rejoicing for others means holding compassion toward them. Because provisional and real, wisdom and severance, are combined in the explanation, the chapter is called “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance.”

To elaborate on conforming to principle: hearing that the Buddha’s Origin is profound and ever more profound, one trusts, accepts, and follows without opposition, without the least doubt or obstruction. To elaborate on conforming to events: hearing that the Buddha benefits beings throughout past, present, and future and that his transforming benefit pervades every place horizontally and vertically, one likewise has not the least doubt or obstruction. Through vast events one penetrates profound principle, and through profound principle one penetrates vast events. Originally nondual, they can nevertheless be spoken of as two; originally undifferentiated, they can nevertheless be distinguished. Though spoken of as two and differentiated, ultimately they remain nondual and undifferentiated. Trusting and understanding in this way is called acceptance.

For more than forty years after appearing in the world, the Tathāgata had not yet revealed the real or told the seven kinds of skillful-means practitioners the true truth. Now one can rejoice for oneself and others, equating an ordinary person’s mind with what the Buddha knows and one’s own produced eye with the Tathāgata’s vision. This knowledge and vision exhausts the Dharma realm, vast without shore or bottom. It is unequaled, equal to the Unequaled, and surpassed by no dharma. The Buddha now teaches this Dharma meaning and I now hear it; therefore the chapter is called “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance.”

II. Why the Fiftieth Person Reveals the Qualities of the Initial Mind

The person at the fiftieth point of successive transmission is the very beginning of the first grade. This beginning has only a single thought of understanding and a single thought of rejoicing for oneself and others. It has no outward practice yet, nor has its benefit reached others. Yet the qualities gained, disclosed through the Tathāgata’s skillfully established simile, surpass those beyond training. If even the fiftieth person is so, how much more the first person who hears directly in the assembly, those who have reached the second, third, fourth, and fifth grades, and those who enter the stages from the ten abodes and ten practices through the later mind? Who could hear of such profound and wondrous qualities without admiring and aspiring to them? The Tathāgata teaches this so that beings will honor and aspire; therefore the chapter is called “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance.”

The preceding text repeatedly praised the qualities of accepting and upholding the sutra. The assembly thought that one must enter the real causal stage to accomplish such qualities and therefore regarded the very beginning of the initial mind as slight and weak. Suddenly they hear that while the Haojian tree remains underground, its shoot already measures a hundred spans, and that while the kalaviṅka remains in the shell, its voice already surpasses all other birds. The assembly finds this rare and extraordinary, and its disparagement and doubt toward the initial mind are removed; therefore the chapter is called “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance.”

Although outsiders who attain five supernormal powers can move mountains and exhaust seas, they cannot subdue the delusions of views and craving and do not equal a person at the stage of warmth. Though those beyond training in the two vehicles are liberated in both seed and fruit, they remain bound by nirvāṇa and do not know that their causes and fruits are provisional. Though those of the Shared Teaching skillfully cultivate the cause, at initial resolve they do not recognize the five hundred yojanas and at realization eliminate only the four abiding delusions. Though those of the Separate Teaching surpass the two vehicles, their cultivation of the cause remains one-sided and their gateway clumsy, and is not praised by the Buddha. None equals the person of initial joyful acceptance. The Buddha now adduces the first letter “A” to compare with the final letter “Cha”; both surpass the various teachings. Therefore the chapter is called “The Qualities of Joyful Acceptance.”

III. Joyful Acceptance in the Great Prajñāpāramitā and This Chapter’s Question and Answer

Someone asks: how does the joyful acceptance here relate to the joyful acceptance taught in the Great Prajñāpāramitā?

Answer: here the Dharma is adduced; there the person is adduced. Person and Dharma are mutually adduced.

This chapter’s sutra text has a question and an answer, each in prose and verse. The preceding chapter already measured the latter four kinds of people but did not discuss the first. Maitreya therefore follows the capacities of the time, asks about this level, and draws its meaning out. Such is the sutra text.

The Buddha’s answer divides into two: first, answering concerning a person of inward joyful acceptance; second, directly explaining a person who hears the Dharma outwardly. The first part again has five topics: teaching one another in succession; the foundational event used for measurement; the Buddha’s question; Maitreya’s answer; and the formal measure. The number and order of all five follow the sutra text, and question and answer each retain their place.

IV. Two Ancient Explanations of the Fifty People and the Root Treatise’s Calculations

The southern explanation divides the fifty people into three: first, each later person is successively superior to the previous one; second, later and previous are equal; third, each later person is successively inferior. A succession of increasingly superior people is hard to find; an equal succession is likewise rare; a gradually inferior succession is closer to the sutra. Measuring with the inferior final person can inversely reveal the qualities of the equal people in the middle and the superior ones before them.

The northern explanation says that one at wondrous awakening first teaches a person of the tenth ground, the person of the tenth ground then teaches one of the ninth, and so on in succession until the ten trusts; the final person is used to measure the first.

The root treatise considers this incorrect. The Buddha clearly says that the first person of the first grade hears Dharma in the assembly, after which one person transmits to another, teaching each other in succession until the fiftieth, and the last measures the first. The final point of transmission is not the beginning of the ten trusts, nor is the first point the end of wondrous awakening. Why adopt such an explanation? Though it raises the stages very high, it does not accord with the sutra’s intent.

The root treatise establishes two other calculations. The first counts horizontally through the fourfold assemblies of the various teachings; the second counts directly through the Perfect Teaching.

In the first, the Tripiṭaka Teaching has four gateways. Each has the fourfold assembly, with male and female novices distinguished to make six people. Six under each of four gateways gives twenty-four. Divided further according to practice through trust and practice through Dharma, they make forty-eight; adding the first and last gives fifty. The four gateways of the Shared and Separate teachings are counted in the same way.

The second calculation directly follows the Perfect gateway. Its components are the lesser seven and greater seven; the greater seven has seven groups of seven, making forty-nine. These are teachers and disciples who possess the qualities of personal practice and teaching others. Only the final person understands personally without possessing the quality of teaching others. The lowest person is therefore used for the measure to reveal the qualities of those above.

V. Measuring from Worldly Pleasure to the Blessing of Initial Joyful Acceptance

The measure first speaks of giving worldly pleasure and removing the suffering of resultant recompense, then giving the pleasure of nirvāṇa and removing the suffering of birth and death. This briefly indicates Brahmā blessing; it is now explained extensively.

The blessing of all people filling Jambudvīpa does not equal that of one person in Aparagodānīya. The blessing of all people filling Aparagodānīya does not equal that of one person in Pūrvavideha. The blessing of all people filling three continents does not equal that of one person in Uttarakuru. The blessing of all people filling the four continents does not equal that of one of the Four Great Kings. Their blessing does not equal that of one Śakra. Proceeding thus through the sixth heaven still does not equal one Brahmā blessing.

Brahmā blessing has two kinds: meditative and dispersed. Dispersed blessing has four forms: building a stūpa where none exists; repairing a damaged stūpa; harmonizing the saṅgha and requesting it to turn the Dharma wheel; and reuniting a dispersed saṅgha. These four blessings equal the blessing of the Brahmā heaven and are therefore called Brahmā blessings.

Noble blessing is the blessing of an arhat dwelling in the final body and attaining nirvāṇa with remainder. There are also people of the three vehicles who embody dharmas, together study non-arising, and exhaust afflictions, like burning wood into charcoal. There is also the noble blessing of a sattva: personal practice and transformation of others both eliminate afflictions through the path without words and enter nirvāṇa without remainder. There is also the blessing of a sattva: beginning with initial resolve, one progressively transforms others so that they enter great nirvāṇa.

Measured level by level: Brahmā blessing does not equal noble blessing; noble blessing does not equal the blessing of nobles who embody dharmas; that does not equal the blessing of a lesser sattva; the lesser sattva’s does not equal the greater sattva’s; and the greater sattva’s does not equal the blessing of initial joyful acceptance on hearing the Lotus Sutra. Why? Because the preceding are not Buddha-Dharma, not real, and not perfect. Though one may already dwell in a later fruit, it still does not equal the initial mind here. Such is the meaning of this passage.

VI. The Private Record’s Fifty Qualities and the Qualities of the Six Faculties

The private record considers the qualities gained by encouraging another to hear the Dharma—from being born in the same place as a dhāraṇī bodhisattva through possessing the complete human marks—to total fifty. If each quality is treated as a person’s designation, fifty people can likewise be counted. Yet the fifty above concern inward understanding and joyful acceptance; these concern only outward acts. This is their difference.

This sutra passage also has qualities of the six faculties. Sharp faculties and wisdom are qualities of mind; not being mute, of tongue; a long, high, straight nose, of nose; seeing the Buddha, of eye; hearing the Dharma, of ear; all the rest listed, of body. The preceding passage concerns qualities at the semblant stage; this one concerns qualities before the semblant stage.

The passage on hearing the sutra has four topics: first, personally going; second, yielding a seat; third, encouraging another to go; fourth, hearing fully and practicing as taught. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

VII. Eighteen Lines of Verse

The verse has eighteen lines divided in two. The first nine recapitulate joyful acceptance. Beginning with “if there is one who encourages,” the second nine recapitulate hearing the sutra.

The nine on joyful acceptance again divide into three. First, the initial line and a half recapitulate the fiftieth person. Second, the five and a half lines beginning with “the final person” recapitulate the foundational event used for measurement. Third, the two lines beginning with “the final” recapitulate the formal measure. The verse abbreviates what it does not recapitulate because the blessings are exceedingly numerous.

The latter nine on hearing the sutra differ slightly in sequence from the prose and divide into four. First, the initial five lines leap over the preceding topic and recapitulate encouraging another to hear. Second, the two lines beginning with “if one intentionally goes” return and retrospectively recapitulate personally going to hear. Third, the one line beginning with “if at a place where Dharma is taught” recapitulates yielding a seat. Fourth, the one line beginning with “how much more” recapitulates practicing as taught. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

釋法師功德品The Qualities of the Dharma Teacher

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、法師、功德與兩重內外莊嚴

『法師』的意義,前文已經說過。至於『功德』,前面所說的是初品最初的功德;現在所說的,則在五品以上,是六根清淨的功德。

所謂內外莊嚴,先有一重解釋:眼、耳、鼻、舌、身五根清淨,名為外莊嚴;意根清淨,名為內莊嚴。

又有一重解釋:從地獄以上直到佛位,往還其間的一切色像,全都在自己的身中顯現,名為內莊嚴;同樣從地獄以上直到佛位的一切色像,藉普現三昧向外化現,名為外莊嚴。身根既然如此,其餘五根也都如此。

讀經、誦經既然能有這樣的功德,受持、解說、書寫其餘四種法師也都如此。初品既然如此,其餘四品更是如此。相似位既然如此,分真位更勝一倍。

修行人聽到這些功德利益,歡喜得不能自持,便會勤加求取而沒有厭倦,信心與精進都倍加增長。由此便清楚知道大乘有廣大力量,疑惑之網因此決然消除。相似解才剛開始的最初階段,已超過二乘所能到達的最極處百千萬倍。由開端指向終點,便能預先理解究竟第一義諦不可思議。本品所說具備這四重意思,所以稱為『法師功德品』。

二、光宅與另一家的功德數

再說六根功德。光宅解釋說:

『身、口、意三業合於十善;每一善又具十善,便成一百。自行、化他、隨喜、讚歎四項合起來,成為四百。再約受持、讀、誦、解說、書寫五種法師,成為二千;又把它分成三品,便是六千功德。此土三根的作用較弱,所以從原數減奪而說八百;另外三根的作用較強,所以增與而說一千二百。把增與與減奪合起來說,仍然是六千。』

又有一人所明的數目與光宅相同:下品八百,中品一千,上品一千二百。

可是,諸師這些偏向一邊的解釋,既沒有契合今經,也不符合其他經論。

《大品》說:『色清淨,所以般若清淨;般若清淨,所以色清淨;色清淨,所以五根清淨;般若清淨,所以意根清淨。』如果六根本來平等,怎麼可以判成上、中、下三品,又分作用強弱?難道可以說一根強而另一根不強,一根清淨而另一根不清淨,一根是上品而其餘不是上品嗎?〔云云:以下反詰從略〕

《正法華》完整具備六千功德,不分上、中、下品。〔云云:以下從略〕

《法華論》說:『凡夫因經典之力而得到殊勝的根用;雖然還沒有進入初地,卻能以父母所生的肉眼,看見大千世界的內外。』

《大經》說:『如來只用一根,便能見色、聞聲、嗅香、辨別味道、感覺觸境、了知諸法。』

今經說六根清淨,與《大品》相同;說以這些功德莊嚴六根,與《正法華》相同;說鼻根能見色、聞聲、感覺、了知,與《涅槃經》相同;說肉眼兼有天眼、慧眼、法眼、佛眼等作用,與《法華論》相同。經論文字與義理既然如此,便不可以偏狹的見解壓抑正經。

三、六千與一千二百的兩套解釋

現在應當正面解釋。

光宅的數目雖然湊足,對六根的分配卻不依經文。現在依三業安樂行來說,其中便有十善;每一善中又有十善,便成一百善;每一善中又具十如,便成一千善;再就化導他人來說,便成二千;再約如來室、如來衣、如來座三項,便成六千。

受持、讀、誦、解說、書寫五種法師,每一種都具足六根清淨;六根中的每一根,各有一千功德。

還可以再作一種解釋。一心中具足十法界,每一法界都有十如,便成一百;每一根又能通取色、聲、香、味、觸、法六塵,便成六百;再約定與慧兩種莊嚴,便成一千二百。每一根都以定、慧二法莊嚴,所以每一根同樣有一千二百功德。

四、清淨不在多少,莊嚴才說盈縮

如果只論六根清淨,清淨本身便不說功德是少是多。如果說莊嚴,才可以說能盈、能縮、能等。

所謂等莊嚴,是每一根都具六千;說一千二百,是顯示根用能盈;說八百,是顯示根用能縮;若只說清淨,則沒有盈、沒有縮,也沒有可計量的等。六根能夠互相運用,根用自在而不可思議。

若偏取某一個數目作固定判斷,便會失去本段旨意。

這是相似位的功德。若依四輪來說,是鐵輪位;若依五十二位來說,是十信心;若依《仁王經》來說,是十善大心。現在對常精進菩薩而說,則是十信的第三心。諸經所用名目雖然不同,同樣都屬於圓教相似位。

五、六根六章的總科

以下經文分成兩部分:第一,總列六根功德能盈、能縮的數目;第二,分別開作眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意六章加以解釋。六章各有長行和偈頌。

六、眼根:仍是肉眼,卻具五眼之用

眼根章說,這是父母所生的眼,所以名為肉眼;可是它所能看見的範圍,已超過天眼。

梵王依果報所得的天眼,在自己所統攝的世界中,能遍見一個大千世界;大千世界以外有風輪阻隔眼力,所以不能看見外面。若梵王到了其他世界,又不能遍見那個大千世界,因為那裡不是梵王所統攝的範圍。

小阿羅漢能見小千世界,大阿羅漢能見大千世界,辟支佛能見百佛世界;他們不受風輪阻礙,也沒有自己世界與其他世界的隔限。

現在《法華經》所說的眼根能見大千世界內外,看來應當是天眼,為什麼仍稱肉眼?

回答說:這是圓教相似位所得的根用。由於經典之力,肉眼有了殊勝作用;可是尚未發起真證,所以還不能稱為天眼,仍然名為肉眼。譬如小乘方便位尚未得到神通時,也不能稱作天眼。這個身體仍是分段生死之身,所以稱為父母所生。

它雖名肉眼,卻具足五眼之用。能見大千世界內外,是天眼之用;能見一切眾生及其業因緣,是法眼之用;眼目極為清淨,是慧眼之用;能在同一時看見大千世界內外,又見差別之業與清淨之境,並能圓伏法界上的惑,是佛眼之用。

《大經》說:『雖然仍有肉眼,也名為佛眼。』由於有佛眼之用,所以名為清淨;由於兼具五眼之用,所以稱為莊嚴;能盈、能縮,所以名為勝根用,也名根自在。怎麼可以只把它理解成八百或一千二百的數目呢?

七、耳根:兩釋各配五耳

耳根章說,它能普遍聽聞大千世界內外十法界的音聲。

一釋繫於所聞之境:聽到六道聲,是肉耳與天耳之用;聽到二乘聲,是慧耳之用;聽到菩薩聲,是法耳之用;聽到佛聲,是佛耳之用。

另一釋繫於能聞之用:父母所生,是肉耳;能聽見大千世界內外,是天耳;聽到聲音而不染著,是慧耳;分別音聲而不錯謬,是法耳;一時互聞一切音聲,是佛耳。

再用耳根回頭類比眼根,眼根也同樣如此:看見人、天,是肉眼與天眼;看見二乘,是慧眼;看見菩薩,是法眼;看見佛,是佛眼。〔云云:以下從略〕

八、鼻根:聞香而有其餘五根之用

鼻根章也依同樣方式解釋。父母所生,是肉鼻;能知大千世界內外,是天鼻;不染、不著,是慧鼻;分別而不錯謬,是法鼻;一時互用,是佛鼻。

本章又特別說明六根互用。

鼻能由香氣知道好壞、分辨貴賤,又能知道天宮的種種莊嚴,所以鼻根有眼根之用。

有人讀經或為人說法,鼻根聞香便能知道,所以鼻根有耳根之用。

鼻根能由香氣知道各種樹木、花朵、果實以及蘇油,所以有舌根之用。

鼻根能知道眾生入禪、出禪;禪定有八觸,五欲娛樂嬉戲也屬觸法,所以鼻根有身根之用。

鼻根又能知道染欲、愚癡、瞋恚之心,也能知道修習善法的人,所以有意根之用。

鼻根自在而有如此殊勝的作用,其餘五根也可依此類推。

九、舌根:苦味變美,為何色不隨之變

舌根章也同樣如此。父母所生,是肉舌;能說十法界的語言,便可說是天舌;語言不受破壞,是慧舌;分別不錯謬,是法舌;一時互用,是佛舌。由此,五舌的意義便已明白。〔云云:以下從略〕

有人問:苦味、澁味與惡味到了舌根,都會變成上妙之味;各種色相到了眼根,為什麼不也變成妙色?

舊有的回答說:這兩者不能類比。味道有損有益,會造成損害的味才須改變;色相不會損壞眼根,所以不必變化,不能以味作例。

現在的解釋不是如此。一切色都同於佛色,一切聲都同於佛聲,其餘各根所對也同樣清淨,所以彼此類比並沒有妨礙。又能遍知一切色法、聲法而不混亂、不錯謬,能作清楚分別也沒有妨礙。既然是自在之根,怎能把它理解成頑固而彼此障礙的根呢?

十、身根:一切色像都在身中顯現

身根章也同樣如此。

世間所有一切,都在身中顯現,是肉身之用;上至有頂的一切在身中顯現,是天身之用;二乘在身中顯現,是慧身之用;菩薩在身中顯現,是法身之用;佛在身中顯現,是佛身之用。

這些色像在同一時圓滿顯現,在同一時互相運用,在同一時沒有錯謬,在同一時沒有染著。〔云云:以下從略〕

十一、意根:月、四月與一年所表示的法義

意根章也同樣如此。

世間維持生活的各種產業,都能隨順正法,這是人的意根清淨。

天人心中所行、所作的種種行動,全都能夠了知,這是天的意根清淨。

四個月表示四諦;一年共有十二個月,表示十二因緣。所宣說的法都與實相不相違背,這是慧意清淨。

一個月表示一乘,這是菩薩意清淨。

凡有所思量,全是先佛經典中已經說過的法,這是佛意清淨。

意根在同一時圓滿明了,在同一時圓滿互用,在同一時沒有染著,在同一時沒有錯謬;根用自在,能盈、能縮、能等、能淨。〔云云:以下從略〕

I. Dharma Teacher, Qualities, and Two Kinds of Inward and Outward Adornment

The meaning of “Dharma teacher” was explained above. As for “qualities,” the preceding chapter taught the first qualities at the beginning of the first grade; the present chapter teaches the qualities of purification of the six faculties above the five grades.

Inward and outward adornment have a first explanation. Purification of the five faculties of eye, ear, nose, tongue, and body is called outward adornment; purification of mind is called inward adornment.

There is also another explanation. All forms and images passing back and forth from hell upward through buddhahood appear within one’s own body; this is called inward adornment. The same forms and images from hell through buddhahood are manifested outward by means of the samādhi of universal manifestation; this is called outward adornment. Since the body faculty is so, the other five faculties are likewise.

Since reading and reciting the sutra can have such qualities, the other kinds of Dharma teacher—receiving and upholding, explaining, and copying—are likewise. Since the first grade is so, the other four grades are all the more so. Since the semblant stage is so, the stage of partial realization is twice as excellent.

When practitioners hear of these beneficial qualities, their joy becomes irrepressible. They seek them diligently without weariness, while both faith and vigor increase twofold. They thereby clearly understand the vast power of the Great Vehicle and decisively eliminate the net of doubt. The very beginning at which semblant understanding first arises already surpasses the utmost point reachable by the two vehicles hundreds of thousands of myriads of times. By pointing from the beginning toward the end, they can understand in advance that the ultimate truth is inconceivable. Because the present chapter possesses these four meanings, it is called “The Qualities of the Dharma Teacher.”

II. Guangzhai’s and Another Master’s Counts of Qualities

Next come the qualities of the six faculties. Guangzhai explains:

“The three karmas of body, speech, and mind accord with the ten wholesome actions; each wholesome action again contains ten wholesome actions, making one hundred. Personal practice, transforming others, joyful acceptance, and praise together make four hundred. In terms of the five kinds of Dharma teacher—receiving and upholding, reading, reciting, explaining, and copying—they make two thousand; dividing these further into three grades gives six thousand qualities. The functions of three faculties in this land are weaker, so their original numbers are reduced to eight hundred. The functions of the other three are stronger, so they are increased to twelve hundred. Increase and reduction together still total six thousand.”

Another person gives the same numbers as Guangzhai: eight hundred in the lower grade, one thousand in the middle, and twelve hundred in the higher.

Yet these one-sided explanations of the various masters accord neither with the present sutra nor with other sutras and treatises.

The Great Prajñāpāramitā says: “Because form is pure, prajñā is pure; because prajñā is pure, form is pure. Because form is pure, the five faculties are pure; because prajñā is pure, the mind faculty is pure.” If the six faculties are originally equal, how can they be judged as three grades—higher, middle, and lower—or divided into stronger and weaker functions? Can one say that one faculty is strong while another is not, one pure while another is impure, or one of the higher grade while the rest are not? 〔The remaining challenges are abbreviated.〕

The True Dharma Lotus possesses the full six thousand qualities without dividing them into higher, middle, and lower grades. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra says: “Ordinary beings obtain extraordinary faculty-functions through the power of the scripture. Although they have not yet entered the first ground, with the physical eye born of their parents they can see within and beyond the great trichiliocosm.”

The Great Nirvāṇa Sutra says: “With only one faculty, the Tathāgata can see forms, hear sounds, smell fragrances, distinguish flavors, feel objects of touch, and know dharmas.”

When the present sutra teaches purification of the six faculties, it agrees with the Great Prajñāpāramitā. When it says that these qualities adorn the six faculties, it agrees with the True Dharma Lotus. When it says that the nose faculty can see form, hear sound, feel, and know, it agrees with the Nirvāṇa Sutra. When it says that the physical eye also has the functions of the divine eye, wisdom-eye, Dharma-eye, and buddha-eye, it agrees with the Treatise on the Lotus Sutra. Since the words and meanings of the sutras and treatises are so, narrow and one-sided views cannot be used to suppress the correct sutra.

III. Two Explanations of Six Thousand and Twelve Hundred

The proper explanation should now be given.

Although Guangzhai’s count reaches the total, its distribution among the six faculties does not follow the sutra. According to the peaceful practices of the three karmas, there are ten wholesome actions. Each contains another ten, making one hundred wholesome actions; each wholesome action further possesses the ten suchnesses, making one thousand. In terms of guiding others, these become two thousand; in terms of the three—the Tathāgata’s room, robe, and seat—they become six thousand.

Each of the five kinds of Dharma teacher—receiving and upholding, reading, reciting, explaining, and copying—fully possesses purification of the six faculties. Each of the six faculties has one thousand qualities.

There is another possible explanation. One mind fully possesses the ten dharma-realms, and each realm has the ten suchnesses, making one hundred. Each faculty universally apprehends the six sense-objects—form, sound, fragrance, flavor, touch, and dharmas—making six hundred. In terms of the two adornments of meditative stability and wisdom, these become twelve hundred. Because every faculty is adorned by both meditative stability and wisdom, every faculty likewise has twelve hundred qualities.

IV. Purity Is Not a Matter of Quantity; Only Adornment Speaks of Fullness and Contraction

If one discusses only purification of the six faculties, purity itself does not say that the qualities are few or many. Only when adornment is discussed can one speak of the capacities for fullness, contraction, and equality.

Equal adornment means that each faculty possesses six thousand. Saying twelve hundred discloses that faculty-function can expand; saying eight hundred discloses that it can contract. If only purity is stated, there is no fullness, contraction, or measurable equality. The six faculties can function through one another; their functions are free and inconceivable.

If one takes a single number one-sidedly as a fixed judgment, one loses the meaning of this passage.

These are qualities of the semblant stage. According to the four wheels, it is the iron-wheel stage. According to the fifty-two stages, it is the mind of the ten trusts. According to the Sutra for Humane Kings, it is the great mind of the ten wholesome actions. As addressed here to the bodhisattva Ever Diligent, it is the third mind of the ten trusts. Although the sutras use different names, all belong to the semblant stage of the Perfect Teaching.

V. General Outline of the Six Sections on the Six Faculties

The following sutra text has two parts: first, a general list of the quantities disclosing the capacities for fullness and contraction in the qualities of the six faculties; second, separate explanations in six sections on eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. Each of the six sections has prose and verse.

VI. The Eye Faculty: Still the Physical Eye, Yet Possessing the Functions of All Five Eyes

The section on the eye says that because this eye is born of one’s parents it is called the physical eye, yet the range it can see already exceeds the divine eye.

Within the world under his rule, Brahmā’s divine eye gained through karmic recompense can see throughout one great trichiliocosm. Outside that trichiliocosm, the wind-circle obstructs his visual power, so he cannot see beyond it. If Brahmā goes to another world, he again cannot see throughout that trichiliocosm, because it lies outside the domain he rules.

A lesser arhat can see a small chiliocosm, a greater arhat a great trichiliocosm, and a pratyekabuddha a hundred buddha-worlds. They are not obstructed by the wind-circle and have no barrier between their own and other worlds.

Since the eye faculty taught in the Lotus Sutra can see within and beyond the great trichiliocosm, it would seem to be a divine eye. Why is it still called the physical eye?

The answer is that this is the faculty-function gained at the semblant stage of the Perfect Teaching. Through the power of the scripture, the physical eye possesses extraordinary function; yet because true realization has not arisen, it cannot be called the divine eye and remains named the physical eye. In the same way, before those at the skillful-means stages of the Lesser Vehicle obtain supernormal powers, their eye cannot be called divine. This body remains a body in segmented birth and death and is therefore called born of one’s parents.

Although named the physical eye, it possesses the functions of all five eyes. Seeing within and beyond the great trichiliocosm is the function of the divine eye. Seeing all beings and the causes and conditions of their karma is the function of the Dharma-eye. The eye’s extreme purity is the function of the wisdom-eye. Seeing within and beyond the great trichiliocosm at one time, seeing differentiated karma and purified objects, and perfectly subduing the delusions above the dharma-realm are functions of the buddha-eye.

The Great Nirvāṇa Sutra says: “Although it still has a physical eye, it is also called a buddha-eye.” Because it has the function of the buddha-eye, it is called pure; because it also possesses the functions of the five eyes, it is called adorned. Since it can expand and contract, it is called extraordinary faculty-function and mastery of the faculty. How can it be understood only as the numbers eight hundred or twelve hundred?

VII. The Ear Faculty: Two Explanations Each Correlated with the Five Ears

The section on the ear says that it can universally hear the sounds of the ten dharma-realms within and beyond the great trichiliocosm.

One interpretation is keyed to the objects heard. Hearing the sounds of the six destinies is the function of the physical and divine ears; hearing the sounds of the two vehicles is the function of the wisdom-ear; hearing bodhisattvas is the function of the Dharma-ear; and hearing buddhas is the function of the buddha-ear.

The other interpretation is keyed to the function that hears. Being born of one’s parents is the physical ear; hearing within and beyond the great trichiliocosm is the divine ear; hearing sounds without defilement or attachment is the wisdom-ear; distinguishing sounds without error is the Dharma-ear; and mutually hearing all sounds at once is the buddha-ear.

The ear can then be used to infer the eye in return, for the eye is likewise. Seeing humans and devas belongs to the physical and divine eyes; seeing the two vehicles to the wisdom-eye; seeing bodhisattvas to the Dharma-eye; and seeing buddhas to the buddha-eye. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

VIII. The Nose Faculty: Smelling Fragrances While Possessing the Functions of the Other Five Faculties

The section on the nose is explained in the same way. Being born of one’s parents is the physical nose; knowing within and beyond the great trichiliocosm is the divine nose; freedom from defilement and attachment is the wisdom-nose; distinguishing without error is the Dharma-nose; and interfunctioning at one time is the buddha-nose.

This section also specifically explains interfunctioning of the six faculties.

From fragrance, the nose can know what is good or bad and distinguish noble from base, and can know the many adornments of heavenly palaces; the nose faculty therefore has the function of the eye.

When someone is reading the sutra or teaching Dharma for others, the nose faculty can know this by smelling the fragrance; it therefore has the function of the ear.

From fragrance, the nose faculty can know various trees, flowers, fruits, clarified butter, and oil; it therefore has the function of the tongue.

The nose faculty can know when beings enter and emerge from meditation. Meditation has eight objects of touch, while enjoyment and play among the five desires also belong to touch; the nose therefore has the function of the body.

The nose faculty can also know minds defiled by desire, delusion, and anger, and can know people cultivating wholesome dharmas; it therefore has the function of mind.

The nose faculty has mastery and such extraordinary functions; the other five faculties can be inferred in the same way.

IX. The Tongue Faculty: Bitter Flavor Becomes Excellent—Why Does Form Not Change Likewise?

The section on the tongue is likewise. Being born of one’s parents is the physical tongue; speaking the languages of the ten dharma-realms can be called the divine tongue; language not being damaged is the wisdom-tongue; distinguishing without error is the Dharma-tongue; and interfunctioning at one time is the buddha-tongue. The meaning of the five tongues is thereby clear. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Someone asks: when bitter, astringent, or bad flavors reach the tongue faculty, they all become superior and wondrous flavors. Why do the various forms that reach the eye not likewise become wondrous forms?

The old answer says that the two cannot be compared. Flavors can harm or benefit, and only a flavor that would cause injury needs to be transformed. Forms do not damage the eye faculty, so no transformation is necessary; flavor cannot be used as the analogy.

The present explanation is otherwise. All forms are the same as the Buddha’s forms, all sounds are the same as the Buddha’s sounds, and the objects of the remaining faculties are likewise pure; there is therefore no obstruction to inferring them from one another. One can also know all form-dharmas and sound-dharmas universally without confusion or error; clear distinction is no obstruction. Since these are faculties at mastery, how can they be understood as stubborn faculties that obstruct one another?

X. The Body Faculty: All Forms and Images Appear Within the Body

The section on the body is likewise.

Everything in the world appearing within the body is the function of the physical body. Everything up to the summit of existence appearing within it is the function of the heavenly body. The two vehicles appearing within the body are the function of the wisdom-body; bodhisattvas appearing within it, the function of the Dharma-body; and buddhas appearing within it, the function of the buddha-body.

These forms and images perfectly appear at one time, function through one another at one time, are free from error at one time, and are free from attachment at one time. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

XI. The Mind Faculty: The Dharma Meanings Represented by One Month, Four Months, and a Year

The section on mind is likewise.

The various productive occupations that sustain worldly life can all accord with right Dharma; this is purification of the human mind faculty.

All the courses of thought and various activities of devas can be known; this is purification of the deva mind faculty.

Four months represent the four truths; a year has twelve months and represents the twelve links of dependent arising. The Dharma taught never contradicts the true mark; this is purification of the wisdom-mind.

One month represents the One Vehicle; this is purification of the bodhisattva mind.

Whatever is contemplated is entirely Dharma already taught in the scriptures of past buddhas; this is purification of the buddha mind.

The mind faculty is perfectly clear at one time, perfectly interfunctions at one time, is free from attachment at one time, and is free from error at one time. Its function is mastered and can expand, contract, be equal, and be pure. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

釋常不輕菩薩品The Bodhisattva Never Disparaging

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、為什麼名為常不輕

常不輕菩薩內心懷著不輕視眾生的理解,對外恭敬祂所不輕視的境,身體建立不輕之行,口中宣說不輕之教,這個人也由不輕而得名。

先說不輕之解。《法華論》說,這位菩薩知道眾生有佛性,所以不敢輕視他們。佛性有五種:正因佛性貫通本來與將來;緣因、了因佛性的種子本來已有,不是今天才突然出現;果性與果果性則是眾生將來必定可以得到,決不虛假。這就是不輕之解。

菩薩帶著這種理解去看每一個人,知道對方同樣如此,這便是祂所敬的不輕之境。因為恭敬這個境,所以有不輕之行;因為把這番話宣說出來,所以有不輕之教。從前毀罵祂的人用『不輕』給這個人命名,如今結集經典的人又用這個名字立作品名。

《見實三昧》記載,佛為父王說一切眾生都是佛。父王問:『一切眾生現在就是佛嗎?』佛答:『如果如實看見眾生,對這位如實看見的人來說,眾生就是佛。』智者把這段話類比到此處:若不能如實看見佛,對那個人來說,所見便不是聖者。

譬如初學射箭的人若把小小箭靶當作目標,射失的多,射中的少;若把整片大地當作箭靶,每一箭都不會落在靶外。若在眾人之中分別誰是賢聖、誰不是賢聖,便容易失準;若如實觀察一切眾生,所見即是佛。前一種是從因緣說明,後一種是從圓滿教義說明。〔云云:以下從略〕

本品又引常不輕這個人作證,證明五品功德之深與六根果報之重。釋尊說自己往昔隨喜此經,得到現報、生報、後報,正是用自身本事勸勉後人流通經典。

二、長行怎樣分成三段

本品經文有長行,也有偈頌。長行分成三大段:第一,同時指向前文所說的罪與福;第二,同時展開本品信受與毀謗兩面;第三,再從逆、順兩面勸誡後人。

第一段所謂同時指向罪福,先指毀謗之罪,內容如〈法師品〉所說;再指受持之福,內容如〈功德品〉所說,依經文即可明白。

第二段同時展開信受與毀謗,先說故事的背景,再說故事本身。背景包括時節、佛的名號、劫名、國名、佛所說之法等,都依經文可見。

故事本身又分三段。第一,從最初一尊威音王佛滅度說起,標明時節。第二,到了像法之中,同時標出兩類人的名稱:毀謗的一方因當時的情形名為增上慢,信受的一方因當時的情形名為常不輕。第三,佛告得大勢菩薩以下,同時說明信者所得與毀者所失。

三、信者所得:兩番四一

先從信受的一方說所得。常不輕得到正說的廣大宗旨,也得到流通的微妙利益。

第一番依經文次第說四一。名叫常不輕,是人一;祂凡有所見,是理一;祂見人便全都禮拜,是行一;祂向人說出不敢輕慢、眾人皆當作佛的話,是教一。這四項顯明由權宜而開出真實。

第二番從遠遠看見四眾以後說起。所見之人本有的道理,是本理一;祂特意走近禮拜,是本行一;祂又向對方說出同一番話,是本教一。這裡少列人一,意思可以依前文了解。這四項顯明由近時所見而開出久遠根本。

經文說,常不輕不專門讀誦經典,只行禮拜。智者判定,這是最初隨喜之人的位次。祂隨喜一切法都有安樂之性,都同是一實相;也隨喜一切人都有三種佛性。讀誦經典,對應了因性;眾人皆行菩薩道,對應緣因性;祂不敢輕慢,反而深深恭敬眾人,對應正因性。祂既敬人也敬法,不生爭競,這正是隨喜之意。

常不輕深深恭敬眾人,是如來座;祂忍受杖木、瓦石、毀罵,是穿著如來衣;祂懷著慈悲心,持續行持而不停止,是進入如來室。

又可以從三業說明:深敬是意業,不輕的言說是口業,特意走近禮拜是身業。這三業都與慈悲相伴,便是誓願安樂行。上述三項與四項,難道不是流通所得的微妙利益嗎?

四、毀者所失:逐句不受四一

經文從四眾之中有人瞋恚、心不清淨說起,這是第二面,說明毀謗者所失。他們生起瞋恚而心不清淨,就是不接受四一。

他們罵常不輕沒有智慧;智慧本應知道道理,既說祂無智,便是不接受理一。他們叫祂比丘,是不接受人一;追問祂從什麼地方來,是不接受行一;把祂的授記罵作虛妄,是不接受教一。

經文總結說,常不輕經過許多年,始終遭到毀罵,表示對方一直不接受第一番四一。祂避走到遠處,仍高聲說出那番不輕之語,對方還是不接受,表示他們也不接受第二番本地四一。

因為常不輕總是說這番話,顯出信者深信而不停止;四眾反過來為祂取了常不輕這個名字,則顯出毀者譏毀而不停止。

有人問:釋迦佛出現在世間以後,曾經徘徊斟酌,沒有立即宣說;常不輕卻是一見到人,倉促之間便向他說眾人皆當作佛。兩者為什麼不同?

回答是:眾生本來已有善根,釋迦佛便先用較小的法將護他們;眾生本來尚未有善根,常不輕便用大法強行下毒,使他們終究因此得益。〔云云:以下從略〕

五、信者與毀者各得什麼果報

從常不輕臨欲命終以下,同時說明信受與毀謗的果報。先說信者,又分果報與會合古今人物兩段。

信者有三種果報:現世得到六根清淨,是現報;下一生值遇燈明佛,是生報;後來又值遇二千億尊佛,是後報。經文所說的神通力,表示身業清淨;樂說辯力,表示口業清淨;善寂力,表示意業清淨。〔云云:以下從略〕

會合古今又分兩段。第一,佛指出往昔的常不輕就是今日的自己,依經文可見。第二,佛從假設自己宿世不曾受持、讀誦此經,也不曾為他人宣說講起,舉出信者所得,勸眾人隨順受持;意思也依經文可見。

接著從往昔四眾說起,說明毀謗者的果報,又分為所得果報與會合古今兩段。毀者得到一惡一善兩種果:因為毀謗,先墮惡道;因為聽見佛性之名,又受毒鼓之力,終於得到善果。

毀者的會合古今也分兩段。第一,佛指出當年的四眾就是今日會中的跋陀婆羅等五百菩薩、師子月等五百比丘、尼思佛等五百優婆塞。第二,從佛告得大勢菩薩應當知道以下,舉毀謗這一逆面顯出信受的順面,以勸人受持來遮止毀謗。這部經有大力,終究感得大果,所以務必勤加修習受持、讀、誦、解說、書寫五種行。

六、十九行半偈怎樣收束長行

偈頌共有十九行半。前十五行半只重頌信者、毀者各自的因與果;後四行重頌勸人受持。分段依經文可以看見,智者不再逐句細說。

偈中所說的著法,是把本來不能用定相顯示的法執定為某一種樣子。若決定說它是有,便是著法;一步步推到決定說它非有非無,也仍名為著法。

《佛藏》以極重的譬喻說明:刀輪殺害整個閻浮提的人,過失還算較少;懷著有所得之心宣說大乘的人,罪過反而超過前者。〔云云:以下從略〕

《大論》說,執著有的一方與執著無的一方互相爭論,乃至執著非有非無的一方又與執著有、無的兩方爭論,都像牛皮與龍繩一樣,無論被哪一種繫縛,都不能免除禍患。

《中論》說,諸佛宣說空法,本來是為了教化執著有的人;如果反過來又執著於空,諸佛便不能教化。若決定說一切法只是非有非無,便名為愚癡之論,因為這樣便失去四悉檀的用意。

無論自己修行還是教化他人,只要失去四悉檀的用意,都名為著法;若能得到四悉檀的用意,自己與他人便都不著。

以上是《妙法蓮華經文句》卷第十上的本品釋文。

I. Why He Is Named Never Disparaging

The bodhisattva Never Disparaging inwardly holds an understanding that does not disparage beings, outwardly reveres the object he does not disparage, establishes the practice of non-disparagement with his body, and proclaims the teaching of non-disparagement with his mouth. This person is also named through non-disparagement.

First comes the understanding of non-disparagement. The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra says that this bodhisattva knows beings have buddha-nature and therefore does not dare disparage them. Buddha-nature is fivefold. Direct-cause buddha-nature extends through origin and future. The seeds of conditioning-cause and revealing-cause buddha-nature have existed originally and do not suddenly appear only today. Fruit-nature and fruit-of-fruit nature are what beings will certainly be able to attain in the future and are never false. This is the understanding of non-disparagement.

The bodhisattva looks at each person with this understanding and knows that the other is likewise; this becomes the object of non-disparagement that he reveres. Because he reveres this object, there is a practice of non-disparagement. Because he proclaims these words, there is a teaching of non-disparagement. Those who formerly reviled him used “Never Disparaging” to name the person, and those who later compiled the scripture used this name to establish the chapter title.

The Sutra of the Samādhi of Directly Seeing Reality records that the Buddha told his royal father that all beings are buddhas. The king asked, “Are all beings already buddhas now?” The Buddha replied, “If someone sees beings in accord with reality, for that person who sees in accord with reality, beings are buddhas.” Zhizhe applies this passage here: if someone cannot see the Buddha in accord with reality, what that person sees is not a noble one.

Suppose a beginner in archery takes a small target as the mark: many arrows miss and few hit. If the whole earth is made the target, no arrow falls outside it. If one distinguishes among people who is noble and who is not, one easily misses. If one contemplates all beings in accord with reality, what one sees is buddha. The former explains through causes and conditions; the latter through the Perfect Teaching. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The chapter also adduces the person Never Disparaging as proof of the depth of the qualities of the five grades and the weight of the recompense of the six faculties. Śākyamuni says that in the past he joyfully accepted this scripture and gained present, next-life, and later recompenses, using his own former affairs to encourage later people to circulate it.

II. How the Prose Divides into Three Parts

This chapter’s sutra text has prose and verse. The prose has three main parts: first, indicating at once the wrongdoing and blessing taught above; second, opening at once the two sides of trust and slander in this chapter; third, admonishing later people from the contrary and accordant sides.

The first part’s simultaneous indication of wrongdoing and blessing first points to the wrongdoing of slander as stated in “The Dharma Teacher,” and then to the blessing of receiving and upholding as stated in “The Qualities.” The meaning is clear from the sutra.

The second part simultaneously opens trust and slander, first giving the story’s background and then the story itself. The background includes the time, the buddha’s name, the kalpa name, the land name, and the Dharma taught by the buddha, all visible in the sutra.

The story itself has three parts. First, beginning from the extinction of the earliest Buddha King of Majestic Voice, it marks the time. Second, within the semblance Dharma, it simultaneously gives the names of two kinds of people: because of their conduct at that time, the slandering side is named overweeningly proud and the trusting side Never Disparaging. Third, beginning where the Buddha addresses the bodhisattva Great Strength, it simultaneously explains what believers gain and revilers lose.

III. What Believers Gain: Two Rounds of the Four Unities

First comes what is gained on the side of trust. Never Disparaging gains the vast purport of the direct teaching and the subtle benefit of circulation.

The first round explains the four unities in scriptural sequence. Being named Never Disparaging is unity of person; everyone he sees, unity of principle; bowing to everyone he sees, unity of practice; and telling them that he does not dare disparage them and that all will become buddhas, unity of teaching. These four disclose opening the real from the provisional.

The second round begins after he sees members of the fourfold assembly at a distance. The principle originally possessed by the people seen is fundamental unity of principle; his intentionally approaching to bow, fundamental unity of practice; and his speaking the same words to them, fundamental unity of teaching. Unity of person is listed only in abbreviated form and can be understood from the preceding text. These four disclose opening the distant Origin from what is seen in recent times.

The sutra says that Never Disparaging does not devote himself to reading and reciting scriptures, but only practices bowing. Zhizhe determines that this is the stage of the person of initial joyful acceptance. He joyfully accepts that all dharmas have a nature of peace and ease and are the same one true mark; he also joyfully accepts that all people possess the three kinds of buddha-nature. Reading and reciting scripture corresponds to revealing-cause nature; everyone practicing the bodhisattva path to conditioning-cause nature; and his not daring to disparage but instead deeply revering everyone to direct-cause nature. He reveres both people and Dharma and produces no contention; this is precisely the meaning of joyful acceptance.

Never Disparaging’s deep reverence for everyone is the Tathāgata’s seat. His enduring staves, sticks, tiles, stones, and abuse is putting on the Tathāgata’s robe. His continuing the practice without stopping, while holding a compassionate mind, is entering the Tathāgata’s room.

It can also be explained through the three karmas. Deep reverence is mental karma, speech that does not disparage is verbal karma, and intentionally approaching to bow is bodily karma. When all three accompany compassion, they are the peaceful practice of vows. Are not the three items and four items above the subtle benefit gained through circulation?

IV. What the Revilers Lose: Sentence-by-Sentence Rejection of the Four Unities

Beginning where someone within the fourfold assembly grows angry and the mind is impure, the sutra presents its second side and explains what slanderers lose. Giving rise to anger with impure minds means that they reject the four unities.

They revile Never Disparaging as without wisdom. Wisdom should know principle; by calling him ignorant, they reject unity of principle. Calling him a bhikṣu rejects unity of person. Demanding where he came from rejects unity of practice. Reviling his prediction as false rejects unity of teaching.

The sutra concludes that over many years Never Disparaging is continually reviled, showing that the others never accept the first round of four unities. He retreats to a distance yet still calls out those words of non-disparagement, and they still do not accept; this shows that they also reject the second round of four fundamental unities.

Never Disparaging’s always speaking these words discloses believers’ deep and unceasing trust. The fourfold assembly instead gives him the name Never Disparaging, disclosing the revilers’ unceasing mockery and abuse.

Someone asks: after appearing in the world, Śākyamuni Buddha circled and deliberated without immediately teaching. Never Disparaging, however, hurriedly told people that they would all become buddhas as soon as he saw them. Why do the two differ?

The answer is that when beings already possessed wholesome roots, Śākyamuni Buddha first protected them with a lesser Dharma; when beings did not yet possess wholesome roots, Never Disparaging forcefully administered the great Dharma like poison so that they would ultimately benefit. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

V. What Recompenses Believers and Revilers Each Receive

Beginning when Never Disparaging is near death, the sutra simultaneously explains the recompenses of trust and slander. It first treats the believer in two parts: recompense and joining the people of past and present.

The believer has three recompenses. Purification of the six faculties in the present life is present recompense; encountering Lamp Radiance Buddha in the next life is next-life recompense; later encountering two thousand koṭis of buddhas is later recompense. The sutra’s strength of supernormal powers signifies purification of bodily karma; strength of delight in teaching and eloquence, purification of verbal karma; strength of excellent quiescence, purification of mental karma. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Joining past and present also has two parts. First, the Buddha identifies the Never Disparaging of the past as himself today, as seen in the sutra. Second, beginning with the hypothetical statement that in former lives he had not received, upheld, read, or recited this scripture or explained it to others, the Buddha adduces what the believer gains and exhorts the assembly to receive and uphold in accord; the meaning is likewise visible in the sutra.

Next, beginning with the fourfold assembly of the past, it explains the slanderers’ recompense, also in two parts: the recompense gained and the joining of past and present. The revilers receive two fruits, one unwholesome and one wholesome. Because they slander, they first fall into evil destinies; because they hear the name of buddha-nature and experience the force of the poisoned drum, they ultimately gain a wholesome fruit.

Joining the slanderers of past and present also has two parts. First, the Buddha identifies the fourfold assembly of that time as the five hundred bodhisattvas beginning with Bhadrapāla, the five hundred bhikṣus beginning with Lion Moon, and the five hundred upāsakas beginning with Mindful of the Buddha in the present assembly. Second, beginning where the Buddha tells the bodhisattva Great Strength that he should know, the Buddha adduces the contrary side of slander to reveal the accordant side of trust, and uses the exhortation to receive and uphold to block slander. This sutra has great power and ultimately evokes a great fruit; one must therefore diligently cultivate the five practices of receiving and upholding, reading, reciting, explaining, and copying.

VI. How Nineteen and a Half Lines of Verse Conclude the Prose

The verse has nineteen and a half lines. The first fifteen and a half only recapitulate the respective causes and fruits of believers and revilers; the last four recapitulate the exhortation to receive and uphold. The divisions are visible from the sutra, and Zhizhe does not explain them again sentence by sentence.

Attachment to dharmas in the verse means fixing dharmas, which originally cannot be disclosed through determinate characteristics, as having one particular form. Definitively saying they exist is attachment to dharmas; proceeding all the way to definitively saying they are neither existent nor nonexistent is still called attachment to dharmas.

The Buddha Treasury Sutra uses an extremely grave simile: the fault of killing all the people of Jambudvīpa with a wheel of blades is still comparatively slight; the wrongdoing of teaching the Great Vehicle with a mind that apprehends something instead exceeds it. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The Great Treatise says that the side attached to existence and the side attached to nonexistence dispute one another, and that the side attached to neither existence nor nonexistence then disputes both. All are like cowhide and dragon-cords: whichever binds them, they cannot escape harm.

The Middle Treatise says that buddhas teach emptiness originally to transform those attached to existence; if one instead becomes attached to emptiness, the buddhas cannot transform such a person. Definitively saying that all dharmas are only neither existent nor nonexistent is called the discourse of fools, because this loses the purport of the four siddhāntas.

Whether practicing oneself or transforming others, losing the purport of the four siddhāntas is called attachment to dharmas. If their purport is attained, neither oneself nor others are attached.

The above is the explanation of this chapter in the first half of fascicle ten of the Fahua Wenju.

釋如來神力品The Supernormal Powers of the Tathāgata

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

〔妙法蓮華經文句卷第十下。天台智者大師說。〕

一、釋品名與本品之位

『如來』一詞,前面已經解釋過了。『神』的意思是不可測度,『力』的意思是能幹能用。不可測度,表示天然的體性深邃;能幹能用,表示轉變的力量廣大。此處為了付囑深法而示現十種大力,所以名為〈神力品〉。

從本品以下共有八品,是付囑與流通。本品說明菩薩受命弘經,下一品說明如來摩頂付累。

二、長行三分與所對之眾

經文有長行與偈頌。長行分三部分:一是菩薩受命,二是佛現神力,三是結要勸持。

最初,經家敘述恭敬的儀節;其次,菩薩發誓弘經。弘經分三事:一是時節,指佛滅度以後;二是處所,指分身佛的諸國;三是誓願——不只是奉命利益他人,也自己發願要弘此真淨大法,兼濟與自美兩全。

從『那時』以下是第二部分,示現十種神力,分兩層:先是所面對的大眾,其次是正式示現神力。『對文殊等人』是迹化之眾,『久住此處的』是下方本化之眾,『一切』是指他方前來的以及隨分身佛而來的。

問:只見下方菩薩發誓,不見文殊等人發誓,這是為什麼?

答:前面經文說『我的國土自有菩薩能持此經』,也就一併包含了。

三、十種神力

第一,吐出舌相。此經所演說的開三顯一、內祕外現、廢近顯遠,說明三世利益眾生都真誠不虛。福德之人舌能到鼻,三藏教的佛舌能到髮際,如今舌至梵天,超出凡聖之外,極於清淨天的頂端。相既然異於尋常,所說的話就更加可信。

第二,全身毛孔遍體放光,周遍照耀十方沒有一處不明朗,表示智慧與境界都窮盡無餘。前面白毫放光最初只在東方,表示七種方便之人初見一理;如今本門既已說完,放一切光照一切土,能使最初的因位直到等覺都究竟佛慧。分身諸佛也是如此。

第三,謦咳。這是將要說話的樣子,也是通暢的表徵。四十多年隱祕真實之義,如今得以伸展舒暢,沒有任何遺留滯礙——這是我出世的大事得以通暢,所以謦咳。又想要把此法付囑諸菩薩,使他們在後世導引利益眾生;將要說這件事,所以謦咳。謦咳具足兩重意義:一咳是咳出事情已了,一咳是咳出付囑他人。

第四,彈指。這是隨喜。隨喜七種方便之人同入圓道,隨喜圓道增益智慧、減損受生,隨喜諸菩薩持守真淨大法,隨喜後世眾生獲得無上之寶。這一彈指豎徹三世、橫亘十方。

第五,大地六種震動。這表示從初心到後心,六番震動無明;如今又表示震動一切人的六根,使其得到清淨。

第六,普遍得見大會。這表示諸佛之道相同,從今以後也是如此。前面五千人起座離去、三度變化土田時被移置他方,他們既已失去本心,不能得到現前的利益,就應當以本非滅度而示現滅度的方式,讓他們從諸菩薩弘經而得道,契入佛慧,與今日這場法會沒有差別。這也表示未來有機一。

第七,虛空之中唱聲。這表示未來有教一。

第八,稱南無而歸命、成為佛弟子。這表示未來有人一。

第九,遙遙散下諸物,如雲聚集而來。這表示未來有行一。

第十,十方通同如同一佛土。這表示理一。

問:怎麼知道十相既表示現在之意,又表示未來之意?

答:經文說『我以如來的神力,為了囑累此經的緣故,還是說不能盡』——既表現在、又表未來,其義已經明白。

四、結要付囑

從『那時佛告訴上行』以下是第三部分,結要付囑。文字分四層:一是稱歎付囑,二是結要付囑,三是勸獎付囑,四是解釋付囑。最初稱歎如經文所示。

結要有四句。『一切法』是說一切都是佛法,這總結了『一切皆妙』之名。『一切力』是說通達無礙、具足八種自在,這總結了妙用。『一切祕藏』是說遍一切處都是實相,這總結了妙體。『一切深事』是說因與果都是深事,這總結了妙宗。『都在此經中宣示顯說』一句,總結全經只有這四項而已——撮取它的樞紐把柄而交付出去。

從『所以你們』以下是第三層,勸獎付囑,如經文所示。

從『所以者何』以下是第四層,解釋付囑。上面說『經卷所在的地方都應當起塔』。經中的要義,要在四件事:『道場』解釋上面所說的甚深之事,『得菩提』解釋上面所說的祕藏,『轉法輪』解釋上面所說的一切法,『入涅槃』解釋上面所說的神力。這四要把經文都收攝盡了,所以都應當起塔。

所謂要,是說得菩提就是法身,轉法輪就是般若,入涅槃就是解脫。三法成就祕密之藏,佛住在其中,這就是塔的意義。《阿含經》說『佛出世只有四處起塔:出生之處、得道之處、轉法輪、入涅槃』。坐道場就是法身出生之處,其餘都如經文所示。

五、偈十六行

偈頌有十六行。最初四行重頌十種神力,其次十二行重頌結要。『囑累』以下二行,以及『這人的功德』一句,是總頌四法。

『能持則是已見我』以下是第二部分,共八行半,分別重頌四法。最初一偈半重頌一切法——持法就是持佛身。『使我以及分身』兩偈重頌神力:神力勸請諸佛使其歡喜。『諸佛坐道場』一偈重頌祕要,可以理解。『對於諸法之義』四偈重頌甚深之事——說法破除黑闇而入一乘,正是佛的甚深之事。最後一偈半是總結。

[Fahua Wenju, latter half of fascicle ten. Taught by Tiantai Master Zhizhe.]

I. Explaining the Chapter Title and Its Place

The term “Tathāgata” has been explained above. “Supernormal” means beyond measurement, and “power” means capacity and use. Beyond measurement indicates the profundity of the innate essence; capacity and use indicate the vastness of transformative power. Ten great powers are manifested here in order to entrust the profound Dharma, so the chapter is called “The Supernormal Powers.”

The eight chapters from this one onward concern entrustment and circulation. The present chapter explains how the bodhisattvas accept the command to propagate the sutra; the next explains how the Tathāgata strokes their crowns and entrusts it to them.

II. The Three Divisions of the Prose and the Assemblies Addressed

The sutra has prose and verse. The prose is divided into three parts: first, the bodhisattvas accept the command; second, the Buddha manifests his supernormal powers; third, he gathers the essentials and exhorts them to uphold.

At the beginning, the compiler of the sutra narrates the ceremony of reverence; next, the bodhisattvas vow to propagate the sutra. Propagation has three matters: first, the time—after the Buddha’s extinction; second, the place—the lands of the emanation-buddhas; third, the vow—not merely to benefit others under command, but also personally to vow to propagate this true and pure Great Dharma, combining aid to others with the beauty of one’s own aspiration.

The passage beginning “At that time” is the second part, manifesting ten supernormal powers, and has two levels: first the assemblies addressed, then the formal manifestation of those powers. “Mañjuśrī and the others” are the assembly transformed through the Trace; “those long dwelling here” are the assembly from below transformed through the Origin; and “all” refers to those who came from other directions and those who accompanied the emanation-buddhas.

Question: Only the bodhisattvas from below are seen vowing; Mañjuśrī and the others are not. Why?

Answer: The preceding text says, “My land itself has bodhisattvas able to uphold this sutra,” which includes them as well.

III. The Ten Supernormal Powers

First, the sign of extending the tongue. This sutra teaches opening the three to reveal the One, keeping the inner secret while appearing outwardly, and discarding the near to reveal the distant, disclosing that the benefit given to beings throughout the three times is sincere and never false. A person of merit can reach the nose with the tongue; the Buddha of the Tripiṭaka Teaching can reach the hairline; here the tongue reaches the Brahmā heaven, beyond ordinary beings and sages, to the summit of the Pure Heaven. Since the sign differs from the ordinary, the words spoken are all the more credible.

Second, every pore throughout the body emits light that shines throughout the ten directions, leaving no place unilluminated. This indicates the complete exhaustion of wisdom and its objects. Earlier, light from the white curl first shone only eastward, indicating that people of the seven expedient means first saw the one principle. Now that the Origin Gate has been fully taught, all kinds of light illuminate all lands, enabling those at the initial causal stage through equal awakening to perfect buddha-wisdom. The emanation-buddhas do likewise.

Third, clearing the throat. This is the sign of being about to speak and also a sign of free flow. The true meaning hidden for more than forty years can now extend and unfold without residue or obstruction. The great affair for which I appeared in the world has flowed freely, so I clear my throat. Again, I wish to entrust this Dharma to the bodhisattvas so they may guide and benefit beings in later ages; because I am about to speak of this, I clear my throat. It has two meanings: one clearing says that the affair is complete; the other says that it is entrusted to others.

Fourth, snapping the fingers. This is joyful acceptance: rejoicing that those of the seven expedient means enter the perfect path together; rejoicing that the perfect path increases wisdom and reduces birth; rejoicing that the bodhisattvas preserve the true and pure Great Dharma; and rejoicing that later beings attain the unsurpassed treasure. This one snap penetrates the three times vertically and spans the ten directions horizontally.

Fifth, the earth quakes in six ways. This indicates six movements of ignorance from the initial mind to the later mind; it now further indicates moving every person’s six faculties so that they attain purity.

Sixth, the entire assembly is universally seen. This indicates that the way of all buddhas is the same and will remain so from now onward. Earlier the five thousand rose and departed, and during the three transformations of the lands they were moved elsewhere. Having lost their original minds, they could not gain present benefit. It is fitting to manifest extinction though extinction is not the origin, so that through the bodhisattvas’ propagation of the sutra they attain the way, enter buddha-wisdom, and become no different from today’s assembly. This also indicates future unity of capacity.

Seventh, a voice calls out from empty space. This indicates that in the future there will be unity of teaching.

Eighth, beings utter “homage,” take refuge, and become the Buddha’s disciples. This indicates that in the future there will be unity of person.

Ninth, various objects scattered from afar gather like clouds. This indicates that in the future there will be unity of practice.

Tenth, the ten directions communicate as one buddha-land. This indicates unity of principle.

Question: How do we know the ten signs indicate both the present and the future?

Answer: The sutra says, “Even were I to use the Tathāgata’s supernormal powers for the sake of entrusting this sutra, I could not finish speaking.” Its indication of present and future is therefore clear.

IV. Gathering the Essentials and Entrusting Them

The passage beginning “At that time the Buddha addressed Superior Practice” is the third part, gathering the essentials and entrusting them. Its wording has four levels: first, praise and entrustment; second, gathering the essentials and entrustment; third, encouragement and entrustment; fourth, explanation and entrustment. The initial praise is as the sutra states.

The gathering of essentials has four phrases. “All dharmas” means that all are Buddha-Dharma and gathers the name “all is wondrous.” “All powers” means unobstructed penetration and possession of the eight forms of sovereignty and gathers wondrous function. “The entire treasury of secrets” means that the true mark pervades every place and gathers wondrous essence. “All profound matters” means that causes and fruits are profound matters and gathers wondrous principle. The phrase “all are proclaimed, revealed, and clearly taught in this sutra” concludes that the whole sutra contains only these four—taking up its pivotal handle and entrusting it.

The passage beginning “Therefore, you” is the third level, encouragement and entrustment, as the sutra states.

The passage beginning “Why is this?” is the fourth level, explanation and entrustment. Above it says, “Wherever a scroll of the sutra is found, a stūpa should be erected.” The sutra’s essentials lie in four matters: “the site of awakening” explains the profound matters stated above; “attaining awakening” explains the treasury of secrets; “turning the Dharma-wheel” explains all dharmas; and “entering nirvāṇa” explains the supernormal powers. These four essentials encompass the sutra’s wording completely, so stūpas should be erected at them all.

What “essential” means is this: attaining awakening is the Dharma-body, turning the Dharma-wheel is prajñā, and entering nirvāṇa is liberation. These three dharmas accomplish the treasury of secrets, and the Buddha abides within it. This is the meaning of the stūpa. The Āgama Sutra says, “When a buddha appears in the world, stūpas are erected at only four places: the place of birth, the place of attaining the way, the turning of the Dharma-wheel, and entry into nirvāṇa.” Sitting at the site of awakening is the birthplace of the Dharma-body; the remainder is as the sutra states.

V. Sixteen Lines of Verse

The verse has sixteen lines. The first four recapitulate the ten supernormal powers; the next twelve recapitulate the gathering of essentials. The two lines beginning with “entrustment,” together with the phrase “this person’s qualities,” generally recapitulate the four dharmas.

The passage beginning “one who can uphold it has already seen me” is the second part, eight and a half lines that separately recapitulate the four dharmas. The first one and a half lines recapitulate all dharmas: upholding the Dharma is precisely upholding the Buddha’s body. The two verses beginning “cause me and my emanations” recapitulate the supernormal powers: those powers exhort the buddhas and cause them to rejoice. The one verse beginning “the buddhas sit at the site of awakening” recapitulates the secret and essential meaning, which can be understood. The four verses beginning “concerning the meaning of all dharmas” recapitulate the profound matters: teaching the Dharma, dispelling darkness, and entering the One Vehicle are precisely the Buddha’s profound matters. The final one and a half verses conclude the recapitulation.

釋囑累品Entrustment

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、三重解釋品名

『囑』是佛所付囑,『累』是煩勞你們宣揚傳布——這是從佛的旨意得名,所以稱為〈囑累〉。

『囑』是頂受所囑之法,『累』是甘心承擔而不以為勞——這是從菩薩的敬順得名,所以稱為〈囑累〉。

『囑』是如來金口所囑,『累』是菩薩以赤誠之心頂戴荷擔——這是把授與受合起來說,所以稱為〈囑累品〉。

因此,如來親自從座位起身,伸手摩頂,把難得之法交付出去;大眾曲身合掌,說『照世尊的教勅,我們必定完全奉行』——授與受都極其殷勤,所以名為〈囑累品〉。

二、正付:權智之手摩實智之頂

經文分兩部分:先是付囑,其次是時眾歡喜。

付囑又分三層:一是如來付囑,二是菩薩領受,三是事畢唱散。

如來付囑又分三層:一是正式付囑,二是解釋付囑,三是誡勅付囑。

正式付囑:佛以一隻權智善巧之手,摩三千三百那由他國土之中、側身充塞虛空的諸菩薩實智之頂。如來授與道法而化度他人,所以名為權智之手;菩薩自行修道而承受道法,所以名為實智之頂。

伸手摩頂,就是身付囑。權智臨於實智,就是意付囑。『而作是言』,就是口付囑。

三、四悉檀之意

這段文字含有四悉檀之意。

『我在無量劫中修習這難得之法』——這是從先前的佛承受學來,如今交付給你們,你們應當再交付他人,三世相繼承嗣,這就是世界悉檀。

『一心流布』,就是為人悉檀。『廣令增』,就是對治悉檀。『益』,就是第一義悉檀。

四、釋付:室、衣、座與三智

『所以者何』以下是解釋付囑。

『有大慈悲』,就是如來之室;『沒有各種慳吝』,就是如來之衣;『也沒有畏懼』,就是如來之座。

『佛的智慧』,就是一切智;『如來的智慧』,就是道種智;『自然的智慧』,就是一切種智。

在如來室中,能布施給眾生這三種智慧,乃至在座中也是如此。這樣的施主所以沒有慳吝、所以沒有畏懼。你們應當學習如來的這種作法——這叫作解釋出佛的用意而付囑他們。

五、誡付

從『在未來世』以下是誡勅付囑。

若是根性深、智慧利的人,就直接為他宣說佛慧;若是不堪承受的人,就在其餘的深法之中示教利喜。

佛慧是深而不是餘,六種方便是餘而不是深,別教的次第則既是餘也是深。你們若能用「餘」中之「深」來助成申明佛慧,就是善巧地報答佛恩——這叫作誡勅付囑。

六、菩薩三領受

從『那時諸菩薩』以下,是第二層領受。

歡喜是意領受,『曲身低頭』是身領受,『一齊發聲說』是口領受,同時也兼含意領受。

『照世尊的教勅』一句,是領受大施主如來室之意;『必定完全奉行』一句,是領受無慳吝如來衣之意;『願世尊不必掛慮』一句,是領受無畏懼如來座之意。

佛既然三度付囑,菩薩也就三度領受,都如經文所示。

七、事畢唱散

『那時釋迦』以下,是第三層唱散。

多寶佛為了作證此經而來,如今迹門與本門二門都已說完,所以須要恭敬地遣送他如故。分身諸佛為了開塔而聚集,開塔之事既已了結,所以令分身各還本土。塔不可以重新開啟,所以分身離去而不再示現;塔還要繼續聽法,所以雖然關閉而仍然留在那裡。

問:塔既然還要聽法,也應當不關閉才對。

答:作證之事已經完成,所以關閉;聽流通之法,所以留存。

八、大眾歡喜

從『說這番話時』以下,是大眾歡喜。

諸佛因為化度他人之事已經成就而歡喜,菩薩因為自行修道而得法所以歡喜。

又:因為說法之人清淨而歡喜——說法的是佛;因為所聽之法清淨而歡喜——所聽的是此妙經;因為聞法而獲得證悟所以歡喜——現在與未來得益的人就是。三件事都具足,所以大為歡喜。

I. Three Explanations of the Chapter Title

“Entrust” is what the Buddha hands over, while “burden” means troubling you to proclaim and circulate it. The title “Entrustment” is therefore named from the Buddha’s intent.

“Entrust” is receiving the entrusted Dharma upon the crown, while “burden” means gladly undertaking it without finding it wearying. The title is therefore named from the bodhisattvas’ reverent accord.

“Entrust” is what the Tathāgata charges them with through his golden mouth, while “burden” is the bodhisattvas’ receiving it on their crowns and carrying it with sincere hearts. The title “Entrustment” therefore joins giving and receiving.

The Tathāgata accordingly rises from his seat in person, reaches out to stroke their crowns, and hands over the difficult-to-attain Dharma. The assembly bends forward, joins their palms, and says, “In accordance with the World-Honored One’s command, we will surely carry it out in full.” Giving and receiving are both deeply earnest, so the chapter is called “Entrustment.”

II. The Formal Entrustment: The Hand of Provisional Wisdom Strokes the Crown of Real Wisdom

The sutra text has two parts: first entrustment, then the assembly’s rejoicing.

Entrustment has three levels: first the Tathāgata entrusts; second the bodhisattvas receive; third, when the affair is complete, the assembly is dismissed.

The Tathāgata’s entrustment also has three levels: the formal entrustment, its explanation, and its admonitory charge.

Formal entrustment: with one skillful hand of provisional wisdom, the Buddha strokes the crowns of real wisdom of the bodhisattvas who fill empty space, standing sideways, throughout three thousand three hundred nayutas of lands. The Tathāgata bestows the Dharma of the way and transforms others, so it is called the hand of provisional wisdom; the bodhisattvas cultivate the way themselves and receive that Dharma, so it is called the crown of real wisdom.

Reaching out to stroke their crowns is bodily entrustment. Provisional wisdom descending upon real wisdom is mental entrustment. The phrase “and spoke these words” is verbal entrustment.

III. The Intent of the Four Siddhāntas

This passage contains the intent of the four siddhāntas.

“Throughout immeasurable aeons I cultivated this difficult-to-attain Dharma”: it was received and learned from former buddhas, is now handed to you, and should in turn be handed by you to others, a succession of inheritance through the three times. This is the worldly siddhānta.

“Single-mindedly circulate it” is the for-person siddhānta. “Widely cause increase” is the counteractive siddhānta. “Benefit” is the ultimate-truth siddhānta.

IV. Explaining the Entrustment: Room, Robe, Seat, and the Three Wisdoms

The passage beginning “Why is this?” explains the entrustment.

“Possessing great kindness and compassion” is the Tathāgata’s room; “without any stinginess” is the Tathāgata’s robe; “without fear” is the Tathāgata’s seat.

“The Buddha’s wisdom” is all-wisdom; “the Tathāgata’s wisdom” is wisdom of the varieties of the path; “natural wisdom” is wisdom of all modes.

Within the Tathāgata’s room, these three wisdoms can be given to sentient beings; the same holds through the seat. Such a donor is without stinginess and without fear. You should learn this way of the Tathāgata. This is called explaining the Buddha’s intent and entrusting it to them.

V. The Admonitory Charge

The passage beginning “In future ages” is the admonitory charge.

For those whose capacities are deep and whose wisdom is sharp, directly teach buddha-wisdom; for those unable to bear it, demonstrate, teach, benefit, and delight them through the remaining profound dharmas.

Buddha-wisdom is profound but not remaining; the six expedient means are remaining but not profound; the sequential teaching of the Separate Teaching is both remaining and profound. If, through what is “remaining” and “profound,” you can aid and clarify buddha-wisdom, you skillfully repay the Buddha’s kindness. This is called the admonitory charge.

VI. The Bodhisattvas’ Threefold Reception

The passage beginning “At that time the bodhisattvas” is the second level, reception.

Joy is mental reception, “bending their bodies and lowering their heads” is bodily reception, and “speaking together with one voice” is verbal reception, while also including mental reception.

The phrase “in accordance with the World-Honored One’s command” receives the intent of the Tathāgata’s room as the great donor; “we will surely carry it out in full” receives the intent of the Tathāgata’s robe without stinginess; and “may the World-Honored One have no concern” receives the intent of the Tathāgata’s seat without fear.

Since the Buddha entrusts three times, the bodhisattvas likewise receive three times, just as the sutra states.

VII. Dismissal When the Affair Is Complete

The passage beginning “At that time Śākyamuni” is the third level, dismissal.

The Buddha Many Jewels came to bear witness to this sutra. Now that the Trace Gate and Origin Gate have both been taught, he should be reverently sent back as before. The emanation-buddhas gathered to open the stūpa; since that work is complete, each is told to return to his own land. The stūpa cannot be opened again, so the emanations depart and do not appear again; the stūpa must still hear the Dharma, so although closed it remains in place.

Question: If the stūpa must still hear the Dharma, should it not also remain open?

Answer: The work of bearing witness is complete, so it closes; it remains in order to hear the Dharma of circulation.

VIII. The Assembly Rejoices

The passage beginning “When these words were spoken” is the assembly’s rejoicing.

The buddhas rejoice because the work of transforming others has been accomplished; the bodhisattvas rejoice because, through cultivating the way themselves, they have attained the Dharma.

Further, they rejoice because the person teaching the Dharma is pure—the teacher is the Buddha; because the Dharma heard is pure—the Dharma heard is this wondrous sutra; and because hearing the Dharma brings realization—the beneficiaries in the present and future are the persons meant. Since all three matters are complete, they rejoice greatly.

釋藥王菩薩本事品The Former Affairs of the Bodhisattva Medicine King

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、釋品名

《觀經》說:『從前名叫星光,從尊者日藏聽聞解說佛的智慧,把雪山上的藥供養眾僧,發願說:願我未來能治眾生身心兩種病,舉世歡喜,號為藥王。』

這段文說明一切眾生喜見菩薩頓然捨去一身,又燒兩臂——輕生命而重佛法,性命殞落而道業長存。舉往昔以顯今日,所以說〈本事品〉。

若推究這個義理,星光應當在喜見之後——從捨藥發誓以來才名叫藥王的緣故〔云云〕。

二、五品之判:師與弟子

以下五品都是化他的流通。今品說明化他之師:唯願大法得以廣大弘揚宣說,大願眾生獲得大饒益,所以竭盡他的神通力、盡捨他的形壽性命,殷殷懇懇而志向猶未止息。庶幾使弟子尊崇法如同尊崇師——我把明傳給你,你又把明傳下去,明明無盡,這就是師的志向。所以知道這一品是勉勵弘法之師。

以下如〈妙音〉〈觀音〉兩品,說明他方大士奉命弘經,普現色身而形貌沒有定準——不可以用牛羊的眼睛去看,不可以用凡庸的識見去衡量,在所聽聞之處不要生輕視之想;輕視之想一生,法就不染入心。所以知道下面的品是勉勵受法的弟子。

有人說:上面諸品是諸佛作佛事,這一品以下是菩薩作佛事。這只是一往之說罷了——上面的品也有菩薩,這以下的品也有諸佛〔云云〕。

三、乘乘之判

如今〈方便品〉開三顯一,圓因已經說完;〈安樂行品〉說明所乘之法;〈壽量品〉說明所乘之果已經說完;這一品以下說明乘於所乘的人。

所以《十二門論》說:『大乘,是普賢、文殊這樣的大人所乘的。』

〈藥王〉是以苦行乘於所乘,〈妙音〉〈觀音〉是以三昧乘於所乘,〈陀羅尼〉是以總持乘於所乘,〈妙莊嚴〉是以誓願乘於所乘,〈普賢〉是以神通乘於所乘。作這樣的解釋,對於化他流通的義理就便當了。

四、分文為四

文分為四:一是問,二是答,三是利益,四是多寶稱善。

問分為三:一是通問遊化,二是別問苦行,三是請答,如經文所說。

二、答,分為二:一是只答苦行——遊化則指色身三昧,或者指下面兩品;二是歎經。

答苦行之中,先說明事之本,其次說明本事。事本分為三,就是時節、有佛、聲聞、國土等等,都如經文所說。本事分為三:一是佛說法,二是修供養,三是結會。

然而佛普遍為一切眾生,為什麼獨獨為喜見?因為他是對揚之人,必須付與流通——如同今日的舍利弗,寄託一人而說諸人。

五、苦行:現在

苦行又分二:一是現在,二是未來。

現在又分二:一是修行得法,二是作念報恩。

報恩又分二:一是三昧力,二是正報身力。身力分為三:一是燒身,二是佛稱歎,三是時節。

「真法供養」——應當是內在運起智觀,觀照煩惱的因與果,都用空慧蕩除它,所以說真法。又觀照:若身、若火,能供養的、所供養的都是實相——誰在燒?誰被燒?能供所供都不可得,所以名為真法。

六、苦行:未來

「一切眾生」以下是未來的苦行,又分為五:一是生在王家,二是說本事,三是前往佛所,四是如來付囑,五是奉命任持。都如經文所說。

任持又分四:一是起塔,二是燒臂,三是利益,四是現報。都如經文所說。

七、結會古今與勸修

「佛告」以下是第三,結會古今。又分為二:一是結會,二是勸修。

勸修——能燃一指勝過捨棄外身:外者輕、內者重,所以功德福報有差異。經文說「妻子」是外身,「國城」等等是外財。

八、歎經:先歎能持者

從「若復有人以七寶」以下是歎經:先歎能持的人,其次歎所持的法,後說明持經之福深厚。

以七寶奉獻四種聖人,不如受持一偈——法是聖者之師;能生、能養、能成、能榮,沒有超過法的,所以人輕而法重。

九、歎所持法:法體·海喻

「宿王」以下是第二,歎所持的法,又分二:先歎法的體,其次歎法的用。

「川流江河諸水之中海為第一」——《無量義》說『四水譬喻教法,藥草喻中一雲能雨譬喻說法』。如今又以諸水總括一切教法,別舉四者,是譬喻乳、酪、生蘇、熟蘇四味之教。

這《法華》之教譬如醍醐之海:說到窮盡本地叫作「深」,遍於一切處叫作「大」,純粹說明佛法而不說其餘的法叫作「鹹」——「最為深大」,它的義理就是這樣。

十、山喻

十座寶山的名字,出自《華嚴》及眾經〔云云〕。土山、黑山、鐵圍山所以不是寶;十山雖然是寶,或者一寶或者二寶所成,又有神龍雜居;須彌山則是四寶所成,純粹是天人所住。

這譬喻其餘的教法所說,能依的是十地、四十心,或凡或賢或聖;所依的或是俗諦、或是真諦、或是中道——這是卑下的。這《法華經》所說的諦理是常樂我淨,如同四寶所成,是開示悟入之人所依,所以這個義理最為高上。

十一、月喻與日喻

星與月同樣是陰精,都在夜間出現;星沒有虧盈,比不上月。諸經解說權智不得自在;此經說明權就是實、實就是權,盈與虧互相指涉,不二而二——像這樣說權智,勝過其餘的教。

日是陽精,獨能破除黑暗。諸經說明實智破除惑,尚且比不上「即實而權」,哪裡談得上「即權而實」?所以知道此經說明實智最為第一。

十二、輪王梵釋喻

轉輪王的號令只及於四域,帝釋齊於三十三天,梵王的號令總攝上界而冠於下界。這譬喻其餘的經所說三諦三昧各不相收、不得自在。

此經所說:以實相入真諦,「決了聲聞法」,「是諸經之王」;實相入俗諦,一切治生產業不相違背;實相入中道,諸法無非佛法。經文說「一切學無學及發菩薩心者之父」,它的義理就是這樣。

十三、四種第一

「一切凡夫四果支佛第一」——這是說明任運而無功用。其餘的經需要藉著功用才得以入流,如同四果之人因為聞、思、修才得以開悟;此經說明無作四諦不夾雜方便,自然流入薩婆若海,如同大白牛肥壯多力、其疾如風〔云云〕。

聲聞、支佛、菩薩為第一——這是說明因第一。其餘的經說明因是七方便;今經說明因超出方便之外,所以因第一。

如來第一——這是說明果。其餘的經說明果近在寂滅道場;此經說明果遠指本地,所以最為第一。

十四、歎法用

「此經能救」以下是歎法的用:先歎拔苦之用,其次以十二事歎與樂之用,後作結。都如經文所說。

十五、持經福深

從「若人得聞」以下,說明持經之福深厚。先舉全部聽聞此經之福,其次舉聽聞此品之福。有格量、有囑累,如經文所說。

口中出香是現世之報,其餘的是後世之報。

「得聞是經不老不死」——這須要作觀行的理解:不老是樂、不死是常。聽聞此經而得到常與樂的理解,坦然存於胸懷而無所畏忌。

十六、聞品得益與多寶稱善

「說是」以下是第三,聞品得益,如經文所說。

第四,多寶稱善,如經文所說。

I. Explanation of the Chapter Title

The Contemplation Sūtra says: “Formerly he was named Starlight. He heard the Buddha’s wisdom explained by the Venerable Sun Treasury, offered medicinal herbs from Snow Mountain to the community of monks, and vowed: May I in the future cure the two illnesses of body and mind in living beings, so that the whole world rejoices and I am called Medicine King.”

This passage explains how the Bodhisattva Gladly Seen by All Beings suddenly relinquished one body and then burned his two arms—holding life lightly and the Buddha-Dharma in esteem, losing life while preserving the work of the path. The past is raised to disclose the present, and therefore the chapter is called Former Affairs.

If the meaning is pursued, Starlight should come after Gladly Seen: only after relinquishing medicine and making his vow was he named Medicine King [and so forth].

II. Classification of the Five Chapters: Teacher and Disciples

The following five chapters all concern circulation through transforming others. The present chapter explains the teacher who transforms others: his sole wish is that the great Dharma be widely propagated and proclaimed, his great vow that living beings receive great benefit. He therefore exhausts his supernormal powers and completely relinquishes physical life itself, earnestly devoted, his resolve never coming to rest. He hopes that the disciples will revere the Dharma as they revere the teacher—I transmit illumination to you, you transmit illumination onward, and illumination continues without end. This is the teacher’s resolve. Thus this chapter is known to exhort teachers who propagate the Dharma.

The following chapters, Wonderful Sound and Perceiver of the World’s Sounds, explain great beings from other lands who receive commands to propagate the scripture and universally manifest physical forms without any fixed appearance. One must not view them with the eyes of cattle and sheep or measure them through ordinary understanding. Do not give rise to thoughts of contempt where you hear the Dharma: once contempt arises, the Dharma does not permeate the mind. Thus the chapters below are known to exhort disciples who receive the Dharma.

Someone says that in the preceding chapters the buddhas perform buddha-work, whereas from the present chapter onward bodhisattvas perform buddha-work. This is only a provisional statement: the chapters above also contain bodhisattvas, and those below also contain buddhas [and so forth].

III. Classification of Riding the Vehicle

The Skillful Means chapter has completed opening the three to reveal the one, and the perfect cause has been explained. Peaceful Practices explains the Dharma that is ridden. The Lifespan chapter completes the fruit that is ridden. From the present chapter onward, what is explained is the person who rides what is ridden.

Thus the Treatise of the Twelve Gates says: “The Great Vehicle is what great persons such as Samantabhadra and Mañjuśrī ride.”

Medicine King rides the vehicle through ascetic practice; Wonderful Sound and Perceiver of the World’s Sounds ride it through samādhi; Dhāraṇī through retention; King Wonderful-Adornment through vows; and Samantabhadra through supernormal powers. Explained in this way, the meaning of circulation through transforming others becomes readily intelligible.

IV. Four Divisions of the Text

The text has four parts: first a question, second an answer, third benefit, and fourth Prabhūtaratna’s praise.

The question has three parts: first a general question about journeying and transforming, second a specific question about ascetic practice, and third a request for an answer, as stated in the scripture.

Second, the answer has two parts: first only the ascetic practice is answered—journeying and transforming may refer to the samādhi of physical forms or to the following two chapters—and second the scripture is praised.

The answer concerning ascetic practice first explains the basis of the event and then the former affair itself. The basis of the event has three parts: the period, the presence of a buddha, and the śrāvakas, land, and so forth, all as stated in the scripture. The former affair has three parts: first the Buddha teaches the Dharma, second offerings are cultivated, and third past and present are joined.

But the Buddha teaches universally for all living beings. Why only for Gladly Seen? Because he is the person who receives and responds to the teaching and must be entrusted with its circulation—just as Śāriputra is today, one person standing in for the many.

V. Ascetic Practice: The Present

Ascetic practice is further divided into two: first the present and second the future.

The present is further divided into two: first cultivating practice and attaining Dharma, and second forming the thought of repaying kindness.

Repaying kindness is further divided into two: first the power of samādhi and second the power of the body as direct recompense. Bodily power has three parts: first burning the body, second praise by the buddhas, and third the length of time.

“True Dharma offering”—internally one should set wisdom and contemplation in motion, contemplate the causes and fruits of affliction, and sweep them all away with the wisdom of emptiness; therefore it is called true Dharma. Further contemplate: whether body or fire, the giver and recipient of the offering are all the true mark—who is burning, and who is being burned? Neither giver nor recipient can be obtained, and therefore it is named true Dharma.

VI. Ascetic Practice: The Future

The passage below “all living beings” concerns ascetic practice in the future and has five parts: first birth in the royal family, second recounting the former affair, third going before the Buddha, fourth entrustment by the Tathāgata, and fifth accepting the command and taking responsibility for upholding the Dharma. All are as stated in the scripture.

Taking responsibility for upholding the Dharma has four parts: first raising a stūpa, second burning the arms, third benefit, and fourth present recompense. All are as stated in the scripture.

VII. Joining Past and Present and Exhorting Cultivation

The passage below “the Buddha told” is the third part, joining past and present. It is further divided into two: first the joining and second the exhortation to cultivate.

In the exhortation to cultivate, burning a single finger surpasses relinquishing the external body: what is external is light and what is internal is weighty, and therefore their merit and blessing differ. The scripture’s “wife and children” are the external body, while “realm and city” and so forth are external wealth.

VIII. Praise of the Scripture: First Praising the Upholder

The passage below “if, furthermore, someone with the seven treasures” is praise of the scripture: first the person able to uphold it is praised, then the Dharma upheld, and finally the depth of the merit of upholding the scripture is explained.

Offering the seven treasures to the four kinds of noble persons is inferior to receiving and upholding one verse. Dharma is the teacher of the noble ones; nothing surpasses it in being able to give birth, nurture, bring to completion, and bring to glory. Thus persons are light and Dharma is weighty.

IX. Praise of the Dharma Upheld: Dharma-Essence and the Ocean Simile

The passage below “Constellation King” is the second part, praising the Dharma upheld, and has two divisions: first praising the essence of the Dharma and then praising its function.

“Among streams, currents, rivers, and all waters, the ocean is foremost”—the Sūtra of Immeasurable Meanings says, “Four waters are similes for the teaching; in the parable of medicinal herbs, one cloud able to rain is a simile for teaching the Dharma.” Here, all waters are again used to gather every teaching, while four are separately raised as similes for the teachings of the four flavors: milk, cream, raw butter, and clarified butter.

The teaching of this Lotus is like the ocean of ghee. Speaking to the exhaustion of the original ground is called “profound”; pervading every place is called “vast”; purely explaining the Buddha-Dharma without teaching other dharmas is called “salty.” Its being “most profound and vast” has this meaning.

X. The Mountain Simile

The names of the ten jeweled mountains come from the Flower Garland Sūtra and various other scriptures [and so forth]. Earthen Mountain, Black Mountain, and Iron Ring Mountain are not jeweled. Although the ten mountains are jeweled, some are formed of one treasure and some of two, and divine dragons dwell among them. Mount Sumeru is formed of four treasures and inhabited exclusively by devas.

This is a simile for what the other teachings explain. Those who rely are the ten grounds and forty minds—ordinary, worthy, or noble—while what they rely upon may be conventional truth, true truth, or the middle way; these are lower. The truth explained by the Lotus Sūtra is permanence, bliss, self, and purity, like something formed of four treasures, and it is relied upon by persons who open, reveal, awaken to, and enter. This meaning is therefore highest.

XI. The Moon and Sun Similes

Stars and moon alike are formed of the yin essence and appear at night, but stars neither wane nor wax and therefore do not equal the moon. The other scriptures explain provisional wisdom without mastery; the present scripture explains that the provisional is precisely the real and the real precisely the provisional, that waxing and waning mutually indicate one another, nondual yet dual. In explaining provisional wisdom this way, it surpasses the other teachings.

The sun is formed of the yang essence and alone can dispel darkness. The other scriptures explain that real wisdom dispels delusion, yet do not even equal “the real is precisely the provisional”; how much less can they speak of “the provisional is precisely the real”? Thus one knows that this scripture’s explanation of real wisdom is foremost.

XII. Similes of the Wheel-Turning King, Brahmā, and Śakra

The command of a wheel-turning king reaches only the four regions; Śakra’s reaches the Heaven of the Thirty-Three; Brahmā’s command gathers the upper realm and stands above the lower. This is a simile for how the three truths and three samādhis explained in other scriptures do not include one another and lack mastery.

The present scripture explains that the true mark enters true truth—“decisively clarifying the śrāvaka Dharma” and becoming “king of the scriptures”; that the true mark enters conventional truth, so every livelihood and productive activity is without contradiction; and that the true mark enters the middle way, so no dharma is other than the Buddha-Dharma. The scripture says it is “father of all those in training and beyond training and those who have generated the bodhisattva resolve”; this is its meaning.

XIII. Four Kinds of Foremost

“Foremost among all ordinary beings, those of the four fruits, and pratyekabuddhas”—this explains natural functioning without deliberate effort. The other scriptures require deliberate effort before one can enter the stream, just as persons of the four fruits awaken through hearing, reflection, and cultivation. The present scripture explains the four truths of nonaction without admixture of skillful means and naturally flows into the ocean of sarvajñā, like the great white ox, sturdy and powerful, swift as the wind [and so forth].

Foremost among śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, and bodhisattvas—this explains that the cause is foremost. Other scriptures explain the cause as the seven skillful means; the present scripture explains a cause that passes beyond skillful means, and therefore its cause is foremost.

The Tathāgata is foremost—this explains the fruit. Other scriptures explain the fruit as near, at the quiescent site of awakening; the present scripture explains the fruit as pointing far back to the original ground, and therefore it is foremost.

XIV. Praise of the Dharma’s Function

The passage below “this scripture can save” praises the function of the Dharma: first its function in removing suffering is praised, then its function in giving happiness is praised through twelve matters, and finally the passage concludes. All are as stated in the scripture.

XV. The Profound Merit of Upholding the Scripture

The passage below “if a person hears” explains the profound merit of upholding the scripture. First it raises the merit of hearing this entire scripture, then the merit of hearing this chapter. There are a comparison and an entrustment, as stated in the scripture.

Fragrance issuing from the mouth is present-life recompense; the other benefits are later-life recompense.

“Hearing this scripture, one neither ages nor dies”—this must be understood as contemplative practice: not aging is bliss and not dying is permanence. One hears this scripture and gains an understanding of permanence and bliss, holding it openly within the breast and fearing nothing.

XVI. Benefit from Hearing the Chapter and Prabhūtaratna’s Praise

The passage below “when this was taught” is the third part, benefit from hearing the chapter, as stated in the scripture.

Fourth is Prabhūtaratna’s praise, as stated in the scripture.

釋妙音菩薩品The Bodhisattva Wonderful Sound

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、釋品名:昔今對釋

經文之中自己作了解釋——

往昔奉獻雲雷音王佛十萬種伎樂,如今遊化他方國土而音樂自然隨行;往昔奉獻八萬四千寶鉢,如今有這麼多的道器眷屬圍繞;往昔得一切眾生語言陀羅尼,如今以普現色身、以微妙的音聲遍吼十方而弘揚宣說此教——所以名為〈妙音品〉。

這一品說明菩薩以難以思議之力,隨著眾生的類別而通達經法。眾人看見他的迹,卻測不到他的本。只要品嚐他的法味,不要揀擇他的形貌;如果自己輕慢那個地位,就是自己壅塞了法的流通——這就是化他門中的第二重意思。

二、分文為六

文分為六:一是放光東召,二是奉命西來,三是十方弘經,四是二土得益,五是還歸本國,六是聞品進道。

三、「大人相」之釋

「大人相」,是說大相之海。

遍體毛的功德比不上一好的功德,眾好的功德比不上一相的功德;諸相從下向上輾轉相勝,都比不上白毫的功德;白毫的功德又比不上肉髻的功德——所以是大人之相。

這個相的業因是從孝順師長而起。如今放這道光召喚本弟子,是要使他弘揚中道之經而利益大機的人。白毫是從一道清淨而起,如今放這道光是要令他弘揚此法。

四、問答一:佛相何故有勝負

問: 佛的每一相都是法界之海,為什麼有勝有負?

答: 其他經典所說的,應當作這樣的說法罷了。

五、問答二:何故召東說西

問: 佛有緣的弟子布滿十方,為什麼召喚東方而解說西方,不論及八方呢?

答: 這裡有所表示。《淨名》說:『日月為什麼行走於閻浮提?是想要用光明除去眾生的昏暗。』

東方是光的開始,西方是光的終了——有始有終,大概只有聖人吧。未發心的令他發心,未究竟的令他究竟。一位菩薩既然如此,眾人也是如此;一方既然如此,諸方也是如此。聖人不繁瑣文字,舉一以概括其餘,所以只說東西罷了。

六、發來:來緣有六

發來,文分為二:一是發來的緣,二是正發來。

來緣分為六:一是經家敘述他的福慧,二是被光照,三是辭別,四是佛誡,五是受旨,六是現來相。

敘述福的由來,是由於值遇先佛很多。「甚深智慧」就是智慧莊嚴,十六三昧就是福德莊嚴。

光照身、辭別佛,都如經文所說。

七、佛誡三意

佛所誡的——法身大士本來不必嚴肅督責就能成就,只是他所帶的眷屬或許有未通達的,所以藉著誡他而規範這些人。

佛身與理相稱,不可以見到卑小之身就忘了他的尊嚴——這是就如來座而誡。

師與弟子智斷具足,師既然施設權法,弟子也隱藏他的實德——這是就如來衣而誡。

依報的國土都是正報所感召的,如來以慈心臨於大千世界,該高就高、該下就下,不可以看見依報而忽視正報——這是就如來室而誡。

此方之佛弘經也是敕這三意,那方世尊所誡也是如此,可見諸佛的道是相同的。

受旨——「如來力」是座力,「神通力」是室力,「莊嚴力」是衣力。這是承受弘經的大旨、利物的宗要,所以能夠不動此會而遊化十方。

八、現相六與問答三

現相之文分為六:一是遣蓮花,二是問,三是答,四是請,五是推功,六是命來,都如經文所說。

問: 如果文殊的位次在下,辭別時不應當求見他;如果文殊位次高而相來,怎麼忽然不認識?

答: 雖然同在一個位次,也有始、有中、有終,只是這一件事不知道,無損於他的高位。又,大眾之中見到瑞相而不明白,發起而令他們知道,所以才問佛。

九、發來六

從「于時」以下是發來,文分為六:一是與眷屬經歷,二是敘相登臺,三是問訊傳旨,四是請見多寶,五是世尊為他通達,六是塔中稱善,都如經文所說。

十、十方弘經

第三,弘經分為二:問與答。

起初問種何善根,第二問有這樣的神力。善根是問往昔,神力是問今日。佛回答這兩重意思。

往昔獻樂奉鉢,於是結會古今,都如經文所說——這是回答他種何善根之問。

從「華德」以下,回答他神力之問。示現三十四種凡身、四種聖人身,結成十法界六道罷了。

「爾時華德」以下,是問如今住在什麼定中而能這樣自在利益,佛的回答如經文所說。

十一、二土得益:三昧與陀羅尼

「說是品」以下是第四,二土得益。

三昧與陀羅尼,體是一個而用不同:寂靜之用為三昧,執持之用名陀羅尼。又,色身變現名三昧,音聲辯說名陀羅尼。

上一品說「初得一切色身三昧轉身、得一切語言陀羅尼」,應當知道音聲仍然是色法,所以說體一而用異。

又,舌根清淨名陀羅尼,其餘諸根清淨名三昧——總之都是六根清淨的法門罷了。

十二、還本土與聞品進道

「爾時妙音」以下是第五,還歸本土。

「動地雨花」——菩薩經歷之處尚且能夠傍帶利益,何況佛在前面放光,傍照東方百八萬億那由他國土,也是傍論其利益。

第六,聞品進道,如經文所說。

I. Explanation of the Chapter Title: Past and Present Interpreted Together

The scripture itself gives the explanation—

In the past he offered one hundred thousand kinds of music to Buddha King Cloud-Thunder-Sound; now, as he journeys and transforms in other lands, music naturally accompanies him. In the past he offered 84,000 jeweled bowls; now he is surrounded by that many companions who are vessels of the path. In the past he attained the dhāraṇī of the languages of all living beings; now through universally manifesting physical forms and subtle, wondrous sound, he roars throughout the ten directions and propagates this teaching. Therefore the chapter is called Wonderful Sound.

This chapter explains how a bodhisattva, through inconceivable power, transmits the scripture in accordance with the kinds of living beings. People see his Trace but cannot fathom his Origin. Simply taste the flavor of his Dharma and do not discriminate according to his appearance. If you yourself slight that station, you obstruct the circulation of Dharma yourself—this is the second meaning within the gate of transforming others.

II. Six Divisions of the Text

The text has six parts: first emitting light and summoning from the east; second receiving the command and coming west; third propagating the scripture throughout the ten directions; fourth benefit in both lands; fifth returning to the original land; and sixth advancing on the path through hearing the chapter.

III. Explanation of “the Mark of a Great Person”

“The mark of a great person” means the ocean of great marks.

The merit of all the hairs covering the body does not equal that of one excellence, the merit of all excellences does not equal that of one mark, and the marks, successively surpassing one another from below upward, do not equal the merit of the white tuft. The merit of the white tuft in turn does not equal that of the crown protuberance. Therefore these are marks of a great person.

The karmic cause of this mark arises from filial obedience toward teachers and elders. The Buddha now emits this light to summon his original disciple so that the disciple may propagate the scripture of the middle way and benefit persons of great capacity. The white tuft arises from the purity of the one path; the Buddha now emits this light so that the disciple may propagate this Dharma.

IV. First Question and Answer: Why Are the Buddha’s Marks Superior and Inferior?

Question: Each of the Buddha’s marks is an ocean of the Dharma realm. Why, then, are some superior and others inferior?

Answer: What is taught in other scriptures should simply be explained this way.

V. Second Question and Answer: Why Summon from the East and Explain the West?

Question: The Buddha’s disciples with karmic affinity fill the ten directions. Why does he summon from the east and explain the west without discussing the other eight directions?

Answer: This carries a representation. The Vimalakīrti Sūtra says: “Why do the sun and moon travel across Jambudvīpa? They wish to use their radiance to dispel the darkness of living beings.”

The east is the beginning of light and the west its end—possessing a beginning and an end, perhaps only noble persons do so. Those who have not generated the resolve are caused to generate it; those not yet ultimate are brought to ultimacy. Since this applies to one bodhisattva, it applies to all; since it applies to one direction, it applies to every direction. Noble persons do not burden the text with detail: they raise one to encompass the rest, and therefore only east and west are discussed.

VI. Setting Out: Six Conditions for Coming

The passage on setting out has two parts: first the conditions for setting out and second the setting out itself.

The conditions for coming are six: first the scripture’s narrator recounts his merit and wisdom; second he is illuminated by the light; third he takes leave; fourth the Buddha admonishes him; fifth he receives the intent; and sixth he manifests the sign of coming.

The source of his merit is his encounter with many former buddhas. “Profound wisdom” is the adornment of wisdom, while the sixteen samādhis are the adornment of merit.

The light illuminating his body and his taking leave of the Buddha are as stated in the scripture.

VII. Three Intents in the Buddha’s Admonition

Concerning the Buddha’s admonition: a great being of the Dharma-body originally needs no stern supervision in order to accomplish the task. Some among the companions he brings, however, may not yet understand, so through admonishing him the Buddha regulates them.

The Buddha’s body accords with principle. One must not see a low and small body and forget its dignity—this is an admonition in terms of the Tathāgata’s seat.

Teacher and disciples fully possess wisdom and severance. Since the teacher establishes provisional dharmas, the disciples also conceal their real virtue—this is an admonition in terms of the Tathāgata’s robe.

The land as dependent recompense is always evoked by direct recompense. The Tathāgata comes over the great-thousand world with a compassionate mind, becoming high where high is appropriate and low where low is appropriate. One must not see the dependent recompense and slight the direct recompense—this is an admonition in terms of the Tathāgata’s room.

The Buddha in this land commands these same three intents when propagating the scripture, and the World-Honored One in that land likewise admonishes them; thus the path of the buddhas is the same.

Receiving the intent: “the Tathāgata’s power” is the power of the seat; “the power of supernormal mastery” is the power of the room; and “the power of adornment” is the power of the robe. This is receiving the great purport of propagating the scripture and the essential aim of benefiting beings, and therefore Wonderful Sound can journey and transform throughout the ten directions without moving from this assembly.

VIII. Six Signs and the Third Question and Answer

The passage on manifesting the signs has six parts: first sending the lotus flowers, second the question, third the answer, fourth the request, fifth referring the merit, and sixth commanding him to come, all as stated in the scripture.

Question: If Mañjuśrī’s position were lower, Wonderful Sound should not have asked to see him when taking leave. If Mañjuśrī’s position were high and the sign appeared, why did he suddenly fail to recognize it?

Answer: Although they occupy the same position, there are still beginning, middle, and end. Not knowing this single matter does not diminish his high station. Further, the great assembly saw the auspicious sign but did not understand it; Mañjuśrī initiated the question so that they might know, and therefore he asked the Buddha.

IX. Six Parts of Setting Out

The passage below “at that time” is the setting out and has six parts: first traveling with the companions; second recounting the marks and ascending the platform; third offering greetings and transmitting the intent; fourth requesting to see Prabhūtaratna; fifth the World-Honored One enabling communication; and sixth praise from within the stūpa, all as stated in the scripture.

X. Propagating the Scripture throughout the Ten Directions

Third, propagating the scripture has two parts: question and answer.

The first question asks what wholesome roots he planted; the second asks how he possesses such supernormal power. Wholesome roots asks about the past, supernormal power about the present. The Buddha answers both meanings.

In the past he offered music and jeweled bowls, and past and present are then joined, all as stated in the scripture—this answers what wholesome roots he planted.

The passage below “Flower Virtue” answers the question about his supernormal power. He manifests thirty-four kinds of ordinary bodies and four kinds of noble bodies, gathered into the ten Dharma realms and six destinies.

The passage below “at that time Flower Virtue” asks in what concentration he now abides to benefit beings with such mastery; the Buddha’s answer is as stated in the scripture.

XI. Benefit in Both Lands: Samādhi and Dhāraṇī

The passage below “when this chapter was taught” is the fourth part, benefit in both lands.

Samādhi and dhāraṇī are one in essence but differ in function: the function of quiescence is samādhi, while the function of retaining is called dhāraṇī. Further, transformation of physical forms is called samādhi, while eloquent teaching through sound is called dhāraṇī.

The preceding chapter says “at first he attained the samādhi of all physical forms and transformed his body, then attained the dhāraṇī of all languages.” One should know that sound remains a form-dharma, and therefore they are said to be one in essence but different in function.

Further, purity of the tongue faculty is called dhāraṇī, while purity of the other faculties is called samādhi—in summary, all are Dharma gates of purity of the six faculties.

XII. Returning to the Original Land and Advancing through Hearing the Chapter

The passage below “at that time Wonderful Sound” is the fifth part, returning to the original land.

“The earth moved and flowers rained down”—the places through which the bodhisattva passes can bring collateral benefit; how much more the Buddha’s preceding emission of light, which collaterally illuminated 1.08 million koṭis of nayutas of lands to the east, also involves their benefit.

Sixth, advancing on the path through hearing the chapter, as stated in the scripture.

釋觀世音菩薩普門品The Universal Gateway of the Bodhisattva Perceiver of the World's Sounds (Guanshiyin)

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、自述體例

這一品是當今流行的王經,講說的人很多。如今的解釋與別人不同,另外有《私記》兩卷,這裡只是略作撮取。

解釋這個題目,有通、有別。通有十雙,別有五隻。

二、通釋:十雙

十雙——第一是人法,乃至第十是智斷〔云云〕。

「觀世音」是人,「普門」是法。人有多種〔云云〕,法有多種〔云云〕。依前面的問答論觀世音之人,依後面的問答論普門之法。人與法合起來立題,所以說〈觀世音普門品〉。

〔二〕「觀世音」是大悲拔苦,依前面的問答,百千苦惱都得解脫;「普門」是大慈與樂,依後面的問答,應以什麼身得度就為他說法。

〔三〕「觀世音」是智慧莊嚴,智慧能斷惑,如同白天沒有黑暗;「普門」是福德莊嚴,福能轉壽,如同寶珠雨下眾寶。

〔四〕「觀世音」是觀智冥合於境,就是法身;「普門」是隨所應而現,就是應身。

〔五〕「觀世音」譬如藥樹王,遍體治癒疾病;「普門」譬如如意珠王,隨人意所給與。

〔六〕「觀世音」是冥中作利益,無所見聞而三毒七難都離、二求兩願都滿;「普門」是顯中作利益,眼睛看見三十三種聖容,耳朵聽聞十九種尊教。

〔七〕「觀世音」是隨自意而照實智;「普門」是隨他意而照權智。

〔八〕「觀世音」是不動本際;「普門」是迹隨方圓。

〔九〕「觀世音」根本是了因種子;「普門」根本是緣因種子。

〔十〕「觀世音」究竟是智德,如十四夜的月光;「普門」究竟是斷德,如二十九夜殘餘的光輝將盡。

經文兩番問答含著無量義理,略用十雙,從人法開始到智斷為止,解釋品題的通名,它的義理就是這樣。

三、別釋:「觀」

別論五隻——

第一是「觀」。觀有多種:析觀、體觀、次第觀、圓觀。析觀是滅色入空;體觀是即色是空;次第觀是從析觀乃至圓觀;圓觀是即析觀就是實相,乃至次第觀也是實相。

如今簡別三觀而唯論圓觀。經文說「普門」——觀如果不圓,門就稱不上普,就是這個意思。

四、別釋:「世」

「世」——若就修行說,先有世後有觀;若就言說說,先有觀後有世。如今從言說之便,所以後論世。

世也有多種:有為世、無為世、二邊世、不思議世。有為世是三界之世,無為世是二種涅槃,二邊世是生死與涅槃,不思議世是實相之境。簡別去諸世而只取不思議世。

五、別釋:「音」

「音」是機。機也有多種:人天機、二乘機、菩薩機、佛機。

人天機是諸惡莫作、諸善奉行;二乘機是厭畏生死、欣尚無為;菩薩機是先人後己、慈悲仁讓;佛機是於一切諸法中都以平等觀而入,一切無礙之人,一道出離生死。

揀別去諸種音之機,唯取佛音之機而施設感應。以這機與應的因緣,所以名為「觀世音」。

六、別釋:「普」與十普

「普」是周遍。諸法無量:如果不得普,那就是偏法;如果得普,那就是圓法。所以《思益》說:『一切法邪、一切法正。』

略約十法說明普;得了這個意思,比類一切法無不是普。所謂:慈悲普、弘誓普、修行普、離惑普、入法門普、神通普、方便普、說法普、成就眾生普、供養諸佛普。

慈悲普:從人天開始到菩薩都有慈悲,然而有普有不普。生緣、法緣兩種慈的體既然偏,所被的緣不廣,不得稱普;無緣之慈與實相體同,它的理既然圓,慈就無所不遍——如同磁石吸鐵,任運相應。這樣的慈悲遍薰一切,名為慈悲普。

弘誓普:弘是廣,誓是制;廣泛制約要心,所以說弘誓。弘誓約四諦而起:若約有作、無生、無量四諦,收法不盡,不名為普;若約無作四諦,名為弘誓普。

修行普:例如佛在未值遇定光佛之前,凡有所修都不與理相合;從得記以後,觸事就是理。以理智歷一切法而修行的人,無行而不普。

斷惑普:若用一切智、道種智斷四住、塵沙等惑,如同砍去枝條,不名斷惑普;若用一切種智斷無明,五住都盡,如同除去根本,名為斷惑普。

入法門普:道前名為修方便,道後所入名為入法門。若二乘以一心入一定,一心只作一事,不得眾多,又被定所繫縛,所以不名為普;若歷別諸地而有淺深階差,也不名為普;若入王三昧,一切三昧都入其中,不起滅定而現諸威儀,所以名為法門普。

神通普:大阿羅漢天眼照大千世界,支佛照百佛世界,菩薩照恒沙世界——都是所緣之境狹,所發之通也偏。若緣實相而修,一發一切發;相似神通尚且如上所說,何況真神通而不普?

方便普:有二種。道前的方便攝在修行之中;道後又分二:一是法體,如入法門中所說;二是化用,如今所說——逗機利物,稱適緣宜,一時圓遍;雖然種種運為,於法性實際而無所損減,這名為方便普。

說法普:能以一種妙音,相稱十法界之機,隨其所宜之類都令解脫,如同修羅之琴,所以名為說法普。

成就眾生普:一切世間及出世間所有的事業,都是菩薩所為——鑿井、造舟、神農嘗藥、雲蔭日照而利益眾生,乃至利益一切賢聖,示教利喜而令入三菩提,這名為成就眾生普。

供養諸佛普:若作外事供養,以一時、一食、一花、一香普供養一切佛,無前無後而一時平等供養;於一微塵中出種種塵也是如此。若作內觀,圓智引導眾行,圓智名為佛,眾行資助圓智,就是供養佛;若行資助其餘的智,不名供養普——眾行資助圓智,這名為供養普。

七、別釋:「門」

「門」——從假入空,空通而假壅;從空入假,假通而空壅。偏通就不是普,壅塞所以不是門。中道非空非假,正通實相而雙照二諦,所以名為普;正通所以名為門。

普門圓通的義理則無量,略舉其中十類就可以知道了。

這一品仍舊是普現三昧的化他流通。

八、分文為三

文分為三:一是問,二是答,三是聞品得益。問答有兩番。

初番的問分為二:起初經家敘述時節——說東方菩薩完畢,接著說西方菩薩之時〔其一〕;說東方生善完畢,接著說西方生善之時〔其二〕;說東方斷疑完畢,接著說西方斷疑之時〔其三〕;說東方得道完畢,接著說西方得道之時〔其四〕。

九、「無盡意」之釋

「無盡意」——《大品》說明空則無盡,《大集》說明八十無盡門,《淨名》說:『所謂無盡,是非盡非無盡,所以名為無盡。』總合三經,用三觀三智來解釋無盡。

「意」是智,「無盡」是境。智契合於境:單就境說應當說無盡,單就智說應當說意;境智合稱,所以說「無盡意」。

〔一〕又,意是世間出世間之本。〔二〕又,意就是法界中道,所以說能觀心性名為上定。〔三〕這是就三智三觀而釋名。

十、興問與總答

興問——《大經》說:『具足二種莊嚴,能問能答。』無盡意先以慧莊嚴問觀世音的慧莊嚴,佛以慧莊嚴答觀世音的慧莊嚴。

佛答分為三:一是總答,二是別答,三是勸持名答。

總答分為四:一是人數,二是遭苦,三是聞名稱號,四是得解脫。

苦本有多種:苦一人、多人受一苦、一人受多苦、一人受少苦。如今經文說百千萬億眾生,是多人;受諸苦惱,是多苦。舉多以顯少——多尚且能救,何況少苦!

遭苦是惡,稱名是善,善與惡合起來就是機的意思。「而得解脫」是應。這是機感因緣而名觀世音,也是人法因緣乃至智斷因緣而名觀世音。後面照這樣結名,不繁瑣文字。

十一、別答:口機・意機・身機

別答分為三:一是口機之應,二是意機之應,三是身機之應。

口機又分二:起初說明七難,其次作結。

火難分為四:一是持名為善,二是遭火為惡,三是應,四是結。

在一難之中照例分三番:一是果報之火,從地獄以上到初禪以還都論機應;二是惡業之火,從地獄以上到非想以還都論機應;三是煩惱之火,從地獄以上到等覺以還都論機應。七難、三毒、二求照例都是如此。這個義理既然廣,可以用心意去理解,不可以用文字記錄。

身機分為二:起初是二求,其次是結。求男有立願、修行、德業;求女文中略去修行——正說禮拜是相同的,所以略去;願與業各不相同,所以重出。結,如經文所說。

十二、勸持名

從「是故眾生」以下是勸持名,分為三:勸持、格量、結歎。

上面敘述殊勝的名號與美好的德,而不分辨形質;如果想要歸依崇敬,應當持他的名字,所以勸持。

《入大乘論》說:『法身唯一,應化之色則多。』格量六十二億應化之身,等於一個法身。

智者說:『圓人唯一,偏人則多。』格量六十二億偏菩薩,等於一個圓菩薩。

十三、第二番問答

第二番問分為三:「云何遊」是問身,「云何說」是問口,「方便」是問意。這是聖人三密無謀之權,隨機而適應。

佛答也是三:一是別答,二是總答,三是勸供養。

「應以」是回答方便力,「現身」是回答他問遊,「說法」是回答他問口。凡有三十三身、十九種說法〔云云〕。

從「成就」以下,結別而開總。別的文廣而意狹,總答文狹而意廣〔云云〕。

從「是故」以下是勸供養。這裡見到形、聽聞法,所以勸供養。起初是勸,其次是受旨。受旨分為六:奉命、不受、重奉、佛勸、即受、結,都如經文所說。

十四、聞品功德:無等等三釋

從「持地」以下是聞品功德〔云云〕。

「無等等」——九法界的心不能等於理,佛法界的心能等於此理,所以是無等而等。

又,畢竟之理是無等;起初緣畢竟之理而發心,能等於理,所以說無等等。

又,心與理都不可得,將什麼去等什麼,而說無等等呢?心與理都不可說;不可說而說,說這個心等於這個理,所以說無等等罷了。

起初一釋是橫釋,其次一釋是豎釋,再次一釋是非橫非豎之釋〔云云〕。

I. Statement of Method

This chapter is the sovereign scripture of the present path, and many people lecture upon it. The present explanation differs from those of others. There are also two fascicles of Private Notes; only a brief selection from them is gathered here.

The title is explained generally and separately. The general explanation has ten pairs; the separate explanation has five individual characters.

II. General Explanation: Ten Pairs

The ten pairs—the first is person and Dharma, and so forth through the tenth, wisdom and severance〔And so forth.〕.

“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” is the person; “Universal Gateway” is the Dharma. There are many kinds of person〔And so forth.〕 and many kinds of Dharma〔And so forth.〕. The preceding exchange of question and answer discusses the person, Perceiver of the World’s Sounds; the latter exchange discusses the Dharma, Universal Gateway. Person and Dharma are joined to establish the title, hence it is called The Universal Gateway of the Bodhisattva Perceiver of the World’s Sounds.

〔2〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” is great compassion removing suffering: according to the preceding exchange, those afflicted by hundreds of thousands of sufferings all attain liberation. “Universal Gateway” is great kindness giving happiness: according to the latter exchange, he teaches Dharma through whatever body is needed for deliverance.

〔3〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” is the adornment of wisdom: wisdom can sever delusion as daylight leaves no darkness. “Universal Gateway” is the adornment of merit: merit can transform lifespan as a jewel rains treasures.

〔4〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” is contemplative wisdom merging unseen with its object; this is the Dharma body. “Universal Gateway” is manifesting in accordance with what is needed; this is the response body.

〔5〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” is like the king of medicinal trees, whose whole body cures illness. “Universal Gateway” is like the king of wish-fulfilling jewels, which gives according to each person’s wish.

〔6〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” performs benefit invisibly: without anything seen or heard, the three poisons and seven disasters are left behind and both wishes in the two quests are fulfilled. “Universal Gateway” performs benefit manifestly: the eyes behold thirty-three noble forms and the ears hear nineteen honored teachings.

〔7〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” illuminates real wisdom by following his own intent; “Universal Gateway” illuminates provisional wisdom by following another’s intent.

〔8〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” does not move from the limit of the Origin; “Universal Gateway” is the Trace adapting to square and round.

〔9〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” is fundamentally the seed of the direct cause; “Universal Gateway” is fundamentally the seed of the conditioning cause.

〔10〕“Perceiver of the World’s Sounds” is ultimately the virtue of wisdom, like moonlight on the fourteenth night; “Universal Gateway” is ultimately the virtue of severance, like the last radiance of the moon on the twenty-ninth night about to disappear.

The scripture’s two exchanges of question and answer contain immeasurable meanings. These ten pairs, beginning with person and Dharma and ending with wisdom and severance, briefly explain the general meaning of the chapter title. Such is their import.

III. Separate Explanation: “Contemplate”

The five individual characters are discussed separately—

The first is guan (“contemplate”). There are many kinds of contemplation: analytic contemplation, embodied contemplation, sequential contemplation, and perfect contemplation. Analytic contemplation extinguishes form and enters emptiness; embodied contemplation sees form itself as emptiness; sequential contemplation proceeds from analytic contemplation through perfect contemplation; perfect contemplation sees analytic contemplation itself as true reality, and likewise sequential contemplation itself as true reality.

The present explanation distinguishes and sets aside the other three contemplations, discussing only perfect contemplation. The scripture says “Universal Gateway”: if contemplation is not perfect, the gateway cannot be called universal. This is the meaning.

IV. Separate Explanation: “World”

As for shi (“world”): in terms of practice, world comes first and contemplation afterward; in terms of speech, contemplation comes first and world afterward. Here the order of speech is followed for convenience, so world is discussed later.

There are also many kinds of world: the conditioned world, unconditioned world, world of the two extremes, and inconceivable world. The conditioned world is the world of the three realms; the unconditioned world is the two kinds of nirvāṇa; the world of the two extremes is saṃsāra and nirvāṇa; the inconceivable world is the object of true reality. All the other worlds are distinguished and set aside, and only the inconceivable world is taken.

V. Separate Explanation: “Sounds”

yin (“sounds”), means capacity. There are also many kinds of capacity: the capacities of humans and gods, the two vehicles, bodhisattvas, and Buddhas.

The capacity of humans and gods is to commit no evil and practice every good. The capacity of the two vehicles is to fear saṃsāra and delight in the unconditioned. The bodhisattva capacity places others before oneself and practices compassion, humanity, and deference. The Buddha capacity enters all dharmas through equal contemplation: a person unobstructed in all things, leaving saṃsāra by the single path.

The various capacities called sounds are distinguished and set aside, and only the capacity of Buddha-sound is taken as the condition for establishing a response. Because of the causes and conditions of this capacity and response, he is named “Perceiver of the World’s Sounds.”

VI. Separate Explanation: “Universal”—and the Ten Universalities

pu (“universal”), means all-pervading. Dharmas are immeasurable: if they do not attain universality, they are partial dharmas; if they attain universality, they are perfect dharmas. Hence the Questions of Brahmā says: “Every Dharma is wrong; every Dharma is right.”

Universality is briefly explained through ten dharmas. Once this meaning is understood, one can infer that no Dharma is not universal. These are the universality of compassion, of the vast vows, of practice, of leaving delusion, of entering Dharma gates, of supernormal powers, of skillful means, of teaching Dharma, of bringing living beings to fulfillment, and of making offerings to all Buddhas.

Universality of compassion: from humans and gods through bodhisattvas, all possess compassion, but it may be universal or not universal. Compassion conditioned by living beings and compassion conditioned by dharmas are partial in substance; because the objects they reach are not broad, they cannot be called universal. Unconditioned compassion is one in substance with true reality. Since its principle is perfect, its compassion pervades everywhere—like a magnet drawing iron, naturally corresponding without contrivance. Compassion such as this universally permeates all and is called universality of compassion.

Universality of the vast vows: “vast” means broad, and “vow” means restraint. Because the essential mind is broadly restrained, they are called the vast vows. The vast vows arise in relation to the Four Truths. If related to the constructed, nonarising, or immeasurable Four Truths, they do not encompass all dharmas and are not called universal. If related to the unconstructed Four Truths, they are called universality of the vast vows.

Universality of practice: for example, before the Buddha encountered Dīpaṃkara Buddha, none of what he practiced accorded with principle. After he received the prediction, whatever he encountered was itself principle. For one who practices across all dharmas through principled wisdom, no practice is not universal.

Universality of severing delusion: if omniscience and knowledge of the paths are used to sever the delusions of the four abodes, dust-and-sand, and so forth, this is like cutting away branches and is not called universal severance of delusion. If knowledge of all modes is used to sever ignorance, all five abodes are exhausted, like removing the root; this is called universality of severing delusion.

Universality of entering Dharma gates: before the path is called cultivating skillful means; what is entered after the path is called entering Dharma gates. Those of the two vehicles enter one concentration with one mind; one mind performs only one act and cannot perform many, and it is bound by concentration, so this is not called universal. Passing separately through stages of different depth is also not called universal. But when one enters the king samādhi, all samādhis enter within it, and all modes of dignified conduct are manifested without rising from the concentration of cessation; this is called universality of Dharma gates.

Universality of supernormal powers: the divine eye of a great arhat illuminates a great-thousand world; a pratyekabuddha illuminates a hundred Buddha-worlds; a bodhisattva illuminates worlds numerous as the sands of the Ganges. In every case, the conditioned object is narrow and the power that arises is partial. If cultivated by taking true reality as condition, when one power arises, all arise. Even approximate supernormal powers are as described above—how much more must true supernormal powers be universal?

Universality of skillful means: there are two kinds. Skillful means before the path are included within practice. Those after the path are again twofold: first, Dharma in substance, as explained under entering Dharma gates; second, transformative function, as explained here—meeting capacities and benefiting beings, fitting conditions and what is appropriate, perfectly pervading all at once. Although it carries out manifold activities, it neither damages nor diminishes the true limit of Dharma-nature. This is called universality of skillful means.

Universality of teaching Dharma: with one wondrous sound, one can correspond to the capacities of the ten Dharma realms and cause every class, according to what is appropriate, to attain liberation—like the lute of an asura. This is called universality of teaching Dharma.

Universality of bringing living beings to fulfillment: every activity in all worlds and beyond them is undertaken by bodhisattvas—digging wells, building boats, Shennong tasting medicinal herbs, clouds providing shade, and the sun giving light to benefit living beings, extending even to benefiting all worthies and noble ones, showing, teaching, benefiting, and delighting them so that they enter complete awakening. This is called universality of bringing living beings to fulfillment.

Universality of making offerings to all Buddhas: if one makes external offerings, then with one occasion, one meal, one flower, and one incense one universally offers to all Buddhas—without before or after, making equal offerings at one time. The same applies when varieties of dust issue from one mote. In internal contemplation, perfect wisdom guides the many practices. Perfect wisdom is named Buddha, and the many practices supporting perfect wisdom are precisely offerings to the Buddha. If practices support other kinds of wisdom, this is not called universality of offering. The many practices supporting perfect wisdom are called universality of offering.

VII. Separate Explanation: “Gateway”

As for men (“gateway”): entering emptiness from provisional existence opens emptiness but obstructs the provisional; entering provisional existence from emptiness opens the provisional but obstructs emptiness. Partial passage is not universal; because there is obstruction, it is not a gateway. The middle way is neither emptiness nor provisional existence; it directly opens onto true reality while illuminating both truths, and is therefore called universal. Because it opens directly, it is called a gateway.

The meaning of the perfect penetration of the universal gateway is immeasurable; these ten categories are raised briefly so that it may be known.

This chapter remains the propagation for transforming others through the samādhi of universal manifestation.

VIII. Three Divisions of the Text

The text has three divisions: first the question, second the answer, and third the benefit attained from hearing the chapter. There are two exchanges of question and answer.

The first question has two parts. First, the compiler of the scripture recounts the time: after the bodhisattvas of the east have been explained, it is time to explain the bodhisattva of the west〔i〕; after the generation of goodness in the east has been explained, it is time to explain the generation of goodness in the west〔ii〕; after the severing of doubt in the east has been explained, it is time to explain the severing of doubt in the west〔iii〕; after attainment of the path in the east has been explained, it is time to explain attainment of the path in the west〔iv〕.

IX. Explanation of “Inexhaustible Intention”

As for “Inexhaustible Intention”: the Large Perfection of Wisdom explains that emptiness is inexhaustible; the Great Collection explains eighty inexhaustible gateways; the Vimalakīrti says: “What is inexhaustible is neither exhausted nor inexhaustible and is therefore named inexhaustible.” These three scriptures are combined, and the three contemplations and three wisdoms are used to explain inexhaustibility.

yi (“intention”), is wisdom; wujin (“inexhaustible”), is the object. Wisdom accords with the object: spoken only from the object, it should be called Inexhaustible; spoken only from wisdom, it should be called Intention. Because object and wisdom are named together, he is called “Inexhaustible Intention.”

〔1〕 Moreover, intention is the basis of the worldly and world-transcending. 〔2〕 Moreover, intention is itself the middle way of the Dharma realm, hence it is said that the ability to contemplate mind-nature is called the highest concentration. 〔3〕 This explains the name in terms of the three wisdoms and three contemplations.

X. Raising the Question and the General Answer

As to raising the question, the Great Nirvāṇa Sūtra says: “Possessing the two adornments, one can ask and can answer.” Inexhaustible Intention first uses the adornment of wisdom to ask about the adornment of wisdom of Perceiver of the World’s Sounds; the Buddha uses the adornment of wisdom to answer concerning the adornment of wisdom of Perceiver of the World’s Sounds.

The Buddha’s answer has three divisions: first a general answer, second a separate answer, and third an answer exhorting people to uphold the name.

The general answer has four parts: first the number of people, second encountering suffering, third hearing and invoking the name, and fourth attaining liberation.

Suffering itself has many forms: one person suffering, many people undergoing one suffering, one person undergoing many sufferings, and one person undergoing little suffering. Here the scripture speaks of hundreds of thousands of millions of living beings, so there are many people; it says they undergo various sufferings, so there are many sufferings. The many are raised to reveal the few—if even the many can be rescued, how much more those with little suffering!

Encountering suffering is evil; invoking the name is good. Good and evil combined constitute the meaning of capacity. “thereby attaining liberation” is the response. Because of the causes and conditions of the resonance of capacity, he is named Perceiver of the World’s Sounds; because of the causes and conditions of person and Dharma through wisdom and severance, he is also named Perceiver of the World’s Sounds. Later instances conclude the name in the same way, without burdening the text.

XI. Separate Answer: Oral, Mental, and Bodily Capacities

The separate answer has three divisions: first, the response to oral capacity; second, the response to mental capacity; third, the response to bodily capacity.

Oral capacity again has two divisions: first the seven disasters are explained, then they are concluded.

The disaster of fire has four divisions: first upholding the name is good, second encountering fire is evil, third the response, and fourth the conclusion.

Within one disaster, there are by analogy three turns: first, the fire of retributive result—from the hells through the first dhyāna, all discuss capacity and response; second, the fire of evil karma—from the hells through the sphere of neither perception nor nonperception, all discuss capacity and response; third, the fire of affliction—from the hells through equivalent awakening, all discuss capacity and response. The seven disasters, three poisons, and two quests all follow this pattern. Since the meaning is broad, it may be understood in thought but cannot be recorded in words.

Bodily capacity has two divisions: first the two quests, then their conclusion. Seeking a son includes establishing a vow, practice, virtue, and karma. In seeking a daughter, the text omits practice—properly speaking, bowing is the same and is therefore omitted; since their vows and karma differ, those are stated again. The conclusion is as in the scripture.

XII. Exhortation to Uphold the Name

From “therefore living beings” onward is the exhortation to uphold the name, with three divisions: exhorting to uphold, comparative measurement, and concluding praise.

The passage above describes the excellent name and beautiful virtue without distinguishing physical qualities. If one wishes to take refuge and pay reverence, one should uphold his name; therefore the text gives this exhortation.

The Treatise on Entering the Great Vehicle says: “The Dharma body is one; the forms of response and transformation are many.” The 6.2 billion response bodies in the comparison equal one Dharma body.

A wise person says: “A perfect person is one; partial persons are many.” The 6.2 billion partial bodhisattvas in the comparison equal one perfect bodhisattva.

XIII. The Second Exchange of Question and Answer

The second question has three parts: “how does he travel?” asks about the body; “how does he teach?” asks about the mouth; “skillful means” asks about the mind. These are the uncontrived provisional workings of a noble one’s three mysteries, responding appropriately to capacities.

The Buddha’s answer also has three divisions: first a separate answer, second a general answer, and third an exhortation to make offerings.

“according to what is needed” answers concerning the power of skillful means; “manifesting a body” answers the question about travel; “teaching Dharma” answers the question about the mouth. In all there are thirty-three bodies and nineteen teachings of Dharma〔And so forth.〕.

From “bringing to fulfillment” onward, the separate is concluded and the general opened. The separate text is broad but its meaning narrow; the general answer is narrow in text but broad in meaning〔And so forth.〕.

From “therefore” onward is the exhortation to make offerings. Here one sees the form and hears the Dharma, so offerings are encouraged. First comes the exhortation, next reception of the intent. Reception of the intent has six divisions: obeying the command, not accepting, offering again, the Buddha’s exhortation, then accepting, and the conclusion. All are as in the scripture.

XIV. Merit from Hearing the Chapter: Three Explanations of “Unequalled Yet Equal”

From “Dharma-Holder” onward is the merit from hearing the chapter〔And so forth.〕.

As for “unequalled yet equal”: the minds in the nine Dharma realms cannot equal principle, while the mind in the Buddha Dharma realm can equal this principle; it is therefore unequalled yet equal.

Moreover, ultimate principle is unequalled. One first generates the resolve by taking ultimate principle as condition and can equal that principle; it is therefore called unequalled yet equal.

Moreover, mind and principle are both unobtainable. What thing could equal what thing, such that one speaks of unequalled yet equal? Mind and principle are both unsayable; one speaks the unsayable and says this mind equals this principle, and therefore it is called unequalled yet equal.

The first explanation is horizontal, the next vertical, and the third neither horizontal nor vertical〔And so forth.〕.

釋陀羅尼品Dhāraṇī

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、釋名:陀羅尼之四義

「陀羅尼」此地翻作總持——總持惡不生起、善不喪失〔其一〕。

又翻作能遮、能持——能持善、能遮惡〔其二、其三〕。

〔其四〕這是能遮兩邊之惡、能持中道之善。

二、諸經開遮之不同

眾經開與遮不同:有的專用來治病,如那達居士;有的專用來護法,如這裡的經文;有的專用來滅罪,如方等;有的通用於治病、滅罪、護經,如《請觀音》;有的是大明呪、無上明呪、無等等明呪,那就不是治病、不是滅罪、不是護經。

若通融而說,也應當兼含;若別論而說,希望必須依經而不要違背教法〔云云〕。

三、諸師釋呪:四說

諸師有的說:呪是鬼神王的名字。稱他們王的名字,部落敬重其主,就不敢作非為,所以能降伏一切鬼魅〔其一〕。

有的說:呪如同軍中的密號。唱出號來若相應,就沒有人盤問;若不相應,就當場拿下治罪。若不順從呪的,頭破七分;若順從呪的,就沒有過失〔其二〕。

有的說:呪是密密默默地治惡,惡自然休息。譬如有一個微賤之人,從這個國家逃到那個國家,訛稱自己是王子,那個國家便把公主嫁給他;他多瞋而難以相處。有一位明智的人從他本國來,公主前去對他說了這件事。那人告訴公主:若他發瞋的時候就說一首偈。偈說:『無親而遊他國,欺誑一切人;粗食是尋常的事,何必再發瞋?』說這首偈的時候,他默然而瞋歇,後來就不再發瞋了。公主與所有的人只是聽見這首偈,都不知道其中的意思。呪也是如此——密密默默地遮惡,其餘的人並不知道〔其三〕。

有的說:呪是諸佛的密語。如同國王索取「先陀婆」,一切臣下沒有人能懂,唯有智臣才能知道。呪也是如此——只是一法而遍具諸種力用:病癒、罪除、善生、道合〔其四〕。

因為這個緣故,都保存原本的音,譯人不翻譯的用意就在這裡。

惡世弘經容易多有惱難,以呪來護持它,使道得以流通。

四、分文為四

文分為四:一是問持經功德,二是答甚多,三是請以呪護持,四是聞品得益。

一、問,如經文所說。

二、答,有格量。本來問的是多不多?回答說甚多,格量出功德,如經文所說。

三、請說呪,有五番:一是藥王,二是勇施,三是毘沙門,四是持國,五是十位羅剎女。

藥王分為四:一是請,二是說,三是歎,四是印可。以下照例有三,如經文所說。十女分為五:一是列名,二是請說,三是歎,四是誓,五是印可。

五、諸鬼之名

「夜叉」翻作捷疾鬼,「羅剎」翻作食人鬼,這兩部是北方所統領的。

「富單那」是熱病鬼,「吉遮」是起尸鬼——若是人、若是夜叉,都有這種鬼。

「毘陀羅」是赤色鬼,「揵陀羅」是黃色鬼〔未詳〕,「烏摩勒」是烏色鬼〔未詳〕,「阿跋摩羅」是青色鬼。

六、阿梨樹枝與三逆

阿梨樹的枝條墮地,法爾自然破為七片。

弒父、弒母、破僧,這是三種逆罪。

七、外國油與斗秤

外國的油是把麻搗碎,使它生蟲而合著壓榨,圖它多汁而更肥——這個過失尤其重大。

斗秤輕出而重入,是欺盜之尤。近世有小斗出、大斗入的,雷震而銘刻在他的背上——這種罪也不輕。

I. Explanation of the Name: Four Meanings of Dhāraṇī

“dhāraṇī” is translated here as comprehensive retention—comprehensively retaining, evil does not arise and goodness is not lost〔i〕.

It is also translated as able to ward off and able to retain—it can retain goodness and ward off evil〔ii, iii〕.

〔iv〕 This can ward off the evil of the two extremes and retain the goodness of the middle way.

II. Different Openings and Restrictions in Various Scriptures

Various scriptures differ in what they open and restrict. Some spells are used exclusively to cure illness, as with the householder Nata; some exclusively to protect the Dharma, as in this passage; some exclusively to eliminate offenses, as in the Vaipulya scriptures; some generally for curing illness, eliminating offenses, and protecting scripture, as in the Invoking Guanshiyin; and some are great-illumination spells, unsurpassed-illumination spells, and unequalled-illumination spells, which are neither for curing illness, eliminating offenses, nor protecting scripture.

If discussed from the universal approach, they should also encompass the others; if discussed separately, one must take care to follow the scripture and not depart from its teaching〔And so forth.〕.

III. Masters’ Explanations of Spells: Four Positions

Some masters say that a spell is the name of a king of ghosts and spirits. By pronouncing their king’s name, the tribe reveres its ruler and dares not commit wrong; therefore the spell can subdue all ghosts and goblins〔i〕.

Some say that a spell is like a secret watchword in an army. If the announced sign corresponds, no one questions the speaker; if it does not, the speaker is seized on the spot and punished. One who does not follow the spell has the head split into seven pieces; one who follows it is free of fault〔ii〕.

Some say that a spell treats evil secretly and silently, so evil stops of itself. Suppose a man of low birth flees this country for another and falsely claims to be a prince; that country gives him the princess in marriage, but he is irascible and difficult to live with. A wise man comes from his native country, and the princess goes to tell him what has happened. The man tells her: when your husband becomes angry, recite a verse. The verse says: “With no kin, you wander in another land, deceiving everyone; coarse food is an ordinary matter—why trouble to become angry again?” When she recites this verse, he falls silent and his anger ceases; afterward he never becomes angry again. The princess and everyone else only hear the verse and do not know its meaning. A spell is the same: it secretly and silently wards off evil, while the others do not understand〔iii〕.

Some say that a spell is the secret speech of the Buddhas. It is like a king requesting “sendhava”: none of his ministers understands except the wise minister. A spell is the same—it is only one Dharma, yet it possesses many powers throughout: illness is cured, offenses removed, goodness born, and the path joined〔iv〕.

For this reason, all preserve the original sounds; the translators’ intent in not translating lies here.

When the scripture is propagated in an evil age, many troubles and difficulties readily arise. Spells protect it so that the path may circulate.

IV. Four Divisions of the Text

The text has four divisions: first, a question about the merit of upholding the scripture; second, the answer that it is exceedingly great; third, the request to protect it with spells; and fourth, benefit attained from hearing the chapter.

First, the question is as stated in the scripture.

Second, the answer contains a comparative measure. The original question asks whether the merit is great; the answer says it is exceedingly great and brings out the merit through comparison, as stated in the scripture.

Third, the request to utter spells has five occasions: Medicine King, Brave-in-Giving, Vaiśravaṇa, Dhṛtarāṣṭra, and the ten rākṣasī women.

Medicine King’s occasion has four divisions: request, utterance, praise, and confirmation. The following occasions have three by analogy, as stated in the scripture. The ten women’s occasion has five: listing the names, requesting and uttering, praise, vow, and confirmation.

V. Names of the Ghosts

“yakṣa” means a swift ghost; “rākṣasa” means a man-eating ghost. These two classes are governed by the north.

“pūtana” is a fever ghost; “kṛtya” is a corpse-raising ghost—whether among humans or yakṣas, this kind of ghost occurs.

“vetāla” is a red ghost; “gandhāra” is a yellow ghost〔unverified〕; “umaraka” is a black ghost〔unverified〕; “apasmāra” is a blue ghost.

VI. Branches of the Arjaka Tree and the Three Grave Offenses

When a branch of the arjaka tree falls to the ground, it naturally splits into seven pieces.

Killing one’s father, killing one’s mother, and disrupting the saṅgha are the three grave offenses.

VII. Foreign Oil and Measures

In foreign lands, oil is made by pounding sesame, allowing worms to arise, and pressing them together in order to obtain more juice and richness—this fault is especially grave.

Giving out with a light measure and taking in with a heavy one is an extreme form of fraudulent theft. In recent times, someone who gave out with a small measure and took in with a large one was struck by lightning, leaving an inscription on his back—this offense too is not light.

釋妙莊嚴王本事品The Former Affairs of King Wonderful-Adornment

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、因緣出他經:四位比丘

這個因緣出自其他經典——

從前佛的末法時代有四位比丘,對《法華經》極其殷重。雖然舒卷這祕密之教,甘露卻還未霑潤;日夜翹誠,片刻不忘。他們歎道:『莫非不是那個人嗎?莫非不是那個地方嗎?』

世間紛擾憂愁,靜與散互相乖違;直是要求得清閑尚且必須厭棄世務,何況崇尚道業?

於是他們結契於山林,志在欣求佛的智慧。幽居的日子一天天積累,衣服糧食單薄罄盡;有所依待就多有煩累,沒有一個時候不匱乏。一頓飯吃不下去,就妨廢了萬里的行程;十旬之中只有九餐,就屈折了雲霄之志——這還說得出什麼呢?

其中一人說:『我們四個人窮到連身命都保不住,法要寄託在哪裡?你們三位只管以性命奉道,不必憂慮朝中之事;我一個人捨出這副身力,發誓供給你們所需。』

於是他振錫杖於門閭之間以求供養接濟,從春天到冬天,週而復始,如同僕人侍奉大家長,甘苦都不喜不慍。

三個人得以施展他們的誠心,功行圓滿事情辦成——一世的利益,將及於無量生。

二、那一人受了王報

而那一個人,因為屢次涉足人間,屢次遭逢聲色;如同陶坯還沒有經火燒煉,難以護持。

有一次偶然遇上國王出行,車馬駢集、旌旗煥赫,他生起心念、動了念頭,愛慕那份光榮。功德的薰修隨著這個念頭而受報,於是人中天上常常得以作王——福雖然不可計量,也還是有限的。

三、三人得道而議救

三個人得道之後,會合而商議說:『我們得免牢籠樊籬,功勞由於這位王;而他耽著果報、增長有為,從此死後不再作王,將要沉入火坑,實在難救。趁著他還沒受苦,正好可以開導教化。』

其中一人說:『這位王執著欲樂而又邪見,若不是用愛的鈎子,沒有辦法把他拔出來。一個人可以作端正的婦人,兩個人作聰明的兒子;兒子與婦人的話他必定順從,照這樣設化,結果就能使他改邪。』

婦人,就是妙音菩薩;往昔的兩位兒子,就是今日的藥王、藥上二菩薩;往昔的王,就是今日的華德菩薩。

所以白毫向東照,升上紫臺而向西引;神呪護經,使流通而大得利益。因為說了四位聖者的前緣,所以名為〈妙莊嚴王本事品〉。

四、釋品名:第二義

又,「妙莊嚴」是以妙法功德莊嚴諸根。

這位王往日對妙法有緣,道的薰習時節成熟,諸根應當清淨;今生雖然還沒有獲得,那個理必定會到來——靈瑞感通,美好的名字早已立定。

例如善吉雖然還沒有得無諍,已經號為空生。所以下文說「得清淨功德莊嚴三昧」——因為這個緣故名為「妙莊嚴王」。

前一品說以呪護持,這一品說以人護持;人的護持尚且如此,呪的護持就更加優良了——這是普遍勸勉流通。

五、分文為六

文分為六:一是明事之本,二是雙標能化所化,三是能化的方便,四是所化的得益,五是結會古今,六是聞品悟道。

事本,如經文所說。

六、雙標能所

「彼佛法中」以下是第二,雙標能化所化。所化一人、能化三人,都舉出他們的名字,另外顯示二子的福德智慧、六度、四弘。

其餘的經指這為十波羅蜜,是橫的法門;三十七助道,是豎的法門。其餘的經以正道為主,行行為助道;今經指十度為正,稱這些是助道。

禪度之中具有三昧,道品之中節節有三昧;再標出七種三昧,是廣顯法門罷了。

七、能化方便

從「時彼佛」以下是第三,能化的方便,文分為三:一是時至,二是論議,三是現化。

起初時至——那位佛出世,常常宣說正法;對王的因緣還弱,就不是時候;若說《法華》,那就是時候了。經文說「彼佛將欲引導說《法華經》」,就是這個意思。

第二、論議——文中兒子稟白母親說時候到了,母親讓他們去化度父親;兒子怨恨生在邪見之家,母親責備而令他們憂念。都如經文所說。

從「於是二子」以下是第三,現化。現化應當是十八變,可以具體解釋。

八、所化得益:十科

從「時父見子」以下是第四,所化得益。文分為十:

一、信子伏師——王見到邪術之變,或一或二,狹隘而且鄙陋;見到兒子所作的,讚歎未曾有;於是相信他的兒子而降伏他的師,問道:師是誰?我也願意見。

二、父王已經相信,宮中八萬四千人也成熟了;稟白母親稱慶,願意放他們出家,母親也聽許了。

三、重新催促父母:如今正是時候,因為佛難值遇。

四、化功已經顯著,佛讚歎他的功德。「法華三昧」是攝一切法歸於一實相,如前面所說。「離惡趣」——一往以三途為惡趣;完整地論,二十五有都乖違真實而生起妄想,都是惡趣,如今都離開了,就是二十五三昧破二十五有。「佛集三昧」就是祕密之藏,佛集於其中,唯是佛的行處而不是其餘的人。

五、一同前往佛所,聞法供養,見瑞歡喜。

六、佛給與授記。

七、出家修行。

八、稱歎二子。

九、佛陳述他行持之高。

十、歎佛而自立誓願。

九、四種善知識

佛讚歎善知識大有義理。

善知識能作佛事——這是外護的善知識。「示教利喜」——這是教授的善知識。「所謂化導令得見佛」——這是同行的善知識。「令入菩提」——這是實際、實相的善知識。

《雜阿含》說:『善知識就像貞良的妻子。』——這就是外護的意思。又說善知識如同宗親財物——這就是同行的意思。又說善知識如同商主的引導——這就是教授的意思。又說善知識如同兒子臥在父親懷中——這就是實際的意思。

十、結會古今與聞品得道

「佛告大眾」以下是結會古今:先結會,其次結歎二位菩薩。

「說是」以下,聞品得道,如經文所說。

I. A Karmic Connection from Another Scripture: Four Monks

This karmic connection comes from another scripture—

In the final Dharma age of a former Buddha, four monks treated the Lotus Sūtra with utmost gravity. Although they rolled and unrolled this secret teaching, the sweet dew had not yet moistened them. Day and night they raised their sincerity and did not forget for an instant. They lamented: “Could it be that we are not the right people? Could it be that this is not the right place?”

The world was confused and sorrowful, while stillness and distraction opposed one another. Even merely seeking leisure required renouncing worldly affairs—how much more did esteeming the path?

So they formed a covenant in the mountains and forests, resolving joyfully to seek the Buddha’s wisdom. The days of secluded dwelling accumulated; clothing and food became sparse and were exhausted. Anything depended upon brought many burdens, and there was no time without lack. If one meal would not go down, a journey of ten thousand miles was abandoned; if they ate only nine meals in a hundred days, their aspirations reaching the clouds were bent low—what could be said?

One of them said: “We four are so poor that we cannot preserve even our bodies and lives—where can the Dharma find support? You three devote your lives only to the path and do not worry about the affairs of the morning meal. I alone will give the strength of this body and vow to provide what you need.”

So he shook his mendicant staff among the gates and lanes to seek offerings and support. From spring through winter, the cycle repeated. Like a servant attending the head of a great household, whether sweet or bitter, he felt neither pleasure nor resentment.

The three could exercise their sincerity, bring their practice to completion, and finish the work—the benefit of one lifetime would extend through immeasurable lives.

II. That One Person Received the Recompense of Kingship

Because that one person repeatedly entered the human world and repeatedly encountered sounds and sights, he was like an unfired clay vessel, difficult to preserve.

Once he happened to see a king traveling. Chariots and horses crowded together and banners blazed. A thought arose and his mind stirred; he desired that glory. The cultivation of merit received recompense following this thought, and among humans and gods he repeatedly became a king. Although his merit was beyond calculation, it was still limited.

III. The Three Attain the Path and Deliberate on Rescuing Him

After the three attained the path, they met and deliberated: “Our escape from the cage was due to this king. But he is immersed in his recompense and increases the conditioned. After this death he will no longer become a king and will sink into the fiery pit; he will truly be difficult to rescue. While he has not yet suffered, now is precisely the time to guide and transform him.”

One of them said: “This king is attached to sensual pleasure and also holds wrong views. Unless we use the hook of love, there is no way to pull him free. One can become a beautiful wife and two can become intelligent sons. He will certainly follow the words of his sons and wife; if transformation is arranged accordingly, it will succeed in changing his wrong views.”

The wife was the Bodhisattva Wonderful Sound; the two former sons were the present Bodhisattvas Medicine King and Medicine Superior; the former king was the present Bodhisattva Flower Virtue.

Thus the white tuft shone eastward, and one ascended the purple terrace to draw him westward; supernormal spells protected the scripture so that its circulation brought great benefit. Because the former connections of four noble ones are told, the chapter is named The Former Affairs of King Wonderful-Adornment.

IV. Explanation of the Chapter Title: Second Meaning

Moreover, “Wonderful-Adornment” means that the qualities of the Wondrous Dharma adorn the faculties.

In the past this king had a connection with the Wondrous Dharma. The time for the path’s permeation had matured, and his faculties should become pure. Although he had not yet attained this in the present life, its principle would certainly arrive—numinous signs evoked a response, and an auspicious name was established early.

For example, although Subhūti had not yet attained freedom from contention, he was already named Empty-Born. Hence the passage below says “attained the samādhi of adornment with pure qualities.” For this reason he is named “King Wonderful-Adornment.”

The preceding chapter spoke of protection by spells, while this chapter speaks of protection by people. If protection by people is already so, protection by spells is still finer—this is the universal exhortation to circulate the scripture.

V. Six Divisions of the Text

The text has six divisions: first, clarifying the basis of the event; second, jointly identifying transformer and transformed; third, the transformer’s skillful means; fourth, benefit attained by the transformed; fifth, identifying past and present; sixth, awakening from hearing the chapter.

The basis of the event is as stated in the scripture.

VI. Jointly Identifying Transformer and Transformed

From “within that Buddha’s Dharma” onward is the second division, jointly identifying transformer and transformed. One person is transformed and three are transformers; all are named. The two sons’ merit and wisdom, six perfections, and four vast vows are separately revealed.

Other scriptures designate these as the ten pāramitās, the horizontal Dharma gate, and the thirty-seven aids to the path, the vertical Dharma gate. Other scriptures take the right path as primary and the various practices as aids to the path; the present scripture designates the ten perfections as the right path and calls these aids to the path.

The perfection of meditation contains samādhis, and every section of the factors of the path contains a samādhi. The additional designation of seven samādhis merely reveals the Dharma gates extensively.

VII. The Transformer’s Skillful Means

From “at that time the Buddha” onward is the third division, the transformer’s skillful means. The text has three parts: first, the arrival of the time; second, deliberation; third, manifest transformation.

First, the arrival of the time: after that Buddha appeared in the world, he constantly proclaimed the right Dharma. While the king’s connection was weak, the time had not come; when the Lotus Sūtra was taught, the time had arrived. The scripture says “that Buddha, wishing to guide him, taught the Lotus Sūtra”; this is the meaning.

Second, deliberation: the sons tell their mother that the time has arrived; the mother yields to them and has them transform their father; the sons complain of being born into a household of wrong views; the mother reproves them and causes them to be concerned. All is as stated in the scripture.

From “thereupon the two sons” onward is the third part, manifest transformation. The manifested transformations should be the eighteen transformations and can be explained in full.

VIII. Benefit Attained by the Transformed: Ten Divisions

From “at that time the father saw his sons” onward is the fourth division, benefit attained by the transformed. The text has ten parts:

First, trusting the sons and subduing the teacher: the king sees one or two transformations of heterodox arts, narrow and crude; seeing what his sons perform, he praises it as unprecedented. He therefore trusts his sons, subdues his teacher, and asks: who is your teacher? I too wish to see him.

Second, the father-king now trusts, and the 84,000 people in the palace have also matured. The sons tell their mother in celebration and ask to be released to leave home; the mother permits them.

Third, they again urge their parents: now is precisely the time, because a Buddha is difficult to encounter.

Fourth, the work of transformation is now manifest, and the Buddha praises their qualities. “Lotus samādhi” gathers all dharmas into the one true reality, as explained above. “leaving evil destinies”—in an initial account, the three evil paths are evil destinies; discussed completely, all twenty-five forms of existence turn from truth and produce delusion and are therefore evil destinies. Now all are left behind: the twenty-five samādhis destroy the twenty-five forms of existence. “Buddha-gathering samādhi” is the secret treasury in which Buddhas gather; it is the place of practice of Buddhas alone and not of others.

Fifth, they go together to the Buddha, hear Dharma, make offerings, behold auspicious signs, and rejoice.

Sixth, the Buddha gives a prediction.

Seventh, leaving home and practicing.

Eighth, praising the two sons.

Ninth, the Buddha recounts the loftiness of his practice.

Tenth, praising the Buddha and making a personal vow.

IX. Four Kinds of Good Spiritual Friend

The Buddha’s praise of good spiritual friends contains profound meaning.

A good spiritual friend can perform a Buddha’s work—this is the friend who protects externally. “showing, teaching, benefiting, and delighting” is the friend who instructs. “namely, transforming and guiding so that one sees the Buddha” is the fellow-practicing friend. “causing one to enter awakening” is the friend of actuality and true reality.

The Saṃyukta Āgama says: “A good spiritual friend is like a faithful and worthy wife”—this is external protection. It also says a good spiritual friend is like the wealth of one’s kin—this is fellow practice. It also says a good spiritual friend is like the guidance of a caravan leader—this is instruction. It also says a good spiritual friend is like a child lying in a father’s embrace—this is actuality.

X. Identifying Past and Present and Attaining the Path from Hearing the Chapter

From “the Buddha told the great assembly” onward is the identification of past and present: first the identification, then the concluding praise of the two bodhisattvas.

From “when this was spoken” onward is attainment of the path from hearing the chapter, as stated in the scripture.

釋普賢菩薩勸發品The Encouragement of the Bodhisattva Universally Worthy (Samantabhadra)

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、釋名:梵漢與《悲華》

《大論》與《觀經》同樣名為「遍吉」,此經稱為「普賢」,都是漢語;梵音是「邲輸颰陀」,此地譯作普賢。

《悲華》說:『我發誓在穢惡的世界中行菩薩道,使它得以嚴淨;我的行持一定要勝過諸位菩薩。寶藏佛說:以這個因緣,如今改你的字,名為普賢。』

這就是三悉檀之意,又是因緣的解釋,又是從行願而得名。

二、判位:從三藏之舊釋到圓教等覺

由來從四念處到四善根,通通稱為普賢;別就世第一法臨近真理、接近聖位,稱之為賢——這是三藏之中的說法。

如今說明:伏道之頂,它的因周遍,所以叫「普」;斷道剛剛窮盡,所差無幾,臨近終際而至於極,所以叫「賢」。

若十信是伏道的開始,那就不是頂、不是周遍;臨近初聖之初,那就不是後、不是極;乃至第十地也不是周、不是極,何況前面諸位?

如今所論的是等覺之位:居於眾伏之頂,伏道周遍所以名為「普」;斷道剛盡而所差無幾,臨近終際而至於極所以名為「賢」。《釋論》引十四夜的月如同十五夜的月,這個義理就明白了。

這是就圓教之位,解釋後位的普賢。

三、釋「勸發」

「勸發」是戀慕法的言辭。

他遙遠地在那個國土,完整聽聞此經的始末既然周備,想要使自行化他永永無有休止,所以自東而西前來勸發——具足四悉檀之意〔云云〕。

經文說:『我為了供養《法華經》的緣故自現其身,若見我身甚大歡喜〔其一〕;已經見我的緣故轉而更加精進,就得三昧以及陀羅尼〔其二〕;得這陀羅尼的緣故,沒有非人能夠破壞,也不再為女人所惑亂〔其三〕;三千大千世界微塵數的菩薩具足普賢之道〔其四〕。』

像這樣的明文就是四悉檀,而前來勸發。

四、流通三分之判

上面判流通為三:從十九行偈以後三品半,舉經力之大以勸流通;〈藥王品〉以下五品,舉菩薩化道之力大以勸流通;這一品舉普賢誓願之力大以勸流通。

五、分文為四與發來

分文為四:一是發來,二是勸發,三是述發,四是發益。

起初經家敘述發來,分為三:一是上供,二是下化,三是修敬。

「自在」是理一,「神通」是行一,「威德」是人一,「名聞」是教一。又,「自在」是常,「神通」是樂,「威德」是我,「名聞」是淨——說起來如此,即一而四,德無不備,自在的意義就在這裡。

淨的力量所以雨花,樂的力量所以奏伎樂,神通所以動地。自在的力量所以隨意而雨,隨去隨雨,隨動隨奏。譬如大龍飛行不息,身邊的雲雨流起而無窮。

普賢與眷屬,以菩薩之身、用四德之力而來。

勸發分四:一是所經歷之處自行上供,其事如此。從「又與諸天龍」以下,是所經歷之處下化利益,隨他所宜而現八部之像,略用二力隨其所堪任,其事如此。三是修敬,身旋而面禮,如經文所說。

六、勸發:請問與佛答

勸發分為二:一是請問勸發,二是誓願勸發。有問、有答。

問——遙遠聽聞經已說完,戀慕法而不止;遠來的志向,志在勸發,所以再度請問。正說是勸發自行,再請流通是勸發化他;如來若許可,兩條路再度演說,光光無極,所以是雙請。

佛答:先總、次別、三結。別列四法之名,如經文所說。

他既然是雙請,如來巧妙地回答,略舉四法以概括其餘。為什麼?四法的要領該括了正說與流通。為什麼?佛雖然沒有偏私,若能遠離惡而從善、反迷還正、開權知見而顯佛知見,那就稱可聖心,是諸佛護念;若佛知見開了,那麼般若照明,這是植眾德本;也是入正定聚,不亂不味、不取不捨;也是發起救度眾生之心。

應當知道這四法與開權顯實,名異而體同,無二無別。

又,「佛護念」是開佛知見,「植眾德本」是示佛知見,「發救眾生」是悟佛知見,「入正定聚」是入佛知見——迹門的要領,這四法就收盡了。

又,迹則有本;從本而開示悟入,所以有迹中的開示悟入。如今開迹就顯本,本與迹無二無別。以四法回答他所請的正說,於義理是明白的。

七、四法配三軌與四安樂行

以四法回答所請的流通:流通的方法,唯有三、唯有四。

「發救眾生」是入如來室;「入正定聚、佛所護念」是著如來衣;「植眾德本」是坐如來座——這是弘宣的要領,即四而三。

「發救眾生」是誓願安樂行;「入正定聚」是意安樂行;「植眾德本」是口安樂行;「護念」是身安樂行——應當知道後四就是前四。

一個回答酬答他的兩重請問,舉四法而冠罩一經。《法華》的重演、這部經的再宣、遠來者的勸發,它的義理就是這樣。

八、三結:駁舊云

三、結——在如來滅後必定得到這部經。

舊說:『能行四法於未來世,常常親手得到這部經。』

如今說不是這樣。上文說「諸法實相義,已為汝等說」,又說「咸令眾生開示悟入佛之知見」——這是《法華》的正體。能行四法必定得到這個理解,就名這個理解為經。這是結他所請的正說之問。

若能運用這個理解,行而傳與他人;他人得到這樣的信解而成為初依之人,能得真解而成為第二、第三、第四依之人——這是結他所請的流通之問。

這個意思若看不出來,豈不是浪費工夫作出其餘的說法嗎?

九、誓願勸發:護人六

「白佛」以下是第二,誓願勸發。文分為二:一是護人,二是護法。

護人分為六:

一、攘除他的外難。起初總攘其難,所以說「使無伺求得其便」就是;其次別攘其難,舉十二種非法就是。

二、教他內法。共有三番教訓:起初是行立讀誦,乘六牙白象而安慰他的心;其次是坐而思惟,又乘六牙教示他的經,給與他三昧——「陀羅尼」是旋假入空,「百千旋」是旋空出假,「方便」是以二者為方便道而得入中道第一義諦;最後是三七日一心精進,又乘六牙示教利喜而說呪,如經文所說。

三、覆以神力。若聞、若持,莫非神力,如經文所說。

四、示勝因。若能作五種法師,就是三世諸佛所為之種、為熟、為脫;此人同於未來諸佛得脫,所以說「同普賢行」。此人已經在先佛處植善,所以說「深種善根」。此人為現在佛所成熟,所以說「手摩其頭」。

五、示近果。但能書寫,近在忉利天;具足五種法師,其次在兜率天,如經文所說。

六、總結。「是故智者」以下就是。

十、誓願護法

從「世尊我今神力」以下,是第二、誓願護法,如經文所說。

十一、述發

第三、述發,就是如來舉勝以陳述成就他的劣,增進行者而勇銳弘宣。

先陳述護法:說你能這樣外多利益、內積慈悲,又久劫以來作這樣的護持;我尚且以佛的神力守護此法,何況是你呢?如經文所說。

從「若有人」以下,陳述他的護人,雖然不依次第,陳述成就之意已足。

「當知是人則見釋迦牟尼佛」——這是陳述他示身教法:那人尚且見我萬德的果身,何況你因中的六牙白象?那人尚且從佛口具足聞經,何況你所教的忘失章句?那人尚且為佛口所讚、手所摩、佛衣所覆,何況你因人的陀羅尼所覆呢?

從「不貪著世樂」以下,陳述他所舉的因:廣舉因中沒有種種過惡,少欲知足而修普賢行——這是陳述勝因。

從「若如來滅後」以下,陳述他所舉的近果:那人當前往道場而必成遠果,何況近果?也在現世得到那近果,不只是生天而已。

從「若人輕毀」以下,陳述他能攘除外難:佛廣示毀謗者的罪,使他們知過必改而不相惱亂——不只是持經者的難得以消滅,也使想要毀謗的人生福;沒有毀、沒有難,彼此安樂,曠濟而無偏——慈之至極。

從「應起遠迎當如敬佛」,陳述他所結信者的功德。

十二、發益

第四、從「說是」以下,是發益之文。

一、聞品之益——「旋陀羅尼」是初地之位,「具普賢道」是十地之位。

二、聞經之益——「大眾歡喜」就是。「歡喜」如前面所說。

這裡為什麼還稱聲聞?乃是經家保存他們的本位罷了。

又,經家稱他們是大乘聲聞——以佛道之聲令一切人聽聞,這個義理就更顯明了。

〔妙法蓮華經文句卷第十下〕

I. Explanation of the Name: Sanskrit, Chinese, and the Compassionate Flower

The Great Treatise and the Contemplation Sūtra alike name him “Universally Auspicious,” while this scripture calls him “Universally Worthy”; both are Chinese. The Sanskrit sound is “Bishubatuo,” which is translated here as Samantabhadra.

The Compassionate Flower Sūtra says: “I vow to practice the bodhisattva path in a defiled and evil world and cause it to become adorned and pure; my practice must surpass that of all bodhisattvas. Treasure-Store Buddha said: ‘For this reason, I now change your name and call you Samantabhadra.’”

This is the meaning of three siddhāntas, an explanation through causes and conditions, and a name obtained from practice and vows.

II. Determining the Stage: From an Older Tripiṭaka-Teaching Explanation to Equal Awakening in the Perfect Teaching

According to the traditional explanation, all the stages from the four foundations of mindfulness through the four wholesome roots are called Samantabhadra. More particularly, the highest mundane dharma, being adjacent to truth and near the noble stage, is called worthy—this is the account within the Tripiṭaka Teaching.

The present explanation says: at the summit of the path of subduing, its causes are all-pervading, and it is therefore called “universal”; just after the path of severance has been exhausted, little remains, and being adjacent to the final limit and reaching the utmost, it is called “worthy.”

If the ten faiths are the beginning of the path of subduing, they are neither its summit nor all-pervading. Being at the beginning of proximity to the first noble stage, they are neither later nor ultimate. Even the tenth ground is neither all-pervading nor ultimate—how much less any of the preceding stages?

What is discussed here is the stage of Equal Awakening: dwelling at the summit of all subduing, the path of subduing is all-pervading and is therefore called “universal”; the path of severance has just been exhausted and little remains, so being adjacent to the final limit and reaching the utmost, it is called “worthy.” The Explanatory Treatise compares the moon on the fourteenth night to the moon on the fifteenth; this makes the meaning clear.

This explains the later-stage Samantabhadra in terms of the stages of the Perfect Teaching.

III. Explanation of “Encouragement”

“encouragement” is a phrase expressing longing for the Dharma.

In that distant land he had heard the beginning and end of this scripture completely. Wishing his own practice and the transformation of others to continue forever without ceasing, he came westward from the east to encourage them—fully possessing the meaning of the four siddhāntas. [And so forth.]

The scripture says: “For the sake of making offerings to the Lotus Sūtra, I manifest my own body; those who see my body greatly rejoice [first]. Because they have seen me, they turn and become still more diligent, and then attain samādhis and dhāraṇīs [second]. Because they attain this dhāraṇī, no nonhuman being can harm them, nor will they be confused by women [third]. Bodhisattvas as numerous as the dust particles of a three-thousand-great-thousand world fully possess the path of Samantabhadra [fourth].”

Such explicit wording is the four siddhāntas by which he comes to encourage.

IV. The Threefold Classification of Circulation

Above, circulation was classified in three parts: from the nineteen-line verse onward, three and a half chapters raise the great power of the scripture to encourage its circulation; the five chapters from “The Former Affairs of Medicine King” onward raise the great power of the bodhisattvas’ path of transformation to encourage circulation; this chapter raises the great power of Samantabhadra’s vows to encourage circulation.

V. Dividing the Text into Four and the Coming Forth

The text divides into four: first, coming forth; second, encouragement; third, affirmation of the encouragement; fourth, benefits produced by the encouragement.

At the outset, the compiler of the scripture narrates the coming forth in three parts: first, making offerings above; second, transforming below; third, showing reverence.

“sovereignty” is the one principle; “supernormal power” is the one practice; “majestic virtue” is the one person; “renown” is the one teaching. Again, “sovereignty” is permanence; “supernormal power” is bliss; “majestic virtue” is self; “renown” is purity. Though spoken in this way, the one is four, no virtue is incomplete, and this is the meaning of sovereignty.

The power of purity therefore rains flowers; the power of bliss therefore produces music; supernormal power therefore moves the earth. The power of sovereignty therefore causes rain at will: wherever he goes it rains, wherever he moves music sounds. It is like a great dragon flying without rest, while clouds and rain stream forth without end around its body.

Samantabhadra and his retinue come in bodhisattva bodies, employing the power of the four virtues.

The coming forth has four aspects. First, wherever he passes he personally makes offerings above; this is as stated. From “together also with gods and dragons” onward, wherever he passes he transforms below and brings benefit, manifesting forms of the eight classes according to what suits others and briefly using two powers according to what they can bear; this is as stated. Third is showing reverence: his body turns while his face bows, as stated in the scripture.

VI. Encouragement: The Question and the Buddha’s Answer

Encouragement divides into two: first, encouragement through a question; second, encouragement through vows. There is a question and an answer.

The question: having heard from afar that the scripture had been completely taught, he longed for the Dharma without ceasing. His purpose in coming from afar was to encourage, and so he asked again. The main teaching encourages his own practice, while the renewed request for circulation encourages transforming others. If the Tathāgata permits it, both paths will be proclaimed again, their light without limit; hence this is a double request.

The Buddha answers first generally, next separately, and third with a conclusion. The separate explanation lists the names of the four dharmas, as stated in the scripture.

Because his was a double request, the Tathāgata answered skillfully, briefly raising four dharmas to encompass all the rest. Why? The essentials of the four dharmas include both the main teaching and circulation. Why? Although the Buddha is impartial, if one can leave evil and follow good, turn from delusion and return to the right, open provisional views and reveal the Buddha’s knowledge and vision, then one accords with the noble mind and is kept in mind and protected by all buddhas. When the Buddha’s knowledge and vision open, prajñā shines forth: this is planting the roots of many virtues. It is also entering the group fixed in rightness—neither confused nor savoring, neither grasping nor rejecting. It is also arousing the mind to rescue living beings.

Know that these four dharmas and opening the provisional to reveal the real differ in name but are the same in substance, without duality or distinction.

Again, “being kept in mind and protected by the buddhas” is opening the Buddha’s knowledge and vision; “planting the roots of many virtues” is revealing the Buddha’s knowledge and vision; “arousing the mind to rescue living beings” is awakening to the Buddha’s knowledge and vision; “entering the group fixed in rightness” is entering the Buddha’s knowledge and vision. The essentials of the Trace Gate are exhausted by these four dharmas.

Again, wherever there is Trace, there is Origin. Opening, revealing, awakening, and entering in the Trace occur because they are opened from the Origin. Now opening the Trace itself reveals the Origin; Origin and Trace are without duality or distinction. It is therefore clear in meaning that the four dharmas answer his request concerning the main teaching.

VII. Aligning the Four Dharmas with the Three Tracks and Four Peaceful Practices

The four dharmas answer his request concerning circulation: the method of circulation consists solely of three and solely of four.

“arousing the mind to rescue living beings” is entering the Tathāgata’s room; “entering the group fixed in rightness and being kept in mind and protected by the buddhas” is wearing the Tathāgata’s robe; “planting the roots of many virtues” is sitting on the Tathāgata’s seat. These are the essentials of propagation: four that are three.

“arousing the mind to rescue living beings” is the peaceful practice of vows; “entering the group fixed in rightness” is the peaceful practice of mind; “planting the roots of many virtues” is the peaceful practice of speech; “being kept in mind and protected” is the peaceful practice of body. Know that the latter four are precisely the former four.

One answer repays his two requests, raising four dharmas to canopy the entire scripture. The Lotus is performed again, this scripture is proclaimed anew, and the one who came from afar gives encouragement: such is the meaning.

VIII. The Third Conclusion: Refuting the Older Explanation

Third, the conclusion: after the Tathāgata’s extinction, one will certainly obtain this scripture.

The older explanation says: “One who can practice the four dharmas will often obtain this scripture in hand in a future life.”

The present explanation says that this is not so. Above, the scripture says “the meaning of the true mark of all dharmas has already been taught for you,” and again “cause all living beings to open, reveal, awaken to, and enter the Buddha’s knowledge and vision.” This is the true substance of the Lotus. One who can practice the four dharmas will certainly attain this understanding, and this understanding is called the scripture. This concludes his question concerning the main teaching.

If one can employ this understanding, practice it, and transmit it to others, others attain such faith and understanding and become persons of the first reliance; attaining true understanding, they become persons of the second, third, and fourth reliances. This concludes his question concerning circulation.

If one cannot see this meaning, would it not be wasted effort to devise other explanations?

IX. Encouragement through Vows: Six Ways of Protecting People

From “addressed the Buddha” onward is the second part, encouragement through vows. The text divides in two: first, protecting people; second, protecting the Dharma.

Protecting people divides into six:

First, removing their external difficulties. At the outset he removes difficulties generally; hence “let none who watch for an opportunity find one” is this. Next he removes difficulties separately by listing twelve unlawful things.

Second, teaching them the inner Dharma. There are three rounds of instruction. First, while they walk or stand and read or recite, he rides a white elephant with six tusks and comforts their minds. Next, while they sit and contemplate, he again rides the six-tusked elephant, teaches them the scripture, and gives them samādhis: “dhāraṇī” turns from the provisional and enters emptiness; “a hundred thousand turns” turns from emptiness and enters the provisional; “skillful means” takes those two as the path of skillful means and thereby enters the ultimate truth of the Middle Way. Finally, for three periods of seven days they are single-minded and diligent, and he again rides the six-tusked elephant, shows, teaches, benefits, and delights them, and speaks the spell, as stated in the scripture.

Third, covering them with supernormal power. Whether they hear or uphold, nothing is outside this supernormal power, as stated in the scripture.

Fourth, showing the superior cause. Those who can perform the five kinds of Dharma teacher are what the buddhas of the three times plant, mature, and liberate. These people attain liberation together with future buddhas, hence “sharing the practice of Samantabhadra.” They have planted good before past buddhas, hence “deeply planted wholesome roots.” They are matured by present buddhas, hence “a hand strokes their heads.”

Fifth, showing the proximate result. Those who can merely copy the scripture are near to birth in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three; those who fully practice the five kinds of Dharma teacher are next born in Tuṣita Heaven, as stated in the scripture.

Sixth, the general conclusion. This begins from “therefore the wise” onward.

X. The Vow to Protect the Dharma

From “World-Honored One, I now by my supernormal power” onward is the second part, the vow to protect the Dharma, as stated in the scripture.

XI. Affirming the Encouragement

Third, affirming the encouragement: the Tathāgata raises what is superior to affirm its lesser counterpart, advancing practitioners and making them brave and keen in propagation.

First he affirms protection of the Dharma: you are able in this way to bring much benefit externally, amass compassion internally, and have provided such protection for long kalpas. I too protect this Dharma with the Buddha’s supernormal power—how much more do you? This is as stated in the scripture.

From “if there is a person” onward, he affirms the protection of people. Although it is not sequential, the intended affirmations are complete.

“know that this person sees Śākyamuni Buddha” affirms his manifestation of a body and teaching of the Dharma. That person even sees my fruit-body of ten thousand virtues—how much more your six-tusked white elephant at the causal stage? That person even hears the scripture completely from the Buddha’s mouth—how much more the passages and phrases forgotten from your teaching? That person is even praised by the Buddha’s mouth, stroked by his hand, and covered by his robe—how much more can your dhāraṇī at the causal stage cover that person?

From “not greedily attached to worldly pleasures” onward, he affirms the causes he raised: extensively listing the absence of many transgressions among the causes, having few desires, being content, and cultivating the practice of Samantabhadra. This affirms the superior cause.

From “if after the Tathāgata’s extinction” onward, he affirms the proximate result he raised. That person will go to the place of awakening and certainly accomplish the distant result—how much more the proximate result? The person also attains that proximate result in the present world and does not merely gain heavenly birth.

From “if a person disparages” onward, he affirms the removal of external difficulties. The Buddha extensively reveals the offenses of disparagers, causing them to recognize their faults, certainly reform, and cease troubling one another. Not only are difficulties removed for those who uphold the scripture; blessings also arise for those who wish to disparage it. With neither disparagement nor difficulty, both sides are at ease; his rescue is vast and impartial—the utmost of compassion.

From “one should rise and greet them from afar as one would honor the Buddha” onward, he affirms the merit of believers in his conclusion.

XII. Benefits Produced by the Encouragement

Fourth, from “when this was spoken” onward is the passage on benefits produced by the encouragement.

First, the benefit from hearing the chapter: “turning dhāraṇī” is the stage of the first ground, while “fully possessing the path of Samantabhadra” is the stage of the tenth ground.

Second, the benefit from hearing the scripture: this is “the great assembly rejoiced.” “rejoicing” is as explained above.

Why are śrāvakas still named here? The compiler of the scripture merely preserves their original position.

Again, the compiler calls them Great-Vehicle śrāvakas—through the voice of the Buddha’s path they cause all people to hear. The meaning becomes still clearer.

[End of Fascicle Ten, Part Two, of Words and Phrases of the Sūtra of the Lotus Blossom of the Wondrous Dharma]

Translator · 釋慧鏡 Shi Huijing — with AI-assisted consistency checking

License · CC BY-NC-SA 4.0